FibeAir IP-20S C83 U

FibeAir IP-20C/S/E
User Guide
DOC-00036523 Rev G.02

Release: C8.3
June 2016
Copyright © 2016 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.

FibeAir IP-20C/S/E User Guide
Notice
This document contains information that is proprietary to Ceragon Networks Ltd. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, modified, or distributed without prior written authorization of
Ceragon Networks Ltd. This document is provided as is, without warranty of any kind.
Trademarks
Ceragon Networks®, FibeAir® and CeraView® are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd., registered
in the United States and other countries.
Ceragon® is a trademark of Ceragon Networks Ltd., registered in various countries.
CeraMap™, PolyView™, EncryptAir™, ConfigAir™, CeraMon™, EtherAir™, CeraBuild™, CeraWeb™, and
QuickAir™, are trademarks of Ceragon Networks Ltd.
Other names mentioned in this publication are owned by their respective holders.
Statement of Conditions
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Ceragon Networks
Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damage in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this document or equipment supplied with it.
Open Source Statement

The Product may use open source software, among them O/S software released under the GPL or GPL
alike license ("Open Source License"). Inasmuch that such software is being used, it is released under
the Open Source License, accordingly. The complete list of the software being used in this product
including their respective license and the aforementioned public available changes is accessible at:
Network element site:
ftp://ne-open-source.license-system.com
NMS site:
ftp://nms-open-source.license-system.com/
Information to User
Any changes or modifications of equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment and the warranty for such equipment.
Intended Use/Limitation
Fixed point-to-point radio links for private networks.
Authorized to Use
Only entities with individual authorization from the National Regulator to operate the mentioned
radio equipment.
The equipment can be used in the following EU countries:
Austria (AT) - Belgium (BE) - Bulgaria (BG) - Switzerland/Liechtenstein (CH) - Cyprus (CY) - Czech
Republic (CZ) - Germany (DE) – Denmark (DK) - Estonia (EE) - Finland (FI) - France (FR) -Greece (GR)
- Hungary (HU) - Ireland (IE) – Iceland (IS) – Italy (IT) – Lithuania (LT) - Luxembourg (LU) – Latvia
(LV) - Malta (MT) - Netherlands (NL) - Norway (NO) - Portugal (PT) - Romania (RO) - Sweden (SE) -
Slovenia (SI) - Slovak Republic (SK) – United Kingdom (UK) – Spain (SP) – Poland (PL)
Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 2 of 597

Table of Contents
Section I: Introduction ......................................................................................... 21
1. Introduction .................................................................................................... 22
1.1 IP-20C System Overview ............................................................................................. 22
1.2 IP-20S System Overview ............................................................................................. 22
1.3 IP-20E System Overview ............................................................................................. 23
1.4 PoE Injector Overview.................................................................................................. 23
1.5 The Web-Based Element Management System .......................................................... 24
1.5.1 Introduction to the Web EMS ....................................................................................... 24
1.5.2 Web EMS Page Layout ................................................................................................ 24
1.6 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure ........................................................... 27
Section II: Web EMS Configuration ................................................................... 32
2. Getting Started................................................................................................ 33
2.1 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network ....................................................................... 33
2.2 Establishing a Connection ........................................................................................... 33
2.2.1 PC Setup ...................................................................................................................... 34
2.3 Logging on ................................................................................................................... 35
2.3.1 Logging in Without Knowing the IP Address ................................................................ 35
2.4 Changing Your Password ............................................................................................ 36
2.5 Configuring In-Band Management ............................................................................... 37
2.6 Changing the Management IP Address ....................................................................... 37
2.7 Configuring the Activation Key ..................................................................................... 39
2.7.1 Activation Key Overview .............................................................................................. 39
2.7.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters ............................................................ 40
2.7.3 Entering the Activation Key .......................................................................................... 41
2.7.4 Activating Demo Mode ................................................................................................. 41
2.7.5 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features ................................................. 41
2.8 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) .......................................................................... 42
2.9 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)................................................................ 45
2.10 Configuring the Radio Parameters ............................................................................... 47
2.11 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) ..................................................................... 49
2.11.1 Radio Profiles ............................................................................................................... 53
2.12 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power ............................................................. 53
2.13 Operating in FIPS Mode............................................................................................... 55
2.13.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance ............................................................................ 55
2.13.2 Enabling FIPS Mode .................................................................................................... 56
2.14 Configuring Grouping (Optional) .................................................................................. 56
2.15 Creating Service(s) for Traffic ...................................................................................... 57

3. Configuration Guide ....................................................................................... 58

3.1 System Configurations ................................................................................................. 58
3.2 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ........................................... 59
3.2.1 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard .................................... 60
3.2.2 Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ................. 63
3.2.3 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard ...... 68
3.3 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC ..................................................................................... 74
3.3.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview ......................................................................................... 74
3.3.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group ....................................................................... 75
3.3.3 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group ............................................................................. 77
3.4 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) ............................................................................ 78
3.4.1 LAG Overview .............................................................................................................. 78
3.4.2 Configuring a LAG Group............................................................................................. 79
3.4.3 Deleting a LAG Group .................................................................................................. 81
3.5 Configuring XPIC ......................................................................................................... 81
3.5.1 XPIC Overview ............................................................................................................. 81
3.5.2 Configuring the Antennas ............................................................................................ 82
3.5.3 Configuring the Radio Carriers .................................................................................... 83
3.5.4 Creating an XPIC Group .............................................................................................. 83
3.6 Configuring HSB Radio Protection ............................................................................... 84
3.6.1 HSB Radio Protection Overview .................................................................................. 84
3.6.2 Configuring HSB Radio Protection ............................................................................... 84
3.6.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit .................................................... 87
3.6.4 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit ............................................................. 87
3.6.5 Editing Standby Unit Settings ...................................................................................... 88
3.6.6 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity .......................................................... 88
3.6.7 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit ....................................................................... 89
3.6.8 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit ................................................... 89
3.6.9 Disabling Unit Protection .............................................................................................. 90
3.7 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity ....................................................................... 90
3.7.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview .......................................................................... 90
3.7.2 MIMO Mate Management Access ................................................................................ 91
3.7.3 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group ................................................................ 91
3.7.4 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group ................................................ 93
3.7.5 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group ................................................ 93
3.7.6 Resetting MIMO ........................................................................................................... 94
3.7.7 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels ....................................................................................... 95
3.7.8 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group ................................................................. 96
3.8 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode ..................................................... 97
4. Unit Management............................................................................................ 98
4.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications .................................. 99
4.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address .................................................................. 99
4.2.1 Changing the Subnet of the Remote IP Address ....................................................... 101
4.3 Configuring SNMP ..................................................................................................... 102
4.4 Configuring Trap Managers ....................................................................................... 105
4.5 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server ................................................... 107

4.6 Upgrading the Software ............................................................................................. 110

4.6.1 Viewing Current Software Versions ........................................................................... 110
4.6.2 Software Upgrade Overview ...................................................................................... 111
4.6.3 Downloading and Installing Software ......................................................................... 111
4.6.4 Configuring a Timed Installation ................................................................................ 114
4.7 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations ................................................................. 116
4.7.1 Configuration Management Overview ........................................................................ 117
4.7.2 Viewing Current Backup Files .................................................................................... 117
4.7.3 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters .................................................. 118
4.7.4 Exporting a Configuration File .................................................................................... 120
4.7.5 Importing a Configuration File .................................................................................... 121
4.7.6 Deleting a Configuration File ...................................................................................... 121
4.7.7 Backing Up the Current Configuration ....................................................................... 122
4.7.8 Restoring a Saved Configuration ............................................................................... 122
4.7.9 Editing CLI Scripts ...................................................................................................... 123
4.8 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration ................................................ 124
4.9 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset ................................................................................ 125
4.10 Configuring Unit Parameters ...................................................................................... 126
4.11 Configuring NTP......................................................................................................... 127
4.12 Displaying Unit Inventory ........................................................................................... 128
5. Radio Configuration ..................................................................................... 129

5.1 Viewing the Radio Status and Settings ...................................................................... 129
5.2 Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters ............................................................... 132
5.3 Configuring ATPC ...................................................................................................... 135
5.4 Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through ................................... 136
5.4.1 Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through Counters ......................... 138
5.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption ................................................................. 142
5.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics ................................................... 145
5.6.1 Configuring Radio Thresholds ................................................................................... 145
5.6.2 Displaying MRMC Status ........................................................................................... 147
5.6.3 Displaying MRMC PMs .............................................................................................. 148
5.6.4 Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters ................................................... 149
5.6.5 Displaying Signal Level PMs ...................................................................................... 152
5.6.6 Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs ................................................................. 153
5.6.7 Displaying Modem MSE PMs .................................................................................... 155
5.6.8 Displaying XPI PMs .................................................................................................... 156
5.6.9 Displaying Traffic PMs ............................................................................................... 157
6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces ................................................................ 164

6.1 Configuring Ethernet Service(s) ................................................................................. 164
6.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview ....................................................................................... 164
6.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services ............................................. 165
6.1.3 The Ethernet Services Page ...................................................................................... 165
6.1.4 Adding an Ethernet Service ....................................................................................... 166
6.1.5 Editing a Service ........................................................................................................ 168
6.1.6 Deleting a Service ...................................................................................................... 168

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services .................................................... 169

6.1.8 Viewing Service Details.............................................................................................. 169
6.1.9 Configuring Service Points ......................................................................................... 170
6.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype ..................................................... 182
6.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces ................................................................................. 184
6.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation .................................................................. 186
6.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics ......................................................................... 188
6.5.1 RMON Statistics ......................................................................................................... 188
6.5.2 Port TX Statistics ........................................................................................................ 190
6.5.3 Port RX Statistics ....................................................................................................... 193
7. Quality of Service (QoS)............................................................................... 196

7.1 QoS Overview ............................................................................................................ 196
7.2 Configuring Classification........................................................................................... 198
7.2.1 Classification Overview .............................................................................................. 198
7.2.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface ................................. 199
7.2.3 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table ......................... 202
7.2.4 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table ............................ 203
7.2.5 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table .................................................................. 205
7.2.6 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table ..................................................... 207
7.3 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) ......................................................................... 208
7.3.1 Policer (Rate Metering) Overview .............................................................................. 208
7.3.2 Configuring Policer Profiles ........................................................................................ 209
7.3.3 Assigning Policers to Interfaces ................................................................................. 211
7.3.4 Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation .......................................... 215
7.4 Configuring Marking ................................................................................................... 216
7.4.1 Marking Overview ...................................................................................................... 216
7.4.2 Enabling Marking ....................................................................................................... 216
7.4.3 Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table ......................................................................... 217
7.4.4 Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table ....................................................................... 218
7.5 Configuring WRED ..................................................................................................... 219
7.5.1 WRED Overview ........................................................................................................ 219
7.5.2 Configuring WRED Profiles ........................................................................................ 220
7.5.3 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues ......................................................................... 222
7.6 Configuring Egress Shaping ...................................................................................... 223
7.6.1 Egress Shaping Overview .......................................................................................... 223
7.6.2 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles ........................................................................... 223
7.6.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles .............................................................. 225
7.6.4 Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue .......................................................... 227
7.6.5 Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle ............................... 229
7.7 Configuring Scheduling .............................................................................................. 231
7.7.1 Scheduling Overview ................................................................................................. 231
7.7.2 Configuring Priority Profiles ....................................................................................... 232
7.7.3 Configuring WFQ Profiles .......................................................................................... 235
7.7.4 Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface ................................................................. 237
7.7.5 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface .................................................................... 237

8. Ethernet Protocols ....................................................................................... 239

8.1 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) .................................................. 239
8.1.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview ................................................................ 239
8.1.2 Adding an ABN entity ................................................................................................. 240
8.1.3 Editing an ABN Entity ................................................................................................. 241
8.1.4 Deleting an ABN Entity............................................................................................... 242
8.1.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity .................................................................... 242
8.2 Configuring LLDP ....................................................................................................... 243
8.2.1 LLDP Overview .......................................................................................................... 243
8.2.2 Displaying Peer Status ............................................................................................... 244
8.2.3 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters ............................................................... 245
8.2.4 Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters ..................................................................... 247
8.2.5 Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters ......................................................... 249
8.2.6 Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters ...................................................... 251
8.2.7 Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters ..................................................................... 253
8.2.8 Displaying LLDP Statistics ......................................................................................... 257
9. Synchronization............................................................................................ 261
9.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator ................................................................................ 261
10. Access Management and Security .............................................................. 263

10.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters ................................................ 264
10.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters ........................................................ 266
10.3 Configuring the Session Timeout ............................................................................... 267
10.4 Configuring Users ...................................................................................................... 267
10.4.1 User Configuration Overview ..................................................................................... 268
10.4.2 Configuring User Profiles ........................................................................................... 269
10.4.3 Configuring Users ...................................................................................................... 271
10.5 Configuring RADIUS .................................................................................................. 273
10.5.1 RADIUS Overview ...................................................................................................... 273
10.5.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication ............................................................................. 274
10.5.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes ................................................................ 274
10.5.4 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity ............................................... 276
10.5.5 Configuring a RADIUS Server ................................................................................... 278
10.6 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS ....................................................... 298
10.6.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File ................................................ 299
10.6.2 Downloading a Certificate .......................................................................................... 301
10.7 Blocking Telnet Access .............................................................................................. 302
10.8 Uploading the Security Log ........................................................................................ 302
10.9 Uploading the Configuration Log ............................................................................... 305
11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting .................................................. 307

11.1 Viewing Current Alarms ............................................................................................. 307
11.2 Viewing the Event Log ............................................................................................... 309
11.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity ................................................................................. 310
11.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information ..................................................................................... 310

11.3.2 Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm Type .................. 311
11.3.3 Editing an Alarm Type ................................................................................................ 311
11.3.4 Setting Alarms to their Default Values ....................................................................... 312
11.4 Uploading Unit Info ..................................................................................................... 312
11.5 Performing Diagnostics .............................................................................................. 314
11.5.1 Performing Radio Loopback ...................................................................................... 314
11.5.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback .................................................................................. 315
11.5.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM) ..................................... 316
12. Web EMS Utilities ......................................................................................... 329

12.1 Restarting the HTTP Server ....................................................................................... 329
12.2 Calculating an ifIndex ................................................................................................. 330
12.3 Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities ........................................... 331
Section III: CLI Configuration ........................................................................... 332

13. Getting Started (CLI)..................................................................................... 333
13.1 General (CLI) ............................................................................................................. 333
13.2 Establishing a Connection (CLI) ................................................................................ 333
13.2.1 PC Setup (CLI) ........................................................................................................... 334
13.3 Logging On (CLI) ........................................................................................................ 334
13.4 General CLI Commands ............................................................................................ 334
13.5 Changing Your Password (CLI) ................................................................................. 335
13.6 Configuring In-Band Management (CLI) .................................................................... 336
13.7 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI) ............................................................ 336
13.8 Configuring the Activation Key (CLI) .......................................................................... 338
13.8.1 Activation Key Overview (CLI) ................................................................................... 338
13.8.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI) ................................................. 338
13.8.3 Entering the Activation Key (CLI) ............................................................................... 339
13.8.4 Activating Demo Mode (CLI) ...................................................................................... 339
13.8.5 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI) ...................................... 339
13.9 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI) ............................................................... 339
13.9.1 Setting the Daylight Savings Time (CLI) .................................................................... 340
13.10 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI) ..................................................................................... 341
13.11 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI).................................................................... 342
13.11.1 Entering Radio View (CLI) ......................................................................... 342
13.11.2 Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI) .......................................................... 343
13.11.3 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI)................................................. 343
13.11.4 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI) ........................................ 344
13.12 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI) .......................................................... 345
13.12.1 Displaying Available MRMC Scripts (CLI) ................................................. 345
13.12.2 Assigning an MRMC Script to a Radio Carrier (CLI) ................................. 346
13.13 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI) .................................................. 347
13.14 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI) ................................................................................... 348
13.14.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance (CLI) ................................................. 348
13.14.2 Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI) ......................................................................... 348

13.15 Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI) ....................................................................... 348
13.16 Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI) ........................................................................... 349
14. Configuration Guide (CLI) ............................................................................ 350

14.1 System Configurations (CLI) ...................................................................................... 350
14.2 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI) .......................................................................... 351
14.2.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI) .............................................................................. 351
14.2.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI) ............................................................ 351
14.2.3 Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI) ...................................... 352
14.2.4 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI).................................................................. 352
14.3 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) (Optional) (CLI) ................................................ 352
14.3.1 LAG Overview (CLI) ................................................................................................... 353
14.3.2 Configuring a LAG Group (CLI) ................................................................................. 353
14.3.3 Viewing LAG Details (CLI) ......................................................................................... 353
14.3.4 Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI) .................................................................... 354
14.4 Configuring XPIC (CLI) .............................................................................................. 356
14.4.1 XPIC Overview (CLI) .................................................................................................. 356
14.4.2 Configuring the Antennas (CLI) ................................................................................. 356
14.4.3 Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI) ........................................................... 357
14.4.4 Creating an XPIC Group (CLI) ................................................................................... 358
14.5 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI) .................................................................... 358
14.5.1 HSB Radio Protection Overview (CLI) ....................................................................... 358
14.5.2 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI) .................................................................... 359
14.5.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit (CLI) ......................................... 360
14.5.4 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI) .................................................. 360
14.5.5 Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI) ........................................................................... 360
14.5.6 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI) ............................................... 361
14.5.7 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI) ........................................................... 362
14.5.8 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI) ........................................ 362
14.5.9 Disabling Unit Protection (CLI) ................................................................................... 362
14.6 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI) ............................................................ 363
14.6.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI) ............................................................... 363
14.6.2 MIMO Mate Management Access (CLI)..................................................................... 364
14.6.3 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI) ..................................................... 364
14.6.4 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI) ..................................... 365
14.6.5 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI) ..................................... 365
14.6.6 Resetting MIMO (CLI) ................................................................................................ 365
14.6.7 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels (CLI) ............................................................................ 365
14.6.8 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI) ...................................................... 367
14.7 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI).......................................... 367
15. Unit Management (CLI)................................................................................. 368

15.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI) ....................... 368
15.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI) ....................................................... 368
15.2.1 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv4 format (CLI) ............................. 369
15.2.2 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv6 format (CLI) ............................. 370
15.3 Configuring SNMP (CLI) ............................................................................................ 371

15.3.1 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI) .................................................................... 371

15.3.2 Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI) ........................................................................................ 372
15.3.3 Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI) .......................................................................... 373
15.3.4 Configuring Trap Managers (CLI) .............................................................................. 374
15.4 Upgrading the Software (CLI) .................................................................................... 376
15.4.1 Software Upgrade Overview (CLI) ............................................................................. 376
15.4.2 Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI) .................................................................. 376
15.4.3 Configuring a Software Download (CLI) .................................................................... 377
15.4.4 Downloading a Software Package (CLI) .................................................................... 378
15.4.5 Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI) .................................................................... 378
15.5 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI) ........................................................ 380
15.5.1 Configuration Management Overview (CLI)............................................................... 380
15.5.2 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI) ......................................... 381
15.5.3 Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI) ................................................. 382
15.5.4 Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI) ................................................... 383
15.5.5 Editing CLI Scripts (CLI)............................................................................................. 384
15.6 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration (CLI) ....................................... 384
15.7 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI) ....................................................................... 384
15.8 Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI) ............................................................................. 385
15.9 Configuring NTP (CLI)................................................................................................ 386
15.10 Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI) .................................................................................. 387
16. Radio Configuration (CLI) ............................................................................ 388

16.1 Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters (CLI) ................................. 388
16.1.1 Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI) .............................. 389
16.1.2 Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI)............................................................. 389
16.1.3 Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI) .......................................................... 389
16.1.4 Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI) ......................................................... 389
16.1.5 Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI) ........................................................ 389
16.1.6 Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI) ............................................................................... 390
16.2 Configuring ATPC (CLI) ............................................................................................. 390
16.3 Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI) .................................................................. 391
16.3.1 Displaying Header De-Duplication Information (CLI) ................................................. 392
16.4 Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI) ....................................................................... 393
16.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI) ........................................................ 394
16.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics (CLI) .......................................... 398
16.6.1 Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs (CLI) .......................... 398
16.6.2 Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI) ................................................... 399
16.6.3 Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI) ................................. 400
16.6.4 Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI) ............................................................................. 401
16.6.5 Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI) ............................................................................. 401
16.6.6 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI) ....................................................................... 401
16.6.7 Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI) ............................................................ 403
16.6.8 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs (CLI) ...................... 403
16.6.9 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs (CLI) .......................... 405
16.6.10 Displaying ACM PMs (CLI) ........................................................................ 408

17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI) ....................................................... 410

17.1 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI) .......................................................................... 410
17.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview (CLI) .............................................................................. 410
17.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI) .................................... 411
17.1.3 Defining Services (CLI) .............................................................................................. 411
17.1.4 Configuring Service Points (CLI) ................................................................................ 417
17.1.5 Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI) ............................. 434
17.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) ............................................ 438
17.2.1 Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) ................................................................... 438
17.2.2 Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI) ................................................................... 438
17.2.3 Configuring the MRU (CLI) ........................................................................................ 439
17.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI) ........................................................................ 440
17.3.1 Entering Interface View (CLI) ..................................................................................... 441
17.3.2 Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit (CLI) .......................... 442
17.3.3 Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI) .............................................................................. 442
17.3.4 Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI) ............................................................. 443
17.3.5 Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI) ......................................... 443
17.3.6 Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI) ............................................ 444
17.3.7 Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI) .......................................................................... 444
17.3.8 Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI)................................................................. 445
17.3.9 Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI)............................................................... 445
17.3.10 Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI) ............................................ 446
17.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation (CLI) ......................................................... 446
17.4.1 Configuring Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port (CLI) ......................... 447
17.4.2 Enabling Automatic State Propagation (CLI) ............................................................. 448
17.4.3 Deleting Automatic State Propagation (CLI) .............................................................. 449
17.4.4 Displaying Automatic State Propagation Parameters (CLI) ....................................... 449
17.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI) ................................................................ 450
17.5.1 Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI) .............................................................................. 450
17.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI) ......................................... 451
17.5.3 Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI) ........................................................................... 452
17.5.4 Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI) .............................................................................. 455
18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)...................................................................... 456

18.1 Configuring Classification (CLI) ................................................................................. 456
18.1.1 Classification Overview (CLI) ..................................................................................... 456
18.1.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface (CLI) ........................ 456
18.1.3 Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI) ................................................. 457
18.1.4 Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI) ..................................................................... 459
18.1.5 Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI) ...................................................................... 462
18.1.6 Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI)....................................................................... 465
18.1.7 Configuring a Default CoS (CLI) ................................................................................ 467
18.1.8 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI) .............................. 467
18.1.9 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI) ....................................... 467
18.2 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI) ................................................................ 468
18.2.1 Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI) ............................................................... 468
18.2.2 Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI) ......................................................... 469
18.2.3 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI) .......................................................................... 470
18.2.4 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI) ............................................................................ 471
18.2.5 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI) ............................................... 471

18.2.6 Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter (Policer) (CLI) .............. 475
18.2.7 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI) .............................................. 476
18.3 Configuring Marking (CLI) .......................................................................................... 478
18.3.1 Marking Overview (CLI) ............................................................................................. 478
18.3.2 Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI) ................................................. 479
18.3.3 Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI) ................................................................... 480
18.3.4 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI) ................................................................... 481
18.4 Configuring WRED (CLI) ............................................................................................ 483
18.4.1 WRED Overview (CLI) ............................................................................................... 483
18.4.2 Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI) ............................................................................... 483
18.4.3 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI) ............................................................. 485
18.5 Configuring Shapers (CLI) ......................................................................................... 486
18.5.1 Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI) ............................................................................. 486
18.5.2 Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI) ............................................................................. 486
18.5.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI) ................................................................ 489
18.5.4 Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI) ........................................ 492
18.6 Configuring Scheduling (CLI) ..................................................................................... 493
18.6.1 Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI) ........................................................................ 493
18.6.2 Configuring Queue Priority (CLI) ................................................................................ 493
18.6.3 Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI) ............................................................... 494
18.6.4 Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI) ........................................................ 497
18.6.5 Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI) ...................................................... 498
18.7 Displaying Egress Statistics (CLI) .............................................................................. 502
18.7.1 Displaying Queue-Level PMs (CLI) ............................................................................ 502
18.7.2 Displaying Service Bundle-Level PMs (CLI) .............................................................. 503
19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI) .............................................................................. 505

19.1 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) (CLI) ......................................... 505
19.1.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI) ....................................................... 505
19.1.2 Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI) ................................................................................ 505
19.2 Configuring LLDP (CLI) .............................................................................................. 510
19.2.1 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI) ...................................................... 510
19.2.2 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI) ........................................................ 511
19.2.3 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI) .................................................................. 512
19.2.4 Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI) .................................................................... 513
19.2.5 Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI) ..................................................... 513
19.2.6 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI) ........................................... 516
19.2.7 Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI) ................................................................................ 519
20. Synchronization (CLI)................................................................................... 521

20.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI) ....................................................................... 521
21. Access Management and Security (CLI) ..................................................... 523

21.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters (CLI) ....................................... 523
21.1.1 Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI) ......................................................... 523
21.1.2 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI) ......................................................... 524
21.1.3 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI) ........................................................ 525
21.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI) ............................................... 526
21.2.1 Configuring Password Aging (CLI) ............................................................................. 526

21.2.2 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI) ................................................... 526

21.2.3 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI) .................................................... 527
21.2.4 Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI) ....................................................... 527
21.3 Configuring Users (CLI) ............................................................................................. 528
21.3.1 User Configuration Overview (CLI) ............................................................................ 528
21.3.2 Configuring User Profiles (CLI) .................................................................................. 529
21.3.3 Configuring User Accounts (CLI) ............................................................................... 530
21.4 Configuring RADIUS (CLI) ......................................................................................... 532
21.4.1 RADIUS Overview (CLI)............................................................................................. 532
21.4.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI) .................................................................... 532
21.4.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI) ....................................................... 533
21.4.4 Viewing RADIUS Access Control and Server Attributes (CLI)................................... 533
21.4.5 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity (CLI) ...................................... 534
21.5 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS (CLI).............................................. 535
21.5.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI) ....................................... 535
21.5.2 Downloading a Certificate (CLI) ................................................................................. 537
21.5.3 Enabling HTTPS (CLI) ............................................................................................... 538
21.6 Blocking Telnet Access (CLI) ..................................................................................... 539
21.7 Uploading the Security Log (CLI) ............................................................................... 539
21.8 Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI) ...................................................................... 540
22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI) ......................................... 542

22.1 Viewing Current Alarms (CLI) .................................................................................... 542
22.2 Viewing the Event Log (CLI) ...................................................................................... 542
22.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI) ........................................................................ 542
22.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information (CLI) ............................................................................ 542
22.3.2 Editing an Alarm Type (CLI) ....................................................................................... 543
22.3.3 Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI) .............................................................. 543
22.4 Uploading Unit Info (CLI)............................................................................................ 544
22.5 Performing Diagnostics (CLI) ..................................................................................... 546
22.5.1 Performing Radio Loopback (CLI) ............................................................................. 546
22.5.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI) ......................................................................... 547
22.6 Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI) ..................................................... 548
Section IV Maintenance ..................................................................................... 550

23. Maintenance.................................................................................................. 551
23.1 IP-20C Connector Pin-outs ........................................................................................ 551
23.1.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical ..................................................................... 551
23.1.2 Eth2 - GbE Electrical/Optical ..................................................................................... 552
23.1.3 Eth3/EXP - GbE Electrical/Optical/Expansion ........................................................... 552
23.1.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard) ........ 553
23.1.5 DC .............................................................................................................................. 553
23.1.6 RSL Interface ............................................................................................................. 553
23.1.7 Source Sharing .......................................................................................................... 553
23.2 IP-20C LEDs .............................................................................................................. 554
23.2.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...................................................................... 554

23.2.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs ............................................................................ 554

23.2.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ................................................................... 555
23.2.4 Radio LED .................................................................................................................. 555
23.2.5 Status LED ................................................................................................................. 555
23.2.6 Protection LED ........................................................................................................... 555
23.3 IP-20S Connector Pin-outs ........................................................................................ 556
23.3.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical ..................................................................... 556
23.3.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-Non-Standard) ........ 557
23.3.5 DC .............................................................................................................................. 558
23.3.6 RSL Interface ............................................................................................................. 558
23.4 IP-20S LEDs .............................................................................................................. 558
23.4.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...................................................................... 558
23.4.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs ............................................................................ 559
23.4.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ................................................................... 559
23.4.4 Radio LED .................................................................................................................. 559
23.4.5 Status LED ................................................................................................................. 559
23.4.6 Protection LED ........................................................................................................... 560
23.5 IP-20E Connector Pin-outs ........................................................................................ 560
23.5.1 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) ........................................................... 560
23.5.2 MGT/Eth4 GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) ............................................................... 561
23.5.3 EXT Port ..................................................................................................................... 561
23.5.4 Power Adaptor ........................................................................................................... 561
23.5.5 RSL Interface ............................................................................................................. 562
23.6 IP-20E LEDs .............................................................................................................. 563
23.6.1 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ...................................................................... 563
23.6.2 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs ................................................. 563
23.6.3 MGT/Eth4 GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs ..................................................... 564
23.6.4 Radio LED .................................................................................................................. 564
23.6.5 Status LED ................................................................................................................. 564
23.6.6 Protection LED ........................................................................................................... 564
23.7 PoE Injector Pin-outs ................................................................................................. 565
23.7.1 PoE Port ..................................................................................................................... 565
23.7.2 Data Port .................................................................................................................... 565
23.7.3 DC .............................................................................................................................. 566
23.8 PoE Injector LEDs ...................................................................................................... 566
23.8.1 Radio LED .................................................................................................................. 566
Section V: Appendices ...................................................................................... 567

24. Alarms List .................................................................................................... 568
25. Abbreviations ............................................................................................... 592

Safety Precautions & Declared Material

General Equipment Precautions
Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those

! specified herein, may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
When working with a FibeAir IDU, note the following risk of electric
shock and energy hazard: Disconnecting one power supply disconnects
! only one power supply module. To isolate the unit completely,
disconnect all power sources.
Machine noise information order - 3. GPSGV, the highest sound pressure

! level amounts to 70 dB (A) or less, in accordance with ISO EN 7779.
Static electricity may cause body harm, as well as harm to electronic
components inside the device.
To prevent damage, before touching components inside the device, all
electrostatic charge must be discharged from both personnel and tools.
High Frequency Electromagnetic Fields!
Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal

damage to personnel. The eye (cornea and lens) is easily exposed.
Any unnecessary exposure is undesirable and should be avoided.
In radio-relay communication installations, ordinary setup for normal
operation, the general RF radiation level will be well below the safety limit.
!
In the antennas and directly in front of them the RF intensity normally will
exceed the danger level, within limited portions of space.
Dangerous radiation may be found in the neighborhood of open waveguide
flanges or horns where the power is radiated into space.
To avoid dangerous radiation the following precautions must be taken:
 During work within and close to the front of the antenna; make sure that
transmitters will remain turned off.
 Before opening coaxial - or waveguide connectors carrying RF power, turn
off transmitters.
 Consider any incidentally open RF connector as carrying power, until
otherwise proved. Do not look into coaxial connectors at closer than
reading distance (30 cm). Do not look into an open waveguide unless you
are absolutely sure that the power is turned off.

ESD
This equipment contains components which are sensitive to “ESD” (Electro

Static Discharge). Therefore, ESD protection measures must be observed
when touching the IDU.
Anyone responsible for the installation or maintenance of the FibeAir IDU
must use an ESD Wrist Strap.
Additional precautions include personnel grounding, grounding of work
benches, grounding of tools and instruments, as well as transport and storage
in special antistatic bags and boxes.
Laser
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure.
The optical interface must only be serviced by qualified personnel, who are
aware of the hazards involved to repair laser products.
When handling laser products the following precautions must be taken:
 Never look directly into an open connector or optical cable.
 Before disconnecting an optical cable from the optical transmitter, the
power should be switched off. If this is not possible, the cable must be
disconnected from the transmitter before it is disconnected from the
receiver.
 When the cable is reconnected it must be connected to the receiver before
it is connected to the transmitter.
Special Requirements for North America
Grounding: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the

earthed conductor of the DC supply circuit and the earthing conductor at the
! equipment.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of
the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful
interference in which case the user will be required to
correct the interference at his own expense.
Restricted Access Area: DC powered equipment should only be installed in a
Restricted Access Area.

Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to country

national electrical codes. For North America, equipment must be installed in
accordance with the US National Electrical Code, Articles 110-16, 110-17 and
110-18, and the Canadian Electrical Code, Section 12.
Overcurrent Protection: A readily accessible listed branch circuit
overcurrent protective device, rated 15 A, must be incorporated in the
building wiring.
Grounded Supply System: The equipment shall be connected to a properly
grounded supply system. All equipment in the immediate vicinity shall be
grounded the same way, and shall not be grounded elsewhere.
Local Supply System: The DC supply system is to be local, i.e. within the same
premises as the equipment.
Disconnect Device: A disconnect device is not allowed in the grounded circuit
between the DC supply source and the frame/grounded circuit connection.
Special Requirements for Norway and Sweden:
! Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation

through the mains connection or through other equipment with a connection
to protective earthing – and to a cable distribution system using coaxial cable,
may in some circumstances create a fire hazard. Connection to a cable
distribution system has therefore to be provided through a device providing
electrical isolation below a certain frequency range (galvanic isolator, see EN
60728-11).
Utstyr som er koplet til beskyttelsesjord via nettplugg og/eller via annet
jordtilkoplet utstyr – og er tilkoplet et kabel-TV nett, kan forårsake brannfare.
For å unngå dette skal det ved tilkopling av utstyret til kabel-TV nettet
installeres en galvanisk isolator mellom utstyret og kabel- TV nettet.
Utrustning som är kopplad till skyddsjord via jordat vägguttag och/eller via
annan utrustning och samtidigt är kopplad till kabel-TV nät kan i vissa fall
medfőra risk főr brand. Főr att undvika detta skall vid anslutning av
utrustningen till kabel-TV nät galvanisk isolator finnas mellan utrustningen
och kabel-TV nätet.

Précautions générales relatives à l'équipement
L’utilisation de commandes ou de réglages ou l'exécution de procédures

! autres que celles spécifiées dans les présentes peut engendrer une
exposition dangereuse aux rayonnements.
L’usage de FibeAir IDU s’accompagne du risque suivant d'électrocution

et de danger électrique : le débranchement d'une alimentation
! électrique ne déconnecte qu'un module d'alimentation électrique. Pour
isoler complètement l'unité, il faut débrancher toutes les alimentations
électriques.
Bruit de machine d’ordre - 3. GPSGV, le plus haut niveau de pression

! sonore s'élève à 70 dB (A) au maximum, dans le respect de la norme ISO
EN 7779.
Allgemeine Vorsichtsmaßnahmen für die Anlage
Wenn andere Steuerelemente verwendet, Einstellungen vorgenommen

! oder Verfahren durchgeführt werden als die hier angegebenen, kann
dies gefährliche Strahlung verursachen.
Beachten Sie beim Arbeiten mit FibeAir IDU das folgende Stromschlag-
und Gefahrenrisiko: Durch Abtrennen einer Stromquelle wird nur ein
! Stromversorgungsmodul abgetrennt. Um die Einheit vollständig zu
isolieren, trennen Sie alle Stromversorgungen ab.
Maschinenlärminformations-Verordnung - 3. GPSGV, der höchste

! Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäß EN ISO 7779.

RoHS Compliance Declaration
Electronic Information Products Declaration of Hazardous/Toxic Substances
Hazardous Substance
Component
Hexavalent Polybrominated Polybrominated
Lead Mercury Cadmium
Chromium Biphenyls Diphenyl
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd)
(Cr VI) (PBB) Ethers (PBDE)
PCB/Circuit
Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply
Modules
Mechanical
Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply
Parts
Cables Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply Comply

About This Guide

This document explains how to configure and operate a FibeAir IP-20C/S/E
system. This document applies to software version C8.0.7.
Note The term IP-20 in this document refers to all three
products: the IP-20C, IP-20S and IP-20E.
The IP-20 system is a modular system with a wide variety of configuration
options. Not all configurations are described in this manual.
This document applies to CeraOS version 8.3.
What You Should Know

Some features described in this manual may not be available in the current
release. Please consult the Release Notes for the functionality supported in the
specific release you are using.
Target Audience
This manual is intended for use by individuals responsible for configuration
and administration of an IP-20 system or network.
Related Documents
 FibeAir IP-20C Technical Description
 FibeAir IP-20C Installation Guide
 FibeAir IP-20S Technical Description
 FibeAir IP-20S Installation Guide
 FibeAir IP-20E Technical Description
 FibeAir IP-20E Installation Guide
 FibeAir IP-20 Series MIB Reference
 FibeAir IP-20C/S/E Release Notes

Section I:
Introduction

1. Introduction
This section includes:
 IP-20C System Overview
 IP-20S System Overview
 IP-20E System Overview
 PoE Injector Overview
 The Web-Based Element Management System
 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure
This user manual provides instructions for configuring and operating the
following systems:
 IP-20C
 IP-20S
 IP-20E
Each of these systems can be used with a PoE Injector.
Wherever applicable, the manual notes the specific distinctions between these
systems. The manual also notes when specific features are only applicable to
certain systems and not others.
1.1 IP-20C System Overview

IP-20C represents a new generation of radio technology, capable of high bit
rates and longer reach, and suitable for more diverse deployment
scenarios. IP-20C is a dual-core, compact, all-outdoor backhaul Ethernet
product that combines radio, baseband, and Carrier Ethernet functionality in a
single, durable box for outdoor installations.
IP-20C offers the convenience of an easy installation procedure, and full
compatibility with RFU-C antennas. It is designed for use in network
configurations which require high capacity solutions. IP-20C covers the entire
licensed frequency spectrum (6-42GHz) and offers a wide capacity range,
including Header De-Duplication.
1.2 IP-20S System Overview

IP-20S is an all-outdoor solution for backhaul sites. It runs under CeraOS, the
high-performance, internetworking operating system, and supports all
common features of the IP-20 platform in a compact, environmentally friendly
architecture.
IP-20S supports cutting edge capacity-boosting techniques, such as QPSK to
2048 QAM and Header De-Duplication, to offer a high capacity solution for
every network topology and every site configuration. Its green, compact,
all-outdoor configuration makes IP-20S ideal for any location.

1.3 IP-20E System Overview

IP-20E is a compact and versatile high capacity backhaul Ethernet system
which operates in the E-band (70-80 GHz). Its light weight and small footprint
make it versatile for many different applications. Thanks to its small footprint,
low power consumption, and simple installation, IP-20E can be installed in
many different types of remote outdoor locations.
IP-20E R2 offers ACM, with a modulation BPSK (2 QAM) through 128 QAM. IP-
20E supports a diverse set of features that is optimally suited for macro–to–
macro site connectivity. It is equally well suited to be used as a high capacity
aggregation link connecting an array of small cells or BTS sites to a macro site.
Note: This document refers to IP-20E hardware release 2 (R2).
For instructions on using IP-20E hardware release 1 (R1),
refer to the FibeAir IP-20C/S/E User Guide Rev E, for
CeraOS 8.2, or earlier versions.
1.4 PoE Injector Overview

The PoE injector box is designed to offer a single cable solution for connecting
both data and the DC power supply to the IP-20C, IP-20S, or IP-20E system. To
do so, the PoE injector combines 48VDC input and GbE signals via a standard
CAT5E cable using a proprietary Ceragon design.
The PoE injector can be ordered with a DC feed protection and with +24VDC
support, as well as EMC surge protection for both indoor and outdoor
installation options. It can be mounted on poles, walls, or inside racks.

1.5 The Web-Based Element Management System
1.5.1 Introduction to the Web EMS

The Element Management System (Web EMS) is an HTTP web-based element
manager that enables the operator to perform configuration operations and
obtain statistical and performance information related to the system,
including:
 Configuration Management – Enables you to view and define
configuration data.
 Fault Monitoring – Enables you to view active alarms.
 Performance Monitoring – Enables you to view and clear performance
monitoring values and counters.
 Diagnostics and Maintenance – Enables you to define and perform loop
back tests and software updates.
 Security Configuration – Enables you to configure security features.
 User Management – Enables you to define users and user groups.
A Web-Based EMS connection to the unit can be opened using a Web browser
(Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome). The Web-Based EMS
uses a graphical interface.
The Web-Based EMS shows the actual unit configuration and provides easy
access to any interface. A wide range of configuration, testing, and system
monitoring tasks can be performed through the Web EMS.
Note! The alarms and system configuration details shown in this
manual do not necessarily represent actual parameters and
values on a fully operating IP-20 system. Some of the pages
and tasks described in this Manual may not be available to
all users, based on the actual system configuration,
activation key, and other details.
1.5.2 Web EMS Page Layout

Each Web EMS page includes the following sections:
 The left section of the page displays the Web EMS menu tree:
Click to display the sub-options under a menu item.
Click to hide the sub-options under a menu item.
 The main section of the page provides the page's basic functionality.

Figure 1: Main Web EMS Page
Optionally, you can display a representation of the IP-20 front panel by

clicking either the arrow in the center or the arrow at the right of the bottom
toolbar.
Figure 1: Displaying a Representation of the Front Panel
Figure 2: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20C/S

Figure 3: Main Web EMS Page with Representation of Front Panel – IP-20E
When HSB radio protection is enabled, two tabs appear on the top of the main
section. These tabs are labeled Active and Standby and enable you to configure
the Active and Standby units separately if necessary. The title above the main
section indicates whether you are working with the Active or Standby TCC.
For details on configuring HSB radio protection, see Configuring HSB Radio
Protection.
Note: HSB protection is only available for IP-20C and IP-20S.
Figure 4: Main Web EMS Page with Active and Standby Tabs
Certain pages include a Related Pages drop-down list on the upper right of
the main section of the page. You can navigate to a page related to the current
page by selecting the page from this list.

Figure 5: Related Pages Drop-Down List
1.6 Reference Guide to Web EMS Menu Structure

The following table shows the Web EMS menu hierarchy, with links to the
sections in this document that provide instructions for the relevant menu
item.
Note: Some menu items are only available if the relevant
activation key or feature is enabled.
Table 1: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Platform Menu
Sub-Menus For Further Information

Management > Unit Parameters Configuring Unit Parameters
Management > NTP Configuration Configuring NTP
Management > Time Services Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
Management > Interface Manager Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)
Management > Inventory Displaying Unit Inventory
Management > Unit Info Uploading Unit Info
Management > Reset Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset
Management > Set to Factory Default Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration
Management > Unit Redundancy Configuring HSB Radio Protection
Management > Networking > Local Changing the Management IP Address
Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications
Management > Networking > Remote Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address
Management > SNMP > SNMP Parameters Configuring SNMP
Management > SNMP > Trap Managers Configuring Trap Managers
Management > SNMP > V3 Users Configuring SNMP
Software > Timer Parameters Configuring a Timed Installation
Software > Versions Viewing Current Software Versions
Software > Download & Install Downloading and Installing Software
Configuration > Timer Parameters Reserved for future use.


Configuration > Backup Files Viewing Current Backup Files
Configuration > Configuration Management Backing Up and Restoring Configurations
Activation Key > Activation Key Configuration Configuring the Activation Key
Activation Key > Activation Key Overview Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features
Security > General > Configuration Operating in FIPS Mode
Security > General > Security Log Upload Uploading the Security Log
Security > General > Configuration Log Upload Uploading the Configuration Log
Security > X.509 Certificate > CSR Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS
Security > X.509 Certificate > Download & Install Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS
Security > Access Control > General Configuring the General Access Control Parameters
Security > Access Control > User Profiles Configuring User Profiles
Security > Access Control > User Accounts Configuring Users
Security > Access Control > Password Configuring the Password Security Parameters
Management
Security > Access Control > Change Password Changing Your Password
Security > Access Control > Radius > Radius Configuring RADIUS
Configuration
Security > Access Control > Radius > Radius Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity
Users
Security > Protocols Control Configuring the Session Timeout
Blocking Telnet Access
Table 2: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Faults Menu

Current alarms Viewing Current Alarms
Event Log Viewing the Event Log
Alarm Configuration Editing Alarm Text and Severity
Table 3: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Radio Menu

Radio Parameters Configuring the Radio Parameters
Remote Radio Parameters Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters
Radio Thresholds Configuring Radio Thresholds
ATPC Configuring ATPC
Payload Encryption Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption


Ethernet Interface > Configuration Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through
Ethernet Interface > Counters Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through Counters
MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts > ETSI Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts > FCC Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
MRMC > MRMC > Status Displaying MRMC Status
PM & Statistics > Counters Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters
PM & Statistics > Signal Level Displaying Signal Level PMs
PM & Statistics > Diversity Reserved for future use
PM & Statistics > Combined Reserved for future use
PM & Statistics > Aggregate Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs
PM & Statistics > MSE Displaying Modem MSE PMs
PM & Statistics > XPI Displaying XPI PMs
PM & Statistics > MRMC Displaying MRMC PMs
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Capacity/Throughput Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Utilization Displaying Utilization PMs
PM & Statistics > Traffic > Frame error rate Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs
Diagnostics > Loopback Performing Radio Loopback
Groups > XPIC Configuring XPIC
Groups > Multi Radio Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
Groups > MIMO Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
Table 4: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Ethernet Menu

General Configuration Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype
Services Configuring Ethernet Service(s)
Interfaces > Physical Interfaces Configuring Ethernet Interfaces
Interfaces > Logical Interfaces Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface
Assigning Policers to Interfaces
Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation
Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues
Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue
Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle
Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface
Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface
Performing Ethernet Loopback

Interfaces > Automatic State Propagation Configuring Automatic State Propagation
Interfaces > Groups > LAG Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
PM & Statistics > RMON RMON Statistics
PM & Statistics > Port TX Port TX Statistics
PM & Statistics > Port RX Port RX Statistics
QoS > Classification > 802.1Q Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table
QoS > Classification > 802.1AD Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table
QoS > Classification > DSCP Modifying the DSCP Classification Table
QoS > Classification > MPLS Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table
QoS > Policer > Policer Profile Configuring Policer Profiles
QoS > Marking > 802.1Q Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table
QoS > Marking > 802.1AD Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table
QoS > WRED > WRED Profile Configuring WRED
QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles
QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles
QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles Configuring Priority Profiles
QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles Configuring WFQ Profiles
Protocols > Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)
Protocols > LLDP > Remote Management Displaying Peer Status
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Configuring the General LLDP Parameters
Parameters
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters
Port Configuration
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
Destination Address
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
Management TLV
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
> Management
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
> Remote Table
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
Parameters
Port


Management
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Displaying LLDP Statistics
General
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port Displaying LLDP Statistics
TX
Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port Displaying LLDP Statistics
RX
Protocols > SOAM > MD Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
Protocols > SOAM > MA/MEG Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
Protocols > SOAM > MEP Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
Table 5: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Sync Menu

Note: For IP-20E, synchronization is planned for future release
and the Sync menu does not appear.
SyncE Regenerator Configuring SyncE Regenerator
Sync Source Reserved for future use
Outgoing Clock Reserved for future use
1588-TC Reserved for future use
Table 6: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Quick Configuration Menu

Link Setup (PIPE) > 1+0 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
Link Setup (PIPE) > 1+0 (Repeater) Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick Configuration
Wizard
Link Setup (PIPE) > Multi Carrier ABC > 2 + 0 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick
Configuration Wizard
Table 7: IP-20 Web EMS Menu Hierarchy – Utilities Menu

Restart HTTP Restarting the HTTP Server
ifIndex Calculator Calculating an ifIndex
MIB Reference Guide Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities

Section II:
Web EMS
Configuration

2. Getting Started
 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network
 Establishing a Connection
 Logging on
 Changing Your Password
 Configuring In-Band Management
 Changing the Management IP Address
 Configuring the Activation Key
 Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)
 Configuring the Radio Parameters
 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)
 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power
 Operating in FIPS Mode
 Configuring Grouping (Optional)
 Creating Service(s) for Traffic
2.1 Assigning IP Addresses in the Network

Before connection over the radio hop is established, it is of high importance
that you assign the IP-20 unit a dedicated IP address, according to an IP plan
for the total network. See Changing the Management IP Address.
By default, a new IP-20 unit has the following IP settings:
 IP address: 192.168.1.1
 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Warning! If the connection over the link is established with identical
IP addresses, an IP address conflict will occur and the
remote connection may be lost.
2.2 Establishing a Connection

Connect the IP-20 unit to a PC by means of a TP cable. The cable is connected
to the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on the PC. Refer to the
Installation Guide for the type of unit you are connecting for cable connection
instructions.

2.2.1 PC Setup
To obtain contact between the PC and the IP-20 unit, it is necessary to
configure an IP address on the PC within the same subnet as the IP-20 unit.
The default IP-20 IP address is 192.168.1.1. Set the PC address to e.g.
192.168.1.10 and subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. Note the initial settings
before changing.
Note: The IP-20 IP address, as well as the password, should be
changed before operating the system. See Changing the
Management IP Address and Changing Your Password.
1 Select Control Panel > All Control Panel Items > Network and Sharing
Center.
2 Click Change the adapter settings.
3 Select Local Area Connection > Properties > Internet Protocol Version
4 (TCP/IP), and set the following parameters:
IP address: 192.168.1.10
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
No default gateway
4 Click OK to apply the settings.
Figure 6: Internet Protocol Properties Window

2.3 Logging on
1 Open an Internet browser (Internet Explorer or Mozilla Firefox).
2 Enter the default IP address “192.168.1.1” in the Address Bar. The Login
page opens.
Figure 7: Login Page
3 In the Login window, enter the following:

User Name: admin
Password: admin
4 Click Apply.
2.3.1 Logging in Without Knowing the IP Address

If the unit's IP address has been changed from its default of 192.168.1.1, and
you do not know the new IP address, you can log into the unit by establishing
a connection directly to the CPU. This requires a Ceragon Networks
proprietary Ethernet cable. This cable should be ordered from Ceragon
Networks, according to the following table.
Cables for Direct CPU Connection
Product Cable Marketing Model Cable Description

CABLE,RJ45M TO 2xRJ45F, 1.0M, WITH GLANDS,
IP-20C and IP-20S IP-20_MIMO_Prot_ mng_spltr
UV PROTECTED
IP-20E IP-20_Mini-MNG-CBL CABLE,MiniDP TO RJ45F,0.2M,FOR FIELD DEBUG
To log in using this cable:

1 The IP address of the CPU is 192.0.2.1. To connect, set up a new Local Area
Connection with an IP address as follows:
IP address: 192.0.2.3
Subnet mask 255.255.255.240
No default gateway
2 Connect Channel 2 of the cable to:
IP-20C and IP-20S: The MGT port on the IP-20 unit.
IP-20E: The EXT port on the IP-20 unit.
3 Connect the single end of the cable to the LAN port on the PC.

4 Verify that the MGT port LED is orange. (When a connection is established
using Channel 1 of the cable, the LED on the MGT port is green.)
Note: For IP-20E, there is no LED to indicate whether the
connection has been established.
5 The system will prompt you for a user name and password (see Figure 7).
6 Enter the default user name and password:
User Name: admin
Password: admin
7 Click Apply.
8 After a connection is established, you can view or configure the unit's IP
address using the Web EMS. See Changing the Management IP Address.
2.4 Changing Your Password

It is recommended to change your default Admin password as soon as you
have logged into the system.
To change your password:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Change Password. The
Change User Password page opens.
Figure 8: Change User Password Page
2 In the Old password field, enter the current password. For example, upon
initial login, enter the default password (admin).

3 In the New password field, enter a new password. If Enforce Password

Strength is activated (see Configuring the Password Security Parameters),
the password must meet the following criteria:
Password length must be at least eight characters.
Password must include characters of at least three of the following
character types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and
special characters. For purposes of meeting this requirement, upper
case letters at the beginning of the password and digits at the end of
the password are not counted.
A password cannot be repeated within five changes of the password.
4 Click Apply.
In addition to the Admin password, there is an additional password protected
user account, “root user”, which is configured in the system. The root user
password and instructions for changing this password are available from
Ceragon Customer Support. It is strongly recommended to change this
password.
2.5 Configuring In-Band Management

You can configure in-band management in order to manage the unit remotely
via its radio and/or Ethernet interfaces.
Each IP-20C unit includes a pre-defined management service with Service ID
257. The management service is a multipoint service that connects the two
local management ports and the network element host CPU in a single service.
In order to enable in-band management, you must add at least one service
point to the management service, in the direction of the remote site or sites
from which you want to access the unit for management.
For instructions on adding service points, see Configuring Service Points.
2.6 Changing the Management IP Address

Related Topics:
 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications
 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address

To change the management IP address of the local unit:

1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Local. The Local
Networking Configuration page opens.
Figure 9: Local Networking Configuration Page
2 Optionally, in the Description field, enter descriptive information about

the unit.
3 In the IP address field, enter an IP address for the unit. You can enter the
address in IPv4 format in this field, and/or in IPv6 format in the IPv6
Address field. The unit will receive communications whether they are sent
to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
4 In the Subnet mask field, enter the subnet mask.
5 Optionally, in the Default gateway field, enter the default gateway
address.
6 Optionally, in the IPv6 Address field, enter an IPv6 address for the unit.
You can enter the address in IPv6 format in this field, and/or in IPv4
format in the IP Address field. The unit will receive communications
whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6 address.
7 If you entered an IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length in the IPv6
Prefix-Length field.
8 Optionally, if you entered an IPv6 address, enter the default gateway in
IPv6 format in the Default Gateway IPv6 field.
9 Click Apply.
2.7 Configuring the Activation Key

 Activation Key Overview
 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters
 Entering the Activation Key
 Activating Demo Mode
 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features
2.7.1 Activation Key Overview

IP-20 offers a pay-as-you-grow concept in which future capacity growth and
additional functionality can be enabled with activation keys. Each device
contains a single unified activation key cipher.
New IP-20 units are delivered with a default activation key that enables you to
manage and configure the unit. Additional feature and capacity support
requires you to enter an activation key cipher in the Activation Key
Configuration page. Contact your vendor to obtain your activation key cipher.
Note: To obtain an activation key cipher, you may need to provide
the unit’s serial number. You can display the serial number
in the Web EMS Inventory page. See Displaying Unit
Inventory.
Each required feature and capacity should be purchased with an appropriate
activation key. It is not permitted to enable features that are not covered by a
valid activation key. In the event that the activation-key-enabled capacity and
feature set is exceeded, an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web
EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning.
After a 48-hour grace period, all other alarms are hidden until the capacity
and features in use are brought within the activation key’s capacity and
feature set.
In order to clear the alarm, you must configure the system to comply with the
activation key that has been loaded in the system. The system automatically
checks the configuration to ensure that it complies with the activation-key-
enabled features and capacities. If no violation is detected, the alarm is
cleared.
Demo mode is available, which enables all features for 60 days. When demo
mode expires, the most recent valid activation key goes into effect. The 60-day
period is only counted when the system is powered up. 10 days before demo
mode expires, an alarm is raised indicating that demo mode is about to expire.

2.7.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters

To display the current activation key status parameters:
1 Select Platform > Activation Key > Activation Key Configuration. The
Activation Key Configuration page opens.
Figure 10: Activation Key Configuration Page
Table 8: Activation Key Status Parameters
Parameter Definition
Type Displays the current activation key type.
Validation number Displays a random, system-generated validation number.
Date code Displays a date code used for validation of the current activation key
cipher.
Violation runtime counter (hours) In the event of an Activation Key Violation alarm, this field displays the
number of hours remaining in the 48-hour activation key violation grace
period.
Sanction state If an Activation Key Violation alarm has occurred, and the 48-hour
activation key violation grace period has expired without the system
having been brought into conformance with the activation-key-enabled
capacity and feature set, Yes appears in this field to indicate that the
system is in an Activation Key Violation sanction state. All other alarms
are hidden until the capacity and features in use are brought within the
activation-key-enabled capacity and feature set.

2.7.3 Entering the Activation Key

To enter a new activation key:
Activation Key Configuration page opens (Figure 10).
2 Enter the activation key cipher you have received from the vendor in the
Activation Key field. The activation key cipher is a string that enables all
features and capacities that have been purchased for the unit.
3 Click Apply.
If the activation key cipher is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or an invalid
serial number), an Activation Key Loading Failure event is sent to the Event
Log. When a legal activation key cipher is entered, an Activation Key Loaded
Successfully event is sent to the Event Log.
2.7.4 Activating Demo Mode

To activate demo mode:
Activation Key Configuration page opens (Figure 10).
2 In the Demo admin field, select Enable.
3 Click Apply.
The Demo timer field displays the number of hours that remain before demo
mode expires.
2.7.5 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features

To display the status of activation key coverage for features and capacities in
the IP-20:
1 Select Platform > Activation Key > Activation Key Overview. The
Activation Key Overview page opens.
Figure 11: Activation Key Overview Page

The Activation Key Overview page displays the activation-key-enabled

features and capacities for the IP-20, and indicates the activation key status of
each feature according to the activation key currently implemented in the unit.
Note: Some of the features listed in the Activation Key Overview
page may not be supported in the currently installed
software version.
Table 9: Activation Key-Enabled-Features Table Parameters
Feature ID A unique ID that identifies the feature.
Feature name The name of the feature.
Feature Description A description of the feature.
Activation key-enabled feature Indicates whether the activation-key-enabled feature is actually being
usage used.
Activation key-enabled feature Indicates whether the feature is allowed under the activation key that is
credit currently installed in the unit.
Activation key violation status Indicates whether the system configuration violates the currently installed
activation key with respect to this feature.
2.8 Setting the Time and Date (Optional)

Related Topics:
 Configuring NTP
IP-20 uses the Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) standard for time and date
configuration. UTC is a more updated and accurate method of date
coordination than the earlier date standard, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Every IP-20 unit holds the UTC offset and daylight savings time information
for the location of the unit. Each management unit presenting the information
uses its own UTC offset to present the information with the correct time.
Note: If the unit is powered down, the time and date are saved for
96 hours (four days). If the unit remains powered down for
longer, the time and date may need to be reconfigured.
To display and configure the UTC parameters:
1 Select Platform > Management > Time Services. The Time Services page
opens.

Figure 12: Time Services Page
2 Configure the fields listed in Table 10.

3 Click Apply.

Table 10: Time Services Parameters
Date & Time UTC Date and Time The UTC date and time.
Configuration
Local Current Date and Read-only. The calculated local date and time,
Time based on the local clock, Universal Time
Coordinated (UTC), and Daylight Savings Time
(DST) configurations.
Offset from GMT UTC Offset Hours The required hours offset (positive or negative)
relative to GMT. This is used to offset the clock
relative to GMT, according to the global
meridian location.
UTC Offset Minutes The required minutes offset (positive or
negative) relative to GMT. This is used to offset
the clock relative to GMT, according to the
global meridian location.
Daylight Saving Start Month The month when Daylight Savings Time begins.
Time
Day The date in the month when Daylight Savings
Time begins.
Daylight Saving End Time Month The month when Daylight Savings Time ends.
Day The date in the month when Daylight Savings
Time ends.
DST Offset (Hours) The required offset, in hours, for Daylight
Savings Time. Only positive offset is supported.

2.9 Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager)

By default:
 Ethernet traffic interfaces are disabled and must be manually enabled.
 The Ethernet management interface is enabled.
 Radio interfaces are enabled.
Note: IP-20S and IP-20E units have a single radio interface.
To enable or disable interfaces:
1 Select Platform > Management > Interface Manager. The Interface
Manager page opens, displaying all of the system's traffic and management
interfaces.
Figure 13: Interface Manager Page
To enable or disable an individual interface:

1 Select the interface in the Interface Manager table.
2 Click Edit. The Interface Manager – Edit page opens.

Figure 14: Interface Manager – Edit Page
3 In the Admin status field, select Up to enable the interface or Down to

disable the interface.
4 Click Apply, then Close.
To enable or disable multiple interfaces:
1 Select the interfaces in the Interface Manager table or select all the
interfaces by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 In the Multiple Selection Operation section underneath the Interface
Manager Table, select Admin status – Up or Admin status – Down.
Figure 15: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Interface Manager Page)
3 Click Apply.
Note: The Operational Status field displays the current, actual
operational state of the interface (Up or Down).

2.10 Configuring the Radio Parameters

In order to establish a radio link, you must:
 Unmute the radio carrier.
 Configure the radio frequencies.
 Configure the TX level.
You can do these tasks, perform other radio configuration tasks, and display
the radio parameters in the Radio Parameters page.
To configure the radio parameters:
1 Select Radio > Radio Parameters. The Radio Parameters page opens.
For IP-20C units, the Radio Parameters page initially displays a table as
shown in Figure 16.
For IP-20S units and IP-20E units, a page appears, similar to Figure 17
(which shows an IP-20C page).
Figure 16: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C
2 For IP-20C units, select the carrier in the Radio table (see Figure 16) and
click Edit. A separate Radio Parameters page opens. The page is essentially
identical to the IP-20E and IP-20S page, except for the addition of a Radio
location parameter.

Figure 17: Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
3 Set the radio frequency in the Frequency control (Local) section:

i In the TX Frequency (MHz) field, set the transmission radio frequency
in MHz.
ii In the RX Frequency (MHz) field, set the received radio frequency in
MHz.
iii Click Apply. The system automatically calculates and displays the
frequency separation in the TX to RX frequency separation (MHz)
field, based on the configured TX and RX frequencies.
iv Optionally, select Set also remote unit to apply the frequency settings
to the remote unit as well as the local unit.

4 Set the other radio parameters in the Configuration parameters section:

i In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL).
The range of values depends on the frequency and RFU type.
ii To mute the TX output of the RFU, select On in the TX Mute field. To
unmute the TX output of the RFU, select Off.
iii In the Link ID field, enter a unique link identifier from 1 to 65535. The
Link ID identifies the link, in order to distinguish it from other links.
iv In the Remote Unit Link ID field, enter the same link identifier you
entered in the Link ID field. This ensures that the Link ID is configured
identically on both sides of the link.
v In the Adaptive TX power admin field, select Enable if you wish the
IP-20 to automatically adjust power levels on the fly in order to
optimize the available capacity at every modulation point. See Enabling
ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power.
Note: The RSL Connector Source field is used in dual-carrier
systems to switch between one carrier and the other when
measuring RSL at the BNC connector.
For a description of the read-only parameters in the Status parameters
section, see Viewing the Radio Status and Settings.
2.11 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s)

Related Topics:
 Displaying MRMC Status
Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation (MRMC) radio scripts define how the radio
utilizes its available capacity. Each script is a pre-defined collection of
configuration settings that specify the radio’s transmit and receive levels, link
modulation, channel spacing, and bit rate. Scripts apply uniform transmit and
receive rates that remain constant regardless of environmental impact on
radio operation.
Note: The list of available scripts reflects activation-key-enabled
features. Only scripts within your activation-key-enabled
capacity will be displayed.
To display the MRMC scripts and their basic parameters and select a script:
1 Select one of the following, depending on the regulatory framework in
which you are operating:
To display ETSI scripts, select Radio > MRMC > Symmetrical Scripts
> ETSI.
To display ANSI (FCC) scripts, select Radio > MRMC > Symmetrical
Scripts > FCC.
The MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page opens. For a description of the
parameters displayed in the MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page, see Table 11:
MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Parameters.
Note: IP-20S and IP-20E units do not support XPIC or
MIMO. For IP-20E units, only Profile 0 through Profile 6 are
available, and only ETSI scripts are available.
The following figures show scripts supported by the IP-20C and IP-20E.
For an up-to-date list of scripts supported by the IP-20C, IP-20S, and IP-
20E in this release, see the IP-20C, IP-20S, and the IP-20E Release Notes.
Figure 18: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (ETSI)
Figure 19: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20E) (ETSI)
Figure 20: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (IP-20C) (FCC)

2 In the Select Radio Interface field, select the slot for which you want to
configure the script.
Note: This step is only applicable for IP-20C units.
3 Select the script you want to assign to the radio. The currently-assigned
script is marked by a check mark (Script ID 1504 in the image above).
4 Click Configure Script. A separate MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page opens
similar to the page shown below.
Figure 21: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page (Configuration)
5 In the MRMC Script operational mode field, select the ACM

mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
Fixed ACM mode applies constant Tx and Rx rates. However, unlike
regular scripts, with a Fixed ACM script you can specify a maximum
profile to inhibit inefficient transmission levels.
In Adaptive ACM mode, Tx and Rx rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled
radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to
the channel fading conditions.
6 In the MRMC Script maximum profile field, enter the maximum profile
for the script. Refer to Radio Profiles for a list of available radio profiles.
7 Click Apply.

Note: Changing the script resets the radio interface and affects
traffic.
Table 11 describes the MRMC Symmetrical Scripts page parameters.
Table 11: MRMC Symmetrical Scripts Page Parameters
Script ID A unique ID assigned to the script in the system.
Channel bandwidth (MHz) The script's channel bandwidth (channel spacing).
Occupied bandwidth (MHz) The script's occupied bandwidth.
Modulation Script Indicates whether the script supports Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM).
In ACM mode, a range of profiles determines Tx and Rx rates. This
enables the radio to modify its transmit and receive levels in response to
environmental conditions.
Multi-Carrier Indicates the Multi-Carrier status of the script (XPIC, MIMO, or Single-
Carrier).
Adjacent Channel Displays the script’s adjacent channel polarization mode.
Latency Level Indicates whether the script is a normal or low-latency script.
Symmetry Indicates that the script is symmetrical (Normal). Only symmetrical scripts
are supported in the current release.
Standard Indicates whether the script is compatible with ETSI or FCC (ANSI)
standards, or both.
MRMC Script operational mode The ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
 Fixed ACM mode applies constant TX and RX rates. However, unlike
 In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An
ACM-enabled radio system automatically chooses which profile to use
according to the channel fading conditions.
MRMC Script maximum profile The maximum profile for the script. For example, if you select a maximum
profile of 5, the system will not climb above profile 5, even if channel fading
conditions allow it.
MRMC Script minimum profile Displays the minimum ACM profile available for the script.

2.11.1 Radio Profiles

Table 12 lists the available radio profiles for IP-20C and IP-20S. Table 13 lists
the available radio profiles for IP-20E.
Table 12: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20C and IP-20S
Profile Modulation
Profile 0 QPSK
Profile 1 8 QAM
Profile 2 16 QAM
Profile 3 32 QAM
Profile 4 64 QAM
Profile 5 128 QAM
Profile 6 256 QAM
Profile 7 512 QAM
Profile 8 1024 QAM (Strong FEC)
Profile 9 1024 QAM (Light FEC)
Profile 10 2048 QAM
Table 13: Available Radio Profiles – IP-20E
Profile Modulation
Profile 0 BPSK
Profile 1 QPSK
Profile 2 8 QAM
Profile 3 16 QAM
Profile 4 32 QAM
Profile 5 64 QAM
Profile 6 128 QAM
2.12 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power

When planning ACM-based radio links, the radio planner attempts to apply the
lowest transmit power that will perform satisfactorily at the highest level of
modulation. During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, most radio
systems cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal
degradation, resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity. The IP-20 is capable
of adjusting power on the fly, and optimizing the available capacity at every
modulation point.

To enable ACM with adaptive transmit power:

shown in Figure 16.
location parameter.
3 In the Adaptive TX power admin field, select Enable. The Adaptive TX

power operational status field should now indicate Up to indicate that
the feature is fully functional.

2.13 Operating in FIPS Mode

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C and IP-20S units.
From CeraOS version 8.3, FibeAir IP-20C and IP-20S can be configured to be
FIPS 140-2-compliant in specific hardware and software configurations, as
described in this section.
2.13.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance

For a full list of FIPS requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2
Security Policy, available upon request. It is the responsibility of the customer
to ensure that these requirements are met.
For an IP-20C or an IP-20S node to be FIPS-compliant, the unit must be FIPS-
compliant hardware. A FIPS-compliant IP-20C or IP-20S unit has a unique part
number ending in the letters AF, in the following format:
 IP-20C-***-AF
 IP-20S-***-AF
Note: To display the part numbers of the hardware components of
your IP-20 unit, see Displaying Unit Inventory.
Special labels must be affixed to a FIPS-compliant IP-20C or IP-20S unit. These
labels are tamper-evident and must be applied in such a way that it is not
possible to open or tamper with the unit. Replacement labels can be ordered
from Ceragon Networks, part number BS-0341-0. Tamper-evident labels
should be inspected for integrity at least once every six months. For further
details, refer to the FibeAir IP-20C Installation Guide or the FibeAir IP-20S
Installation Guide.

2.13.2 Enabling FIPS Mode

To set the unit to operate in FIPS mode:
1 Select Platform > Security > General > Configuration. The Security
General Configuration page opens.
Figure 23: Security General Configuration Page
2 In the FIPS admin configuration field, select Enable.

3 Click Apply.
Note: Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset.
After enabling FIPS:
 The MD5 option for SNMPv3 is blocked.
 After any system reset, the length of time before users can log back into
the system is longer than usual due to FIPS-related self-testing.
For a full list of FIPS requirements, including software configuration
requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security Policy, available
upon request.
2.14 Configuring Grouping (Optional)

At this point in the configuration process, you should configure any interface
groups that need to be set up according to your network plan. For details on
available grouping and other configuration options, as well as configuration
instructions, see System Configurations.

2.15 Creating Service(s) for Traffic

In order to pass traffic through the IP-20, you must configure Ethernet traffic
services. For configuration instructions, see Configuring Ethernet Service(s).

3. Configuration Guide
 System Configurations
 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard
 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
 Configuring XPIC
 Configuring HSB Radio Protection
 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC, XPIC, MIMO, and Space Diversity are only
supported with IP-20C. HSB radio protection is only
supported with IP-20C and IP-20S.
3.1 System Configurations

This section lists the basic system configurations and the IP-20 product types
that support them, as well as links to configuration instructions.
Table 14: System Configurations
Configuration Supported Link to Configuration Instructions

Products
Multi-Carrier IP-20C Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
ABC (Multi-
Radio)
Link IP-20C/S/E Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
Aggregation
(LAG)
1+1 XPIC IP-20C Configuring XPIC
HSB Radio IP-20C/S Configuring HSB Radio Protection
Protection
MIMO and IP-20C Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
Space Diversity
IP-20C in IP-20C Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode
Single Radio
Carrier Mode

3.2 Configuring a Link Using the Quick Configuration

Wizard
The Web EMS provides wizards to configure radio links. The wizards guide
you through configuration of the basic radio parameters and services
necessary to establish a working pipe link. The following link types can be
configured with the Quick Configuration wizard:
 1+0 – Configures a 1+0 radio link consisting of a user-selected Ethernet
(or LAG) and radio interface connected. This link passes traffic between
the radio and Ethernet interfaces via a point-to-point pipe service. See
Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard.
 1+0 Repeater – Configures a 1+0 radio link that passes traffic between
two user-selected radios via a point-to-point pipe service. This type of link
is used to configure a node that functions as a repeater, passing traffic
between two other nodes. See Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the
Quick Configuration Wizard.
 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC – Configures a 2 + 0 Multi-Carrier ABC group
consisting of an Ethernet interface or LAG and the two radio interfaces. See
Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick Configuration
Wizard. For a detailed explanation of Multi-Carrier ABC and its
requirements, see Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC.
You can also use this wizard to configure XPIC between the radios within
the Multi-Carrier ABC group. For a detailed explanation of XPIC and its
requirements, see Configuring XPIC.
Note: 1+0 Repeater links and Multi-Carrier ABC are only available
for IP-20C dual-carrier units.
Because the Quick Configuration wizard creates Pipe links, you cannot add an
interface to a link using the Quick Configuration wizard if any service points
are attached to the interface prior to configuring the link. See Deleting a
Service Point.

3.2.1 Configuring a 1+0 Link Using the Quick Configuration Wizard

To configure a 1+0 link using the Quick Configuration wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Link Setup (PIPE) > 1+0. Page 1 of the 1+0
Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 24: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1
2 In the Ethernet Interface field, select an Ethernet interface or a LAG for

the link.
Note: To create a LAG, click Create LAG. The Create LAG Group
page opens. For instructions on creating LAG groups, see
Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG).
3 In the Radio Interface field, select a radio interface for the link.
4 In the Pipe Type field, select the Attached Interface type for the service
that will connect the radio and Ethernet interfaces. Options are:
s-tag – A single S-VLAN is classified into the service points.
dot1q - A single C-VLAN is classified into the service points.
Note: For a full explanation of Ethernet Services, service types,
and attached interface types, see Configuring Ethernet
Service(s).

5 Click Next. Page 2 of the 1+0 Quick Configuration wizard opens.

6 In the TX Frequency (MHz) field, set the transmission radio frequency in

MHz.
7 In the RX Frequency (MHz) field, set the received radio frequency in MHz.
8 In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL). The
range of values depends on the frequency and RFU type.
9 To mute the TX output of the RFU, select On in the TX mute field. To
11 In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the
radio. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see Configuring
the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
12 In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode: Fixed or Adaptive.
Fixed ACM mode applies constant TX and RX rates. However, unlike

In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An ACM-enabled

radio system automatically chooses which profile to use according to
the channel fading conditions.
13 Do one of the following:
If you selected Fixed in the Operational Mode field, the next field is
Profile. Select the ACM profile for the radio in the Profile field.
If you selected Adaptive in the Operational Mode field, the next field
is Maximum Profile. Enter the maximum profile for the script in the
Maximum Profile field. See Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
15 In the In Band Management field, select Yes to configure in-band

management, or No if you do not need in-band management. If you select
Yes, the Management VLAN field appears.
16 If you selected Yes in the In Band Management field, select the
management VLAN in the Management VLAN field.
17 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for
in-band management, select In Band includes Ethernet interface.

18 Click Finish. Page 5 of the 1+0 Quick Configuration wizard opens. This
page displays the parameters you have selected for the link.
Figure 28: 1+0 Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 5 (Summary Page)
19 To complete configuration of the link, click Submit. If you want to go back

and change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click Submit, the
unit is reset.
3.2.2 Configuring a 1+0 (Repeater) Link Using the Quick

To configure a 1+0 repeater (radio-to-radio) link using the Quick
Configuration wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Link Setup (PIPE) > 1+0 (Repeater). Page
1 of the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
Figure 29: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1

2 In the Radio #1 Interface field, select the first radio interface for the link.
3 Click Next. Page 2 of the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
4 In the Radio #2 Interface field, select the second radio interface for the
link.
that will connect the radios. Options are:
Service(s).

7 For each interface, configure the following radio parameters:

in MHz.
MHz.
iii In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL).
iv To mute the TX output of the RFU, select On in the TX mute field. To

9 For each interface, configure the following MRMC script parameters:

i In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the
radio. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script, see
Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
ii In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode for the radio:
Fixed or Adaptive.
 In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An ACM-
enabled radio system automatically chooses which profile to use
iii Do one of the following:
 If you selected Fixed in the Operational Mode field, the next field
is Profile. Select the ACM profile for the radio in the Profile field.
 If you selected Adaptive in the Operational Mode field, the next
field is Maximum Profile. Enter the maximum profile for the script
in the Maximum Profile field. See Configuring the Radio (MRMC)
Script(s).

management VLAN in the Management VLAN field. Management will be
available through both radio interfaces.

13 Click Finish. Page 6 of the 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration wizard opens.
This page displays the parameters you have selected for the link.
Figure 34: 1+0 Repeater Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 6 (Summary Page)
14 To complete configuration of the link, click Submit. If you want to go back

and change any of the parameters, click Back. After you click Submit, the
unit is reset.

3.2.3 Configuring a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC Link Using the Quick

To configure a 2+0 Multi-Carrier ABC link using the Quick Configuration
wizard:
1 Select Quick Configuration > Link Setup (PIPE) > Multi Carrier ABC >
2+0. Page 1 of the 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration wizard
opens.
Figure 35: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Page 1
2 In the Ethernet Interface field, select an Ethernet interface or a LAG for

the group.
Note: To create a LAG, click Create LAG. The Create LAG Group
page opens. For instructions on creating LAG groups, see
Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG).
3 In the Radio #1 Interface field, select the first radio interface for the
group.
Note: The Number of Radio Interfaces field is read-only.
that will connect the radio and Ethernet interfaces. Options are:
Service(s).

5 Click Next. The Radio #2 Selection page opens.

Figure 36: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio #2 Selection
Page
6 In the Radio #2 Interface field, select the second radio interface for the
group.
7 Click Next. The Radio XPIC Configuration page opens. If you want to set up
an XPIC configuration, select the radio pair. For full instructions on
configuring XPIC, including antenna alignment instructions, see
Configuring XPIC.
Figure 37: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio XPIC
Configuration Page

8 Click Next. The Radio Parameters Configuration page opens. You can
configure the basic radio parameters for each interface. If you selected
XPIC in the Radio XPIC Configuration page, you configure the parameters
for the group rather than the individual interfaces.
Figure 38: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters
Configuration Page
Figure 39: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio Parameters
Configuration Page (XPIC)

9 For each interface or XPIC group, configure the following radio

parameters.
in MHz.
MHz.
iii In the TX Level (dBm) field, enter the desired TX signal level (TSL).
iv To mute the TX output of the RFU, select On in the TX mute field. To
10 Click Next. The Radio MRMC Script Configuration page opens. You can
configure the MRMC script parameters for each interface. For an XPIC
group, you configure the parameters for the group rather than the
individual interfaces.
Figure 40: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script
Configuration Page
Figure 41: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Radio MRMC Script
Configuration Page - XPIC

11 For each interface or XPIC group, configure the following MRMC script
parameters:
i In the Script ID field, select the MRMC script you want to assign to the
radio or XPIC group. For a full explanation of choosing an MRMC script,
see Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
ii In the Operational Mode field, select the ACM mode: Fixed or
Adaptive.
 In Adaptive ACM mode, TX and RX rates are dynamic. An ACM-
enabled radio system automatically chooses which profile to use
iii Do one of the following:
 If you selected Fixed in the Operational Mode field, the next field
is Profile. Select the ACM profile in the Profile field.
 If you selected Adaptive in the Operational Mode field, the next
field is Maximum Profile. Enter the maximum profile for the script
in the Maximum Profile field. See Configuring the Radio (MRMC)
Script(s).
12 Click Next. The Management Configuration page opens.
Figure 42: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard – Management
Configuration Page

management VLAN in the Management VLAN field.
15 If you want to use the Ethernet interface as well as the radio interface for
in-band management, select In Band includes Ethernet interface.

16 Click Finish. The Summary page opens. This page displays the parameters
you have selected for the group.
Figure 43: 2 + 0 Multi Carrier ABC Quick Configuration Wizard –Summary Page
17 To complete configuration of the Multi-Carrier ABC group, click Submit. If

you want to go back and change any of the parameters, click Back. After
you click Submit, the unit is reset.

3.3 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC

Note: This option is only relevant for IP-20C units.

 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview
 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group
 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group
3.3.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview

Multi-Carrier Adaptive Bandwidth Control (ABC) enables multiple separate
radio carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. This provides an
Ethernet link over the radio with the total sum of the capacity of all the radios
in the group, while still behaving as a single Ethernet interface. In
Multi-Carrier ABC mode, traffic is dynamically divided among the carriers, at
the Layer 1 level, without requiring Ethernet Link Aggregation.
Load balancing is performed regardless of the number of MAC addresses or
the number of traffic flows. During fading events which cause ACM modulation
changes, each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers
between modulations, increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and
maximizing spectrum utilization. The result is 100% utilization of radio
resources in which traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio
capacity per carrier.
One Multi-Carrier ABC group that includes both radio interfaces can be
configured per unit.

3.3.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group

To configure a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > Multi Carrier ABC. The Multi Carrier ABC page
opens.
Figure 44: Multi-Carrier ABC Group Page (Empty)
2 Click Create Group. The first page of the Create ABC Group wizard opens.
Figure 45: Create ABC Group Wizard – First Page
3 Optionally, enter a descriptive name for the group in the Group Name
field.

4 Click Next. The next page of the Create Group wizard opens.
Figure 46: Create ABC Group Wizard – Second Page
5 In the Member 1 field, select a radio interface.

Note: Although you may select the Radio members in any order
you wish, ABC configuration will not succeed unless Radio
slot 2 port 1 is selected first and Radio slot 2 port 2 is
selected second.
6 Click Next. The next page of the Create Group wizard opens.
7 In the Member 2 field, select a radio interface.
8 Click Next. A summary page opens.
Figure 47: Create ABC Group Wizard – Finish Page
9 Click Submit, A message appears indicating whether or not the operation

was successful.
10 Click Close to close the Create Group wizard. You must click Submit
before clicking Close, or the selections you made will be discarded and the
process cancelled.

3.3.2.1 Adding and Removing Group Members

You can add and remove interfaces from the group after creating the group.
This is relevant if you want to delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group, since you
must remove the members individually before deleting the group.
To remove interfaces:
1 Select the group in the Multi-Carrier ABC table and click Add/Remove
Members. The abc-config-table - Add/Remove Members page opens.
Figure 48: Multi Carrier ABC Group - Add/Remove Members Page
2 Select a member in the Remove Member field.

Note: Although you may select the Radio members in any order
you wish, member removal will not succeed unless Radio
slot 2 port 1 is removed first and Radio slot 2 port 2 is
removed second.
3 Click Apply.
4 Repeat these steps to remove additional members from the group.
3.3.3 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group

To delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > Multi Carrier ABC. The Multi Carrier ABC page
opens (Figure 44).
2 Select the group in the Multi-Carrier ABC table and click Add/Remove
Members. The abc-config-table – Add/Remove Members page opens
(Figure 48).
3 Remove each member of the group. See Adding and Removing Group
Members.
4 Click Close to close the Multi Carrier ABC – Add/Remove Members page.
5 Select the group and click Delete.

3.4 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)

Link aggregation (LAG) enables you to group several physical Ethernet or
radio interfaces into a single logical interface bound to a single MAC address.
This logical interface is known as a LAG group. Traffic sent to the interfaces in
a LAG group is distributed by means of a load balancing mechanism. IP-20
uses a distribution function of up to Layer 4 in order to generate the most
efficient distribution among the LAG physical ports.
This section explains how to configure LAG and includes the following topics:
 LAG Overview
 Configuring a LAG Group
 Deleting a LAG Group
3.4.1 LAG Overview

LAG can be used to provide redundancy for Ethernet interfaces, both on the
same IP-20 unit (line protection) and on separate units (line protection and
equipment protection). LAGs can also be used to provide redundancy for radio
links.
LAG can also be used to aggregate several interfaces in order to create a wider
(aggregate) link. For example, LAG can be used to create a 4 Gbps channel.
You can create up to four LAG groups. The following restrictions exist with
respect to LAG groups:
 Only physical interfaces (including radio interfaces), not logical interfaces,
can belong to a LAG group.
 Interfaces can only be added to the LAG group if no services or service
points are attached to the interface.
 Any classification rules defined for the interface are overridden by the
classification rules defined for the LAG group.
 When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed interface is
assigned the default interface values.
There are no restrictions on the number of interfaces that can be included in a
LAG. It is recommended, but not required, that each interface in the LAG have
the same parameters (e.g., speed, duplex mode).
The LAG page lists all LAG groups configured on the unit.
Note: To add or remove an Ethernet interface to a LAG group, the
interface must be in an administrative state of “down”. This
restriction does not apply to radio interfaces. For
instructions on setting the administrative state of an
interface, see Enabling the Interfaces (Interface Manager).

3.4.2 Configuring a LAG Group
3.4.2.1 Creating a LAG Group

To create a LAG group:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Groups > LAG. The LAG page opens.
2 Click Create LAG underneath the Link Aggregation table. The Create LAG
Group page opens.
Figure 49: Create LAG Group – Page 1
3 In the Group ID field, select a LAG Group ID. Only LAG IDs that are not
already assigned to a LAG group appear in the dropdown list.
4 In the LAG Member 1 field, select an interface to assign to the LAG group.
Only interfaces not already assigned to a LAG group appear in the
dropdown list.
5 Click Next. A new Create LAG Group page opens.
Figure 50: Create LAG Group – Page 2
6 In the LAG Member 2 field, select an additional interface to assign to the

LAG Group.
7 To add additional interfaces to the LAG group, repeat steps 5 and 6.
8 When you have finished adding interfaces to the LAG group, click Finish. A
new Create LAG Group page opens displaying all the interfaces you have
selected to include in the LAG group.

Figure 51: Create LAG Group – Final Page
9 Click Submit. If all the interfaces meet the criteria listed above, a message
appears that the LAG group has been successfully created. If not, a
message appears indicating that the LAG group was not created and giving
the reason.
3.4.2.2 Editing a LAG Group

To edit an existing LAG group:
2 Select the LAG group you want to edit in the Link Aggregation table.
3 Click Edit underneath the Link Aggregation table. The Link Aggregation -
Edit page opens.
Figure 52: Link Aggregation - Edit Page
4 Do one or both of the following:

To remove an interface from the LAG Group, select the interface in
the Remove Member field.
To add an interface to the LAG Group, select the interface in the Add
Member field.
5 Click Apply.

6 To remove or add additional interfaces, repeat steps 4 and 5.

7 When you are finished, click Close to close the Link Aggregation – Edit
page.
Note: When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed
interface is assigned the default interface values.
3.4.3 Deleting a LAG Group

In order to delete a LAG group, you must first make sure that no service points
are attached to the LAG group.
To delete a LAG group:
2 Select the LAG group you want to delete in the Link Aggregation table.
3 Click Delete underneath the Link Aggregation table. The LAG group is
deleted.
To delete multiple LAG groups:
1 Select the LAG groups in the Link Aggregation table or select all the LAG
groups by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete underneath the Link Aggregation table.
3.5 Configuring XPIC


 XPIC Overview
 Configuring the Antennas
 Configuring the Radio Carriers
 Creating an XPIC Group
3.5.1 XPIC Overview

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two
radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between
them. Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation
is required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that
if one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be
affected. This mechanism also ensures that both carriers will be operational,
after the failure is cleared.
To configure and enable XPIC, first configure the antennas and then configure
the carriers, as described below.

3.5.2 Configuring the Antennas

1 Align the antennas for one carrier. While you are aligning these antennas,
mute the second carrier. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
2 Adjust the antenna alignment until you achieve the maximum RSL for the
first-carrier link (the “RSLwanted”). This RSL should be no more than +/-2
dB from the expected level.
3 Record the RSLwanted and mute the first radio carrier at each end of the
link.
4 Unmute the second (orthogonal) radio carrier which was muted during the
antenna alignment process.
5 Determine the XPI, by either of the following two methods:
Measure the RSL of the second carrier (the “RSLunwanted”). To calculate
the XPI, subtract RSLunwanted from the RSLwanted.
Note: To measure the second carrier, leave the Voltmeter
connected to the BNC connector. In the Radio Parameters
page of the Web EMS (Figure 17), change the RSL
Connector Source field from PHYS1 to PHYS2 (or vice
versa). The BNC connector will now measure RSL from the
other carrier.
Read the XPI from the Modem XPI field of the Radio Parameters page
in the Web EMS. See Viewing the Radio Status and Settings.
6 The XPI should be at least 25dB. If it is not, you should adjust the OMT
assembly on the back of the antenna at one side of the link until you
achieve the highest XPI, which should be no less than 25dB. Adjust the
OMT very slowly in a right-left direction. OMT adjustment requires very
fine movements and it may take several minutes to achieve the best
possible XPI. It is recommended to achieve XPI levels between 25dB and
30dB.
7 Enable all four radio carriers and check the XPI levels of both carriers at
both sides of the link by checking the Modem XPI field of the Radio
Parameters page in the Web EMS. See Viewing the Radio Status and
Settings. All four carriers should have approximately the same XPI value.
Do not adjust the XPI at the remote side of the link, as this may cause the
XPI at the local side of the link to deteriorate.
Note: In some cases, the XPI might not exceed the required 25dB
minimum due to adverse atmospheric conditions. If you
believe this to be the case, you can leave the configuration at
the lower values, but be sure to monitor the XPI to make
sure it subsequently exceeds 25dB. A normal XPI level in
clear sky conditions is between 25 and 30dB.

3.5.3 Configuring the Radio Carriers

To configure the radio carriers:
1 Configure the carriers on both ends of the link to the desired frequency
channel. Both carriers must be configured to the same frequency channel.
2 Assign an XPIC (CCDP operational mode) support-enabled script to the
carriers on both ends of the link. Each carrier must be assigned the same
script. For details, refer to Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s).
Note: XPIC support is indicated by an X in the script name. For
example, mdN_A2828X_111_1205 is an XPIC-enabled script.
mdN_A2828N_130_100 is not an XPIC-enabled script. For a
list of XPIC support-enabled scripts, refer to the most recent
FibeAir IP-20C Release Notes.
3 In the XPIC page, create an XPIC group that consists of the two RMCs that
will be in the XPIC group. See Creating an XPIC Group.
3.5.4 Creating an XPIC Group

To create an XPIC group:
1 Select Radio > Groups > XPIC. The XPIC page opens.
Figure 53: XPIC Configuration Page
2 In the XPIC Configuration page, select Enable in the Admin state field and
click Apply.
To disable XPIC, select Disable in the Admin state field and click Apply.

3.6 Configuring HSB Radio Protection

This section explains how to configure HSB radio protection and includes the
following topics:
 HSB Radio Protection Overview
 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit
 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit
 Editing Standby Unit Settings
 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity
 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit
 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit
 Disabling Unit Protection
3.6.1 HSB Radio Protection Overview

IP-20C and IP-20S support 1+1 HSB radio protection. IP-20C also supports
2+2 HSB radio protection. In HSB radio protection, one IP-20 operates in
active mode and the other operates in standby mode. If a protection
switchover occurs, the Active unit goes into standby mode and the Standby
unit goes into active mode.
 For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection and 2+2 HSB radio
protection support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
 For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection support in IP-20S, refer
to the IP-20S Technical Description.
3.6.2 Configuring HSB Radio Protection

You must perform the initial configuration of a 1+1 or 2+2 HSB system using a
splitter cable for each unit to provide a management connection to each unit.
For instructions on preparing and connecting the splitter cables, refer to the
Installation Guide for IP-20C or IP-20S.
Ethernet traffic must be routed to each unit via an optical splitter cable.
To configure HSB radio protection:
1 Before enabling protection, you must:
i Verify that both units have the same hardware part number (see
Displaying Unit Inventory) and the same software version (see Viewing
Current Software Versions). If the units do not have the same software
version, upgrade each unit to the most recent software release (see
Upgrading the Software).
ii Assign an IP address to each unit. For instructions, see Changing the
Management IP Address.
iii Establish a management connection to one of the units. You can select
either unit; once you enable Protection Administration, the system will
determine which unit becomes the Active unit.
2 Select Platform > Management > Unit Redundancy. The Unit
Redundancy (HSB Protection) page opens.

Figure 54: Unit Redundancy Page
3 In the Protection Admin field, select Enable.

4 Click Apply.
The system configures itself for HSB protection:
 The system determines which unit is the Active unit based on a number of
pre-defined criteria.
 When the system returns online, all management must be performed via
the Active unit using the IP address you defined for that unit.
 The IP address you defined for the unit which is now the Standby unit is no
longer valid, and the management port of the Standby unit becomes non-
operational.
 Management of the Standby unit is performed via the Active unit, via the
cable between the two MIMO/Prot ports on the splitters connecting the
two units.
 The Unit Redundancy page refreshes to include additional radio protection
fields.

Figure 55: Unit Redundancy Page when Redundancy Enabled
In additional, almost every Web EMS page will now include two tabs on
top of the main section of the page:
Active – Enables you to configure the Active unit.
Standby – In most cases, this tab is read-only and enables you to
display Standby unit parameters. Even when a switchover occurs, the
unit displayed in the Web EMS is always the currently Active unit.
Note: The parameters that are editable on the Standby tab are
described in Editing Standby Unit Settings.
5 Once you have enabled Protection:
i Perform all necessary radio configurations on the Active unit, such as
setting the frequency, assigning MRMC scripts, unmuting the radio, and
setting up radio groups such as XPIC or Multi-Carrier ABC
(Multi-Radio).
ii Perform all necessary Ethernet configurations on the Active unit, such
as defining Ethernet services.
iii In the Unit Redundancy page, click Copy to Mate to copy the
configuration of the Active unit to the Standby unit. Confirm the action
in the confirmation window that appears.
Note: While the system is performing the copy-to-mate operation,
a temporary loss of management connection will occur.
To keep the Standby unit up-to-date, after any change to the configuration of
the Active unit click Copy to Mate to copy the configuration to the Standby
unit.
If you change the configuration of the Active unit but do not perform Copy to
Mate, a Configuration Mismatch alarm appears in the Faults > Current
Alarms page.

Note: You can use the following CLI command to display a list of
mismatched parameters:
root> platform management protection show

mismatch details
3.6.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit

In order to configure 2+2 HSB unit protection on an IP-20C unit, you must
simply enable the second radio carrier on both units on both sides of the link.
No other configuration is necessary other than the configuration described
above.
 To enable the second radio carrier on both units, use the Interface
Manager page (see Figure 13). The following figure shows the Interface
Manager page with both radio carriers enabled.
Figure 56: Interface Manager Page – Both Radio Carriers Enabled
3.6.4 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit

You can view the settings of the standby unit any time.
To view the settings of the standby unit, click the Standby tab of the desired
page. The following is an example of the Standby tab of the Radio Parameters
page after Protection Admin has been enabled.
Figure 57: Standby Tab of Radio Parameters Page

3.6.5 Editing Standby Unit Settings

Almost all settings of the standby unit are view-only. However, several
settings are editable on the Standby unit. They must be configured separately
for the Standby unit, and are not copied via copy-to-mate, nor do they trigger a
configuration mismatch in the CLI.
In the Web EMS, failure to synchronize these configuration settings causes a
configuration mismatch alarm.
The following settings must be configured separately on the standby unit:
 Setting the Unit Name – in the Name field of the Unit Parameters page (see
Configuring Unit Parameters).
 Disabling/enabling Radio TX-mute – in the TX mute field of the Edit Radio
Parameters window. Refer to Configuring the Radio Parameters.
 Clearing the Radio and RMON counters – in the TX mute field of the
Counters Page. Refer to Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters.
 Setting the activation key configuration – in the Activation Key and Demo
admin fields of the Activation Key Configuration Page (see Configuring the
Activation Key).
 Defining user accounts – Refer to the Access Control User Accounts Page
(see Configuring Users).
 Setting synchronization settings – Refer to the SyncE Regenerator
page (see Configuring SyncE Regenerator).
3.6.6 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity

You can view link and protection status and activity any time.
To view link and protection status and activity:
Unit Redundancy Page

The following information is displayed:

 Protection Operational State – Indicates whether HSB protection is
functional (available in practice). Radio protection is not functional if any
of the following occurred:
MIMO is configured.
The management connection to the mate is down.
 Protection Activity – The activity state of the device: Active or Standby.
 Protection Link to Mate – Indicates whether the two units (the Active
and the Standby) are physically connected.
 Copy to mate status – Indicates the status of the last copy-to-mate
operation
 Protection Admin – Indicates whether HSB protection is enabled or
disabled.
 Lockout – Indicates whether lockout is enabled or disabled.
3.6.7 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit

The following events trigger switchover for HSB radio protection according to
their priority, with the highest priority triggers listed first.
1 Loss of active unit
2 Lockout
3 Radio/Ethernet interface failure
4 Manual switch
At any point, you can manually switch to the Standby unit, provided that the
highest protection fault level in the Standby unit is no higher than the highest
protection fault level on the Active unit.
To manually switchover to the Standby unit:
2 Click Manual Switch.
3 Confirm the action in the confirmation window that appears.
3.6.8 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit

At any point, you can perform lockout, which disables automatic switchover to
the standby unit.
To disable automatic switchover to the Standby unit:
2 Select On in the Lockout field.
3 Click Apply.
To re-enable automatic switchover, select Off in the Lockout field and then
click Apply.

3.6.9 Disabling Unit Protection

You can disable unit protection at any time. If you disable unit protection,
keep in mind that while the unit that was formerly the active unit maintains its
IP address, the unit that was formerly the standby unit is assigned the default
IP address (192.168.1.1)
To disable protection:
2 Select Disable in the Protection Admin field.
3 Click Apply.
3.7 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C units.
This section describes how to configure MIMO and space diversity, and
include the following topics:
 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview
 MIMO Mate Management Access
 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group
 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group
 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group
 Resetting MIMO
 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels
 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group
3.7.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview

Line-of-Sight (LoS) Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) achieves spatial
multiplexing by creating an artificial phase de-correlation by deliberate
antenna distance at each site in deterministic constant distance. At each site in
an LoS MIMO configuration, data to be transmitted over the radio link is split
into two bit streams (MIMO 2x2) or four bit streams (MIMO 4x4). These bit
streams are transmitted via two antennas. In MIMO 2x2, the antennas use a
single polarization. In MIMO 4x4, each antenna uses dual polarization. The
phase difference caused by the antenna separation enables the receiver to
distinguish between the streams.
IP-20C supports both MIMO 2x2 and MIMO 4x4. For a full explanation of
MIMO support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
The same hardware configurations can also be used to implement BBS Space
Diversity. IP-20C supports 1+0 and 2+2 Space Diversity. For a full explanation
of Space Diversity support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
Note: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created per
IP-20C unit. All MRMC scripts that support MIMO also
support Space Diversity.

3.7.1.1 2+2 Space Diversity

2+2 HSB Space Diversity provides both equipment protection and signal
protection. If one unit goes out of service, the other unit takes over and
maintains the link until the other unit is restored to service and Space
Diversity operation resumes.
2+2 HSB Space Diversity utilizes two IP-20C units operating in dual core
mode. In each IP-20C unit, both radio carriers are connected to a single
antenna. One optical GbE port on each IP-20C is connected to an optical
splitter. Traffic must be routed to an optical GbE port on each IP-20C unit.
In effect, a 2+2 HSB configuration is a protected 2+0 Space Diversity
configuration. Each IP-20C monitors both of its cores. If the active IP-20C
detects a radio failure in either of its cores, it initiates a switchover to the
standby IP-20C.
3.7.2 MIMO Mate Management Access

For MIMO configurations using in-band management and an external switch
operating in LAG mode, you must enable MIMO Mate Management Access in
order to manage both units via in-band management. When MIMO Mate
Management Access is enabled, the two units exchange incoming management
packets, ensuring that all management data is received by both units.
Note that MIMO Mate Management Access should only be enabled if both of
the following conditions exist:
 In-band management
 External switch using LAG
If either of these conditions is not present, MIMO Mate Management Access
should be disabled. By default, the feature is disabled.
To enable MIMO Mate Management Access, enter the following command:
root> radio mimo mate mng access set admin enable
To disable MIMO Mate Management Access, enter the following command:

root> radio mimo mate mng access set admin disable
To display whether MIMO Mate Management Access is enabled, enter the

following command:
root> radio mimo mate mng access show
Note: MIMO Mate Management Access can only be configured via

CLI.
3.7.3 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group

Note: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created
per IP-20C unit.
To create a MIMO or Space Diversity group:
1 Select Radio > Groups> MIMO. The MIMO page opens.
2 Click Create MIMO. The Create MIMO Group page opens.

Figure 58: Create MIMO Group – Page 1
3 In the Group Type field, select one of the following according to your
desired system configuration:
MIMO 2x2
MIMO 4x4
1+0 Space Diversity
2+0 Space Diversity
Note To enable 2+2 Space Diversity, select 2+0 Space
Diversity after setting up the hardware configuration
for 2+2 Space Diversity. See 2+2 Space Diversity.
4 Click Next. The Create MIMO Group page is updated and displays your
system configuration.
Figure 59: Create MIMO Group – Page 2
5 Click Submit, to create the MIMO or Space Diversity group.

Click Close to cancel and close the window.
6 After creating the group, you must enable the group in the MIMO - Edit
page. See Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group.

7 For 4x4 MIMO configurations and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, you
must set the role of the group to Master or Slave. See Setting the Role of a
MIMO or Space Diversity Group.
3.7.4 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group

To set the admin state of a MIMO or Space Diversity group:
2 select a MIMO group from the table, then click Edit Group. The MIMO -
Edit page opens.
Figure 60: MIMO - Edit Page
3 In the Admin state field:

Select Enable to enable the MIMO or Space Diversity configuration.
Select Disable to disable the MIMO or Space Diversity configuration
4 Click Apply.
3.7.5 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group

For 4x4 MIMO configurations and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, you
must set the role of the group to Master or Slave. This determines the role of
the IP-20C unit in the overall MIMO or Space Diversity configuration.
To set the role of a MIMO or Space Diversity group:
2 Select a MIMO group from the table
3 Click Edit Group. The MIMO - Edit page opens.
4 Perform the following:

For 4x4 MIMO configurations and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations,
select Master or Slave in the Role field. This determines the role of
For MIMO 2x2 configurations and 1+0 Space Diversity configurations,
select Not-Relevant in the Role field.
5 Click Apply.
3.7.6 Resetting MIMO

In hardware failure scenarios, MIMO 4x4 provides a resiliency mechanism
that enables the link to continue functioning as a 2+0 XPIC link.
To restore full MIMO operation, the faulty equipment must be replaced. The
replacement equipment must be pre-configured to the same configuration as
the equipment being replaced. Once the new equipment has been properly
installed and, if necessary, powered up, you must reset MIMO.
Note: MIMO reset causes a traffic interruption.
To reset MIMO:
2 Select the MIMO group from the table.
3 Click Edit Group. The MIMO - Edit page opens.

4 Click Reset State Machine.

5 Confirm the reset operation.
3.7.7 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels

You can view MMI and XPI levels for the individual radio carriers in a MIMO
group.
Note that the MMI value can also be calculated manually. To calculate it
manually, you must measure the following RSL levels per receiver:
1 Mute all remote transmitters except the transmitter for the link you want
to measure, and measure the local RSL level (RSL_Wanted).
2 Mute all remote transmitters except the same polarization interferer and
measure the local RSL2 (RSL_Int).
The MMI is equal to RSL_Wanted – RSL_Int
To view MMI and XPI Levels:
2 Select the MIMO group from the table.
3 Click Edit Members. The MIMO - Edit Members page opens.

Figure 63: MIMO - Edit Members Page
The MIMO - Edit Members page provides the following information for each
radio carrier in the MIMO group:
 MMI – MIMO Mate Interference. MMI represents the difference between
the RSL1 and the RSL2 of the remote Master and Slave transmitters with
the same polarization. The nominal range is 0. The range should be from -3
dB to +3 dB.
This parameter is not relevant for 1+0 Space Diversity (as indicated by a
value of -99).
 XPI – Cross Polarization Interference. This is only relevant in 4x4
configurations, where each unit operates in dual polarization (XPIC) mode.
The XPI value should be at least 25 dB. For further information, see
Configuring XPIC.
3.7.8 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group

You can delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group.
To delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group:
1 Before deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity group, you must disable the
group. To disable the group, set the Admin State to Disable in the MIMO -
Edit Page.
Note: When the MIMO or Space Diversity group is disabled,
the system is automatically reset.
2 Select a MIMO group from the table.
3 Click Delete. The Delete MIMO confirmation page opens.
4 Confirm the operation.

3.8 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode

If you wish to operate an IP-20C unit in single radio carrier mode, you must
perform the following steps:
1 Verify that XPIC is disabled. See Configuring XPIC.
2 Disable Multi-Carrier ABC, as described in Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC
Group.
3 Disable one of the two radio interfaces, as described in Enabling the
Interfaces (Interface Manager).
4 Mute the disabled radio interface, as described in Configuring the Radio
Parameters.

4. Unit Management
 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications
 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address
 Configuring SNMP
 Configuring Trap Managers
 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server
 Upgrading the Software
 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations
 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration
 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset
 Configuring Unit Parameters
 Configuring NTP
 Displaying Unit Inventory
Related topics:
 Setting the Time and Date (Optional)
 Uploading Unit Info
 Changing the Management IP Address

4.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating

Communications
You can specify which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating
communications, such as downloading software, sending traps, pinging, or
exporting configurations. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
To set the IP protocol version of the local unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Local. The Local
Figure 64: Local Networking Configuration Page
2 In the IP address Family field, select the IP protocol the unit will use
when initiating communications. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
4.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address

You can configure the IP address of a remote unit.
To configure the IP address of a remote unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Networking > Remote. The Remote
shown in Figure 65.
For IP-20S units and IP-20E units, the page appears as shown in
Figure 66.

Figure 65: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20C
Figure 66: Remote Networking Configuration Page – IP-20S and IP-20E
click Edit. A separate Remote IP Configuration page opens. The page is
identical to the IP-20C and IP-20S page.

Figure 67: Remote IP Configuration Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
3 In the Remote IP address field, enter an IP address for the remote unit.
You can enter the address in IPv4 format in this field, and/or in IPv6
format in the IPv6 Address field. The remote unit will receive
communications whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6
address.
4 In the Remote Subnet mask field, enter the subnet mask of the remote
radio.
5 Optionally, in the Remote default gateway field, enter the default
gateway address for the remote radio.
6 Optionally, in the Remote IPv6 Address field, enter an IPv6 address for
the remote unit. You can enter the address in IPv6 format in this field,
and/or in IPv4 format in the IP Address field. The unit will receive
communications whether they are sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6
address.
7 If you entered an IPv6 address, enter the IPv6 prefix length in the Remote
IPv6 Prefix-Length field.
8 Optionally, if you entered an IPv6 address, enter the default gateway in
IPv6 format in the Remote default Gateway IPv6 field.
9 Click Apply.
4.2.1 Changing the Subnet of the Remote IP Address

If you wish to change the Remote IP Address to a different subnet:
1 Change the address of the Remote Default Gateway to 0.0.0.0.
2 Click Apply.
3 Set the Remote IP Address as desired, and the Remote Default
Gateway as desired.

Similarly, if you wish to change the Remote IPv6 Address to a different

subnet:
1 Change the address of the Remote IPv6 Default Gateway to
0:0:0:0:0:0:0:0.
2 Click Apply.
3 Set the Remote IPv6 Address as desired, and the Remote IPv6 Default
Gateway as desired.
4.3 Configuring SNMP

P-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20E support SNMP v1, V2c, and v3. You can set
community strings for access to IP-20 units.
IP-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20E support the following MIBs:
 RFC-1213 (MIB II).
 RMON MIB.
 Proprietary MIB.
Access to the unit is provided by making use of the community and context
fields in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.
To configure SNMP:
1 Select Platform > Management > SNMP > SNMP Parameters. The SNMP
Parameters page opens.

Figure 68: SNMP Parameters Page
2 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable SNMP monitoring, or Disable

to disable SNMP monitoring.
Note: The Operational Status field indicates whether SNMP
monitoring is currently active (Up) or inactive (Down).
3 In the SNMP Read Community field, enter the community string for the
SNMP read community.
4 In the SNMP Write Community field, enter the community string for the
SNMP write community
5 In the SNMP Trap Version field, select V1, V2, or V3 to specify the SNMP
version.
Note: The SNMP MIB Version field displays the current SNMP
MIB version the unit is using.
6 In the V1V2 Blocked field, select Yes if you want to block SNMPv1 and
SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be enabled.
7 Click Apply.
If you are using SNMPv3, you must also configure SNMPv3 users. SNMPv3
security parameters are configured per SNMPv3 user.

To add an SNMP user:

1 Select Platform > Management SNMP > V3 Users. The V3 Users page
opens.
Figure 69: V3 Users Page
2 Click Add. The V3 Users - Add page opens.

Figure 70: V3 Users - Add Page
3 Configure the SNMP V3 Authentication parameters, as described below.


Table 15: SNMP V3 Authentication Parameters
User Name Enter the SNMPv3 user name.
Password Enter a password for SNMPv3 authentication. The password must be at
least eight characters.
Authentication Algorithm Select an authentication algorithm for the user. Options are:
 None
 SHA
 MD5
Encryption (Privacy) Mode Select an encryption (privacy) protocol for the user. Options are:
 None
 DES
 AES
Access Mode Select an access permission level for the user. Options are:
 Read Write User
 Read Only User
4.4 Configuring Trap Managers

You can configure trap forwarding parameters by editing the Trap Managers
table. Each line in the Trap Managers table displays the setup for a manager
defined in the system.
To configure trap managers:
1 Select Platform > Management > SNMP > Trap Managers. The Trap
Managers page opens.
Figure 71: Trap Managers Page

2 Select a trap manager and click Edit. The Trap Managers Edit page opens.
Figure 72: Trap Managers - Edit Page
3 Configure the trap manager parameters, as described in Table 16.

Table 16: Trap Manager Parameters
IPv4 Address If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the destination IPv4
address. Traps will be sent to this IP address. See Defining the IP Protocol
Version for Initiating Communications.
IPv6 Address If the IP address family is configured to be IPv6, enter the destination IPv6
address. Traps will be sent to this IP address. See Defining the IP Protocol
Version for Initiating Communications.
Description Enter a description of the trap manager (optional).
Admin Select Enable or Disable to enable or disable the selected trap manager.
Community Enter the community string for the SNMP read community.
Port Enter the number of the port through which traps will be sent.
Heartbeat Period Enter the interval, in minutes, between each heartbeat trap.
CLLI Enter a Common Language Location Identifier (CLLI). The CLLI is free text
that will be sent with the trap. You can enter up to 100 characters.

V3 User Name If the SNMP Trap version selected in SNMP Parameters page is V3, enter
the name of a V3 user defined in the system.
To view or define a V3 user, use the V3 Users page.
Note: Make sure that an identical V3 user is also defined on the manager's
side.
4.5 Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server

Several tasks, such as software upgrade and configuration backup, export, and
import, require the use of FTP or SFTP. The IP-20 can function as an FTP or
SFTP client. If you wish to use FTP/SFTP, you must install FTP/SFTP server
software on the PC or laptop you are using.
Note: For FTP, it is recommended to use FileZilla_Server software
that can be downloaded from the web (freeware).
For SFTP, it is recommended to use SolarWinds SFTP/SFCP
server (freeware).
If you are using IPv6 to perform the operation, make sure to
use FileZilla version 0.9.38 or higher to ensure IPv6 support.
If you are using another type of FTP or SFTP server, make
sure the application version supports IPv6.
To install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop:
1 Create a user and (optional) password on the FTP/SFTP server. For
example, in FileZilla Server, perform the following:
i From the Edit menu, select Users.
ii In the Users window, click Add.
iii In the Add user account window, enter a user name and click OK.
iv In the Users window, select Enable account and, optionally, select
Password and enter a password.
v In the Users window, click OK.

Figure 73: FileZilla Server User Configuration
2 Create a shared FTP/SFTP folder on the PC or laptop you are using to

perform the software upgrade (for example, C:\FTPServer).
3 In the FTP/SFTP server, set up the permissions for the shared FTP/SFTP
folder. For example, in FileZilla Server:
i From the Edit menu, select Users.
ii In the Users window, select Shared folders.
iii Underneath the Shared folders section, click Add and browse for your
shared FTP folder.
iv Select the folder and click OK.
v In the Shared folders section, select your shared FTP folder.
vi In the Files and Directories sections, select all of the permissions.
vii Click Set as home directory to make the Shared folder the root
directory for your FTP server.
viii Click OK to close the Users window.

Figure 74: FileZilla Server Shared Folder Setup

4.6 Upgrading the Software

IP-20 software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that
includes software and firmware for all components in the system. Software is
first downloaded to the system, then installed. After installation, a reset is
automatically performed on all components whose software was upgraded.

 Viewing Current Software Versions
 Software Upgrade Overview
 Downloading and Installing Software
 Configuring a Timed Installation
4.6.1 Viewing Current Software Versions

To display a list of software packages currently installed and running on the
system modules:
1 Select Platform > Software > Versions. The Versions page opens. For a
description of the information provided in the Versions page, see
Table 17: Versions Page Columns.
Figure 75: Versions Page
Table 17: Versions Page Columns
Package Name The name of the software package.
Target Device The specific component on which the software runs.
Running Version The software version currently running on the component.
Installed Version The software version currently installed for the component. If the installed
version is not already the running version, it will become the running
version after the next reset takes place.
Downloaded Version The version, if any, that has been downloaded from the server but not yet
installed. Upon installation, this version will become the Installed Version.

Reset Type The level of reset required by the component in order for the Installed
Version to become the Active Version. A cold (hard) reset powers down
and powers back up the component. A warm (soft) reset simply reboots the
software or firmware in the component.
4.6.2 Software Upgrade Overview

The IP-20 software installation process includes the following steps:
1 Download – The files required for the installation or upgrade are
downloaded from a remote server.
2 Installation – The downloaded software and firmware files are installed
in all modules and components of the IP-20 that are currently running an
older version.
3 Reset – The IP-20 is restarted in order to boot the new software and
firmware versions.
Software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. When you download
a software bundle, the system verifies the validity of the bundle. The system
also compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the
IP-20 and its components, so that only files that need to be updated are
actually downloaded. A message is displayed for each file that is actually
downloaded.
Note: When downloading an older version, all files in the bundle
may be downloaded, including files that are already
installed.
Software bundles can be downloaded via FTP or SFTP. After the software
download is complete, you can initiate the installation.
Note: Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to
verify that the system date and time are correct. See Setting
the Time and Date (Optional).
4.6.3 Downloading and Installing Software

When downloading software, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP client. You
must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the software upgrade. For details, see Installing and Configuring an
FTP or SFTP Server.
To download and install a new software version:
1 Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to verify that the
system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and Date (Optional).
2 Install and configure FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you
are using to perform the software upgrade, as described in Installing and
Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.

3 Unzip the new software package for IP-20 into your shared FTP or SFTP
folder.
4 In the IP-20’s Web EMS, select Platform > Software > Download &
Install. The Download & Install page opens.
Figure 76: Download & Install Page
5 In the File Transfer Protocol field, select the file transfer protocol you
want to use (FTP or SFTP).
6 In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the FTP
server.
7 In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the FTP
server. If you did not configure a password for your FTP/SFTP user, simply
leave this field blank.
8 If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the IPv4 address of
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP/SFTP server in the Server IPv4
address field. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating
Communications.
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP/SFTP server in the Server IPv6
Address field. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating
Communications.
10 In the Path field, enter the directory path from which you are downloading
the files. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. To leave the path blank, enter //.
11 To configure a timed installation, in the Timed installation field, select
Yes. Otherwise, select No. For more information on timed installations, see
Configuring a Timed Installation.
12 Click Apply to save your settings.

13 Click Download. The download begins. You can view the status of the
download in the Download & Install - Status Parameters section of the
Download & Install page. See Table 18.
14 Once the download has been completed, verify that the version you want
to install has been downloaded. You can check the downloaded version for
each component by viewing the Downloaded Version column in the
Versions page. See Viewing Current Software Versions.
Important Note – If upgrading from version 7.9 or earlier:
• Before you proceed to install the software, repeat the download
process even if Download Success is displayed in the Download
status field, until the unit displays the message No new software
modules found.
• In case of failure, wait at least 30 minutes and repeat the software

download.
15 Click Install. The installation begins. You can view the status of the
installation in the Download & Install - Status Parameters section of the
Download & Install Download & Install page. See Table 18.
Upon completion of the installation, the system performs an automatic reset.
Important Notes:
• DO NOT reboot the unit during the software installation process. As
soon as the process is successfully completed, the unit will reboot
itself.
• Sometimes the installation process can take up to 30 minutes.
• Only in the event that software installation was not successfully
finished and more than 30 minutes have passed can the unit be
rebooted.

Table 18: Download & Install Status Parameters
Download status The status of any pending software download. Possible values are:
 Ready – The default value, which appears when no download is in
progress.
 Verifying download files – The system is verifying the files to be
downloaded.
 Download in progress – The download files have been verified, and
the download is in progress.
If an error occurs during the download, an appropriate error message is
displayed in this field.
When the download is complete, one of the following status indications
appears:
 Download Success
 Download Failure
 All components already found in the system
When the system is reset, the Download Status returns to Ready.
Download progress Displays the progress of the current software download.
Install status The status of any pending software installation. Possible values are:
 Ready – The default value, which appears when no installation is in
progress.
 Verifying installation files – The system is verifying the files to be
installed.
 Installation in progress – The installation files have been verified,
and the installation is in progress.
If an error occurs during the installation, an appropriate error message is
When the installation is complete, one of the following status indications
appears:
 Installation Success
 Installation Partial Success
 Installation Failure
 incomplete-sw-version
When the system is reset, the Installation Status returns to Ready.
Install progress Displays the progress of the current software installation.
4.6.4 Configuring a Timed Installation

You can schedule a timed (deferred) software installation to take place at any
time within 24 hours after you configure the installation.
To schedule a timed software installation:
1 Download the software version you want to install. See Downloading and
Installing Software.

2 Select Platform > Software > Timer Parameters. The Timer Parameters
– Software Installation page opens.
Figure 77: Timer Parameters - Software Installation Page
3 In the Software management timer field, enter the amount of time, in

hours and minutes, you want to defer the installation. For example, in
Figure 77, the timer is set for two hours after the timer was configured
(02:00).
4 Click Apply.
5 Select Platform > Software > Download & Install. The Download &
Install page opens (Figure 76).
6 In the Timed Installation field, select Yes.
7 Click Apply.
8 Click Install. A confirmation window opens.
9 Click OK. The Download & Installation page is refreshed to include the
following fields:
Time to installation – Displays the time remaining, in seconds, until
the scheduled installation.
Cancel Timed Installation – Click to cancel the timed installation.

Figure 78: Download & Install Page – Timed Installation
4.7 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations

You can import and export IP-20 configuration files. This enables you to copy
the system configuration to multiple IP-20 units. You can also backup and save
configuration files.
Configuration files can only be copied between units of the same type,
i.e., IP-20C to IP-20C, IP-20S to IP-20S, and IP-20E to IP-20E.

 Configuration Management Overview
 Viewing Current Backup Files
 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters
 Exporting a Configuration File
 Importing a Configuration File
 Deleting a Configuration File
 Backing Up the Current Configuration
 Restoring a Saved Configuration
 Editing CLI Scripts

4.7.1 Configuration Management Overview

System configuration files consist of a zip file that contains three components:
 A binary configuration file used by the system to restore the configuration.
 A text file which enables users to examine the system configuration in a
readable format. The file includes the value of all system parameters at the
time of creation of the backup file.
 An additional text file which enables you to write CLI scripts in order to
make desired changes in the backed-up configuration. This file is executed
by the system after restoring the configuration.
The system provides three restore points to manage different configuration
files. Each restore point contains a single configuration file. Files can be added
to the restore points by creating backups of the current system state or by
importing them from an external server. For example, you may want to use
one restore point to keep a last good configuration, another to import changes
from an external server, and the third to store the current configuration.
You can apply a configuration file to the system from any of the restore points.
4.7.2 Viewing Current Backup Files

To display the configuration files currently saved at the system restore points:
1 Select Platform > Configuration > Backup Files. The Backup Files page
opens. For a description of the information provided in the Backup Files
page, see Table 19: Backup Files Page Columns.
Figure 79: Backup Files Page
Table 19: Backup Files Page Columns
File number A number from 1 to 3 that identifies the restore point.

Original system type The type of unit from which the backup configuration file was created.
Software version The software version of the unit from which the backup configuration file
was created.
Time of creation The time and date on which the configuration file was created.
Original IP address The IP address of the unit from which the configuration file was created.
System ID The System ID, if any, of the unit from which the configuration file was
created. This is taken from the Name field in the Unit Parameters page.
See Configuring Unit Parameters.
Valid Reserved for future use.
4.7.3 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters

When importing and exporting configuration files, the IP-20 functions as an
FTP or SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or
laptop you are using to perform the import or export. For details, see Installing
and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
Before importing or exporting a configuration file, you must perform the
following steps:
1 Verify that the system date and time are correct. See Setting the Time and
Date (Optional).
2 Install and configure an FTP server on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the import or export. See Installing and Configuring an FTP or
SFTP Server.

3 In the IP-20 Web EMS, select Platform > Configuration > Configuration
Management. The Configuration Management page opens.
Figure 80: Configuration Management Page
4 In the File transfer protocol field, select the file transfer protocol you
server.
server. If you did not configure a password for your FTP user, simply leave
this field blank.
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IP address
field. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications.
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the IPv6 Server
Address field. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating
Communications.
9 In the Path field, enter the directory path to or from which you are
downloading or uploading the file. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's
home directory, not the absolute path. To leave the path blank, enter //.
10 In the File name field, enter the name of the file you are importing, or the
name you want to give the file you are exporting.

Note: You must add the suffix .zip to the file name. Otherwise, the
file import may fail. You can export the file using any name,
then add the suffix .zip manually.
11 In the File number field, select from three system restore points:
When you import a configuration file, the file is saved to the selected
restore point, and overwrites whichever file was previously held in
that restore point.
When you export a configuration file, the file is exported from the
selected restore point.
When you back up the current configuration, the backup configuration
file is saved to the selected restore point, and overwrites whichever file
was previously held in that restore point.
When you restore a configuration, the configuration file in the selected
restore point is the file that is restored.
Note: The Timed installation field is reserved for future use.
4.7.4 Exporting a Configuration File

You can export a saved configuration file from one of the system's three
restore points to a PC or laptop.
To export a configuration file:
1 Verify that you have followed all the steps in Setting the Configuration
Management Parameters.
2 Select Platform > Configuration > Configuration Management. The
Configuration Management page opens (Figure 80).
3 In the File Number field, select the restore point from which you want to
export the file.
5 Click Export. The export begins. You can view the status of the export in
the File Transfer status field in the Export/Import file status section.
Possible values are:
Ready – The default value, which appears when no import or export is
in progress.
File-in-Transfer – The file export is in progress.
If an error occurs during the import or export, an appropriate error
message is displayed in this field.
When the import or export is complete, one of the following status indications
appears:
 Succeeded
 Failure
The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to
Ready.

4.7.5 Importing a Configuration File

You can import a saved configuration file from a PC or laptop to one of the
system's three restore points.
To import a configuration file:
1 Verify that you have followed all the steps in Setting the Configuration
Management Parameters.
3 In the File Number field, select the restore point to which you want to
import the file.
5 Click Import. The import begins. You can view the status of the import in
the File Transfer status field in the Export/Import file status section.
Possible values are:
Ready – The default value, which appears when no import or export is
in progress.
File-in-Transfer – The file import is in progress.
If an error occurs during the import or export, an appropriate error
message is displayed in this field.
When the import or export is complete, one of the following status indications
appears:
 Succeeded
 Failure
The next time the system is reset, the File Transfer status field returns to
Ready.
After importing the configuration file, you can apply the configuration by
restoring the file from the restore point to which you saved it. See Restoring a
Saved Configuration.
4.7.6 Deleting a Configuration File

You can delete a saved configuration file from any of the system's three
restore points:
To delete a configuration file:
2 In the File Number field, select the restore point that holds the
configuration file you want to delete.
3 Click Delete. The file is deleted.

4.7.7 Backing Up the Current Configuration

You can back up the current configuration file to one of the system's three
restore points.
To back up a configuration file:
2 In the File Number field, select the restore point to which you want to
back up the file. If another configuration file is already saved to that
restore point, it will be overwritten by the file you back up.
3 Click Backup. The backup begins. You can view the status of the backup in
the Backup file creation status field. Possible values in the status field
are:
Ready – The default value, which appears when no backup is in
progress.
Generating file – The system is verifying the files to be backed up.
If an error occurs during the backup, an appropriate error message is
When the backup is complete, one of the following status indications appears:
 Succeeded
 Failure
The next time the system is reset, the Backup file creation status field
returns to Ready.
4.7.8 Restoring a Saved Configuration

You can replace the current configuration with any configuration file saved to
one of the system's three restore points by restoring the configuration file
from the restore point. Restoring a saved configuration does not change the
unit’s FIPS mode.
To restore a configuration file:
2 In the File Number field, select the restore point that holds the
configuration you want to restore.
3 Click Restore. The configuration restoration begins. You can view the
status of the restoration in the Configuration restore status field.
Note: While a configuration restoration is taking place, no user
can make any changes to the configuration. All system
configuration parameters are read-only during the
configuration restoration.

4.7.9 Editing CLI Scripts

The configuration file package includes a text file that enables you to write CLI
scripts in a backed-up configuration that are executed after restoring the
configuration.
To edit a CLI script:
1 Back up the current configuration to one of the restore points. See Backing
Up the Current Configuration.
2 Export the configuration from the restore point to a PC or laptop.
See Exporting a Configuration File.
3 On the PC or laptop, unzip the file Configuration_files.zip.
4 Edit the cli_script.txt file using clish commands, one per line.
5 Save and close the cli_script.txt file, and add it back into
the Configuration_files.zip file.
6 Import the updated Configuration_files.zip file back into the unit.
See Importing a Configuration File.
7 Restore the imported configuration file. See Restoring a Saved
Configuration. The unit is automatically reset. During initialization, the CLI
script is executed, line by line.
Note: If any specific command in the CLI script requires reset, the
unit is reset when that command is executed. During
initialization following the reset, execution of the CLI script
continues from the following command.

4.8 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration

You can restore the unit to its factory default configuration, while retaining
the unit’s IP address settings and logs.
To restore the factory default settings:
1 Select Platform > Management > Set to Factory Default. The Set to
Factory Default page opens.
Figure 81: Set to Factory Default Page
2 Click Set to Factory Default. The unit is restored to its factory default
settings. This does not change the unit's IP address or FIPS configuration.

4.9 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset

To initiate a hard (cold) reset on the unit:
1 Select Platform > Management > Reset. The Reset page opens.
Figure 82: Reset Page
2 Click Reset.
3 A prompt appears asking if you want to proceed with the reset.
Click Yes to initiate the reset.
The unit is reset.

4.10 Configuring Unit Parameters

To view and configure system information:
1 Select Platform > Management > Unit Parameters. The Unit Parameters
page opens. Table 20 describes the fields in the Unit Parameters page.
Figure 83: Unit Parameters Page
Table 20: Unit Parameters
Name A name for the unit (optional). This name appears at the top of every Web EMS page.
Description Descriptive information about the unit. This information is used for debugging, and
should include information such as the unit type.
System up time The time since the system was last reinitialized.
Contact person The name of the person to be contacted if and when a problem with the system occurs
(optional).
Location The actual physical location of the node or agent (optional).
Longitude The unit's longitude coordinates.
Latitude The unit's latitude coordinates.
Measurement format The type of measurement you want the system to use: Metric or Imperial.
Unit Temperature The current temperature of the unit.
Voltage input (Volt) The voltage input of the unit.

4.11 Configuring NTP

IP-20 supports Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP distributes Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) throughout the system, using a jitter buffer to neutralize
the effects of variable latency.
To view and configure the NTP Parameters:
1 Select Platform > Management > NTP Configuration. The NTP
Configuration page opens.
Figure 84: NTP Configuration Page
2 In the Admin field, select Enable.

3 In the NTP version field, select the NTP version you want to use. Options
are NTPv3 and NTPv4. NTPv4 provides interoperability with NTPv3 and
with SNTP.
4 In the NTP server IP address field, enter the IP address of the NTP server.
5 Click Apply.
Table 21 describes the status parameters that appear in the NTP Configuration
page.

Table 21: NTP Status Parameters
Poll interval Displays the interval used by the NTP client to maintain synchronization with the current
NTP server.
Sync on NTP server Displays the IP address of the remote NTP server on which the NTP client is currently
IP address locked.
Client lock status Indicates if the NTP client is locked on a remote NTP server. Possible values are:
 LOCK – The NTP client is locked on the remote server.
 LOCAL – The NTP client is locked on the local system clock (free running clock).
 N/A – The NTP client is not locked on any clock.
4.12 Displaying Unit Inventory

To view the unit's part number and serial number:
1 Select Platform > Management > Inventory. The Inventory page opens,
showing the unit's part number and serial number.
Figure 85: Inventory Page

5. Radio Configuration
 Viewing the Radio Status and Settings
 Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters
 Configuring ATPC
 Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through
 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption
 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics
Related topics:
 Configuring the Radio Parameters
 System Configurations
 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC
 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity
 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode
 Performing Radio Loopback
5.1 Viewing the Radio Status and Settings

You can configure the radios and display the radio parameters in the Radio
Parameters page.
Note: For instructions how to configure the radio parameters, see
Configuring the Radio Parameters.
To display the radio parameters:
shown in Figure 86.

Figure 86: Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C
location parameter.

Table 22 lists and describes the parameters in the Radio table of the IP-20C
Radio Parameters page and the Status parameters section of the Radio
Parameters configuration page.
Table 22: Radio Status Parameters
Parameter Description
Type The RF module type.

XPIC Support Indicates whether the carrier is operating in XPIC mode. For
instructions on configuring XPIC, refer to Configuring XPIC.
Note: Only relevant for IP-20C units.
TX Frequency The configured TX radio frequency. The TX radio frequency is
configured in the Frequency control (Local) section of the Radio
Parameters page. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
RX Frequency The configured RX radio frequency. The RX radio frequency is
configured in the Frequency control (Local) section of the Radio
Parameters page. See Configuring the Radio Parameters.
Radio Interface operational status Indicates whether the carrier is operational (Up) or not operational
(Down).
Operational TX Level (dBm) The actual TX signal level (TSL) of the carrier (in dBm).
RX Level (dBm) The actual measured RX signal level (RSL) of the carrier (in dBm).
Modem MSE (dB) The MSE (Mean Square Error) of the RX signal, measured in dB. A
value of -99.00 dB means that the modem is not locked.
Modem XPI (dB) The XPI (Cross Polarization Interference) level, measured in dB.
Defective Blocks The number of defective radio blocks that have been counted.
TX Mute Status Indicates whether radio transmission is muted.
Adaptive TX power operational status Indicates whether Adaptive TX power is currently operational.
5.2 Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters

You can view and configure the parameters of the carrier or carriers at the
remote side of the link in the Remote Radio Parameters page.
To display the remote radio parameters:
1 Select Radio > Remote Radio Parameters. The Remote Radio Parameters
page opens.
shown in Figure 88.
For IP-20S units and IP-20E units, the page appears as shown
in Figure 89.

Figure 88: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20C
Figure 89: Remote Radio Parameters Page – IP-20S and IP-20E
2 For IP-20C units, select the carrier in the Remote Radio table (see
Figure 88) and click Edit. A separate Remote Radio Parameters page
opens. The page is identical to the IP-20E and IP-20S page.

Figure 90: Remote Radio Parameters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
3 Configure the remote radio parameters. For a description of these

parameters, see Table 23: Remote Radio Parameters.
4 Click Apply.
You can also reset the remote unit from the Remote Radio Parameters – Edit
page:
 To reset the remote unit, click Reset Remote Unit.
Table 23: Remote Radio Parameters
Radio Location Read-only. Identifies the carrier.
Remote Radio Location Read-only. Identifies the location of the remote radio.
Local Remote Channel Operational Read-only. The operational status of the active (in a protection
Status configuration) remote channel.
Remote Receiver Signal Level Read-only. The Rx level of the remote radio, in dBm.
Remote Most Severe Alarm Read-only. The level of the most severe alarm currently active on the
remote unit.
Remote Unit Link ID Edit page only. Identifies the link, in order to distinguish it from other links.
Enter a unique identifier from 1 to 65535.
Remote Tx Output Level The remote unit's Tx output level, if the remote unit has been configured to
operate at a fixed Tx level (in dBm).

Remote Radio Mute To mute the TX output of the remote radio, select On. To unmute the TX
output of the remote radio, select Off.
Remote IP Address The IPv4 IP address of the remote unit.
Remote IPv6 Address The IPv6 IP address of the remote unit.
5.3 Configuring ATPC

ATPC is a closed-loop mechanism by which each radio adjusts its transmitted
signal power according to the indication received across the link, in order to
achieve a desired RSL on the other side of the link. Without ATPC, if loss of
frame occurs the system automatically increases its transmit power to the
configured maximum. This may cause a higher level of interference with other
systems until the failure is corrected.
To enable and configure ATPC and display ATPC settings:
1 Select Radio > ATPC. The ATPC page opens.
shown in Figure 91.
Figure 91: ATPC Page – IP-20C
2 For IP-20C units, select the carrier you wish to configure in the ATPC table
(see Figure 91) and click Edit. A separate ATPC –Edit page opens. The page
is essentially identical to the IP-20E and IP-20S page.

Figure 92: ATPC – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
3 In the Admin field, select Enable to enable ATPC or Disable to disable

ATPC.
4 In the Reference RX Level (dBm) field, enter a number between -70
and -30 as the reference value for the ATPC mechanism.
5 In the Remote Unit ATPC admin field, select Enable to enable ATPC or
Disable to disable ATPC on the remote radio carrier.
6 In the Remote ATPC Rx ref level field, enter a number between -70
and -30 as the reference value for the ATPC mechanism on the remote
radio carrier.
7 In the Remote ATPC override state cancel field, select No or Yes to
instruct the system whether to cancel the remote ATPC override state.
5.4 Configuring Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-

Through
Note: Header De-Duplication is supported for IP-20C and IP-20S.
For IP-20E, Header De-Duplication is planned for future
release.
Header De-Duplication enables operators to significantly improve Ethernet
throughout over the radio link without affecting user traffic. Header
De-Duplication can be configured to operate on various layers of the protocol
stack, saving bandwidth by reducing unnecessary header overhead. Header
De-duplication is also sometimes known as header compression.
Note: The Header De-Duplication configuration must be identical
on both sides of the link.
Using the Frame Cut-Through feature, frames assigned to queues with 4th
priority pre-empt frames already in transmission over the radio from other
queues. Transmission of the pre-empted frames is resumed after the
cut -through with no capacity loss or re-transmission required.

To configure Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through:

1 Select Radio > Ethernet Interface > Configuration. The Radio Ethernet
Interface Configuration page opens.
For IP-20C units, the Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration page
initially displays a table as shown in Figure 93.
For IP-20S units, a page appears, similar to Figure 94 (which shows an
IP-20C page).
Figure 93: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration Page – IP-20C
2 For IP-20C units, select the carrier in the Radio Ethernet and Compression
table (see Figure 93) and click Edit. A separate Radio Ethernet Interface
Configuration page opens. The page is essentially identical to the IP-20E
and IP-20S page.
3 Click Edit. The Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 94: Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration – Edit Page Per Carrier – IP-20C

4 In the Cut through mode field, select Yes to enable Frame Cut-Through or
No to disable Frame Cut-Through.
5 In the Header Compression mode field, select from the following
options:
Disabled – Header De-Duplication is disabled.
Layer2 – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet level.
MPLS – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet and MPLS
levels.
Layer3 – Header De-Duplication operates on the Ethernet and IP
levels.
Layer4 – Header De-Duplication operates on all supported layers up to
Layer 4.
Tunnel – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on
the Tunnel layer for packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
Tunnel-Layer3 – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3,
and on the Tunnel and T-3 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE
frames.
Tunnel-Layer4 – Header De-Duplication operates on Layer 2, Layer 3,
and on the Tunnel, T-3, and T-4 layers for packets carrying GTP or GRE
frames.
6 Click Apply, then Close
Note: The Utilization threshold field is not applicable.
5.4.1 Viewing Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through

Counters
You can view PMs on the usage of Header De-Duplication and Frame
Cut-Through.
To view Header De-Duplication and Frame Cut-Through counters:
1 Select Radio > Ethernet Interface > Counters. The Radio Ethernet
For IP-20C units, the Radio Ethernet Interface Configuration page
initially displays a table as shown in Figure 95.
For IP-20S units and IP-20E units, the page appears as shown
in Figure 96.

Figure 95: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – IP-20C
Figure 96: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page – IP-20S and IP-20E
2 For IP-20C units, select the carrier in the Header Compression Counters
table (Figure 95) and click View. A separate Radio Ethernet Interface
Configuration page opens. The page is essentially identical to the IP-20E
and IP-20S page.

Figure 97: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
Table 24 lists and describes the fields in the Radio Ethernet Interface Counters
page.
Table 24: Radio Ethernet Interface Counters Fields
Interface Location Identifies the radio interface.
Header Compression Counters
TX bytes before enhanced HC Bytes on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
TX compressed bytes Bytes on the TX side that were compressed by Header
De-Duplication.
TX frames before enhanced HC Frames on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
TX frames compressed by enhanced Frames on the TX side that were compressed by Header
HC De-Duplication.

TX learning frames The number of frames that have been used to learn unique data
flows. Once a particular flow type has been learned, subsequent
frames with that flow type are compressed by Header
De-Duplication.
TX frames not compressed due to Frames on the TX side that were not compressed due to exclusion
excluding rule rules.
Note: The use of exclusion rules for Header De-Duplication is
planned for future release.
TX frames not compressed due to Frames on the TX side that were not compressed for reasons other
other reasons than the use of exclusion rules.
TX number of active flows The number of Header De-Duplication flows that are active on the
TX side.
Number of active flows of user Not supported.
selected flow type
Ethernet Port Counters
Port RX good bytes The number of good bytes received on the port since the last time
the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Port RX good frames The number of good frames received on the port since the last time
the Radio Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Port TX total bytes The number of bytes transmitted since the last time the Radio
Ethernet Interface counters were cleared.
Port TX frames The number of frames transmitted since the last time the Radio
Port TX idle bytes The number of idle bytes transmitted since the last time the Radio
Cut Through Counters
TX frames The number of frames that have been transmitted via Frame
Cut-Through since the last time the Radio Ethernet Interface
counters were cleared.

5.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption

This feature is not supported with MIMO links.
This feature requires:

 Requires an activation key. If no valid AES activation key has been applied
to the unit, AES will not operate on the unit. See Configuring the Activation
Key.
Note: In order for the AES activation key to become active, you
must reset the unit after configuring a valid AES activation
key. Until the unit is reset, an alarm will be present if you
enable AES. This is not the case for other activation keys.
FibeAir IP-20C and IP-20S support AES-256 payload encryption. AES is
enabled and configured separately for each radio carrier.
IP-20 uses a dual-key encryption mechanism for AES:
 The user provides a master key. The master key can also be generated by
the system upon user command. The master key is a 32-byte symmetric
encryption key. The same master key must be manually configured on
both ends of the encrypted link.
 The session key is a 32-byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the
actual data. Each link uses two session keys, one for each direction. For
each direction, the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and
propagated automatically, via a Key Exchange Protocol, to the other side of
the link. The Key Exchange Protocol exchanges session keys by encrypting
them with the master key, using the AES-256 encryption algorithm.
Session keys are regenerated at user-configured intervals.
AES key generation is completely hitless, and has no effect on ACM operation.
To configure payload encryption:
1 Select Radio > Payload Encryption. The Payload Encryption page opens.
For IP-20C units, the Payload Encryption page initially displays a table
as shown in Figure 98.
For IP-20S units, a page appears, similar to Figure 99 (which shows an
IP-20C page).

Figure 98: Payload Encryption Page
2 Select the carrier you want to configure and click Edit. The Payload
Encryption – Edit page opens.
Figure 99: Payload Encryption – Edit Page
3 In the Admin Mode field, select AES-256 to enable payload encryption. To

disable payload encryption, select Disable.
4 Configure the master key by doing one of the following:
Enter a master key in the Master Key field. You must enter between 8
and 32 ASCII characters.
Click Generate key to generate a master key automatically.

You must use the same master key on both sides of the link. This means
that if you generate a master key automatically on one side of the link, you
must copy that key and for use on the other side of the link. Once payload
encryption has been enabled on both sides of the link, the Key Exchange
Protocol periodically verifies that both ends of the link have the same
master key. If a mismatch is detected, an alarm is raised and traffic
transmission is stopped for the mismatched carrier at both sides of the
link. The link becomes non-valid and traffic stops being forwarded.
When you enter a master key, or when the master key is automatically
generated, the key is hidden behind dots. To copy the master key, you
must display the key. To display the master key, click Show Key. A new
Master key field appears, displaying the master key. You can copy the key
to the clipboard from this field.
Figure 100: Payload Encryption – Edit Page with Master Key Displayed
5 In the Session Key Period field, configure a time interval in hours and
minutes (HH:MM). This is the interval at which the session key is
automatically regenerated.
6 When you are finished, click Apply.
Note: Any time payload encryption fails, the Operational status of
the link is Down until payload encryption is successfully
restored.

5.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics

 Configuring Radio Thresholds
 Displaying MRMC Status
 Displaying MRMC PMs
 Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters
 Displaying Signal Level PMs
 Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs
 Displaying Modem MSE PMs
 Displaying XPI PMs
 Displaying Traffic PMs
Note: The Radio > PM & Statistics > Diversity and Radio > PM &
Statistics > Combined pages are reserved for future use.
5.6.1 Configuring Radio Thresholds

You can configure PM thresholds, BER thresholds, and Excessive BER
Administration. This enables you to define the levels at which certain PMs are
counted, such as the number of seconds in which the configured threshold RX
and TX levels are exceeded. This also enables you to define the levels at which
certain alarms are triggered.
To configure the radio thresholds:
1 Select Radio > Radio Thresholds. The Radio Thresholds page opens.
Figure 101: Radio Thresholds Page
2 In the Excessive BER admin field, select Enable to enable excessive BER
administration or Disable to disable excessive BER administration.
Excessive BER administration determines whether or not excessive BER is
propagated as a fault and considered a system event. For example, if
excessive BER administration is enabled, excessive BER can trigger a
protection switchover and can cause a synchronization source to go into a
failure status. Excessive BER administration is enabled or disabled for the
entire unit rather than for specific radios.
3 In the Thresholds table, select the radio for which you want to configure
thresholds.
4 Click Edit. The Radio Thresholds – Edit page opens.
Figure 102: Radio Thresholds – Edit Page
5 Configure the thresholds, as described in Table 25.

Table 25: PM and BER Thresholds
Radio Location Identifies the carrier (Slot 2, port 1 or Slot 2, port 2).
RX Level Threshold 1 (dBm) Specify the threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the RSL is below
this level.
RX Level Threshold 2 (dBm) Specify a second threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the RSL is
below this level.
TX Level Threshold (dBm) Specify the threshold for counting exceeded seconds if the TSL is below
this level.
MSE PM Threshold (dB) Specify the modem MSE (Mean Square Error) threshold for calculating
MSE Exceed Threshold seconds.
XPI PM Threshold (dB) Specify the modem XPI threshold for calculating XPI Exceed Threshold
seconds.
Excessive BER Threshold Select the level above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors
detected over the radio link.
Signal Degrade BER Threshold Select the level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is issued for errors
detected over the radio link.

5.6.2 Displaying MRMC Status
Related Topics:
To display the current modulation and bit rate per radio:
1 Select Radio > MRMC > MRMC Status. The MRMC Status page opens.
Figure 103: MRMC Status Page
Table 26 describes the MRMC status parameters.

Note: To display the same parameters for an individual radio in a
separate page, select the radio in the MRMC script status
table and click View.
Table 26: MRMC Status Parameters
Radio Location Identifies the carrier (Slot 2, port 1 or Slot 2, port 2).
TX profile The current TX profile.
TX QAM The current TX modulation.
TX bit-rate The current TX bit-rate.
RX profile The current RX profile.
RX QAM The current RX modulation.
RX bit-rate The current RX bit-rate.

5.6.3 Displaying MRMC PMs
Related Topics:
To display Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation PMs, including information on ACM
profile fluctuations per interval per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > MRMC. The MRMC PM Report page
opens.
Figure 104: MRMC PM Report Page
2 For the IP-20C, In the Port field, select the port that holds the radio for
which you want to display PMs.
3 In the Interval Type field:
To display reports in 15-minute intervals, select 15 minutes.
To display reports in daily intervals, select 24 hours.
Table 27 describes the MRMC PMs.
Note: To display the same parameters for a specific interval in a
separate page, select the interval in the MRMC PM table and
click View.

Table 27: MRMC PMs
Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute
intervals, displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Min profile Displays the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Max profile Displays the maximum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Min bitrate Displays the minimum total radio throughput (Mbps) delivered during the
interval.
Max bitrate Displays the maximum total radio throughput (Mbps) delivered during the
interval.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the
measured interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values
are not reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that
occurred at that time.
5.6.4 Displaying and Clearing Defective Block Counters

The Counters page displays the number of blocks in which errors were
detected. The larger the amount, the poorer the radio link quality.
To display the number of blocks in which errors were detected per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Counters. The Counters page opens.
For IP-20C units, the Counters page initially displays a table as shown
in Figure 105.
For IP-20S and IP-20E units, the Counters page appears as shown in
Figure 106.

Figure 105: Counters Page – IP-20C

Figure 106: Counters Page – IP-20S and IP-20E
2 For IP-20C units, you can select the carrier in the Radio table (see
Figure 105) and click View to display a page for that carrier. A separate
Counters page opens.
Figure 107: Counters Page Per Carrier – IP-20C
3 To clear the counters, click Clear Counters.

5.6.5 Displaying Signal Level PMs

To display signal level PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Signal Level. The Signal Level PM report
page opens.
Figure 108: Signal Level PM Report Page
2 For the IP-20C, in the Port field, select the port that holds the radio for
Table 28 describes the Signal Level PMs.
separate page, select the interval in the RF PM table and
click View.

Table 28: Signal Level PMs
Max TSL (dBm) The maximum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Min TSL (dBm) The minimum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Max RSL (dBm) The maximum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Min RSL (dBm) The minimum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
TSL exceed threshold seconds The number of seconds the measured TSL exceeded the threshold during
the interval. TSL thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds page.
See Configuring Radio Thresholds.
RSL exceed threshold1 seconds The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold 1
during the interval. RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds
page. See Configuring Radio Thresholds.
RSL exceed threshold2 seconds The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold 2
during the interval. RSL thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured
interval are reliable. An x in the column indicates that the values are not
reliable due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that
time.
5.6.6 Displaying Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs

To display modem BER (Bit Error Rate) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Aggregate. The Aggregate PM report
page opens.

Figure 109: Aggregate PM Report Page
Table 29 describes the Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs.
separate page, select the interval in the Modem BER PM
Table 29: Modem BER (Aggregate) PMs
ES Displays the number of seconds in the measuring interval during which
errors occurred.
SES Displays the number of severe error seconds in the measuring interval.
UAS Displays the Unavailable Seconds value of the measured interval. The value
can be between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).

BBE Displays the number of background block errors during the measured
interval.
time.
5.6.7 Displaying Modem MSE PMs

To display modem MSE (Minimum Square Error) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > MSE. The MSE PM report page opens.
Figure 110: MSE PM Report Page
Table 30 describes the Modem MSE PMs.
separate page, select the interval in the Modem MSE PM

Table 30: Modem MSE PMs
Min MSE (dB) Displays the minimum MSE in dB, measured during the interval.
Max MSE (dB) Displays the maximum MSE in dB, measured during the interval.
Exceed threshold seconds Displays the number of seconds the MSE exceeded the MSE PM threshold
during the interval. The MSE PM is configured in the Radio Thresholds
time.
5.6.8 Displaying XPI PMs
Related topics:
To display XPI (Cross Polarization Interface) PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > XPI. The XPI PM report page opens.
Note: The XPI page only appears if XPIC is configured on the unit.
Figure 111: XPI PM Report Page

2 In the Port field, select the port that holds the radio for which you want to
display PMs.
Table 31 describes the XPI PMs.
separate page, select the interval in the Modem XPI PM table
and click View.
Table 31: XPI PMs
Min XPI (dB) The minimum XPI level that was measured during the interval.
Max XPI (dB) The maximum XPI level that was measured during the interval.
XPI below threshold seconds The number of seconds the measured XPI level was below the threshold
during the interval. XPI thresholds are configured in the Radio Thresholds
time.
5.6.9 Displaying Traffic PMs

 Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs
 Displaying Utilization PMs
 Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs
5.6.9.1 Displaying Capacity and Throughput PMs

You can display PMs for capacity and throughput for a radio, based on:
 The total Layer 1 bandwidth (payload plus overheads) sent through the
radio (Mbps).
 The total effective Layer 2 traffic sent through the radio.
You can also configure thresholds for capacity and throughput PMs. The
number of seconds during which these thresholds are exceeded are among the
dispayed PMs.
To display capacity and throughput PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Capacity/Throughput. The
Capacity PM report page opens.

Figure 112: Capacity PM Report Page
To set the thresholds for capacity and throughput PMs:
1 Select Threshold. The Ethernet Radio Capacity & Throughput Threshold
page opens.
Figure 113: Ethernet Radio Capacity and Throughput Threshold Page
2 Enter the capacity and throughput thresholds you want, in Mbps. The
range of values is 0 to 4294967295. The default value for is 1000.

Table 32 describes the capacity and throughput PMs.

separate page, select the interval in the PM table and click
View.
Table 32: Capacity/Throughput PMs
Time interval index For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute
Peak capacity (Mbps) Displays the highest L1 bandwidth, in Mbps, sent through the selected radio
during the measured time interval.
Average capacity (Mbps) Displays the average L1 bandwidth, in Mbps, during the measured time
interval.
Seconds exceeding Threshold Displays the number of seconds during the measured time interval during
which the L1 bandwidth exceeded the configured capacity threshold.
Peak throughput (Mbps) Displays the highest throughput, in Mbps, that occurred for the selected
radio during the measured time interval.
Average throughput (Mbps) Displays the average throughput, in Mbps, for the selected radio during the
measured time interval.
which the throughput exceeded the configured throughput threshold.
time.

5.6.9.2 Displaying Utilization PMs

To display radio capacity utilization PMs per radio:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Utilization. The Utilization PM
report page opens.
Figure 114: Utilization PM Report Page
To set the thresholds for utilization PMs:
1 Select Threshold. The Utilization Threshold page opens.

Figure 115: Ethernet Radio Utilization Threshold Page
2 Enter the utilization threshold you want, in % (1-100). The default value
for is 100.
View.
Table 33: Utilization PMs
Peak utilization (%) Indicates the highest utilization of the radio capacity that occurred for the
selected radio or group during the measured time interval.
Average utilization (%) Indicates the average utilization of the radio capacity for the selected radio
or group during the measured time interval.
which the L1 bandwidth exceeded the configured utilization threshold.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at time and date of the measured
time.
5.6.9.3 Displaying Frame Error Rate PMs

To display frame error rate PMs per radio or Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Select Radio > PM & Statistics > Traffic > Frame error rate. The Frame
error rate PM report page opens.

Figure 116: Frame Error PM Report Page
View.

Table 34: Frame Error Rate PMs
FER Displays the frame error rate (%) during the measured time interval.
time.

6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces

 Ethernet Services and Interfaces
 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype
 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces
 Configuring Automatic State Propagation
 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics
Related topics:
 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG)
 Quality of Service (QoS)
 Ethernet Protocols
 Performing Ethernet Loopback
6.1 Configuring Ethernet Service(s)

 Ethernet Services Overview
 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services
 The Ethernet Services Page
 Adding an Ethernet Service
 Editing a Service
 Deleting a Service
 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services
 Note: When setting multiple services to Reserve state, make sure to
avoid setting the management service to Reserve state.
 Viewing Service Details
 Configuring Service Points
6.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview

Users can define up to 64 Ethernet services. Each service constitutes a virtual
bridge that defines the connectivity between logical ports in the IP-20
network element.
This version of IP-20 supports the following service types:
 Multipoint (MP)
 Point-to-Point (P2P)
 Management (MNG)
In addition to user-defined services, IP-20 contains a pre-defined management
service (Service ID 257). By default, this service is operational.

Note: You can use the management service for in-band

management. For instructions on configuring in-band
management, see Configuring In-Band Management.
A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interface.
Service points define the movement of frames through the service. Each
service point includes both ingress and egress attributes. A Point-to-Point or
Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A Management service can
hold up 30 service points.
For a more detailed overview of IP-20's service-oriented Ethernet switching
engine, refer to the Technical Description for the IP-20 product type you are
using.
6.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services

When provisioning Ethernet services, it is recommended to follow these
guidelines:
 Use the same Service ID for all service fragments along the path of the
service.
 Do not re-use the same Service ID within the same region. A region is
defined as consisting of all IP-20 devices having Ethernet connectivity
between them.
 Use meaningful EVC IDs.
 Give the same EVC ID (service name) to all service fragments along the
path of the service.
 Do not reuse the same EVC ID within the same region.
It is recommended to follow these guidelines for creating service points:
 Always use SNP service points on NNI ports and SAP service points on UNI
ports.
 For each logical interface associated with a specific service, there should
never be more than a single service point.
 The transport VLAN ID should be unique per service within a single region.
That is, no two services should use the same transport VLAN ID.
6.1.3 The Ethernet Services Page

The Ethernet Services page is the starting point for defining Ethernet services
on the IP-20.
To open the Ethernet Services page:
1 Select Ethernet > Services. The Ethernet Services page opens.

Figure 117: Ethernet Services Page
Table 35 describes the parameters displayed in the Ethernet Services page.
Table 35: Ethernet Services Page Parameters
Services ID A unique ID for the service.
Service Type The service type:
 MP – Multipoint
 P2P – Point-to-Point
 MNG – Management
Service sub type Indicates the type of service (Ethernet).
EVC ID The Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) ID. This parameter does not affect
the network element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology
management.
EVC description The Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) description. This parameter does not
affect the network element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology
management.
Admin Indicates whether the service is enabled (Operational) or disabled
(Reserved). You can configure services for later use by defining the service
as Reserved. In Reserved mode, the service occupies system resources
but is unable to transmit and receive data.
6.1.4 Adding an Ethernet Service

To add an Ethernet service:
1 Select Ethernet > Services. The Ethernet Services page opens
(Figure 117).
2 In the Ethernet Services page, click Add. The Ethernet Services – Add page
opens.

Figure 118: Ethernet Services - Add page
3 In the Service ID field, select a unique ID for the service. You can choose
any unused value from 1 to 1024. Once you have added the service, you
cannot change the Service ID. Service ID 1025 is reserved for a pre-defined
management service.
4 In the Service Type field, select the service type:
MP – Multipoint
MNG – Management
P2P – Point-to-Point
5 Optionally, in the EVC ID field, enter an Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC)
ID (up to 20 characters). This parameter does not affect the network
element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology management.
6 Optionally, in the EVC Description field, enter a text description of the
service (up to 64 characters). This parameter does not affect the network
element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for topology management.
7 In the Admin field, select one of the following options:
Operational - The service is functional.
Reserved - The service is disabled until this parameter is changed to
Operational. In this mode, the service occupies system resources but
is unable to receive and transmit data.
8 In the MAC table size field, enter the maximum MAC address table size for
the service. The MAC address table is a source MAC address learning table
used to forward frames from one service point to another. You can select a
value from 16 to 131,072, in multiples of 16. This maximum only applies to
dynamic, not static, MAC address table entries.
Note: Additional configuration of the MAC address table can be
performed via the CLI. See Defining the MAC Address
Forwarding Table for a Service.
9 In the Default CoS field, enter a default Class of Service (CoS) value (0-7).
This value is assigned to frames at the service level if CoS Mode is set to
Default-CoS. Otherwise, this value is not used, and frames retain whatever
CoS value they were assigned at the service point or logical interface level.
10 In the CoS Mode field, select one of the following options. This parameter
determines whether or not frames passing through the service have their
CoS modified at the service level. The CoS determines the priority queue to
which frames are assigned.
Default CoS – Frames passing through the service are assigned the
default CoS defined above. This CoS value overrides whatever CoS may
have been assigned at the service point or interface level.
Preserve-SP-COS-Decision – The CoS of frames passing through the
service is not modified by the service's default CoS.
11 Click Apply, then Close to close the Ethernet Services - Add page.
12 Add service points. You must add service points to the service in order for
the service to carry traffic. See Configuring Service Points.
6.1.5 Editing a Service

To edit a service:
(Figure 117).
2 Select the service in the Service Configuration Table.
3 In the Ethernet Services page, click Edit. The Ethernet Services - Edit page
opens.
This page is identical to the Ethernet Services - Add page (Figure 118). You can
edit any parameter that can be configured in the Add page, except the
Service ID.
6.1.6 Deleting a Service

Before deleting a service, you must first delete any service points attached to
the service.
To delete a service:
1 Delete all service points attached to the service you wish to delete, as
described in Deleting a Service Point.
(Figure 117).
3 Select the service in the Ethernet Service Configuration Table.
4 Click Delete. The service is deleted.

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services

To enable, disable, or delete multiple services:
(Figure 117).
2 Select the services in the Ethernet Services Configuration table, or select all
the services by selecting the check box in the top row.
To enable the selected services, in the Multiple Selection Operation
section underneath the Ethernet Services Configuration Table, select
Operational and click Apply.
To disable the selected services, in the Multiple Selection Operation
section underneath the Ethernet Services Configuration Table, select
Reserved and click Apply.
To delete the selected services, select Delete underneath the Ethernet
Services Configuration Table. Before deleting a service, you must
delete any service points attached to the service, as described in
Deleting a Service Point.
Figure 119: Multiple Selection Operation Section (Ethernet Services)
Note: When setting multiple services to Reserve state, make sure

to avoid setting the management service to Reserve state.
6.1.8 Viewing Service Details

To view the full service parameters:
(Figure 117).
2 Select the service in the Ethernet Services Configuration table.
3 In the Ethernet Services page, click Service Details. The Ethernet
Services – Service Details page opens. The Service Details page contains
the same fields as the Add page (Figure 118). However, in the Service
Details page, these fields are read-only.

6.1.9 Configuring Service Points

 Ethernet Services Points Overview
 The Ethernet Service Points Page
 Adding a Service Point
 Editing a Service Point
 Deleting a Service Point
 Attaching VLANs
6.1.9.1 Ethernet Services Points Overview

Service points are logical interfaces within a service. A service point is a logical
entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service points define the
movement of frames through the service. Each service point includes both
ingress and egress attributes.
Each service point for a Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can be either a
Service Access Point (SAP) or a Service Network Point (SNP). A Point-to-Point
service can also use Pipe service points.
 An SAP is equivalent to a UNI in MEF terminology and defines the
connection of the user network with its access points. SAPs are used for
Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
 An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E-NNI in MEF terminology and defines
the connection between the network elements in the user network. SNPs
are used for Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
 A Pipe service point is used to create traffic connectivity between two
ports in a port-based manner (Smart Pipe). In other words, all the traffic
from one port passes to the other port.
Management services utilize Management (MNG) service points.
A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A
management service can hold up to 30 service points.

6.1.9.2 The Ethernet Service Points Page

The Ethernet Service Points page is the starting point for configuring Ethernet
service points.
To open the Ethernet Service Points page:
(Figure 117).
2 Select the relevant service in the Ethernet Services Configuration table.
3 Click Service Points. The Ethernet Service Points page opens.
Figure 120: Ethernet Service Points Page
You can choose to display the following sets of attributes by selecting the
appropriate button above the SP Attributes table:
 General – See Ethernet Service Points – General SP Attributes Table
 Ingress – See Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes
 Egress – See Ethernet Service Points – Egress Attributes
To return to the Ethernet Services page at any time, click Back to Services
table at the top of the Ethernet Service Points page.

Ethernet Service Points – General SP Attributes Table

The General SP Attributes table is shown in Figure 120: Ethernet Service Points
Page. Table 36 describes the parameters displayed in the General SP
Attributes table.
Table 36: General Service Point Attributes
Service point ID This ID is unique within the service. For Point-to-Point and Multipoint services, the
range of values is 1-32. For Management services, the range of values is 1-30.
When adding a service point, you can select a service point ID from the available
options in the Service point ID drop-down list in the Ethernet Service Points – Add
page. Once you have added the service point, you cannot change the service point
ID.
Service point name A descriptive name for the service point (optional). The Service Point Name can be
up to 20 characters.
Service point type The service point type. Options are:
 SAP – Service Access Point.
 SNP – Service Network Point.
 MNG – Management service point.
 PIPE – Pipe service point.
The following rules apply to the mixing of different types of service points on a single
logical interface:
 You cannot configure both SAPs and SNPs on the same logical interface.
 You can configure both SAPs or SNPs on the same logical interface as a MNG
service point.
 If you configure a Pipe service point on an interface, you cannot configure an
SAP, SNP, or another Pipe service point on the same interface. You can,
however, configure an MNG service point on the same interface.
 You cannot configure more than one MNG service point on a single logical
interface.
Once you have added the service point, you cannot change this parameter.
Interface location The physical or logical interface on which the service point is located. Once you have
added the service point, you cannot change this parameter.
Attached interface type The encapsulation type (Ethertype) for frames entering the service point. Once you
have added the service point, you cannot change this parameter.
The Attached Interface Type determines which frames enter the service via this
service point, based on the frame’s VLAN tagging. Since more than one service point
may be associated with a single interface, frames are assigned to the earliest defined
service point in case of conflict.
For a list of available Attached Interface Types, the types of frames to which each
one applies, and the service point types for which each one is available, see
Table 37.

C-Vlan encapsulation The C-VLAN classified into the service point. Options are 1-4094, Untagged, or N.A.
(Not Applicable). Once you have added the service point, you cannot change this
parameter.
If you selected Bundle-C in the Attached Interface Type field, select Untagged or
N.A. You can then add multiple C-VLANs via the Attach VLAN option. See Attaching
VLANs.
S-Vlan encapsulation The S-VLAN classified into the service point. Options are 1-4094, Untagged, or N.A.
(Not Applicable). Once you have added the service point, you cannot change this
parameter.
If you selected Bundle-S in the Attached Interface Type field, select the S-VLAN
value to classify into the service point (1-4094), or select Untagged. You can then
add multiple C-VLANs via the Attach VLAN option. See Attaching VLANs.
Table 37 describes the available Attached Interface Types.
Table 37: Attached Interface Types
Attached Interface Types of Frames Available for Service

Type Point Types
dot1q A single C-VLAN is classified into the service point. All
s-tag A single S-VLAN is classified into the service point. SNP, PIPE, and MNG
Bundle-C A set of C-VLANs is classified into the service point. SAP
Bundle-S A single S-VLAN and a set of C-VLANs are classified SAP
into the service point.
All-to-One All C-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the SAP
interface are classified into the service point.
Q-in-Q A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN combination is classified SAP and MNG
into the service point.

Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes

Select Ingress in the Ethernet Service Points page to display the Ethernet
Service Points – Ingress Attributes table. Table 38 describes the parameters
displayed in the Ingress SP Attributes table.
Figure 121: Ethernet Service Points Page – Ingress Attributes
Table 38: Service Point Ingress Attributes
Learning admin Determines whether MAC address learning for incoming frames is enabled (Enable)
or disabled (Disable). When enabled, the service point learns the source MAC
addresses of incoming frames and adds them to a MAC address forwarding table.
Allow flooding Determines whether incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses are forwarded
to other service points via flooding. Select Allow to allow flooding or Disable to
disable flooding.
Allow broadcast Indicates whether frames with a broadcast destination MAC address are allowed to
ingress the service via this service point. Select Allow to allow broadcast or Disable
to disable broadcast.

CoS Mode Indicates how the service point handles the CoS of frames that pass through the
service point. Options are:
 sp-def-cos – The service point re-defines the CoS of frames that pass through
the service point, according to the Default CoS (below). This decision can be
overwritten on the service level.
 Interface-Decision – The service point preserves the CoS decision made at the
interface level. The decision can still be overwritten at the service level.
 PCL – Reserved for future use.
 TCAM – Reserved for future use.
Default CoS The default CoS. If the CoS Mode is sp-def-cos, this is the CoS assigned to frames
that pass through the service point. This decision can be overwritten at the service
level. Possible values are 0 to 7.
Ethernet Service Points – Egress Attributes

Select Egress in the Ethernet Service Points page to display the Ethernet
Service Points – Egress Attributes table. Table 39 `describes the parameters
displayed in the General SP Attributes table.
Figure 122: Ethernet Service Points Page – Egress Attributes
Table 39: Service Point Egress Attributes

C-Vlan CoS preservation Determines whether the original C-VLAN CoS value is preserved or restored for
frames egressing from the service point.
 If C-VLAN CoS preservation is enabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is the same as the value when the frame entered the
service.
 If C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have been
re-assigned by the interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results
from marking (see Marking admin, below).
C-Vlan preservation Determines whether the original C-VLAN ID is preserved or restored for frames
egressing from the service point.
 If C-VLAN preservation is enabled, the C-VLAN ID of frames egressing the
service point is the same as the C-VLAN ID when the frame entered the service.
 If C-VLAN preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN ID of frames egressing the
service point is set at whatever value might have been re-assigned by the
interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results from marking (see
Marking admin, below).
S-Vlan CoS preservation Determines whether the original S-VLAN CoS value is preserved or restored for
 If S-VLAN CoS preservation is enabled, the S-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is the same as the value when the frame entered the
service.
 If S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, the C-VLAN CoS value of frames
egressing the service point is set at whatever value might have been
re-assigned by the interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results
from marking (see Marking admin, below).
S-Vlan preservation Read-only. Indicates whether the original S-VLAN ID is preserved or restored for
 If S-VLAN preservation is enabled, the S-VLAN ID of frames egressing the
service point is the same as the S-VLAN ID when the frame entered the service.
 If S-VLAN preservation is disabled, the S-VLAN ID of frames egressing the
service point is set at whatever value might have been re-assigned by the
interface, service point, or service, or whatever value results from marking (see
Marking admin, below).

Marking admin Determines whether re-marking of the outer VLAN (C-VLAN or S-VLAN) of tagged
frames that pass through the service point is enabled.
 If Marking admin is set to Enable, and CoS preservation for the relevant outer
VLAN is set to Disable, the SAP re-marks the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP
bits of egress frames according to the calculated CoS and Color, and the
user-configurable 802.1Q and 802.1AD marking tables. You can configure these
tables by selecting Ethernet > QoS > Marking from the menu on the left side of
the Web EMS.
 If Marking admin and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both
set to Enable, re-marking is not performed.
 If Marking admin and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both
set to Disable, re-marking is applied, but only according to the values defined
for Green frames in the 802.1Q and 802.1AD marking tables.
Service Bundle ID This can be used to assign one of the available service bundles from the H-QoS
hierarchy queues to the service point. This enables you to personalize the QoS
egress path. Permitted values are 1-63.
6.1.9.3 Adding a Service Point

To add a service point:
(Figure 117).
3 Click Service Points. The Ethernet Service Points page opens (Figure 120).
4 Select the relevant service point in the Ethernet Services Points – General
SP Attributes table.

5 Click Add. The Ethernet Service Points – Add page opens.

Figure 123: Ethernet Service Points - Add Page

6 Configure the service point attributes, as described in Table 36, Table 38,
and Table 39.
Note: Optionally, you can select from a list of pre-defined service
point options in the Pre defined options field at the top of
the Ethernet Service Points - Add page. The system
automatically populates the remaining service point
parameters according to the system-defined parameters.
However, you can manually change these parameter values.
The pre-defined options are customized to the type of
service to which you are adding the service point.
6.1.9.4 Editing a Service Point

To edit a service point:
(Figure 117).
5 Click Edit. The Ethernet Service Points– Edit page opens. The Ethernet
Service Points – Edit page is similar to the Ethernet Service Points - Add
page (Figure 123). You can edit any parameter that can be configured in
the Add Service Point page, except Service Point ID, Service Point Type,
and the General SP Attributes.
6 Edit the service point attributes, as described in Table 36, Table 38, and
Table 39.
6.1.9.5 Deleting a Service Point

You can only delete a service point with an Attached Interface Type of
Bundle-C or Bundle-S if no VLANs are attached to the service point. See
Attaching VLANs.
To delete a service point:
(Figure 117).
5 Click Delete. The service point is deleted.

6.1.9.6 Attaching VLANs

When the Attached Interface Type for a service point is set to Bundle-C or
Bundle-S, you can add multiple C-VLANs to the service point.
To add multiple C-VLANs:
(Figure 117).
5 Click Attached VLAN. The Attached VLAN List page opens.
Figure 124: Attached VLAN List Page

6 Click Add. The Attached VLAN List - Add page opens.

Figure 125: Attached VLAN List - Add Page
7 Configure the VLAN Classification parameters, described in Table 40.

Table 40: VLAN Classification Parameters
Interface Location Read-only. The physical or logical interface on which the service point is located.
Service ID Read-only. The ID of the service to which the service point belongs.
Service Point ID Read-only. The ID of the service point.
C-Vlan Encapsulation Select the C-VLAN you want to add to the service point.
S-Vlan Encapsulation Read-only.
If the Attached Interface Type for the service point is Bundle-S, this field displays
the S-VLAN encapsulation selected when the service point was created.
If the Attached Interface Type for the service point is Bundle-C, this field is
inactive.
CoS Overwrite Valid If you want to assign a specific CoS and Color to frames with the C-VLAN or S-VLAN
defined in the C-VLAN Encapsulation field, select true. This CoS and Color values
defined below override the CoS and Color decisions made at the interface level.
However, if the service point or service are configured to apply their own CoS and
Color decisions, those decisions override the decision made here.

CoS Value If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to true, the CoS value defined in this field is applied to
frames with the C-VLAN defined in the C-VLAN Encapsulation field. This CoS
overrides the CoS decision made at the interface level. However, if the service point
or service are configured to apply their own CoS, that decision overrides the decision
made here.
If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to false, this parameter has no effect.
Color If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to true, the Color value defined in this field is applied
to frames with the C-VLAN defined in the C-VLAN Encapsulation field. This Color
overrides the Color decision made at the interface level. However, if the service point
or service are configured to apply their own Color, that decision overrides the
decision made here.
If CoS Overwrite Valid is set to false, this parameter has no effect.
To edit a VLAN Classification table entry, select the entry in the VLAN
Classification table and click Edit. You can edit all the fields that can be
configured in the Attached VLAN List – Add page, except the C-VLAN
Encapsulation field.
To delete a VLAN Classification table entry, select the entry in the VLAN
Classification table and click Delete.
6.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype

To configure the size of the MRU (Maximum Receive Unit) and the S-VLAN
Ethertype:
1 Select Ethernet > General Configuration. The Ethernet General
Configuration page opens.

Figure 126: Ethernet General Configuration Page
2 In the MRU field, enter the global size (in bytes) of the Maximum Receive
Unit (MRU). Permitted values are 64 to 9612. The default value is 2000.
Frames that are larger than the global MRU will be discarded.
3 In the S VLAN Ether type field, select the S-VLAN Ethertype. This defines
the ethertype recognized by the system as the S-VLAN ethertype. Options
are: 0x8100, 0x88A8, 0x9100, and 0x9200. The default value is 0x88A8.
Note: The C-VLAN Ethertype is set at 0x8100 and cannot be
modified.
4 Click Apply.

6.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces

Related Topics:
 Configuring Ethernet Service(s)
 Quality of Service (QoS)
The IP-20’s switching fabric distinguishes between physical interfaces and
logical interfaces. Physical and logical interfaces serve different purposes in
the switching fabric. In some cases, a physical interface corresponds to a
logical interface on a one-to-one basis. For some features, such as LAG, a group
of physical interfaces can be joined into a single logical interface.
The basic interface characteristics, such as media type, port speed, duplex, and
auto-negotiation, are configured for the physical interface via the Physical
Interfaces page. Ethernet services, QoS, and OAM characteristics are
configured on the logical interface level.
To configure the physical interface parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Physical Interfaces. The Physical
Interfaces page opens.
Figure 127: Physical Interfaces Page

2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Physical
Interfaces - Edit page opens.
Figure 128: Physical Interfaces - Edit Page
3 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the interface.

4 In the Media type field, select the physical interface layer 1 media type.
Options are:
Auto-Type – NA.
RJ45 – An electrical (RJ-45) Ethernet interface.
SFP – An optical (SFP) Ethernet interface.
Radio – A radio interface.
5 In the Auto negotiation field, select On to enable or Off to disable
Auto-Negotiation. When the Media-Type is Radio, Auto Negotiation is
always Off.
6 In the Speed field, select the maximum speed of the interface. Options are:
Ethernet RJ-45 interfaces – 100Mbps HD, 100Mbps FD, and
1000Mpbs FD.
Ethernet SFP interfaces – Only 1000FD is supported.
Radio interfaces – The parameter is read-only and set by the system to
1000FD.
7 In the Duplex field, select the interface's duplex setting (Full-Duplex or
Half-Duplex). Only Full-Duplex is available in this release.
Table 41 describes the status parameters that appear in the Physical Interfaces
page.

Table 41: Physical Interface Status Parameters
Interface location The location of the interface.
Operational Status Indicates whether the interface is currently operational (Up) or non-operational (Down).
Admin Status Indicates whether the interface is currently enabled (Up) or disabled (Down). You can
enable or disable an interface from the Interface Manager page. See Enabling the
Interfaces (Interface Manager).
Media Type The physical interface layer 1 media type.
Actual port speed Displays the actual speed of the interface for the link as agreed by the two sides of the
link after the auto negotiation process.
Actual port duplex Displays the actual duplex status of the interface for the link as agreed by the two sides
of the link after the auto negotiation process.
6.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation

Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
Ethernet port. You can also configure Automatic State Propagation to close the
Ethernet port based on a radio failure at the remote carrier.
Automatic state propagation is configured as pairs of interfaces. Each interface
pair includes a Monitored Interface and a Controlled Interface.
It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic
State Propagation configuration.
To configure an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Automatic State Propagation. The
Automatic State Propagation page opens.
Figure 129: Automatic State Propagation Page

2 Click Add. The Automatic State Propagation - Add page opens.

Figure 130: Automatic State Propagation - Add Page
3 In the Controlled Ethernet interface field, select the interface that will be
disabled upon failure of the Monitored Radio Interface, defined below.
4 In the Monitored Radio interface field, select the Monitored Radio
Interface. The Controlled Ethernet Interface, defined above, is disabled
upon a failure indication on the Monitored Radio Interface.
5 In the Auto state propagation admin field, select Enable to enable
Automatic State Propagation on the interface pair, or Disable to disable
Automatic State Propagation on the pair.
6 Optionally, in the Auto state propagation trigger by remote fault field,
select Enable if you want to configure the system to disable the Controlled
Ethernet Interface upon a radio failure at the remote side of the link from
the Monitored Radio Interface.
7 Optionally, in the Auto state propagation CSF mode admin field, select
Enable or Disable to enable or disable Client Signal Failure (CSF) mode. In
CSF mode, the ASP mechanism does not physically shut down the
Controlled Interface when ASP is triggered. Instead, the ASP mechanism
sends a failure indication message (a CSF message). The CSF message is
used to propagate the failure indication to external equipment.
To edit an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select the interface pair in the Automatic state propagation configuration
table.
2 Click Edit. The Automatic State Propagation – Edit page opens. The Edit
page is similar to the Add page (Figure 130), but the Controlled Ethernet
Interface and Monitored Radio Interface parameters are read-only.
To delete an Automatic State Propagation interface pair:
1 Select the interface pair in the Automatic state propagation configuration
table.
2 Click Delete. The interface pair is removed from the Automatic state
propagation configuration table.
To delete multiple interface pairs:
1 Select the interface pairs in the Automatic state propagation configuration
table or select all the interfaces by selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete. The interface pairs are removed from the Automatic state
propagation configuration table.
6.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics

IP-20 stores and displays statistics in accordance with RMON and RMON2
standards. You can display various peak TX and RX rates (in seconds) and
average TX and RX rates (in seconds), both in bytes and in packets, for each
measured time interval. You can also display the number of seconds in the
interval during which TX and RX rates exceeded the configured threshold.

 RMON Statistics
 Port TX Statistics
 Port RX Statistics
6.5.1 RMON Statistics

To view and reset RMON statistics:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > RMON. The RMON page opens.
Figure 131: RMON Page
 To clear the statistics, click Clear All at the bottom of the page.
 To refresh the statistics, click Refresh at the bottom of the page.

Each column in the RMON page displays RMON statistics for one of the unit’s
interfaces. To hide or display columns:
1 In the header row, select the arrow next to any of the columns.
2 Select Columns.
3 Mark the interfaces you want to display and clear the interfaces you do not
want to display.
Figure 132: RMON Page – Hiding and Displaying Columns

6.5.2 Port TX Statistics

The Ethernet Port TX PM report page displays PMs that measure various peak
transmission rates (in seconds) and average transmission rates (in seconds),
both in bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
The page also displays the number of seconds in the interval during which
transmission rates exceeded the configured threshold.

 Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs
 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port TX PM Statistics per Interface
 Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold
6.5.2.1 Displaying Ethernet Port TX PMs

To display Ethernet Port TX PMs:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Port TX. The Ethernet Port TX PM
Report page opens.
Figure 133: Ethernet Port TX PM Report Page
2 In the Interface field, select the interface for which you want to display
PMs.
To display reports for the past 24 hours, in 15 minute intervals, select
15 minutes.
To display reports for the past month, in daily intervals, select 24
hours.
Table 42 describes the Ethernet TX port PMs.

Table 42: Ethernet TX Port PMs
Interval For 24-hour intervals, displays the date of the interval. For 15-minute intervals,
displays the date and ending time of the interval.
Peak... Average... bytes... Various peak transmission rates (in seconds) and average transmission rates (in
Packets... seconds), both in bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
TX bytes Layer 1 exceed The number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the
threshold (sec) interval. For instructions on setting the threshold, see Setting the Ethernet Port TX
Threshold.
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid. An x
in the column indicates that the values are not valid (for example, because of a
power surge or power failure that occurred during the interval).
To clear the PMs, click Clear All.
6.5.2.2 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port TX PM Statistics per Interface

To select the interfaces for which to gather and display Port TX PMs:
1 In the Ethernet Port TX PM Report page, click PM Admin. The Ethernet PM
Port Admin page opens.
Figure 134: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page
2 Select the interface.

3 Click Enable Port PM or Disable Port PM to enable or disable the
gathering of Port TX PMs on the selected interface.
4 Click Close.

6.5.2.3 Setting the Ethernet Port TX Threshold

The TX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold (sec) column shows, for each
interval, the number of seconds the TX bytes exceeded the specified threshold
during the interval:
To view and set this threshold:
1 In the Ethernet Port TX PM Report page, click Threshold. The Ethernet
Port Tx Threshold page opens.
Figure 135: Ethernet Port Tx Threshold Page
2 Enter a threshold, between 0 and 4294967295.


6.5.3 Port RX Statistics

The Ethernet Port RX PM report page displays PMs that measure various peak
transmission rates (in seconds) and average RX rates (in seconds), both in
bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
The page also displays the number of seconds in the interval during which RX
rates exceeded the configured threshold.

 Displaying Ethernet Port RX PMs
 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port RX PM Statistics per Interface
 Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold
6.5.3.1 Displaying Ethernet Port RX PMs

To display Ethernet Port RX PMs:
1 Select Ethernet > PM & Statistics > Port RX. The Ethernet Port RX PM
Report page opens.
Figure 136: Ethernet Port RX PM Report Page
2 In the Interface field, select the interface for which you want to display
PMs.
To display reports for the past 24 hours, in 15 minute intervals, select
15 minutes.
To display reports for the past month, in daily intervals, select 24
hours.
Table 43 describes the Ethernet RX port PMs.

Table 43: Ethernet RX Port PMs
Peak... Average... bytes... Various peak transmission rates (in seconds) and average RX rates (in seconds),
Packets... both in bytes and in packets, for each measured time interval.
RX bytes Layer 1 exceed The number of seconds the RX bytes exceeded the specified threshold during the
threshold (sec) interval. For instructions on setting the threshold, see Setting the Ethernet Port RX
Threshold.
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid. An x
in the column indicates that the values are not valid (for example, because of a
power surge or power failure that occurred during the interval).
To clear the PMs, click Clear All.
6.5.3.2 Enabling or Disabling Gathering of Port RX PM Statistics per Interface

To select the interfaces for which to gather and display Port RX PMs:
1 In the Ethernet Port RX PM Report page, click PM Admin. The Ethernet PM
Port Admin page opens.
Figure 137: Ethernet PM Port Admin Page
2 Select the interface.

3 Click Enable Port PM or Disable Port PM to enable or disable the
gathering of Port RX PMs on the selected interface.
4 Click Close.

6.5.3.3 Setting the Ethernet Port RX Threshold

The RX bytes Layer 1 exceed threshold (sec) column shows for each
interval, the number of seconds the RX bytes exceeded the specified threshold
during the interval:
To view and set this threshold:
1 In the Ethernet Port RX PM Report page, click Threshold. The Ethernet
Port Rx Threshold page opens.
Figure 138: Ethernet Port Rx Threshold Page
2 Enter a threshold, between 0 and 4294967295.


7. Quality of Service (QoS)

 QoS Overview
 Configuring Classification
 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering)
 Configuring Marking
 Configuring WRED
 Configuring Egress Shaping
 Configuring Scheduling
Note: You can display QoS egress statistics, but only via CLI. For
information, see Displaying Egress Statistics (CLI).
7.1 QoS Overview

Quality of Service (QoS) deals with the way frames are handled within the
switching fabric. QoS is required in order to deal with many different network
scenarios, such as traffic congestion, packet availability, and delay restrictions.
IP-20’s personalized QoS enables operators to handle a wide and diverse
range of scenarios. IP-20’s smart QoS mechanism operates from the frame’s
ingress into the switching fabric until the moment the frame egresses via the
destination port.
QoS capability is very important due to the diverse topologies that exist in
today’s network scenarios. These can include, for example, streams from two
different ports that egress via single port, or a port-to-port connection that
holds hundreds of services. In each topology, a customized approach to
handling QoS will provide the best results.
Figure 139 shows the basic flow of IP-20’s QoS mechanism. Traffic ingresses
(left to right) via the Ethernet or radio interfaces, on the “ingress path.” Based
on the services model, the system determines how to route the traffic. Traffic
is then directed to the most appropriate output queue via the “egress path.”

Figure 139: QoS Block Diagram

Egress
Ingress
Marker
Rate Limit (Optional)
GE/Radio Port Classifier
(Policing) Queue Scheduler/
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
Egress
Ingress
Marker
Rate Limit (Optional)
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
Egress
Ingress CET/Pipe Marker
Rate Limit Services (Optional)
Manager Shaper
Port GE/Radio
(Optional)
Standard QoS/ H-QoS
The ingress path consists of the following QoS building blocks:

 Ingress Classifier – A hierarchical mechanism that deals with ingress
traffic on three different levels: interface, service point, and service. The
classifier determines the exact traffic stream and associates it with the
appropriate service. It also calculates an ingress frame CoS and Color. CoS
and Color classification can be performed on three levels, according to the
user’s configuration.
 Ingress Rate Metering – A hierarchical mechanism that deals with
ingress traffic on three different levels: interface, service point, and service
point CoS. The rate metering mechanism enables the system to measure
the incoming frame rate on different levels using a TrTCM standard MEF
rate meter, and to determine whether to modify the color calculated
during the classification stage.
The egress path consists of the following QoS building blocks:
 Queue Manager – This is the mechanism responsible for managing the
transmission queues, utilizing smart WRED per queue and per packet
color (Green or Yellow).
 Scheduling and Shaping – A hierarchical mechanism that is responsible
for scheduling the transmission of frames from the transmission queues,
based on priority among queues, Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) in bytes
per each transmission queue, and eligibility to transmit based on required
shaping on several different levels (per queue, per service bundle, and per
port).
 Marker – This mechanism provides the ability to modify priority bits in
frames based on the calculated CoS and Color.
For a more detailed description of QoS in the IP-20, refer to the Technical
Description for the IP-20 product type you are using.

7.2 Configuring Classification

The hierarchical classifier consists of the following levels:
 Logical interface-level classification
 Service point-level classification
 Service level classification
This section explains how to configure classification at the logical interface
level.
 For instructions how to configure classification at the service point level,
see Ethernet Service Points – Ingress Attributes.
 For instructions how to configure classification at the service level, see
Adding an Ethernet Service.

 Classification Overview
 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface
 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification Table
 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table
 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table
 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table
In addition to the procedures described in this section, you can specify a
specific CoS and Color for a specific VLAN ID. This is the highest classification
priority on the logical interface level, and overrides any other classification
criteria at the logical interface level. Classification by VLAN ID can only be
configured via CLI. See Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI).
7.2.1 Classification Overview

IP-20 supports a hierarchical classification mechanism. The classification
mechanism examines incoming frames and determines their CoS and Color.
The benefit of hierarchical classification is that it provides the ability to “zoom
in” or “zoom out”, enabling classification at higher or lower levels of the
hierarchy. The nature of each traffic stream defines which level of the
hierarchical classifier to apply, or whether to use several levels of the
classification hierarchy in parallel.
Classification takes place on the logical interface level according to the
following priorities:
VLAN ID (CLI-only – see Configuring VLAN Classification and Override
(CLI))
802.1p bits
DSCP bits
MPLS EXP field
Default interface CoS

IP-20 performs the classification on each frame ingressing the system via the
logical interface. Classification is performed step by step from the highest
priority to the lowest priority classification method. Once a match is found, the
classifier determines the CoS and Color decision for the frame for the logical
interface-level.
For example, if the frame is an untagged IP Ethernet frame, a match will not be
found until the third priority level (DSCP). The CoS and Color values defined
for the frame’s DSCP value will be applied to the frame.
You can disable some of these classification methods by configuring them as
un-trusted. For example, if 802.1p classification is configured as un-trusted for
a specific interface, the classification mechanism does not perform
classification by UP bits. This is useful, for example, if classification is based on
DSCP priority bits.
If no match is found at the logical interface level, the default CoS is applied to
incoming frames at this level. In this case, the Color of the frame is assumed to
be Green.
7.2.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface

This section explains how to configure the classification criteria per each
logical interface. The following sections explain how to modify the
classification tables per bit type.
To configure the classification criteria for a logical interface:
1 Select Ethernet > Interfaces > Logical Interfaces. The Logical Interfaces
page opens.
Figure 140: Logical Interfaces Page

2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Logical
Interfaces - Edit page opens.
Figure 141: Logical Interfaces - Edit Page
3 Configure the parameters described in Table 44.

Note: The Ingress byte compensation and Egress byte
compensation fields are described in Configuring the
Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation.

Table 44: Logical Interface Classification Parameters
Trust VLAN UP bits Select the interface's trust mode for user priority (UP) bits:
 Trust – The interface performs QoS and color classification according to UP and
CFI/DEI bits according to user-configurable tables for 802.1q UP bits (C-VLAN
frames) or 802.1AD UP bits (S-VLAN frames). VLAN UP bit classification has
priority over DSCP and MPLS classification, so that if a match is found with the UP
bit of the ingressing frame, DSCP values and MPLS bits are not considered.
 Un-Trust – The interface does not consider 802.1 UP bits during classification.
Trust DSCP Select the interface's trust mode for DSCP:
 Trust – The interface performs QoS and color classification according to a
user-configurable table for DSCP to CoS and color classification. DSCP
classification has priority over MPLS classification, so that if a match is found with
the DSCP value of the ingressing frame, MPLS bits are not considered.
 Un-Trust – The interface does not consider DSCP during classification.
Trust MPLS Select the interface's trust mode for MPLS bits:
 Trust – The interface performs QoS and color classification according to a
user-configurable table for MPLS EXP to CoS and color classification.
 Un-Trust – The interface does not consider MPLS bits during classification.
Default port CoS Select the default CoS value for frames passing through the interface (0 to 7). This value
can be overwritten on the service point and service level.

7.2.3 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1Q UP and CFI Bit Classification

Table
To modify the classification criteria for 802.1Q User Priority (UP) bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > 802.1Q. The 802.1Q
Classification page opens.
Figure 142: 802.1Q Classification Page
2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1Q
Classification – Edit page opens.
Figure 143: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page

3 Modify the parameters you want to change:

802.1Q UP – Read-only. The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
802.1Q CFI – Read-only. The CFI bit to be mapped.
802.1Q CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and CFI.
802.1Q Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP
and CFI.
7.2.4 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table
To modify the classification criteria for 802.1AD User Priority (UP) bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > 802.1AD. The 802.1AD
Classification page opens.
Figure 144: 802.1AD Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1AD
Classification - Edit page opens.
Figure 145: 802.1Q Classification - Edit Page

802.1AD UP – Read-only. The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
802.1ADQ DEI – Read-only. The DEI bit to be mapped.
802.1AD CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and
DEI.
802.1AD Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP
and DEI.

7.2.5 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table

You can configure the classification criteria for Differentiated Service Code
Point (DSCP) priority values. The DSCP is a 6-bit length field inside the IP
datagram header carrying priority information. Classification by DSCP can be
used for untagged frames, as well as 802.1Q tagged or provider VLAN tagged
frames.
To modify the classification criteria for DSCPs:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > DSCP. The DSCP Classification
page opens.
Figure 146: DSCP Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The DSCP Classification -
Edit page opens.
Figure 147: DSCP Classification - Edit Page

DSCP – Read-only. The DSCP value to be mapped.
Binary – Read-only. The binary representation of the DSCP value.
Description – Read-only. The description of the DSCP value.
CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.
Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated DSCP value.

7.2.6 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table

MPLS bits are used to provide QoS capabilities by utilizing the bits set in the
MPLS labels. Classification by MPLS bits is supported in both untagged and
802.1Q provider-tagged frames.
To modify the classification criteria for MPLS EXP bits:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Classification > MPLS. The MPLS Classification
page opens.
Figure 148: MPLS Classification Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The MPLS Classification -
Edit page opens.
Figure 149: MPLS Classification - Edit Page

MPLS EXP – Read-only. The MPLS (experimental) bit to be mapped.
CoS – The CoS assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP value.
Color – The Color assigned to frames with the designated MPLS EXP
value.
7.3 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering)

 Policer (Rate Metering) Overview
 Configuring Policer Profiles
 Assigning Policers to Interfaces
 Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation
7.3.1 Policer (Rate Metering) Overview

The IP-20 switching fabric supports hierarchical policing on the logical
interface level. You can define up to 250 rate meter (policer) profiles.
Note: Policing on the service point level, and the service point and
CoS level, is planned for future release.
IP-20's policer mechanism is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism
(TrTCM). The policers can change a frame’s color and CoS settings based on
CIR/EIR + CBS/EBS, which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for
implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA
requirements.
The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected frame. Based
on this color, the queue management mechanism decides whether to drop the
frame or to pass it to the queue.

7.3.2 Configuring Policer Profiles

 Adding a Policer Profile
 Editing a Policer Profile
 Deleting a Policer Profile
7.3.2.1 Adding a Policer Profile

To add a policer profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Policer > Policer Profile. The Policer Profile
page opens.
Figure 150: Policer Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Policer Profile - Add page opens.

Figure 151: Policer Profile - Add Page
3 Configure the profile’s parameters. See Table 45 for a description of the

policer profile parameters.
Table 45: Policer Profile Parameters
Profile ID A unique ID for the policer profile. You can choose any unused value from 1 to 250.
Once you have added the profile, you cannot change the Profile ID.
Description A description of the policer profile.
Policer type Read-only. The type of policer. Always set to MEF-TRTCM.
CIR Enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) for the policer, in bits per second. Permitted
values are 0, or 64,000 through 1,000,000,000 bps. If the value is 0, all incoming CIR
traffic is dropped.
CBS Enter the Committed Burst Rate (CBR) for the policer, in Kbytes. Permitted values are 2
through 128 Kbytes.
EIR Enter the Excess Information Rate (EIR) for the policer, in bits per second. Permitted
values are 0, or 64,000 through 1,000,000,000 bps. If the value is 0, all incoming EIR
traffic is dropped.
EBS Enter the Excess Burst Rate (EBR) for the policer, in Kbytes. Permitted values are 2
through 128 Kbytes.

Color mode Select how the policer treats packets that ingress with a CFI or DEI field set to 1 (yellow).
Options are:
 Color Aware – All packets that ingress with a CFI/DEI field set to 1 (yellow) are
treated as EIR packets, even if credits remain in the CIR bucket.
 Color Blind – All ingress packets are treated as green regardless of their CFI/DEI
value. A color-blind policer discards any former color decisions.
Coupling flag Select Enable or Disable. When enabled, frames that ingress as yellow may be
converted to green when there are no available yellow credits in the EIR bucket.
Coupling Flag is only relevant in Color Aware mode.
7.3.2.2 Editing a Policer Profile

To edit a policer profile, select the profile in the Police Profile table and click
Edit. The Policer Profile Table Edit page opens.
The Policer Profile Table - Edit page is identical to the Policer Profile Table -
Add page (Figure 151). You can edit any parameter that can be configured in
the Policer Profile Table Add page, except the Profile ID.
7.3.2.3 Deleting a Policer Profile

You cannot delete a policer profile that is attached to a logical interface. You
must first remove the profile from the logical interface, then delete the profile.
See Assigning Policers to Interfaces.
To delete a policer profile, select the profile in the Police Profile table and click
Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple policer profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Policer Profile table or select all the profiles by
selecting the check box in the top row.
2 Click Delete. The profiles are deleted.
7.3.3 Assigning Policers to Interfaces

To assign policers to a logical interface:
page opens (Figure 140).
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and
click Policers. The Policers page opens.

Figure 152: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Unicast Policer (Default)
For a logical interface, you can assign policers to the following traffic flows:
 Unicast Policer
 Multicast Policer
 Broadcast Policer
 Ethertype Policers
7.3.3.1 Assigning Unicast Policers

To assign a policer for unicast traffic to a logical interface:
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration Table and
click Policers. The Policers page opens. By default, the Policers page opens
to the Unicast Policer table (Figure 152).
3 In the Policer profile field, select a profile from the policer profiles
defined in the system. The Policer profile drop-down list includes the ID
and description of all defined profiles.
4 In the Unicast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on unicast
traffic flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable policing on
unicast traffic flows from the logical interface.
5 Click Apply.

7.3.3.2 Assigning Multicast Policers

To assign a policer for multicast traffic to a logical interface:
3 Select Multicast Policer. The Multicast Policer table appears.
Figure 153: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Multicast Policer
5 In the Multicast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on multicast
traffic flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable policing on
multicast traffic flows from the logical interface.
6 Click Apply.
7.3.3.3 Assigning Broadcast Policers

To assign a policer for broadcast traffic to a logical interface:
3 Select Broadcast Policer. The Broadcast Policer table appears.

Figure 154: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Broadcast Policer
5 In the Broadcast admin field, select Enable to enable policing on
broadcast traffic flows from the logical interface, or Disable to disable
policing on broadcast traffic flows from the logical interface.
6 Click Apply.
7.3.3.4 Assigning Ethertype Policers

You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value.
To assign a policer to an Ethertype:
2 Select the interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration Table and
3 Select Ethertype type 1 Policer. The Ethertype type 1 Policer table appears.

Figure 155: Logical Interfaces – Policers Page – Ethertype Policer
4 In the Ethertype 1 profile field, select a profile from the policer profiles
defined in the system. The Ethertype 1 profile drop-down list includes
the ID and description of all defined profiles.
5 In the Ethertype 1 user value field, enter the Ethertype value to which
you want to apply this policer. The field length is 4 nibbles (for example,
0x0806 - ARP).
6 In the Ethertype 1 admin field, select Enable to enable policing on the
logical interface for the specified ethertype, or Disable to disable policing
on the logical interface for the specified ethertype.
7 Click Apply.
8 To assign policers to additional Ethertypes, select Ethertype type 2
Policer and Ethertype type 3 Policer and repeat the steps above.
7.3.4 Configuring the Ingress and Egress Byte Compensation

You can define the ingress and egress byte compensation value per logical
interface. The policer attached to the interface uses these values to
compensate for Layer 1 non-effective traffic bytes.
To define the ingress byte compensation value for a logical interface:
2 Select the interface you want to configure and click Edit. The Logical
Interfaces - Edit page opens (Figure 141).
3 In the Ingress byte compensation field, enter the ingress byte
compensation value, in bytes. Permitted values are 0 to 32 bytes. The
default value is 20 bytes.

4 In the Egress byte compensation field, enter the egress byte

compensation value, in bytes. Permitted values are 0 to 32 bytes. The
default value is 0 bytes. Only even values are permitted.
7.4 Configuring Marking

 Marking Overview
 Enabling Marking
 Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table
 Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table
7.4.1 Marking Overview

When enabled, IP-20's marking mechanism modifies each frame’s 802.1p UP
bit and CFI/DEI bits according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color)
field is modified according to the classifier and policer decision. The color is
first determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer.
Green color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is
represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1. Marking is performed on egress frames
that are VLAN-tagged.
The marking is performed according to global mapping tables that describe
the 802.1p UP bits and the CFI bits (for C-VLAN tags) or DEI bits (for S VLAN
tags). The marking bit in the service point egress attributes determines
whether the frame is marked as green or according to the calculated color.
Note: The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless
of whether the marking bit is set.
Regular marking is only performed when:
 The outer frame is S-VLAN, and S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled, or
 The outer frame is C-VLAN, and C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled.
If marking and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both
disabled, special marking is applied. Special marking means that marking is
performed, but only according to the values defined for Green frames in the
802.1Q and 802.1AD marking tables.
When marking is performed, the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits are
re-marked according to the calculated CoS and color, and the mapping table
for C-VLAN or S-VLAN.
7.4.2 Enabling Marking

Marking is enabled and disabled on the service point level. See Ethernet
Service Points – Egress Attributes.

7.4.3 Modifying the 802.1Q Marking Table

The 802.1Q Marking table enables you to modify the CoS to UP and CFI bit
mapping that is implemented when marking is enabled.
To modify the 802.1Q Marking table:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Marking > 802.1Q. The 802.1Q Marking page
opens. Each row in the 802.1Q Marking page represents a CoS and color
combination.
Figure 156: 802.1Q Marking Page
2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1Q Marking -
Edit page opens.
Figure 157: 802.1Q Marking - Edit Page

3 Enter the new 802.1Q UP and 802.1Q CFI values.

7.4.4 Modifying the 802.1AD Marking Table

The 802.1AD Marking table enables you to modify the CoS to UP and DEI bit
mapping that is implemented when marking is enabled.
To modify the 802.1AD Marking table:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Marking > 802.1AD. The 802.1AD Marking page
opens. Each row in the 802.1AD Marking page represents a CoS and color
combination.
Figure 158: 802.1AD Marking Page

2 Select the row you want to modify and click Edit. The 802.1AD Marking -
Edit page opens.
Figure 159: 802.1AD Marking - Edit Page
3 Enter the new 802.1AD UP and 802.1AD DEI values.

7.5 Configuring WRED

 WRED Overview
 Configuring WRED Profiles
 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues
7.5.1 WRED Overview

Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) enables differentiation between
higher and lower priority traffic based on CoS. You can define up to 30 WRED
profiles. Each profile contains a green traffic curve and a yellow traffic curve.
This curve describes the probability of randomly dropping frames as a
function of queue occupancy.
The system also includes two pre-defined read-only profiles. These profiles
are assigned profile IDs 31 and 32.
A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue. The WRED profile assigned to
the queue determines whether or not to drop incoming packets according to
the occupancy of the queue. As the queue occupancy grows, the probability of
dropping each incoming frame increases as well. As a consequence,
statistically more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs.

7.5.2 Configuring WRED Profiles

 Adding a WRED Profile
 Editing a WRED Profile
 Deleting a WRED Profile
7.5.2.1 Adding a WRED Profile

To add a WRED profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > WRED > WRED Profile. The WRED Profile page
opens.
Figure 160: WRED Profile Page
2 Click ADD. The WRED Profile - Add page opens, with default values
displayed.
Figure 161: WRED Profile - Add Page

3 In the WRED Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile.

Permitted values are 1-30.
4 In the Green curve min point field, enter the minimum throughput of
green packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). When this
value is reached, the system begins dropping green packets in the queue.
5 In the Green curve max point field, enter the maximum throughput of
green packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). When this
value is reached, all green packets in the queue are dropped.
6 In the Green curve max drop ratio field, enter the maximum percentage
(1-100) of dropped green packets for queues with this profile.
7 In the Yellow curve min point field, enter the minimum throughput of
yellow packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). When this
value is reached, the system begins dropping yellow packets in the queue.
8 In the Yellow curve max point field, enter the maximum throughput of
yellow packets for queues with this profile, in Kbytes (0-8192). After this
value is reached, all yellow packets in the queue are dropped.
9 In the Yellow curve max drop ratio field, enter the maximum percentage
(1-100) of dropped yellow packets for queues with this profile.
7.5.2.2 Editing a WRED Profile

To edit a WRED profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > WRED > WRED Profile. The WRED Profile page
opens (Figure 160).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The WRED Profile – Edit
page opens. This page is similar to the WRED Profile – Add page
(Figure 161). You can edit any parameter except the WRED Profile ID.
3 Modify the profile.
7.5.2.3 Deleting a WRED Profile

You cannot delete a WRED profile that is assigned to a queue. You must first
remove the WRED profile from the queue, then delete the WRED profile. See
Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues.
To delete a WRED profile, select the profile in the WRED Profile Configuration
table (Figure 160) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple WRED profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the WRED Profile Configuration table or select all the
profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.

7.5.3 Assigning WRED Profiles to Queues

To assign a WRED profile to a queue:
2 Select an interface in the Ethernet Logical Port Configuration table and
click WRED. The WRED page opens.
Figure 162: Logical Interfaces – WRED Page
3 In the Show Service bundle ID field, select 1.

Note: Service Bundles are bundles of queues, grouped together in
order to configure common egress characteristics for
specific services. In the current release, only Service Bundle
1 is supported.
4 Select a CoS Queue ID and click Edit. The Logical Interfaces – WRED – Edit
page opens.
Figure 163: Logical Interfaces – WRED - Edit Page

5 In the Profile ID field, select the WRED profile you want to assign to the
selected queue.
7.6 Configuring Egress Shaping

 Egress Shaping Overview
 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles
 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles
 Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue
 Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle
7.6.1 Egress Shaping Overview

Egress shaping determines the traffic profile for each queue. IP-20 can
perform queue shaping on the following levels:
 Queue Level – Single leaky bucket shaping. On the queue level, you can
configure up to 31 single leaky bucket shaper profiles. If no profile is
attached to the queue, no egress shaping is performed on that queue.
 Service Bundle Level – Dual leaky bucket shaping. On the service bundle
level, users can configure up to 256 dual leaky bucket shaper profiles. If no
profile is attached to the service bundle, no egress shaping is performed on
that service bundle.
 Interface Level – Single leaky bucket shaping.
Note: Egress shaping on the interface level is planned for future
release.
7.6.2 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles

 Adding a Queue Shaper Profile
 Editing a Queue Shaper Profile
 Deleting a Queue Shaper Profile

7.6.2.1 Adding a Queue Shaper Profile

To add a queue shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles. The Queue Shaper
Profile page opens.
Figure 164: Queue Shaper Profile Page
2 Click Add. The Queue Shaper – Add page opens, with default values
displayed.
Figure 165: Queue Shaper Profile – Add Page
3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile. Permitted

values are 1-31.
4 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the profile.
5 In the CIR field, enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned to
the profile, in bits per second. Permitted values are:
16,000 - 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
32,000,000 - 131,008,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
7.6.2.2 Editing a Queue Shaper Profile

To edit a queue shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Queue Profiles. The Queue Shaper
Profile page opens (Figure 164).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Queue Shaper Profile
– Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Queue Shaper Profile – Add
page (Figure 165). You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID.
7.6.2.3 Deleting a Queue Shaper Profile

You cannot delete a queue shaper profile that is assigned to a queue. You must
first remove the profile from the queue, then delete the profile. See Assigning a
Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue.
To delete a queue shaper profile, select the profile in the Queue Shaper
Profiles Configuration table (Figure 164) and click Delete. The profile is
deleted.
To delete multiple queue shaper profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Queue Shaper Profiles Configuration table or
select all the profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.6.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles

 Adding a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
 Editing a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
 Deleting a Service Bundle Shaper Profile
7.6.3.1 Adding a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

To add a service bundle shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles. The Service
Bundle Shaper Profile page opens.

Figure 166: Service Bundle Shaper Profile Page
2 Click Add. The Service Bundle Shaper Profile – Add page opens, with
default values displayed.
Figure 167: Service Bundle Shaper Profile – Add Page
3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique ID to identify the profile. Permitted

values are 1-31.
4 Optionally, in the Description field, enter a description of the profile.
5 In the CIR field, enter the Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned to
the profile, in bits per second. Permitted values are:
0 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
6 In the PIR field, enter the Peak Information Rate (PIR) assigned to the
profile, in bits per second. Permitted values are:
16,000 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000.
32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000.
7.6.3.2 Editing a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

To edit a service bundle shaper profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Shaper > Service Bundle Profiles. The Service
Bundle Shaper Profile page opens (Figure 166).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Service Bundle
Shaper Profile – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Service Bundle
Shaper Profile – Add page (Figure 167). You can edit any parameter except
the Profile ID.
7.6.3.3 Deleting a Service Bundle Shaper Profile

You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile that is assigned to a service
bundle. You must first remove the profile from the service bundle, then delete
the profile.
To delete a service bundle shaper profile, select the profile in the Service
Bundle Shaper Profiles Configuration table (Figure 166) and click Delete. The
profile is deleted.
To delete multiple service bundle shaper profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Service Bundle Shaper Profiles Configuration
table or select all the profiles by selecting the check box in the top row.
7.6.4 Assigning a Queue Shaper Profile to a Queue

To assign a queue shaper profile to a queue:
click Shaper. The Logical Interfaces – Shaper page opens, with the Egress
Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default. All queue shaper
profiles defined in the system are listed in the table.

Figure 168: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Queue Shaper
3 Click Add. The Egress Queue Shaper Configuration – Add page opens.
Figure 169: Logical Interfaces – Egress Queue Shaper Configuration – Add Page
Note: In this release, only one service bundle (Service Bundle

ID 1) is supported.
4 In the CoS queue ID field, select the CoS queue ID of the queue to which
you want to assign the shaper. Queues are numbered according to CoS
value, from 0 to 7.
5 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured queue shaper
profiles. See Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles.
6 In the Shaper Admin field, select Enable to enable egress queue shaping
for the selected queue, or Disable to disable egress queue shaping for the
selected queue.

To assign a different queue shaper profile to a queue:

Queue Shaper Configuration table open by default (Figure 168).
4 Select the row you want to edit and click Edit. The Egress Queue Shaper
Configuration – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Egress Queue
Shaper Configuration – Add page (Figure 169).
5 To assign a different egress queue shaper profile, select the profile in the
Profile ID field.
6 To enable or disable egress queue shaping for the selected queue, select
Enable to enable egress queue shaping for the queue, or Disable to
disable egress queue shaping for the queue.
7.6.5 Assigning a Service Bundle Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle

To assign a service bundle shaper profile to a service bundle:
3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper
Configuration table appears. All service bundle shaper profiles defined in
the system are listed in the table.

Figure 170: Logical Interfaces – Shaper – Egress Service Bundle Shaper
4 Click Add. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add page
opens.
Figure 171: Logical Interfaces – Egress Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add
Page
Note: In this release, only one service bundle (Service Bundle

ID 1) is supported.
5 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured service bundle
shaper profiles. See Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles.
6 In the Shaper Admin field, select Enable to enable egress service bundle
shaping, or Disable to disable egress service bundle shaping.

To assign a different service bundle shaper profile:

3 Select Egress Service Bundle Shaper. The Egress Service Bundle Shaper
Configuration table appears (Figure 170). All service bundle shaper
profiles defined in the system are listed in the table.
4 Select the row you want to edit and click Edit. The Egress Service Bundle
Shaper Configuration – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Egress
Service Bundle Shaper Configuration – Add page (Figure 171).
5 To assign a different egress queue shaper profile, select the profile in the
Profile ID field.
6 To enable or disable egress service bundle shaping, select Enable or
Disable.
7.7 Configuring Scheduling

 Scheduling Overview
 Configuring Priority Profiles
 Configuring WFQ Profiles
 Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface
 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface
7.7.1 Scheduling Overview

Scheduling determines the priority among the queues. IP-20 provides a
unique hierarchical scheduling model that includes four priorities, with
Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) within each priority, and shaping per port and
per queue.
The scheduler scans the queues and determines which queue is ready to
transmit. If more than one queue is ready to transmit, the scheduler
determines which queue transmits first based on:
 Queue Priority – A queue with higher priority is served before
lower-priority queues.
 Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) – If two or more queues have the same
priority and are ready to transmit, the scheduler transmits frames from
the queues based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames
per queue based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue.

7.7.2 Configuring Priority Profiles

Scheduling priority profiles determine the queue priority. Each profile
contains eight CoS-based priorities, corresponding to eight queues in an
interface to which the profile is assigned. You can configure up to eight
priority profiles. A ninth profile, Profile ID 9, is pre-configured. You can
configure Green priorities from 4 (highest) to 1 (lowest). An additional four
Yellow priority profiles are defined automatically.

 Adding a Scheduler Priority Profile
 Editing a Service Scheduler Priority Profile
 Deleting a Scheduler Priority Profile
7.7.2.1 Adding a Scheduler Priority Profile

To add a scheduler priority profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles. The Scheduler
Priority Profile page opens.
Figure 172: Scheduler Priority Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Scheduler Priority Profile – Add page opens, with default
values displayed.
Figure 173: Scheduler Priority Profile – Add Page

3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique Profile ID between 1 and 8.

4 For each CoS value, enter the Green priority, from 4 (highest) to 1 (lowest)
(1-4). This priority is applied to Green frames with that CoS egressing a
queue to which the profile is assigned.
5 Optionally, you can enter a description of up to 20 characters in the field to
the right of each CoS value.
Note: The Yellow priority values are assigned automatically by the
system.
7.7.2.2 Editing a Service Scheduler Priority Profile

To edit a scheduler priority profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > Priority Profiles. The Scheduler
Priority Profile page opens (Figure 172).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Scheduler Priority
Profile – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Scheduler Priority
Profile – Add page (Figure 173). You can edit any parameter except the
Profile ID.
7.7.2.3 Deleting a Scheduler Priority Profile

To delete a scheduler priority profile, select the profile in the Scheduler
Priority Profiles page (Figure 172) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple scheduler priority profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Scheduler Priority Profiles page or select all the

7.7.3 Configuring WFQ Profiles

WFQ profiles determine the relative weight per queue. Each profile contains
eight CoS-based weight values, corresponding to eight queues in an interface
to which the profile is assigned. You can configure up to five WFQ profiles. A
sixth profile, Profile ID 1, is pre-configured.

 Adding a WFQ Profile
 Editing a WFQ Priority Profile
 Deleting a WFQ Profile
7.7.3.1 Adding a WFQ Profile

To add a WFQ profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles. The Scheduler WFQ
Profile page opens.
Figure 174: Scheduler WFQ Profile Page

2 Click Add. The Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add page opens, with default
values displayed.
Figure 175: Scheduler WFQ Profile – Add Page
3 In the Profile ID field, select a unique Profile ID between 2 and 7. Profile

ID 1 is used for a pre-defined WFQ profile.
4 For each CoS value, enter the weight for that CoS, from 1 to 20.
7.7.3.2 Editing a WFQ Priority Profile

To edit a scheduler WFQ profile:
1 Select Ethernet > QoS > Scheduler > WFQ Profiles. The Scheduler WFQ
Profile page opens (Figure 174).
2 Select the profile you want to edit and click Edit. The Scheduler WFQ
Profile – Edit page opens. This page is similar to the Scheduler WFQ Profile
– Add page (Figure 175). You can edit any parameter except the Profile ID.
7.7.3.3 Deleting a WFQ Profile

To delete a scheduler WFQ profile, select the profile in the Scheduler WFQ
Profiles page (Figure 174) and click Delete. The profile is deleted.
To delete multiple scheduler WFQ profiles:
1 Select the profiles in the Scheduler WFQ Profiles page or select all the

7.7.4 Assigning a Priority Profile to an Interface

To assign a priority profile to an interface:
click Scheduler. The Logical Interfaces – Scheduler page opens, with the
Egress Port Scheduling Priority Configuration – Edit page open by default.
Figure 176: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling Priority
3 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured scheduling priority

profiles. See Configuring Priority Profiles.
7.7.5 Assigning a WFQ Profile to an Interface

To assign a WFQ profile to an interface:
click Scheduler. The Logical Interfaces – Scheduler page opens, with the
Egress Port Scheduling Priority Configuration – Edit page open by default
(Figure 176).

3 Select Egress Port Scheduling WFQ. The Egress Port Scheduling WFQ
Configuration – Edit page opens.
Figure 177: Logical Interfaces – Scheduler – Egress Port Scheduling WFQ
4 In the Profile ID field, select from a list of configured scheduling priority

profiles. See Configuring WFQ Profiles.

8. Ethernet Protocols
 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)
 Configuring LLDP
Related Topics:
 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)
8.1 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)

 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview
 Adding an ABN entity
 Editing an ABN Entity
 Deleting an ABN Entity
 Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity
8.1.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview

Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN), also known as Ethernet Operation
and Maintenance (EOAM), enables third party applications to learn about
bandwidth changes in a radio link when ACM is active. Once ABN is enabled,
the radio unit reports bandwidth information to upstream third-party
switches.
The ABN entity creates a logical relationship between a radio interface or a
logical group of radio interfaces, called the Monitored Interface, and an
Ethernet interface or a logical group of Ethernet interface, called the Control
Interface. When bandwidth degrades from the nominal value in the Monitored
Interface, messages relaying the actual bandwidth values are periodically sent
over the Control Interface. A termination message is sent once the bandwidth
returns to its nominal level.

8.1.2 Adding an ABN entity

To add an ABN entity:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > Adaptive Bandwidth Notification. The
ABN (Adaptive Bandwidth Notification) page opens.
Figure 178: ABN (Adaptive Bandwidth Notification) Page
2 Click Add underneath the ABN Configuration and Status table. The ABN
Configuration and Status – Add page opens.
Figure 179: ABN Configuration and Status – Add Page

3 In the Name field, enter a name for the ABN entity.

4 In the Control Interface field, select the Control Interface. This is the
interface to which messages are transmitted when bandwidth in the
monitored interface degrades below the nominal value.
5 In the Monitored Interface field, select the Monitored Interface. This is
the interface which is constantly monitored for its bandwidth value.
6 In the Admin field, select is-Up to enable ABN monitoring or is-Down to
disable ABN monitoring.
7 In the Monitoring Interval field, select the interval for which a weighted
average of the bandwidth readings is calculated.
8 In the Holdoff Time field, specify the amount of time the system waits
when bandwidth degradation occurs, before transmitting a message. If the
bandwidth is below the nominal value when the holdoff period ends, the
system starts transmitting messages.
9 In the MEL field, select the Maintenance Level in the messages.
10 In the Tx Period field, specify how often messages are transmitted when
bandwidth is below the nominal value. Options are:
4 – One second.
5 – Ten seconds.
6 – One minute.
11 In the Tx VLAN field, specify the VLAN on which messages are transmitted.
Options are:
Untagged.
1 – 4090.
Table 46 describes the status (read-only) fields in the ABN Configuration and
Status table.
Table 46: ABN Status Parameters
Nominal BW The nominal bandwidth of the link.
Current BW The weighted average of the bandwidth readings taken during the last Monitoring
Interval.
Version The ABN version used.
8.1.3 Editing an ABN Entity

To edit an ABN entity:
ABN (Adaptive Bandwidth Notification) page opens (Figure 178).
2 Select the ABN entity in the ABN Configuration and Status Table.

3 Click Edit. The ABN Entity - Edit page opens.

The Edit page is similar to the ABN Configuration and Status – Add page
(Figure 179). However, the Control interface and Monitored
interface parameters are read-only, and additional read-only parameters
display the Nominal BW, the Current BW, and the Version.
4 Edit the ABN entity attributes, as described in Adding an ABN entity.
8.1.4 Deleting an ABN Entity

To delete an ABN entity:
3 Click Delete. The ABN entity is removed from the ABN Configuration and
Status Table.
8.1.5 Viewing the Statistics for an ABN Entity

To view the statistics for an ABN entity:
3 Click Statistics. The ABN Configuration and Status - Statistics page opens.
Figure 180: ABN Configuration and Status - Statistics Page
Table 47 describes the ABN entity statistics.

Table 47: ABN Entity Statistics Parameters
Name The name of the ABN entity.
Tx Messages The number of bandwidth messages transmitted since the counter was last reset.
Counter
Holdoff State The Holdoff state of the monitored link. Options are:
 Off – Holdoff time measurement has not been started.
 Counting – Holdoff time measurement has started but the timeout has not elapsed
yet.
 On – Holdoff measurement time has ended and the current bandwidth is still below
the nominal value.
Holdoff Start Time The Holdoff start time for the last event.
(mSec)
Last Tx message The last transmitted bandwidth message, in hexadecimal notation.
8.2 Configuring LLDP

 LLDP Overview
 Displaying Peer Status
 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters
 Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters
 Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters
 Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters
 Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters
 Displaying LLDP Statistics
8.2.1 LLDP Overview

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral layer 2 protocol that
can be used by a network element attached to a specific LAN segment to
advertise its identity and capabilities and to receive identity and capacity
information from physically adjacent layer 2 peers. LLDP is a part of the IEEE
802.1AB – 2005 standard that enables automatic network connectivity
discovery by means of a port identity information exchange between each port
and its peer. Each port periodically sends and also expects to receive frames
called Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDU). LLDPDUs contain
information in TLV format about port identity, such as MAC address and
IP address.
LLDP is used to send notifications to the NMS, based on data of the local unit
and data gathered from peer systems. These notifications enable the NMS to
build an accurate network topology.

8.2.2 Displaying Peer Status

To display a summary of the important LLDP management information
regarding the unit's nearest neighbor (peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Remote Management. The LLDP
Remote Management page opens.
Figure 181: LLDP Remote System Management Page
Table 48 describes the LLDP remote system management parameters. These

parameters are read-only.
Table 48: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters
Local Interface Location The location of the local interface.
Management Address The octet string used to identify the management address component associated
with the remote system.
Address Sub Type The type of management address identifier encoding used in the associated
LLDP Agent Remote Management Address.
Time Mark The time the entry was created.

8.2.3 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters

This section explains how to define the general LLDP parameters for the unit.
For instructions on defining port-specific parameters, see Configuring the
LLDP Port Parameters.
Note: The management IP address advertised by the local element
depends on the IP protocol (IPv4 or IPv6) configured for the
unit. See Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating
Communications.
To display and configure the general LLDP parameters for the unit:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration >
Parameters. The LLDP Configuration Parameters page opens.
Figure 182: LLDP Configuration Parameters Page
2 Modify the configurable parameters, described in Table 50.

3 Click Apply.
Table 49 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Configuration
Parameters page.

Table 49: LLDP Read-Only Configuration Parameters
Max TX Credit Displays the maximum number of consecutive LLDPDUs that can be
transmitted at any one time. In this release, the Max TX Credit is set at 5.
Fast TX Interval (Seconds) Displays, in seconds, the interval at which LLDP frames are transmitted
during fast transmission periods, such as when the unit detects a new peer.
In this release, the Fast TX Interval is set at 1.
Fast TX The initial value used to initialize the variable which determines the number
of transmissions that are made during fast transmission periods. In this
release, the Fast TX No. is set at 4.
Reinit Delay (Seconds) Defines the minimum time, in seconds, the system waits after the LLDP
Admin status becomes Disabled until it will process a request to reinitialize
LLDP. For instructions on disabling or enabling LLDP on a port, see
Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters.
In this release, the Reinit Delay is set at 2.
Table 50: LLDP Configurable Configuration Parameters
TX Interval (Seconds) Defines the interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are transmitted. You
can select a value from 5 to 32768. The default value is 30.
Notification Interval (Seconds) Defines the interval, in seconds, between transmission of LLDP notifications
during normal transmission periods. You can select a value from 5 to 3600.
The default value is 10.
Hold Multiplier Defines the time-to-live (TTL) multiplier. The TTL determines the length of
time LLDP frames are retained by the receiving device. The TTL is
determined by multiplying the TX Interval by the Hold Multiplier.
You can select a value from 2 to 10. The default value is 4.

8.2.4 Configuring the LLDP Port Parameters

To enable LLDP per port and determine how LLDP operates and which TLVs
are sent for each port:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Configuration > Port
Configuration. The LLDP Port Configuration page opens.
Figure 183: LLDP Port Configuration Page
2 Select an interface and click Edit. The LLDP Port Configuration - Edit page
opens.
Figure 184: LLDP Port Configuration - Edit Page

3 In the Admin field, select from the following options to define how the
LLDP protocol operates for this port:
TX Only – LLDP agent transmits LLDP frames on this port but does not
update information about its peer.
RX Only – LLDP agent receives but does not transmit LLDP frames on
this port.
TX and RX – LLDP agent transmits and receives LLDP frames on this
port (default value).
Disabled – LLDP agent does not transmit or receive LLDP frames on
this port.
4 In the Notification Enable field, select from the following options to
define, on a per agent basis, whether or not notifications from the agent to
the NMS are enabled:
True – The agent sends a Topology Change trap to the NMS whenever
the system information received from the peer changes.
False – Notifications to the NMS are disabled (default value).
Table 51 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Port
Configuration page.
Table 51: LLDP Port Configuration Status Parameters
Interface Location Identifies the port.
Destination Address The destination address of the LLDP agent associated with this port.
TLV TX Indicates which of the unit's capabilities is transmitted by the LLDP agent for the
port:
 PortDesc – The LLDP agent transmits Port Description TLVs.
 SysName – The LLDP agent transmits System Name TLVs.
 SysDesc – The LLDP agent transmits System Description TLVs.
 SysCap – The LLDP agent transmits System Capabilities TLVs.

8.2.5 Displaying the Unit’s Management Parameters

To display the unit's destination LLDP MAC address:
Destination Address. The LLDP Destination Address Table page opens.
Figure 185: LLDP Destination Address Table Page

To displays the MAC address associated with the unit for purposes of LLDP
transmissions:
Management TLV. The LLDP Management TLV Configuration page opens.
Figure 186: LLDP Management TLV Configuration Page
Table 52 lists and describes the status parameters in the LLDP Management
TLV Configuration page.

Table 52: LLDP Management TLV Parameters
Destination Address Defines the MAC address associated with the port for purposes of LLDP
transmissions.
Management Address The unit's IP address.
Address Subtype Defines the type of the management address identifier encoding used for
the Management Address.
Tx Enable Indicates whether the unit's Management Address is transmitted with
LLDPDUs. In this release, the Management Address is always sent.
8.2.6 Displaying Peer Unit’s Management Parameters

To display LLDP management information about the unit's nearest neighbor
(peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System >
Management. The LLDP Remote System Management page opens.
Figure 187: LLDP Remote System Management Page
Table 53 describes the LLDP remote system management parameters. These

Table 53: LLDP Remote System Management Parameters

Management Address The octet string used to identify the management address component associated
with the remote system.
Address Sub Type The type of management address identifier encoding used in the associated
LLDP Agent Remote Management Address.
Destination Address The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC Address.
Remote ID An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular
connection instance, unique only for the indicated remote system.
To display unit parameter information received via LLDP from the unit's
nearest neighbor (peer):
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Remote System >
Remote Table. The LLDP Remote System Table page opens.
Figure 188: LLDP Remote System Table Page
Table 54 describes the parameters in the LLDP Remote System Table page.
These parameters are read-only.
Table 54: LLDP Remote System Table Parameters
Remote ID An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to identify a particular
connection instance, unique only for the indicated peer.

Remote Chassis ID An octet string used to identify the peer's hardware unit.
Chassis ID Subtype The type of encoding used to identify the peer's hardware unit.
Remote Port An octet string used to identify the port component associated with the remote
system.
Port Sub type The type of port identifier encoding used in the peer's Port ID.
8.2.7 Displaying the Local Unit’s Parameters

To display the unit parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System >
Parameters. The LLDP Local System Parameters page opens.
Figure 189: LLDP Local System Parameters Page
Table 55 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Parameters page.
These parameters are read-only.

Table 55: LLDP Local System Parameters
System Name The system name included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent, as defined in
the Name field of the Unit Parameters page. See Configuring Unit Parameters.
System Description The system description included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent, as
defined in the Description field of the Unit Parameters page. See Configuring
Unit Parameters.
Chassis ID The MAC Address of the local unit.
Chassis ID SubType The type of encoding used to identify the local unit. In this release, this parameter
is always set to MAC Address.
Capabilities Supported A bitmap value used to identify which system capabilities are supported on the
local system, as included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent.
The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
0 – other
1 – repeater
2 – bridge
3 – wlanAccessPoint
4 – router
5 – telephone
6 – docsisCableDevice
7 – stationOnly
8 – cVLANComponent
9 – sVLANComponent
10 – twoPortMACRelay
Capabilities Enabled A bitmap value used to identify which system capabilities are enabled on the
local system, as included in TLVs transmitted by the LLDP agent.
The bitmap is defined by the following parameters:
0 – other
1 – repeater
2 – bridge
3 – wlanAccessPoint
4 – router
5 – telephone
6 – docsisCableDevice
7 – stationOnly
8 – cVLANComponent
9 – sVLANComponent
10 – twoPortMACRelay

To display the unit’s port parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System > Port.
The LLDP Local System Port page opens.
Figure 190: LLDP Local System Port Page
Table 56 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Port page. These
Table 56: LLDP Local System Port Parameters
Port ID The port's MAC address.
Port Sub Type The type of encoding used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions. In this
release, this parameter is always set to MAC Address.
Port Description A description of the port.

To display the unit’s management parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP

agents:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Local System >
Management. The LLDP Local System Management page opens.
Figure 191: LLDP Local System Management Page
2 To display all the parameters, select a row and click View.

Figure 192: LLDP Local System Management – View Page

Table 57 describes the parameters in the LLDP Local System Management

page. These parameters are read-only.
Table 57: LLDP Local System Management Parameters
Management Address The local unit's IP address.
Address Sub Type The format of the local unit's IP Address.
Address Length Reserved for future use.
Address Interface ID Reserved for future use.
Address Interface Sub Type Reserved for future use.
Address OID Reserved for future use.
8.2.8 Displaying LLDP Statistics

To display statistics about changes reported via LLDP by the remote unit:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > General.
The LLDP Statistic page opens.
Figure 193: LLDP Statistic Page
Table 58 describes the statistics in the LLDP Statistic page.

Table 58: LLDP Statistics
Last Change Time The time of the most recent change in the remote unit, as reported via LLDP.
Inserts The number of times the information from the remote system has changed.
Deletes The number of times the information from the remote system has been deleted.
Drops Reserved for future use.
Ageouts The number of times the information from the remote system has been deleted
from the local unit's database because the information's TTL has expired.
The RX Ageouts counter in the Port RX page is similar to this counter, but is for
specific ports rather than the entire unit.
To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port TX.
The LLDP Port TX Statistic page opens.
Figure 194: LLDP Port TX Statistic Page

Table 59 describes the statistics in the LLDP Port TX Statistic page.
Table 59: LLDP Port TX Statistics
Interface Location The index value used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions.
Destination Address The LLDP MAC address associated with this entry.
Total Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted by the LLDP agent on this port to the
destination MAC address.
Errored Length Frames The number of LLDPDU Length Errors recorded for this port and destination
MAC address.
If the set of TLVs that is selected in the LLDP local system MIB by network
management would result in an LLDPDU that violates LLDPDU length
restrictions, then the No. of Length Error statistic is incremented by 1, and an
LLDPDU is sent containing the mandatory TLVs plus as many of the optional
TLVs in the set as will fit in the remaining LLDPDU length.
To display statistics about LLDP frames received by the unit:

1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > LLDP > Advanced > Statistic > Port RX.
The LLDP Port TX Statistic page opens.
Figure 195: LLDP Port RX Statistic Page
Table 60 describes the statistics in the LLDP Port TX Statistic page.
Table 60: LLDP Port RX Statistics
Interface Location The index value used to identify the port in LLDP transmissions.

Destination Address The LLDP MAC address associated with this entry.
Total Discarded The number of LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port, and then
discarded for any reason. This counter can provide an indication that LLDP
header formatting problems may exist with the local LLDP agent in the sending
system or that LLDPDU validation problems may exist with the local LLDP agent
in the receiving system.
Invalid Frames The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port
while the agent is enabled.
Valid Frames The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP agent on this port.
Discarded TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason by the LLDP agent on this
port.
Unrecognized TLVs The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given port that are not recognized by
LLDP agent.
Ageouts The number of age-outs that occurred on the port. An age-out is the number of
times the complete set of information advertised by the remote system has been
deleted from the unit's database because the information timeliness interval has
expired.
This counter is similar to the LLDP No. of Ageouts counter in the LLDP Statistic
page, except that it is per port rather than for the entire unit.
This counter is set to zero during agent initialization. This counter is incremented
only once when the complete set of information is invalidated (aged out) from all
related tables on a particular port. Partial ageing is not allowed.

9. Synchronization
 Configuring SyncE Regenerator
Note: The Sync Source and Outgoing Clock pages are reserved for
future use.
9.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator

Note: SyncE Regenerator is supported for IP-20C and IP-20S. For
IP-20E, SyncE Regenerator support is planned for future
release.
In SyncE PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is transported between two
interfaces through the radio link.
With the system acting as a simple link, no distribution mechanism is
necessary, resulting in improved frequency distribution performance with
PRC quality and a simplified configuration.
Notes: SyncE Regenerator currently supports only a single pipe
configuration.
To add a pipe configuration:
1 Select Sync > SyncE Regenerator. The SyncE Regenerator page opens.
Figure 196: SyncE Regenerator Page
2 Click Add underneath the Pipe Configurations Table. The Pipe

Configuration - Add window opens.

Figure 197: Pipe Configurations - Add Page
3 Select a Pipe ID.

4 Select one of the available interfaces for each Sync Interface.
Note: One of the Sync Interfaces must be a Radio interface and the
other must be an Ethernet interface. If the two interfaces are
the same type, the operation will fail.
Only one radio port is available for IP-20S and IP-20E units.
5 Click Apply.

10. Access Management and Security

 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters
 Configuring the Password Security Parameters
 Configuring the Session Timeout
 Configuring Users
 Configuring RADIUS
 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates
 Blocking Telnet Access
 Uploading the Security Log
 Uploading the Configuration Log
Related topics:
 Operating in FIPS Mode
 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption

10.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters

To avoid unauthorized login to the system, IP-20 automatically blocks users
upon a configurable number of failed login attempts. You can also configure
IP-20 to block users that have not logged into the unit for a defined number of
days.
To configure the blocking criteria:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > General. The Access
Control General Configuration page opens.
Figure 200: Access Control General Configuration Page
2 In the Failure login attempts to block user field, select the number of
failed login attempts that will trigger blocking. If a user attempts to login
to the system with incorrect credentials this number of times
consecutively, the user will temporarily be prevented from logging into the
system for the time period defined in the Blocking period field. Valid
values are 1-10. The default value is 3.
3 In the Blocking period (Minutes) field, enter the length of time, in
minutes, that a user is prevented from logging into the system after the
defined number of failed login attempts. Valid values are 1-60. The default
value is 5.
4 In the Unused account period for blocking (Days) field, you can
configure a number of days after which a user is prevented from logging
into the system if the user has not logged in for the configured number of
days. Valid values are 0, or 30-90. If you enter 0, this feature is disabled.
The default value is 0.
5 Click Apply.
Once a user is blocked, you can unblock the user from the User Accounts page.
To unblock a user:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Accounts. The
Access Control User Accounts page opens (Figure 206).
2 Select the user and click Edit. The Access Control User Accounts - Edit page
opens.
Figure 201: Access Control User Accounts - Edit Page
3 In the Blocked field, select No.


10.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters

To configure enhanced security requirements for user passwords:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Password Management.
The Access Control Password Management page opens.
Figure 202: Access Control Password Management Page
2 In the Enforce password strength field, select Yes or No. When Yes is
selected:
The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
3 In the Password change for first login field, select Yes or No. When Yes
is selected, the system requires the user to change his or her password the
first time the user logs in.
4 In the Password aging (Days) field, select the number of days that user
passwords will remain valid from the first time the user logs into the
system. You can enter 20-90, or No Aging. If you select No Aging,
password aging is disabled and passwords remain valid indefinitely.
5 Click Apply.

10.3 Configuring the Session Timeout

By default, there is a 10 minute session timeout. If you do not perform any
activity on the system for the period of time defined as the session timeout,
the user session times out and you will have to log in to the system again.
To modify the session timeout:
1 Select Platform > Security > Protocols Control. The Protocols Control
page opens.
Figure 203: Protocols Control Page
2 In the Session timeout (Minutes) field, select a session timeout, in

minutes, from 1 to 60.
3 Click Apply.
10.4 Configuring Users

 User Configuration Overview
 Configuring User Profiles
 Configuring Users
Related topics:

10.4.1 User Configuration Overview

User configuration is based on the Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) model.
According to the RBAC model, permissions to perform certain operations are
assigned to specific roles. Users are assigned to particular roles, and through
those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular system
functions.
In the IP-20 GUI, these roles are called user profiles. Up to 50 user profiles can
be configured. Each profile contains a set of privilege levels per functionality
group, and defines the management protocols (access channels) that can be
used to access the system by users to whom the user profile is assigned.
The system parameters are divided into the following functional groups:
 Security
 Management
 Radio
 TDM
 Ethernet
 Synchronization
A user profile defines the permitted access level per functionality group. For
each functionality group, the access level is defined separately for read and
write operations. The following access levels can be assigned:
 None – No access to this functional group.
 Normal – The user has access to parameters that require basic knowledge
about the functional group.
 Advanced – The user has access to parameters that require advanced
knowledge about the functional group, as well as parameters that have a
significant impact on the system as a whole, such as restoring the
configuration to factory default settings.

10.4.2 Configuring User Profiles

User profiles enable you to define system access levels. Each user must be
assigned a user profile. Each user profile contains a detailed set of read and
write permission levels per functionality group.
The system includes a number of pre-defined user profiles. You can edit these
profiles, and add user profiles. Together, the system supports up to 50 user
profiles.
To add a user profile:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Profiles. The Access
Control User Profiles page opens.
Figure 204: Access Control User Profiles Page

2 Click Add. The Access Control User Profiles - Add page opens.
Figure 205: Access Control User Profiles - Add Page
3 In the Profile field, enter a name for the profile. The profile name can
include up to 49 characters. Once you have created the user profile, you
cannot change its name.
Note: The Usage counter field displays the number of users to
whom the user profile is assigned.
4 In the Permitted access channels row, select the access channels the user
will be permitted to use to access the system.
5 For each functionality group, select one of these options for write level and
read level. All users with this profile will be assigned these access levels:
None
Normal
Advanced
To view a user profile, click + next to the profile you want to view.
To edit a user profile, select the profile and click Edit. You can edit all of the
profile parameters except the profile name.
To delete a user profile, select the profile and click Delete.
Note: You cannot delete a user profile if the profile is assigned to
any users.

10.4.3 Configuring Users

You can configure up to 2,000 users. Each user has a user name, password,
and user profile. The user profile defines a set of read and write permission
levels per functionality group. See Configuring User Profiles.
To add a new user:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > User Accounts. The
Access Control User Accounts page opens.
Figure 206: Access Control User Accounts Page
2 Click Add. The Access Control User Profiles - Add page opens.
Figure 207: Access Control User Accounts - Add Page

3 In the User name field, enter a user name for the user. The user name can
be up to 32 characters.
4 In the Profile field, select a User Profile. The User Profile defines the user’s
access levels for functionality groups in the system. See Configuring User
Profiles.
5 In the Password field, enter a password for the user. If Enforce Password
Strength is activated (see Configuring the Password Security Parameters),
the password must meet the following criteria:
The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
6 In the Blocked field, you can block or unblock the user. Selecting Yes
blocks the user. You can use this option to block a user temporarily,
without deleting the user from the system. If you set this option to Yes
while the user is logged into the system, the user will be automatically
logged out of the system within 30 seconds.
Note: Users can also be blocked by the system automatically. You
can unblock the user by selecting No in the Blocked field.
See Configuring the General Access Control Parameters.
7 Optionally, in the Expiration date field, you can configure the user to
remain active only until a defined date. After that date, the user
automatically becomes inactive. To set an expiration date, click the
calendar icon and select a date, or enter a date in the format dd-mm-yyyy.
In addition to the configurable parameters described above, the Access
Control User Accounts page displays the following information for each user:
 Login Status – Indicates whether the user is currently logged into the
system.
 Last Logout – The date and time the user most recently logged out of the
system.
To edit a user’s account details, select the user and click Edit. You can edit all
of the user account parameters except the User name and password.
To add a user, click Add.
To delete a user, select the user and click Delete.

10.5 Configuring RADIUS

 RADIUS Overview
 Activating RADIUS Authentication
 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes
 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity
 Configuring a RADIUS Server
10.5.1 RADIUS Overview

The RADIUS protocol provides centralized user management services. IP-20
supports RADIUS server and provides a RADIUS client for authentication and
authorization. When RADIUS is enabled, a user attempting to log into the
system from any access channel (CLI, WEB, NMS) is not authenticated locally.
Instead, the user’s credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS
server which indicates to the IP-20 whether the user is known, and which
privilege is to be given to the user.
The following RADIUS servers are supported:
 FreeRADIUS
 RADIUS on Windows Server (IAS)
Windows Server 2008
You can define up to two Radius servers. If you define two, one serves as the
primary server and the other as the secondary server.

10.5.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication

To activate RADIUS authentication:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Radius > Radius
Configuration. The Radius Configuration page opens.
Figure 208: Radius Configuration Page
2 In the Radius Admin field, select Enable.

3 Click Apply.
10.5.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes

To configure the RADIUS server attributes:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Radius > Radius
Configuration. The Radius Configuration page opens (Figure 208).
2 In the Radius Configuration table, select the line that corresponds to the
RADIUS server you want to configure:
Select Server ID 1 to configure the Primary Radius server.
Select Server ID 2 to configure the Secondary Radius server.

3 Click Edit. The Radius Configuration – Edit page opens.

Figure 209: Radius Configuration – Edit Page
4 In the IPV4 address field, enter the IP address of the RADIUS server.
5 In the Port field, enter the port of the RADIUS server.
6 In the Retries field, enter the number of times the unit will try to
communicate with the RADIUS server before declaring the server to be
unreachable.
7 In the Timeout field, enter the timeout (in seconds) that the agent will
wait in each communication with the selected RADIUS server before
retrying if no response is received.
8 In the Secret field, enter the shared secret of the RADIUS server. The string
must be between 22-128 characters long.
In addition to the configurable parameters described above, the Radius
Configuration page displays the following information for each RADIUS server:
 Server Id – The server ID of the Radius server:
1 – The primary Radius server.
2 – The secondary Radius server.
 Connectivity Status – The connectivity status of the Radius server in the
last attempted connection:
True – The last connection attempt succeeded.
False – The last connection attempt failed.

10.5.4 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity

You can view RADIUS user connectivity and permissions information for all
Radius users currently connected.
To view RADIUS users:
1 Select Platform > Security > Access Control > Radius > Radius Users.
The Radius Users page opens.
Figure 210: Radius Users Page
 The User ID column displays the user’s name.

 The Access Channels column displays the access channels the user is
allowed to use to access the unit.
 The User Instances column displays the number of open sessions the user
currently has.

To view the user’s authorized access levels, click + next to the user name. The
page refreshes and displays the additional access level information.
Figure 211: Radius Users Page – Expanded
For each of the six functional groups (Ethernet, Management, Radio,

Security, Sync, TDM), the page displays the Read access level (None, Regular,
or Advanced), and the Write access level (None, Regular, or Advanced).

10.5.5 Configuring a RADIUS Server

If you want to use the IP-20 RADIUS feature, you must first install a RADIUS
server and configure it to work with the IP-20 device.
The following subsections describe how to configure a Win2008 RADIUS
server and a Linux FreeRADIUS server to work with an IP-20. For the sake of
simplicity, the subsections describe how to create three users: an Advanced
user with Advanced read/write permissions, a Normal user with regular
read/write permissions, and a Viewer user with no read/write permissions.
10.5.5.1 Configuring a Win 2008 RADIUS Server

The following sub-sections describe how to configure a Win 2008 RADIUS
Server to work with an IP-20 device.
Step 1 – Creating Groups and Users

To create groups and users:
1 Create three user groups, as follows:
i In the Server Manager, navigate to Configuration > Local Users and
Groups.
ii Right click Groups and create the following three user groups:
 Radius_Advanced
 Radius_Normal
 Radius_Viewer

Figure 212: Server Manager – Creating User Groups

2 Create three users:

u1
u2
u3
Figure 213: Server Manager – Creating Users
3 Attach each user to a group, as follows:

Attach u1 to Radius_Advanced
Attach u2 to Radius_Normal
Attach u3 to Radius_Viewer

Step 2 – Creating a RADIUS Client

Define the IP-20 device as a RADIUS client, as follows:
1 In the Server Manager, navigate to Roles > Network Policy and Access
Services > NPS (Local) > RADIUS Clients and Servers > RADIUS Clients.
2 Right-click RADIUS Clients, and select New RADIUS Client. The New
RADIUS Client window appears.
Figure 214: Server Manager – Creating a RADIUS Client

3 In the New RADIUS Client window:

i Select the Enable this RADIUS client check box.
ii Enter a descriptive Friendly name for the device, such as IP-20X.
iii Enter the device IP Address.
iv Select RADIUS Standard as the Vendor name.
v In the Shared Secret section, select Manual, and enter a Shared
secret, then enter it again in Confirm shared secret. Note down the
secret because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret field
of the Radius Configuration – Edit page (Figure 209).
Step 3 – Creating a Network Policy

Create a network policy for each of the three groups you created:
Radius_Advanced, Radius_Normal, Radius_Viewer. That is, follow the
instructions in this section, for each of the three groups.
To create a network policy:
1 In the Server Manager, navigate to Roles > Network Policy and Access
Service > NPS (Local) > Policies > Network Policies.
2 Right-click Network Policies, and select New. The New Network Policy
wizard appears.
3 In the specify Network Policy Name and Connection Type, give the policy a
descriptive name, indicating whether it is a policy for the Advanced, the
Normal or the Viewer group.

Figure 215: Create Network Policy – Specify Name and Connection Type
4 Click Next.
5 In the Specify Conditions window, click Add.
6 In the Select Condition window that appears, select the User Groups
condition and click Add.
Figure 216: Create Network Policy – Select Condition

7 In the User Groups window that appears, click Add Groups.

8 In the Select Group window that appears, click Advanced.
9 In the Select Group window that appears, click Find Now to list all groups,
and then select the appropriate group from the list: Radius_Advanced,
Radius_Normal, or Radius_Viewer.
10 Click OK.
Figure 217: Create Network Policy – User Group added to Policy’s Conditions
11 Click OK to save settings.

12 Click Next.

13 In the Specify Access Permission window that appears, select the Access
Granted option.
Figure 218: Create Network Policy – Specifying Access Permission
14 Click Next.

15 In the Configure Authentication Methods window that appears, make sure

only the Unencrypted Authentication (PAP, SPAP) option is selected.
Figure 219: Create Network Policy – Configuring Authentication Methods
16 In the query window that appears, click No.

Figure 220: Create Network Policy – Insecure Authentication Method Query

17 In the Configure Constraints window that appears, click Next.

Figure 221: Create Network Policy – Configuring Constraints

18 In the Configure Settings window that appears:

i Remove all Standard RADIUS attributes. Make sure the Attributes
table is empty.
Figure 222: Create Network Policy – Configuring Settings
ii Select the Vendor Specific checkbox and click Add under the
Attributes table.

19 In the Add Vendor Specific Attribute window that appears:

i Select Custom in the Vendor drop down field.
ii Click Add.
Figure 223: Create Network Policy – Adding Vendor Specific Attributes

20 In the Attribute Information window that appears, click Add.

Figure 224: Create Network Policy – Selecting to Add Attribute Information
21 In the Vendor-Specific Attribute Information window that appears:

i Select Enter Vendor Code.
ii Enter 2281 in the Enter Vendor Code field.
iii Select the option Yes. It conforms.
iv Click Configure Attribute.
Figure 225: Create Network Policy – Specifying the Vendor

22 In the Configure VSA (RFC Compliant) window that appears, configure 13

attributes as follows:
i For Vendor-assigned attribute number from 21 till 32, select
Decimal in the Attribute format field. These twelve attributes define
the Read access level (None, Regular, or Advanced), and the Write
access level (None, Regular, or Advanced) for each of the six functional
groups (Ethernet, Management, Radio, Security, Sync, TDM). Therefore,
in the Attribute value field enter the value corresponding to the
access level you wish to permit to members of the group whose policy
you are configuring, where:
 2 = Advanced
 1 = Regular
 0 = None
Thus for example, enter 2 for all twelve attributes if you are
configuring a policy for the Radius_Advanced group. This gives
Advanced read permissions and Advanced write permissions, for all six
functional groups, to the members of the Radius_Advanced group.
Figure 226: Create Network Policy – Configuring Vendor-Specific Attribute
Information

ii For Vendor-assigned attribute number 50, select Decimal in the

Attribute format field. The Attribute value of this attribute defines
the access channel(s) permitted to members of the group whose policy
you are configuring. The Attribute value is the sum of the values
corresponding to the access channels you wish to permit, where the
value for each access channel is:
 none=0
 serial=1
 telnet=2
 ssh=4
 web=8
 nms=16
 snmp=32
 snmpV3=64
Thus for example, enter 127 to allow access from all channels:
Serial + Telnet + SSH + Web + NMS + SNMP +SNMPv3;
Or enter 24 to allow access only from NMS + SNMP channels.

iii Click OK.
23 Click OK.
The following figure shows the Attributes table for the Radius_Advanced
group, where access to the device is allowed from all channels.
Figure 227: Create Network Policy – Example of Vendor-Specific Attribute
Configuration

24 Close all opened windows and click Next.

25 In the Completing New Network Policy window, click Finish.
26 Reset the Network Policy Server (NPS) by stopping and starting the NPS
service as follows:
i Right click the NPS (Local) node, and select Stop NPS Service.
ii Right click the NPS (Local) node, and select Start NPS Service.
Figure 228: Create Network Policy – Stopping/Starting NPS Services
10.5.5.2 Configuring a Linux FreeRADIUS Server

The following sub-sections describe how to configure a Linux FreeRADIUS
server to work with an IP-20 device.
To so do, you will need to modify the following three files:
 /etc/raddb/users
 /etc/raddb/clients.conf
 /usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon

Step 1 – Creating Users

This step describes how to create the following three users:
 u1 – with advanced read/write privileges, password 1111
 u2 – with normal read/write privileges, password 2222
 u3 – with no read/write privileges, password 3333
To create these RADIUS users:
1 Add the users in the /etc/raddb/users file, using any editor you like,
according to the following example:
# user1 - advanced privileges
u1 auth-type := local, Cleartext-Password := "1111"
security-ro = advanced,
security-wo = advanced,
mng-ro = advanced,
mng-wo = advanced,
radio-ro = advanced,
radio-wo = advanced,
tdm-ro = advanced,
tdm-wo = advanced,
eth-ro = advanced,
eth-wo = advanced,
sync-ro = advanced,
sync-wo = advanced,
access_channel = u1accesschannel,
fall-through = yes
# user2 - regular privileges
security-ro = regular,
security-wo = regular,
mng-ro = regular,
mng-wo = regular,
radio-ro = regular,
radio-wo = regular,
tdm-ro = regular,
tdm-wo = regular,
eth-ro = regular,
eth-wo = regular,
sync-ro = regular,

sync-wo = regular,
fall-through = yes
# user3 - no privilege (viewer)
security-ro = none,
security-wo = none,
mng-ro = none,
mng-wo = none,
radio-ro = none,
radio-wo = none,
tdm-ro = none,
tdm-wo = none,
eth-ro = none,
eth-wo = none,
sync-ro = none,
sync-wo = none,
fall-through = yes
2 Save the changes in the /etc/raddb/users file.

Step 2 – Defining the Permitted Access Channels

The access_channel of each user we configured in the /etc/raddb/users file,
defines the channels through which that user is allowed to access the unit.
This is done by summing the values corresponding to the allowed channels,
where the values are:
### none 0
### serial 1
### telnet 2
### ssh 4
### web 8
### nms 16
### snmp 32
### snmpV3 64
For example:
 The value 127 denotes permission to access the device from all channels:
Serial + Telnet + SSH + Web + NMS + SNMP +SNMPv3
 The value 24 indicates permission to access the device only from the Web
+ NMS channels.
To define each user’s access channels:
1 In the usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon file, configure the
values of the access channels according to the following example:
### access channel for u1
user:serial+telnet+ssh+web+nms+snmp+snmpV4
VALUE ACCESS_CHANNEL u1accesschannel 127

2 Save the changes to the usr/share/freeradius/dictionary.ceragon file.

Step 3 – Specifying the RADIUS client

This step describes how to define a device as a RADIUS client. The RADIUS
server accepts attempts to connect to a device only if that is device is defined
as a RADIUS client.
To define a device as a RADIUS client:
1 In the /etc/raddb/clients.conf file, add the device according to the
following example.
The example shows how to add an IP-20G device with IP address
192.168.1.118:
# IP20-C
client 192.168.1.118 {
secret = default_not_applicable
shortname = ceragon-ip-20G
Keep in mind:
The secret must be between 22 and 128 characters long. Note down
the secret because you will need to enter the same value in the Secret
field of the Radius Configuration – Edit page (Figure 209).
The shortname is not mandatory, but should be added, and should be
different for each RADIUS client.
2 Save the changes to the /etc/raddb/clients.conf file.
Step 4 – Restarting the RADIUS client

After configuring all of the above, restart the RADIUS process.
To restart the RADIUS process:
1 Stop the process by entering:
killall -9 radiusd
2 Start the process running in the background by entering:
radius –X &
Note: To check the logs each time a user connects to the server,
enter:
radius –X &

10.6 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS

The web interface protocol for accessing IP-20 can be configured to HTTP
(default) or HTTPS. It cannot be set to both at the same time.
Before setting the protocol to HTTPS, you must:
1 Create and upload a CSR file. See Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File.
2 Download the certificate to the IP-20 and install the certificate. See
Downloading a Certificate.
3 Enable HTTPS. This must be performed via CLI. See Enabling HTTPS (CLI).
When uploading a CSR and downloading a certificate, the IP-20 functions as an
SFTP client. You must install SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the upload or download. For details, see Installing and
Note: For these operations, SFTP must be used.

10.6.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File

To generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) file:
1 Select Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > CSR. The Security
Certificate Request page opens.
Figure 229: Security Certificate Request Page

2 In the Common Name field, enter the fully–qualified domain name for
your web server. You must enter the exact domain name.
3 In the Organization field, enter the exact legal name of your organization.
Do not abbreviate.
4 In the Organization Unit field, enter the division of the organization that
handles the certificate.
5 In the Locality field, enter the city in which the organization is legally
located.
6 In the State field, enter the state, province, or region in which the
organization is located. Do not abbreviate.
7 In the Country field, enter the two-letter ISO abbreviation for your
country (e.g., US).
8 In the Email field, enter an e-mail address that can be used to contact your
organization.
9 In the File Format field, select PEM or DER to determine the file format.
Note: In this version, only PEM is supported.
10 In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the SFTP
server.
11 In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the SFTP
server. If you did not configure a password for your SFTP user, simply
12 In the Path field, enter the directory path to which you are uploading the
CSR. Enter the path relative to the SFTP user's home directory, not the
13 In the File Name field, enter the name you want to give to the exported
CSR.
the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPV4
Communications.
the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPv6
Communications.
17 Click Generate & Upload. The file is generated and uploaded.
The Creation/Upload status field displays the status of any pending CSR
generation and upload. Possible values are:
 Ready – The default value, which appears when CSR generation and
upload is in progress.
 File-in-transfer – The upload operation is in progress.
 Success – The file has been successfully uploaded.
 Failure – The file was not successfully uploaded.
The Creation/Upload progress field displays the progress of any current CSR
upload operation.

10.6.2 Downloading a Certificate

To download a certificate:
1 Select Platform > Security > X.509 Certificate > Download & Install.
The Security Certification Download and Install page opens.
Figure 230: Security Certification Download and Install Page
2 In the Username field, enter the user name you configured in the SFTP
server.
3 In the Password field, enter the password you configured in the SFTP
server. If you did not configure a password for your SFTP user, simply
4 In the Path field, enter the directory path from which you are uploading
the certificate. Enter the path relative to the SFTP user’s home directory,
not the absolute path. To leave the path blank, enter //.
5 In the File Name field, enter the certificate’s file name in the SFTP server.
the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPV4
Communications.
the PC or laptop you are using as the SFTP server in the Server IPv6
Communications.
9 Click Download. The certificate is downloaded.
10 Click Install. The certificate is installed on the IP-20.

10.7 Blocking Telnet Access

You can block telnet access to the unit. By default, telnet access is not blocked.
To block telnet access:
1 Select Platform > Security > Protocols Control. The Protocols Control
page opens.
Figure 231: Protocols Control Page
2 In the Telnet Admin field, select Disable to block telnet access. By default,
telnet access is enabled (Enable).
3 Click Apply.
10.8 Uploading the Security Log

The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed
to any security feature, as well as all security related events.
When uploading the security log, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP client.
You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the import or export. For details, see Installing and
To upload the security log:
perform the upload. See Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.

2 Select Platform > Security > General > Security Log Upload. The
Security Log Upload page opens.
Figure 232: Security Log Upload Page

3 In the Protocol Type field, select the file transfer protocol you want to use
(FTP or SFTP).
4 In the Server username field, enter the user name you configured in the
FTP server.
5 In the Server password field, enter the password you configured in the
FTP server. If you did not configure a password for your FTP user, simply
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPV4
Communications.
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPv6
Communications.
files. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
security log.
11 Click Upload. The upload begins.
The File transfer status field displays the status of any pending security log
upload. Possible values are:
 Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in
progress.
The File transfer progress field displays the progress of any current security
log upload operation.

10.9 Uploading the Configuration Log

The configuration log lists actions performed by users to configure the system.
This file is mostly used for security, to identify suspicious user actions. It can
also be used for troubleshooting.
When uploading the configuration log, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP
client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you
are using to perform the upload. For details, see Installing and Configuring an
FTP or SFTP Server.
To upload the configuration log:
2 Select Platform > Security > General > Configuration Log Upload. The
Security Log Upload page opens.
Figure 233: Configuration Log Upload Page

server.
this field blank.
the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP server in the Server IPV4
Communications.
Communications.
files. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
configuration log.
Note: The directory path and fie name, together, cannot be more than:
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4: 236 characters
11 Click Upload. The upload begins.
The File transfer status field displays the status of any pending configuration
log upload. Possible values are:
 Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in
progress.
The File transfer progress field displays the progress of any current
configuration log upload operation.

11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting

 Viewing Current Alarms
 Viewing the Event Log
 Editing Alarm Text and Severity
 Uploading Unit Info
 Performing Diagnostics
Note: CW mode, used to transmit a single or dual frequency tones
for debugging purposes, can be configured using the CLI. See
Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI).
11.1 Viewing Current Alarms

To display a list of current alarms in the unit:
1 Select Faults > Current Alarms. The Current Alarms page opens. The
Current Alarms page displays current alarms in the unit. Each row in the
Current Alarms table describes an alarm and provides basic information
about the alarm. For a description of the information provided in the
Current Alarms page, see Table 61: Alarm Information.
Figure 234: Current Alarms Page

2 To view more detailed information about an alarm, click + at the beginning

of the row or select the alarm and click View.
Figure 235: Current Alarms - View Page
Table 61: Alarm Information
Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the alarm by the system.
Time The date and time the alarm was triggered.
Severity The severity of the alarm. In the Current Alarms table, the severity is
indicated by a symbol. You can display a textual description of the severity
by holding the cursor over the symbol.
Note: You can edit the severity of alarm types in the Alarm Configuration
page. See Editing Alarm Text and Severity.
Description A system-defined description of the alarm.
User Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined description of
the alarm by users.
Note: You can add user text to alarms in the Alarm Configuration page.
See Editing Alarm Text and Severity.
Origin The module that generated the alarm.
Probable Cause This field only appears in the Current Alarms - View page. One or more
possible causes of the alarm, to be used for troubleshooting.
Corrective Actions This field only appears in the Current Alarms - View page. One or more
possible corrective actions to be taken in troubleshooting the alarm.
Alarm ID A unique ID that identifies the alarm type.

11.2 Viewing the Event Log

The Event Log displays a list of current and historical events and information
about each event.
To display the Event Log:
1 Select Faults > Event Log. The Event Log opens. For a description of the
information provided in the Event Log, see Table 62: Event Log
Information.
Figure 236: Event Log
Table 62: Event Log Information
Time The date and time the event was triggered.
Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the event by the system.
Severity The severity of the event. In the Event Log table, the severity is indicated
by a symbol. You can display a textual description of the severity by
holding the cursor over the symbol.
Note: You can edit the severity of event types in the Alarm Configuration
page. See Editing Alarm Text and Severity.
State Indicates whether the event is currently raised or has been cleared.
Description A system-defined description of the event.
User Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined description of
the event by users.
Note: You can add user text to events in the Alarm Configuration page.
See Editing Alarm Text and Severity.
Origin The module that generated the event.

11.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity

You can view a list of alarm types, edit the severity level assigned to individual
alarm types, and add additional descriptive text to individual alarm types.

 Displaying Alarm Information
 Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm Type
 Editing an Alarm Type
 Setting Alarms to their Default Values
11.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information

To view the list of alarms defined in the system:
1 Select Faults > Alarm Configuration. The Alarm Configuration page
opens. For a description of the information provided in the Alarm
Configuration page, see Table 63: Alarm Configuration Page Parameters.
Figure 237: Alarm Configuration Page
Table 63: Alarm Configuration Page Parameters
Sequence Number (#) A unique sequence number assigned to the row by the system.
Alarm ID A unique ID that identifies the alarm type.
Severity The severity assigned to the alarm type. You can edit the severity in the Alarm
Configuration – Edit page. See Editing an Alarm Type.
Description A system-defined description of the alarm.

Additional Text Additional text that has been added to the system-defined description of the alarm by
users. You can edit the text in the Alarm Configuration – Edit page. See Editing an
Alarm Type.
Service Affecting Indicates whether the alarm is considered by the system to be service-affecting (on)
or not (off).
11.3.2 Viewing the Probable Cause and Corrective Actions for an Alarm
Type
Most alarm types include a system-defined probable cause and suggested
corrective actions. To view an alarm type's probable cause and corrective
actions, click + on the left side of the alarm type's row in the Alarm
Configuration page. The Probable Cause and Corrective Actions appear
underneath the alarm type's row, as shown below. If there is no +, that means
no Probable Cause and Corrective Actions are defined for the alarm type.
Figure 238: Alarm Configuration Page – Expanded
11.3.3 Editing an Alarm Type

To change the severity of an alarm type and add additional text to the alarm
type's description:
1 Select the alarm type in the Alarm Configuration page (Figure 237).
2 Click Edit. The Alarm Configuration - Edit page opens.
Figure 239: Alarm Configuration - Edit Page

3 Modify the Severity and/or Additional Text fields.

11.3.4 Setting Alarms to their Default Values

To set all alarms to their default severity levels and text descriptions, click Set
All to Default in the Alarm Configuration page (Figure 237).
11.4 Uploading Unit Info

You can generate a Unit Information file, which includes technical data about
the unit. This file can be uploaded and forwarded to customer support, at their
request, to help in analyzing issues that may occur.
When uploading a Unit Information file, the IP-20 functions as an FTP or SFTP
client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you
are using to perform the upload. For details, see Installing and Configuring an
FTP or SFTP Server.
To generate and upload a Unit Information file:
2 Select Platform > Management > Unit Info. The Unit Info page opens.
Figure 240: Unit Info Page

server.
this field blank.
Communications.
Communications.
file. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory, not the
Unit Information file.
11 Click Create to create the Unit Information file. The following fields
display the status of the file creation process:
File creation status – Displays the file creation status. You must wait
until the status is Success to upload the file. Possible values are:
Ready – The default value, which appears when no file is being
created.
Generating File – The file is being generated.
Success – The file has been successfully created. You may now
upload the file.
Failure – The file was not successfully created.
File creation progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file creation operation.
12 Click Export. The upload begins. The following fields display the status of
the upload process:
File transfer status – Displays the status of any pending Unit
Information file upload. Possible values are:
Ready – The default value, which appears when no file transfer is in
progress.
File-in-transfer – The upload operation is in progress.
Success – The file has been successfully uploaded.

Failure – The file was not successfully uploaded.

If you try to export the file before it has been created, the following
error message appears: Error #3-Invalid set value.
If this occurs, wait about two minutes then click Export again.
File transfer progress – Displays the progress of the current Unit
Information file upload operation.
11.5 Performing Diagnostics

 Performing Radio Loopback
11.5.1 Performing Radio Loopback

To perform loopback on a radio:
1 Select Radio > Diagnostics > Loopback. The Radio Loopbacks page
opens.
Figure 241: Radio Loopbacks Page
2 Select the slot on which you want to perform loopback and click Edit. The
Radio Loopbacks – Edit page opens.
Note: You cannot perform loopback directly on a Multi-Carrier
ABC group. To perform traffic-level diagnostics on a
Multi-Carrier ABC group, the loopback must be activated for

all members of the group. Radio-level diagnostics can still be

performed on individual members of the group.
Figure 242: Radio Loopbacks – Edit Page
3 In the Loopback timeout (minutes) field, enter the timeout, in minutes,

for automatic termination of the loopback (0-1440). A value of 0 indicates
that there is no timeout.
4 In the RF loopback field, select On.
5 Click Apply.
11.5.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback

Ethernet loopbacks can be performed on any logical Ethernet interface except
a LAG. When Ethernet loopback is enabled on an interface, the system loops
back all packets ingressing the interface. This enables loopbacks to be
performed over the link from other points in the network.
To perform Ethernet loopback:
click Loopback. The Logical Interfaces – Loopback page opens.

Figure 243: Logical Interfaces – Loopback Page
3 In the Ethernet loopback admin field, select Enable to enable Ethernet

loopback on the logical interface, or Disable to disable Ethernet loopback
on the logical interface.
4 In the Ethernet loopback duration (sec) field, enter the loopback
duration time (in seconds).
5 In the Swap MAC address admin field, select whether to swap DA and SA
MAC addresses during the loopback. Swapping addresses prevents
Ethernet loops from occurring. It is recommended to enable MAC address
swapping if LLDP is enabled.
6 Click Apply to initiate the loopback.
11.5.3 Configuring Service OAM (SOAM) Fault Management (FM)

 SOAM Overview
 Configuring MDs
 Configuring MA/MEGs
 Configuring MEPs
 Displaying Remote MEPs
 Displaying Last Invalid CCMS
11.5.3.1 SOAM Overview

The Y.1731 and IEEE 802.1ag standards and the MEF-30 specifications define
Service OAM (SOAM). SOAM is concerned with detecting, isolating, and
reporting connectivity faults spanning networks comprising multiple LANs,
including LANs other than IEEE 802.3 media.

Y.1731 Ethernet FM (Fault Management) consists of three protocols that

operate together to aid in fault management:
 Continuity check
 Link trace
 Loopback
Note: Link trace and Loopback are planned for future release.
IP-20 utilizes these protocols to maintain smooth system operation and
non-stop data flow.
Note: Support for IEEE 802.1ag is planned for future release.
The following are the basic building blocks of FM:
 MD (Maintenance Domain) – An MD defines the network segment for
which connectivity faults are managed via SOAM.
 MA/MEG (Maintenance Association/Maintenance Entity Group) – An
MA/MEG contains a set of MEPs.
 MEP (Maintenance Association End Points) – Each MEP is located on a
service point of an Ethernet service. By exchanging CCMs (Continuity
Check Messages), local and remote MEPs have the ability to detect the
network status, discover the MAC address of the remote unit/port where
the peer MEP is defined, and identify network failures.
Note: MIPs (Maintenance Association Intermediate Points) are not
supported in the current release.
 CCM (Continuity Check Message) – MEPs in the network exchange CCMs
with their peers at defined intervals. This enables each MEP to detect loss
of connectivity or failure in the remote MEP.

11.5.3.2 Configuring MDs

In the current release, you can define one MD, with an MD Format of None.
To add an MD:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MD. The SOAM MD page opens.
Figure 244: SOAM MD Page
2 Click Add. The SOAM MD – Add page opens.

Figure 245: SOAM MD Page
3 In the MD Name field, enter an identifier for the MD (up to 43

alphanumeric characters). The MD Name should be unique over the
domain.
4 In the MD Format field, select None.

Note: Support for MDs with the MD format Character String is

planned for future release. In this release, the software
enables you to configure such MDs, but they have no
functionality.
5 In the MD Level field, select the maintenance level of the MD (0-7). The
maintenance level ensures that the CFM frames for each domain do not
interfere with each other. Where domains are nested, the encompassing
domain must have a higher level than the domain it encloses. The
maintenance level is carried in all CFM frames that relate to that domain.
The MD Level must be the same on both sides of the link.
Note: In the current release, the MD level is not relevant to the
SOAM functionality.
The MHF (MIP) Creation field displays the type of MHF format included in
the CCMs sent in this MD (in the current release, this is MHF Default).
The Sender TLV Content field displays the type of TLVs included in the CCMs
sent in this MD (in the current release, this is only Send ID Chassis).
11.5.3.3 Configuring MA/MEGs

You can configure up to 1280 MEGs per network element. MEGs are classified
as Fast MEGs or Slow MEGs according to the CCM interval (see Table 64):
 Fast MEGs have a CCM interval of 1 second.
 Slow MEGs have a CCM interval of 10 seconds, 1 minute, or 10 minutes.
You can configure up to 1024 Slow MEPs and up to 256 Fast MEPs per
network element. You can configure up to 348 Slow Local MEPs (a local MEP
in a Slow MEG) and up to 64 Fast Local MEPs (a local MEP in a Fast MEG) per
network element.
To add a MEG:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MA/MEG. The SOAM MA/MEG
page opens.
Figure 246: SOAM MA/MEG Page

2 Click Add MEG. The SOAM MA/MEG – Add page opens.

Figure 247: SOAM MA/MEG – Add Page
3 Configure the fields described in Table 64.

Table 65 describes the status (read-only) fields in the SOAM MA/MEG
Component table.
Table 64: SOAM MA/MEG Configuration Parameters
MD (ID, Name) Select the MD to which you are assigning the MEP.
MA/MEG short name Enter a name for the MEG (up to 44 alphanumeric characters).

MEG Level Select a MEG level (0-7). The MEG level must be the same for MEGs on both sides of
the link. Higher levels take priority over lower levels.
If MEGs are nested, the OAM flow of each MEG must be clearly identifiable and
separable from the OAM flows of the other MEGs. In cases where the OAM flows are
not distinguishable by the Ethernet layer encapsulation itself, the MEG level in the OAM
frame distinguishes between the OAM flows of nested MEGs.
Eight MEG levels are available to accommodate different network deployment
scenarios. When customer, provider, and operator data path flows are not
distinguishable based on means of the Ethernet layer encapsulations, the eight MEG
levels can be shared among them to distinguish between OAM frames belonging to
nested MEGs of customers, providers and operators. The default MEG level
assignment among customer, provider, and operator roles is:
 The customer role is assigned MEG levels 6 and 7.
 The provider role is assigned MEG levels 3 through 5.
 The operator role is assigned MEG levels: 0 through 2.
The default MEG level assignment can be changed via a mutual agreement among
customer, provider, and/or operator roles.
The number of MEG levels used depends on the number of nested MEs for which the
OAM flows are not distinguishable based on the Ethernet layer encapsulation.
CCM Interval The interval at which CCM messages are sent within the MEG. Options are:
 1 second (default)
 10 seconds
 1 minute
 10 minutes
It takes a MEP 3.5 times the CCM interval to determine a change in the status of its
peer MEP. For example, if the CCM interval is 1 second, a MEP will detect failure of the
peer 3.5 seconds after it receives the first CCM failure message. If the CCM interval is
10 minutes, the MEP will detect failure of the peer 35 minutes after it receives the first
CCM failure message.
Service ID Select an Ethernet service to which the MEG belongs. You must define the service
before you configure the MEG.
Table 65: SOAM MA/MEG Status Parameters
MA/MEG ID Automatically generated by the system.
MA/MEG Name Format Reserved for future use. In the current release, this is Char String only.
MIP Creation Reserved for future use.
Tx Sender ID TLV content Reserved for future use. Sender ID TLV is not transmitted.
Port Status TLV TX Reserved for future use. No Port Status TLV is transmitted in the CCM frame.
Interface Status TLV TX Reserved for future use. No Interface Status TLV is transmitted in the CCM frame.
MEP List Lists all local and remote MEPs that have been defined for the MEG.

11.5.3.4 Configuring MEPs

Each MEP is attached to a service point in an Ethernet service. The service and
service point must be configured before you configure the MEP. See
Configuring Ethernet Service(s).
To configure a MEP, you must:
1 Add MEPs to the relevant MA/MEG. In this stage, you add both local and
remote MEPs. The only thing you define at this point is the MEP ID. See
Adding Local and Remote MEPs.
2 Configure the local MEPs. At this point, you determine which MEPs are
local MEPs. The system automatically defines the other MEPs you
configured in the previous step as remote MEPs. See Configuring the Local
MEPs.
3 Enable the Local MEPs. See Enabling Local MEPs.
Adding Local and Remote MEPs

To add a MEP to the MA/MEG:
1 In the SOAM MA/MEG page, select a MA/MEG and click MEP List. The MEP
List page opens.
Figure 248: MEP List Page

2 Click Add. The Add MEP page opens.

Figure 249: Add MEP Page
3 In the MEP ID field, enter a MEP ID (1-8191).

Configuring the Local MEPs

Once you have added local and remote MEPs, you must define the MEPs and
determine which are the local MEPs:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens.
Table 66 lists and describes the parameters displayed in the SOAM MEP
page.
Figure 250: SOAM MEP Page
Note: To display MEPs belonging to a specific MEG, select the MEG

in the Filter by MA/MEG field near the top of the SOAM
MEP page. To display all MEPs configured for the unit, select
All.

2 Click Add. Page 1 of the Add SOAM MEP wizard opens.

Figure 251: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 1
3 In the MEG Name field, select an MA/MEG.

4 Click Next. Page 2 of the Add SOAM MEP wizard opens.
Figure 252: Add SOAM MEP Wizard – Page 2
5 In the Direction field, select Down.

Note: In the current release, the Up direction is not supported.

6 In the MEP ID field, select a MEP ID from the list of MEPs you have added
to the selected MEG.
7 In the Service Point field, select the service point on which you want to
place the MEP.
8 Click Finish. The Add SOAM MEP wizard displays the parameters you have
selected.
Figure 253: Add SOAM MEP Wizard –Summary Page
9 Verify that you want to submit the displayed parameters and click Submit.
Table 66: SOAM MEP Parameters
MD ID An MD ID automatically generated by the system.
MA/MEG ID An MA/MEG ID automatically generated by the system.
MEP ID The MEP ID.
Interface Location The interface on which the service point associated with the MEP is
located.
SP ID The service point ID.
MEP Direction In this release, only Down is supported.
MEP Fault Notification State The initial status of the SOAM state machine.
MEP Active Indicates whether the MEP is enabled (True).
MEP CCM TX Enable Indicates whether the MEP is sending CCMs (True).
CCM and LTM Priority The p-bit included in CCMs sent by this MEP (0 to 7).
MEP Defects Reserved for future use.
RMEP List Once you have configured at least one local MEP, all other MEPs
that you have added but not configured as local MEPs are displayed
here.

Enabling Local MEPs

Once you have added a MEP and defined it as a local MEP, you must enable the
MEP.
To enable a MEP:
1 In the SOAM MEP page (Figure 250), select the MEP you want to enable.
2 Click Edit. The SOAM MEP - Edit page opens.
Figure 254: SOAM MEP - Edit Page
3 In the MEP Active field, select True.

4 In the MEP CCM TX Enable field, select True.
5 In the CCM and LTM Priority field, select the p-bit that will be included in
CCMs sent by this MEP (0 to 7). It is recommended to select 7.

11.5.3.5 Displaying Remote MEPs

To display a list of remote MEPs (RMEPs) and their parameters:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens
(Figure 250).
2 Select a MEP and click RMEP List. The SOAM MEP DB table is displayed.
Figure 255: SOAM MEP DB Table
Table 67 lists and describes the parameters displayed in the SOAM MEP DB
table. To return to the SOAM MEP page, click Back to MEP.
Note: To display these parameters in a separate window for a
specific remote MEP, select the RMEP ID and click View.
Table 67: SOAM MEP DB Table Parameters
RMEP ID The remote MEP ID.
RMEP Operational State The operational state of the remote MEP.
RMEP Last rx CCM MAC Address The MAC Address of the interface on which the remote MEP is located.
RMEP Last CCM OK or Fail Timestamp The timestamp marked by the remote MEP indicated the most recent CCM OK
or failure it recorded. If none, this field indicates the amount of time since SOAM
was activated.
RMEP Last rx CCM RDI Indication Displays the state of the RDI bit in the most recent CCM received by the remote
MEP:
 True – RDI was received in the last CCM.
 False – No RDI was received in the last CCM.
RMEP Last rx CCM Port Status TLV The Port Status TLV in the most recent CCM received from the remote MEP.
RMEP Last rx CCM Interface Status TLV Reserved for future use.
RMEP Last rx CCM Chassis ID Format Displays the MAC address of the remote unit.
RMEP Last rx CCM Chassis ID Reserved for future use.

11.5.3.6 Displaying Last Invalid CCMS

To display the entire frame of the last CCM error message and the last CCM
cross-connect error message received by a specific local MEP:
1 Select Ethernet > Protocols > SOAM > MEP. The SOAM MEP page opens
(Figure 250).
2 Select a MEP and click Last Invalid CCMS. The MEP Last Invalid CCMS
page opens.
Figure 256: MEP Last Invalid CCMS Page
The Last RX error CCM message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains an error received by the MEP.
The Last RX Xcon fault message field displays the frame of the last CCM that
contains a cross-connect error received by the MEP.
Note: A cross-connect error occurs when a CCM is received from a
remote MEP that has not been defined locally.

12. Web EMS Utilities

 Restarting the HTTP Server
 Calculating an ifIndex
 Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities
12.1 Restarting the HTTP Server

To restart the unit’s HTTP server:
1 Select Utilities > Restart HTTP. The Restart HTTP page opens.
Figure 257: Restart HTTP Page
2 Click Restart. The system prompts you for confirmation.

3 Click OK. The HTTP server is restarted, and all HTTP sessions are ended.
After a few seconds, the Web EMS prompts you to log in again.

12.2 Calculating an ifIndex

The ifIndex calculator enables you to:
 Calculate the ifIndex for any object in the system.
 Determine the object represented by any valid ifIndex.
To use the ifIndex calculator:
1 Select Utilities > ifCalculator. The ifIndex Calculator page opens.
Figure 258: ifIndex Calculator Page
 If you have an ifIndex and you want to determine which hardware item in
the unit it represents, enter the number in the ifIndex number field and
click Calculate Index to name. A description of the object appears in the
Result field.
 To determine the ifIndex of a hardware item in the unit, such as an
interface, card, or slot, select the object type in the Functional Type field,
select the Slot and Port (if relevant), and click Calculate Name to Index.
The object’s ifIndex appears in the Result field.

12.3 Displaying, Searching, and Saving a list of MIB Entities

To display a list of entities in the IP-20 private MIB:
1 Select Utilities > ifCalculator. The ifIndex Calculator page opens.
Figure 259: MIB Reference Table Page
The MIB Reference Table is customized to the type of IP-20 product you are
using. There are three separate versions of the MIB Reference Table:
 IP-20N/A/LH
 IP-20G/GX
 IP-20C/S/E
Note: Even though the MIB Reference Table is customized to these
three product groups, some of the entities listed in the Table
may not be relevant to the particular unit you are using.
This may occur because of activation key restrictions, minor
differences between product types, or simply because a
certain feature is not used in a particular configuration. For
example, the column genEquipUnitShelfSlotConfigTable is
relevant to IP-20GX but not to IP-20G.
 To search for a text string, enter the string in the Search field and press
<Enter>. Items that contain the string are displayed in yellow. Searches are
not case-sensitive.
 To save the MIB Reference Table as a .csv file, click Save to File.

Section III:
CLI
Configuration

13. Getting Started (CLI)

 General (CLI)
 Establishing a Connection (CLI)
 Logging On (CLI)
 General CLI Commands
 Changing Your Password (CLI)
 Configuring In-Band Management (CLI)
 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)
 Configuring the Activation Key (CLI)
 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)
 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)
 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)
 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI)
 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)
 Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI)
 Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI)
13.1 General (CLI)

Before connection over the radio hop is established, it is of high importance
that you assign to the IP-20 unit a dedicated IP address, according to an IP
plan for the total network. See Changing the Management IP Address (CLI).
By default, a new IP-20 unit has the following IP settings:
 IP address: 192.168.1.1
 Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Warning! If the connection over the link is established with identical
IP addresses, an IP address conflict will occur and remote
connection to the element on the other side of the link may
be lost.
13.2 Establishing a Connection (CLI)

Connect the IP-20 unit to a PC by means of a TP cable. The cable is connected
to the MGT port on the IP-20 and to the LAN port on the PC. Refer to the
Installation Guide for the type of unit you are connecting for cable connection
instructions.


Management IP Address (CLI) and Changing Your Password
(CLI).
13.2.1 PC Setup (CLI)

To obtain contact between the PC and the IP-20 unit, it is necessary to
configure an IP address on the PC within the same subnet as the IP-20 unit.
The default IP-20 IP address is 192.168.1.1. Set the PC address to e.g.
192.168.1.10 and subnet mask to 255.255.255.0. Note the initial settings
before changing.
Management IP Address (CLI) and Changing Your Password
(CLI).
13.3 Logging On (CLI)

Use a telnet connection to manage the IP-20 via CLI. You can use any standard
telnet client, such as PuTTy or ZOC Terminal. Alternatively, you can simply use
the telnet <ip address> command from the CMD window of your PC or
laptop.
The default IP address of the unit is 192.168.1.1. Establish a telnet connection
to the unit using the default IP address.
When you have connected to the unit, a login prompt appears. For example:
login:
At the prompt, enter the default login user name: admin

A password prompt appears. Enter the default password: admin
The root prompt appears. For example:
login: admin
Password:
Last login: Mon Apr 13 11:27:02 on console
IP20C
root>
13.4 General CLI Commands

To display all command levels available from your current level, press <TAB>
twice. For example, if you press <TAB> twice at the root level, the following is
displayed:
root>
auto-state-propagation ethernet exit multi-carrier-abc
platform quit radio radio-groups

switch-back switch-to wait

Some of these are complete commands, such as quit and exit. Others
constitute the first word or phrase for a series of commands, such as ethernet
and radio.
Similarly, if you enter the word “platform” and press <TAB> twice, the first
word or phrase of every command that follows platform is displayed:
root> platform
activation-key configuration if-manager management
security software status
sync unit-info unit-info-file
root> platform
To auto-complete a command, press <TAB> once.

Use the up and down arrow keys to navigate through recent commands.
Use the ? key to display a list of useful commands and their definitions.
At the prompt, or at any point in entering a command, enter the word help to
display a list of available commands. If you enter help at the prompt, a list of
all commands is displayed. If you enter help after entering part of a command,
a list of commands that start with the portion of the command you have
already entered is displayed.
To scroll up and down a list, use the up and down arrow keys.
To end the list and return to the most recent prompt, press the letter q.
To ping another network device, enter one of the following commands:
root> ping ipv4-address <x.x.x.x> count <number of echo packets>
root> ping ipv6-address <ipv6> count < number of echo packets>
The count parameter is optional. This parameter can be an integer from 1 to

10. The default value is 4.
The ping command is available from all views (e.g., root, interface views,
group views).
13.5 Changing Your Password (CLI)

It is recommended to change your default Admin password as soon as you
have logged into the system.
To change your password, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security access-control password edit own-
password
The system will prompt you to enter your existing password. The system will
then prompt you to enter the new password.
If Enforce Password Strength is activated, the password must meet the
following criteria:
 Password length must be at least eight characters.

 Password must include characters of at least three of the following

character types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special
characters. For purposes of meeting this requirement, upper case letters at
the beginning of the password and digits at the end of the password are
not counted.
 The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
See Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI).
In addition to the Admin password, there is an additional password protected
user account, “root user”, which is configured in the system. The root user
password and instructions for changing this password are available from
Ceragon Customer Support. It is strongly recommended to change this
password.
13.6 Configuring In-Band Management (CLI)

You can configure in-band management in order to manage the unit remotely
via its radio and/or Ethernet interfaces.
Each IP-20 unit includes a pre-defined management service with Service ID
257. The management service is a multipoint service that connects the two
local management ports and the network element host CPU in a single service.
In order to enable in-band management, you must add at least one service
point to the management service, in the direction of the remote site or sites
from which you want to access the unit for management. For instructions on
adding service points, see Configuring Service Points (CLI).
13.7 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)

Related Topics:
 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI)
 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI)
You can enter the unit's address in IPv4 format and/or in IPv6 format. The
unit will receive communications whether they were sent to its IPv4 address
or its IPv6 address.
To set the unit's IP address in IPv4 format, enter the following command in
root view to configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway:
root> platform management ip set ipv4-address <ipv4-address>
subnet <subnet> gateway <gateway> name <name> description
<name>
Table 68: IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters
Parameter Input Type Permitted Values Description

ipv4-address Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The IP address for the unit.
subnet Dotted decimal format. Any valid subnet mask. The subnet mask for the unit.
gateway Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The default gateway for the
unit (optional).


name Text String. Enter a name (optional).
description Text String. Enter a description
(optional).
To set the unit's IP address in IPv6 format, enter the following command in
root view to configure the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway:
root> platform management ip set ipv6-address <ipv6-address>
prefix-length <prefix-length> gateway <gateway>
Note: It is recommended not to configure addresses of type

FE:80::/64 (Link Local addresses) because traps are not
sent for these addresses.
Table 69: IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters

ipv6-address Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 address. The IP address for the unit.
hexadecimal digits
separated by colons.
prefix-length Number. 1-128 The prefix-length for the
unit.
gateway Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 address. The default gateway for the
hexadecimal digits unit (optional).
Examples
The command below sets the following parameters:
 IPv4 Address - 192.168.1.160
 Subnet Mask – 255.255.0.0
 Default Gateway – 192.168.1.100
root> platform management ip set ipv4-address 192.168.1.160
subnet 255.255.0.0 gateway 192.168.1.100
The command below sets the following parameters:

 IPv6 Address - FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
 Prefix length – 64
 Default Gateway - FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
root> platform management ip set ipv6-address
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329 prefix-length 64
gateway FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329

13.8 Configuring the Activation Key (CLI)

 Activation Key Overview (CLI)
 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI)
 Entering the Activation Key (CLI)
 Activating Demo Mode (CLI)
 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI)
13.8.1 Activation Key Overview (CLI)

IP-20 offers a pay-as-you-grow concept in which future capacity growth and
additional functionality can be enabled with activation keys. Each device
contains a single unified activation key cipher.
New IP-20 units are delivered with a default activation key that enables you to
manage and configure the unit. Additional feature and capacity support
requires you to enter an activation key. Contact your vendor to obtain your
activation key cipher.
Note: To obtain an activation key cipher, you may need to provide
the unit’s serial number. See Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI).
Each required feature and capacity should be purchased with an appropriate
activation key. It is not permitted to enable features that are not covered by a
valid activation key. In the event that the activation-key-enabled capacity and
feature set is exceeded, an Activation Key Violation alarm occurs and the Web
EMS displays a yellow background and an activation key violation warning.
After a 48-hour grace period, all other alarms are hidden until the capacity
and features in use are brought within the activation key’s capacity and
feature set.
In order to clear the alarm, you must configure the system to comply with the
activation key that has been loaded in the system. The system automatically
checks the configuration to ensure that it complies with the activation-key-
enabled features and capacities. If no violation is detected, the alarm is
cleared.
Demo mode is available, which enables all features for 60 days. When demo
mode expires, the most recent valid activation key goes into effect. The 60-day
period is only counted when the system is powered up. Ten days before demo
mode expires, an alarm is raised indicating that demo mode is about to expire.
13.8.2 Viewing the Activation Key Status Parameters (CLI)

To display information about the currently installed activation key, enter the
following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key show information

13.8.3 Entering the Activation Key (CLI)

To enter the activation key, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform activation-key set key string <key string>
If the activation key is not legal (e.g., a typing mistake or an invalid serial
number), an Activation Key Loading Failure event is sent to the Event Log.
When a legal activation key is entered, an Activation Key Loaded Successfully
event is sent to the Event Log.
13.8.4 Activating Demo Mode (CLI)

To activate demo mode, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform activation-key set demo admin enable
To display the current status of demo mode, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform activation-key show demo status
13.8.5 Displaying a List of Activation-Key-Enabled Features (CLI)

To display a list of features that your current activation key supports, and
usage information about these features, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform activation-key show usage all
To display a list of the radio capacities that your current activation key
supports and their usage information, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform activation-key show usage radio
13.9 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)

Related Topics:
 Configuring NTP (CLI)
IP-20 uses the Universal Time Coordinated (UTC) standard for time and date
configuration. UTC is a more updated and accurate method of date
coordination than the earlier date standard, Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
Every IP-20 unit holds the UTC offset and daylight savings time information
for the location of the unit. Each management unit presenting the information
uses its own UTC offset to present the information with the correct time.
Note: If the unit is powered down, the time and date are saved for
96 hours (four days). If the unit remains powered down for
longer, the time and date may need to be reconfigured.
To set the UTC time, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management time-services utc set date-and-time
<date-and-time>

To set the local time offset relative to UTC, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform management time-services utc set offset hours-
offset <hours-offset> minutes-offset <minutes-offset>
To display the local time configurations, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management time-services show status
Table 70: Local Time Configuration CLI Parameters

date-and-time Number dd-mm-yyyy,hh:mm:ss Sets the UTC time.
where:
dd = date
mm = month
yyyy= year
hh = hour
mm = minutes
ss = seconds
hours-offset Number -12 – 13 The required hours offset (positive or
negative) relative to GMT. This is used to
offset the clock relative to GMT, according
to the global meridian location.
minutes-offset Number 0 – 59 The required minutes relative to GMT.
This is used to offset the clock relative to
GMT, according to the global meridian
location.
Examples
The following command sets the GMT date and time to January 30, 2014,
3:07 pm and 58 seconds:
root> platform management time-services utc set date-and-time
30-01-2014,15:07:58
The following command sets the GMT offset to 13 hours and 32 minutes:
root> platform management time-services utc set offset hours-
offset 13 minutes-offset 32
13.9.1 Setting the Daylight Savings Time (CLI)

To set the daylight savings time parameters, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform management time-services daylight-savings-time
set start-date-month <start-date-month> start-date-day <start-
date-day> end-date-month <end-date-month> end-date-day <end-
date-day> offset <offset>

Table 71: Daylight Savings Time CLI Parameters

start-date-month Number 1 – 12 The month when Daylight Savings Time
begins.
start-date-day Number 1 – 31 The date in the month when Daylight
Savings Time begins.
end-date-month Number 1 – 12 The month when Daylight Savings Time
ends.
end-date-day Number 1 – 31 The date in the month when Daylight
Savings Time ends.
offset Number 0 – 23 The required offset, in hours, for Daylight
Savings Time. Only positive offset is
supported.
Examples
The following command configures daylight savings time as starting on May
30 and ending on October 1, with an offset of 20 hours.
root> platform management time-services daylight-savings-time
set start-date-month 5 start-date-day 30 end-date-month 10 end-
date-day 1 offset 20
13.10 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)

By default:
 Ethernet traffic interfaces are disabled and must be manually enabled.
 The Ethernet management interface is enabled.
 Radio interfaces are enabled.
Note: IP-20S and IP-20E units have a single radio interface.
To enable or disable an interface, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform if-manager set interface-type <interface-type>
slot <slot> port <port> admin <admin>
To display the status of all the interfaces in the unit, enter the following
command in root view:
root> platform if-manager show interfaces
Table 72: Interface Configuration CLI Parameters

interface-type Variable ethernet ethernet – an Ethernet traffic
radio interface.
radio – a radio interface.
slot Number Ethernet: 1 The slot on which the interface is
Radio: 2 located.


port Number GbE 1: 1 The specific interface you want to
GbE 2: 2 enable or disable.
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C only): 2
admin Variable up Enter up to enable the interface
down or down to disable the interface.
Examples
The following command enables Ethernet port 2:
root> platform if-manager set interface-type ethernet slot 1
port 2 admin up
The following command enables radio interface 1:

root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2 port
1 admin up
The following command disables radio interface 1:

root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2 port
1 admin down
The following command disables Ethernet port 3:

port 3 admin down
13.11 Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI)

In order to establish a radio link, you must:
 Enter radio view.
 Unmute the radio carrier.
 Configure the radio frequencies.
 Configure the TX level.
13.11.1 Entering Radio View (CLI)

To view and configure radio parameters, you must first enter the radio’s view
level in the CLI.
To enter a radio’s view level, enter the following command in root view:
root> radio slot <slot> port <port>
Table 73: Entering Radio View CLI Parameters

slot Number 2


port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1 The specific radio carrier you
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C only): 2 want to access.
Examples
The following command enters radio view for radio carrier 1:
root> radio slot 2 port 1
The following prompt appears:

radio[2/1]>
13.11.2 Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI)

To mute or unmute the radio, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf mute set admin <admin>
To display the mute status of a radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>rf mute show status
Table 74: Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters

admin Variable on Mutes (on) or unmutes (off) the
off radio.
Examples
The following command mutes radio carrier 1:
radio[2/1]>rf mute set admin on
The following command unmutes radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C unit:

radio[2/2]>rf mute set admin off
13.11.3 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) level of a radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>rf set tx-level <tx-level>
To display the maximum transmit (TX) level of a radio, enter the following
command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf show max-tx-level
Table 75: Radio Transmit (TX) Level CLI Parameters

tx-level Number IP-20C and IP-20S units: -1 to 22 The desired TX signal level
IP-20E units: -1 to 12 (TSL), in dBm.

Examples
The following command sets the TX level of radio carrier 1 to 10 dBm:
radio[2/1]>rf set tx-level 10
13.11.4 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) frequency of a radio, enter the following command in
radio view. This command includes an option to set the remote RX frequency
in parallel:
radio[x/x]>rf set tx-frequency <tx-frequency> local-remote
<local-remote>
Table 76: Radio Transmit (TX) Frequency CLI Parameters

tx-frequency Number Depends on the MRMC The desired TX frequency (in KHz) and, if
script and the unit type. <local-remote> is set to enable, the
desired RX frequency of the remote unit.
local-remote Variable enable Optional. Determines whether to apply the
disable configured TX frequency value to the RX
frequency of the remote unit.
Examples
The following command sets the TX frequency of radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C
or IP-20S unit to 12900000 KHz, and sets the RX frequency of the remote unit
to the same value.
radio[2/1]>rf set tx-frequency 12900000 local-remote enable
The following command sets the TX frequency of radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C

or IP-20S unit to 12900000 KHz, but does not set the RX frequency of the
remote unit.
radio[2/1]>rf set rx-frequency 12900000 local-remote disable
The following command sets the TX frequency of the radio in an IP-20E unit to
71000000 KHz, and sets the RX frequency of the remote unit to the same
value.
radio[2/1]> rf set tx-frequency 71000000 local-remote enable
The following command sets the TX frequency of the radio in an IP-20E unit to
71000000 KHz, but does not set the RX frequency of the remote unit.
radio[2/1]> rf set rx-frequency 71000000 local-remote disable

13.12 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)

Multi-Rate Multi-Constellation (MRMC) radio scripts define how the radio
utilizes its available capacity. Each script is a pre-defined collection of
configuration settings that specify the radio’s transmit and receive levels, link
modulation, channel spacing, and bit rate. Scripts apply uniform transmit and
receive rates that remain constant regardless of environmental impact on
radio operation.
13.12.1 Displaying Available MRMC Scripts (CLI)

To display all scripts that are available for a specific radio carrier in your unit,
enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>mrmc script show script-type <script-type> acm-
support <acm-support>

Table 77: MRMC Script CLI Parameters

script-type Variable normal Determines the type of scripts to be
asymmetrical displayed:
 normal – Scripts for symmetrical
bandwidth.
 asymmetrical – Scripts for asymmetrical
bandwidth.
Note: Asymmetrical scripts are not supported
in this release.
acm-support Boolean yes Determines whether to display scripts that
no support Adaptive Coding Modulation (ACM).
In ACM mode, a range of profiles determines
Tx and Rx rates. This allows the radio to
modify its transmit and receive levels in
response to environmental conditions.
Examples
The following command displays available symmetrical (normal) scripts with
ACM support for radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C unit:
radio[2/2]>mrmc script show script-type normal acm-support yes
The following command displays available symmetrical (normal) scripts for

an IP-20E unit:
radio[2/2]>mrmc script show script-type normal acm-support yes

13.12.2 Assigning an MRMC Script to a Radio Carrier (CLI)

Once you have a list of valid scripts, you can assign a script to the radio carrier.
The command syntax differs depending on whether you are assigning a script
with ACM support or a script without ACM support.
Note: When you enter a command to change the script, a prompt
appears informing you that changing the traffic will reset
the unit and affect traffic. To continue, enter yes.
To assign a script with ACM enabled, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> mrmc set acm-support script-id <script-id>
modulation adaptive max-profile <profile>
To assign a script without ACM enabled, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> mrmc set acm-support script-id <script-id>
modulation fixed profile <profile>
To display the current MRMC script configuration, enter the following

radio[x/x]>mrmc show script-configuration
Table 78: MRMC Script Assignation to Radio Carrier CLI Parameters

script-id Number Depends on available The ID of the script you want to assign to the
scripts. radio carrier.
modulation Variable adaptive Determines whether ACM is enabled
fixed (adaptive) or disabled (fixed).
profile Number IP-20C and IP-20S The maximum modulation profile.
units: 0-10
IP-20E units: 0-6 For IP-20C and IP-20S, the options are:
0 – QPSK
1 – 8 PSK
2 – 16 QAM
3 – 32 QAM
4 – 64 QAM
5 – 128 QAM
6 – 256 QAM
7 – 512 QAM
8 – 1024 QAM (Strong FEC)
9 – 1024 QAM (Light FEC)
10 – 2048 QAM
For IP-20E, the options are:

0 – BPSK
1 – QPSK
2 – 8 QAM
3 – 16 QAM
4 – 32 QAM
5 – 64 QAM
6 – 128 QAM

Examples
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1503, with ACM enabled and
a maximum profile of 9, to radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C and IP-20S unit:
radio[2/1]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 13 modulation
adaptive max-profile 9
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 1502, with ACM disabled and
a maximum profile of 5, to radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C unit:
radio[2/2]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 13 modulation fixed
profile 5
The following command assigns MRMC script ID 4701, with ACM disabled and
a maximum profile of 5, to the radio carrier in an IP-20E unit:
radio[2/1]>mrmc set acm-support script-id 4701 modulation fixed
profile 5
13.13 Enabling ACM with Adaptive Transmit Power (CLI)

When planning ACM-based radio links, the radio planner attempts to apply the
lowest transmit power that will perform satisfactorily at the highest level of
modulation. During fade conditions requiring a modulation drop, most radio
systems cannot increase transmit power to compensate for the signal
degradation, resulting in a deeper reduction in capacity. The IP-20 is capable
of adjusting power on the fly, and optimizing the available capacity at every
modulation point.
To enable Adaptive TX Power for a radio, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power admin enable
To disable Adaptive TX Power for a radio, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power admin disable
To display whether Adaptive TX Power is enabled, enter the following

radio[x/x]>rf adaptive-power show status
The output of this command is:

radio [x/x]>rf adaptive-power show status
RF adaptive power admin status: [enable/disable]

RF adaptive power operational status: [up/down]
RF adaptive power operational status: Up means the feature is enabled

and fully functional for that radio link. Note that the feature is configured and
operates independently for each radio link.

13.14 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)

From CeraOS version 8.3, FibeAir IP-20C and IP-20S can be configured to be
FIPS 140-2-compliant in specific hardware and software configurations, as
described in this section.
13.14.1 Requirements for FIPS Compliance (CLI)

For a full list of FIPS requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2
Security Policy, available upon request. It is the responsibility of the customer
to ensure that these requirements are met.
For details on hardware requirements for operating in FIPS mode, see
Requirements for FIPS Compliance.
13.14.2 Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI)

To set the unit to operate in FIPS mode, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security fips-mode set admin enable
To disable FIPS mode, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security fips-mode set admin disable
Note: Changing the FIPS configuration causes a unit reset.

To display the unit’s current FIPS setting, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security fips-mode show
Status values are:

 enable – FIPS mode is enabled.
 disable – FIPS mode is disabled.
After enabling FIPS:

 The MD5 option for SNMPv3 is blocked.
 After any system reset, the length of time before users can log back into
the system is longer than usual due to FIPS-related self-testing.
For a full list of FIPS requirements, including software configuration
requirements, refer to the Ceragon IP-20 FIPS 140-2 Security Policy, available
upon request.
13.15 Configuring Grouping (Optional) (CLI)

At this point in the configuration process, you should configure any interface
groups that need to be set up according to your network plan. For details on
available grouping and other configuration options, as well as configuration
instructions, see System Configurations (CLI).

13.16 Creating Service(s) for Traffic (CLI)

In order to pass traffic through the IP-20, you must configure Ethernet traffic
services. For configuration instructions, see Configuring Ethernet Services
(CLI).

14. Configuration Guide (CLI)
14.1 System Configurations (CLI)

This section lists the basic system configurations and the IP-20 product types
that support them, as well as links to configuration instructions.
Table 79: System Configurations (CLI)
Configuration Supported Link to Configuration Instructions

Products
Multi-Carrier ABC (Multi-Radio) IP-20C Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)
Link Aggregation (LAG) IP-20C/S/E Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) (Optional) (CLI)
XPIC IP-20C Configuring XPIC (CLI)
HSB Radio Protection IP-20C/S Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)
MIMO and Space Diversity IP-20C Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI)
IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode IP-20C Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI)

14.2 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)


 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI)
 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
 Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)
14.2.1 Multi-Carrier ABC Overview (CLI)

Multi-Carrier Adaptive Bandwidth Control (ABC) enables multiple separate
radio carriers to be shared by a single Ethernet port. This provides an
Ethernet link over the radio with the total sum of the capacity of all the radios
in the group, while still behaving as a single Ethernet interface. In
Multi-Carrier ABC mode, traffic is dynamically divided among the carriers, at
the Layer 1 level, without requiring Ethernet Link Aggregation.
Load balancing is performed regardless of the number of MAC addresses or
the number of traffic flows. During fading events which cause ACM modulation
changes, each carrier fluctuates independently with hitless switchovers
between modulations, increasing capacity over a given bandwidth and
maximizing spectrum utilization. The result is 100% utilization of radio
resources in which traffic load is balanced based on instantaneous radio
capacity per carrier.
One Multi-Carrier ABC group that includes both radio interfaces can be
configured per unit.
14.2.2 Configuring a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

Note: Radio slot 2 port 1 should always be configured on
channel 1 while Radio slot 2 port 2 should always be
configured on channel 2.
To configure a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Create the group by entering the following command in root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc create group group_id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]>
2 Enter Multi-Carrier ABC Group view by entering the following command in
root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]

3 Add members to the group as follows:

To add a radio interface to the group, enter the following command in
Multi-Carrier ABC Group view. Repeat this command for each radio
interface you want to add.
multi-carrier-abc group-id [1]> attach-member slot 2 port
<port> channel-id <1-16>
The Channel ID identifies the interface within the group.
4 Repeat for the second radio interface.
The following commands create a Multi-Carrier ABC group.
root> multi-carrier-abc create group group_id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> attach-member slot 2 port 1
channel-id 1
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> attach-member slot 2 port 2
channel-id 2
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> exit
14.2.3 Removing Members from a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

To remove members from a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 To remove an individual radio interface from the Multi-Carrier ABC group,
go to Multi-Carrier ABC group view and enter the following command:
multi-carrier-abc group-id[1]> detach-member channel-id
<channel-id>
14.2.4 Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI)

To delete a Multi-Carrier ABC group:
1 Remove the members from the group. See Removing Members from a
Multi-Carrier ABC Group (CLI).
2 Delete the group by entering the following command in root view:
root> multi-carrier-abc delete group group_id 1
14.3 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) (Optional) (CLI)

This section explains how to configure LAG and includes the following topics:
 LAG Overview (CLI)
 Configuring a LAG Group (CLI)
 Viewing LAG Details (CLI)
 Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI)

14.3.1 LAG Overview (CLI)

LAG can be used to provide interface redundancy, both on the same card (line
protection) and on separate cards (line protection and equipment protection).
LAG can also be used to aggregate several interfaces in order to create a wider
(aggregate) link. For example, LAG can be used to create a 4 Gbps channel.
You can create up to four LAG groups.
The following restrictions exist with respect to LAG groups:
 Only physical interfaces (including radio interfaces), not logical interfaces,
can belong to a LAG group.
 Interfaces can only be added to the LAG group if no services or service
points are attached to the interface.
 Any classification rules defined for the interface are overridden by the
classification rules defined for the LAG group.
 When removing an interface from a LAG group, the removed interface is
assigned the default interface values.
There are no restrictions on the number of interfaces that can be included in a
LAG. It is recommended, but not required, that each interface in the LAG have
the same parameters (e.g., speed, duplex mode).
Note: To add or remove an Ethernet interface to a LAG group, the
interface must be in an administrative state of “down”. This
restriction does not apply to radio interfaces. For
instructions on setting the administrative state of an
interface, see Enabling the Interfaces (CLI).
14.3.2 Configuring a LAG Group (CLI)

To create a LAG:
1 Go to interface view for the first interface you want to assign to the LAG
and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> static-lag add lagid <lagid>
2 Repeat this process for each interface you want to assign to the LAG.
14.3.3 Viewing LAG Details (CLI)

To display the name of a LAG to which an interface belongs, go to interface
view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> static-lag show name
To enter interface view for a LAG, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet interfaces group <lagid>

To display details about a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG and enter the
following command:
eth group [lagx]> summary show
To display a LAG's operational state, go to interface view for the LAG and enter
the following command:
eth group [lagx]> operational state show
To display a list of interfaces that belong to a LAG, go to interface view for the
LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag show members
14.3.4 Editing and Deleting a LAG Group (CLI)

To remove a member Ethernet interface from a LAG, go to interface view for
the LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag remove member interface eth
slot <slot> port <port>
To remove a member radio interface from a LAG, go to interface view for the
LAG and enter the following command:
eth group [lagx]> port static-lag remove member interface radio
slot <slot> port <port>
To delete a LAG, go to interface view for the LAG and simply remove all the
members, as described above.
Table 80: LAG Group CLI Parameters

lagid Variable lag1 The ID for the LAG.
lag2
lag3
lag4
slot Number Ethernet: 1 Depends on the interface and unit
Radio: 2 type.
port Number GbE 1: 1 The port number of the interface.

GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
Examples
The following commands create a LAG with the ID lag2. The LAG includes the
Ethernet interfaces 1 and 2 and radio interface 1:
port 1 admin down


port 2 admin down
root> ethernet interfaces eth slot 1 port 1
eth type eth [1/1]>
eth type eth [1/1]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type eth [1/1]> exit
root>
eth type eth [1/2]>

eth type eth [1/2]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type eth [1/2]> exit
root>
root> ethernet interfaces radio slot 2 port 1
eth type radio[2/1]>
eth type radio[2/1]> static-lag add lagid lag2
eth type radio[2/1]> exit

port 1 admin up

port 2 admin up
The following command displays the name of the LAG to which Ethernet
port 1 belongs:
eth type eth [1/1]> static-lag show name
Static-lag group name: lag2
The following commands display details about the LAG:

root> ethernet interfaces group lag2
eth group [lag2]>
eth group [lag2]> port static-lag show members
Static-lag members
-------------------
Eth#[1/1]
Eth#[1/2]
Radio#[2/1]
eth group [lag2]> summary show
Group lag2 Summary: Value

Port Description:
Port Admin state: enable
Port Operational state: down
Port Edge state: non-edge-port
Member Port#(1) 1/1
Member Port#(2) 1/2
Member Port#(3) 2/1

eth group [lag2]> operational state show
Port operational state: up.
eth group [lag2]>
The following commands remove port 2 on slot 1 from the LAG:

port 2 admin down
eth group [lag2]>
eth group [lag2]> port static-lag remove member interface eth

slot 1 port 2
14.4 Configuring XPIC (CLI)

This section explains how to configure XPIC and includes the following topics:
 XPIC Overview (CLI)
 Configuring the Antennas (CLI)
 Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI)
 Creating an XPIC Group (CLI)
14.4.1 XPIC Overview (CLI)

Cross Polarization Interference Canceller (XPIC) is a feature that enables two
radio carriers to use the same frequency with a polarity separation between
them. Since they will never be completely orthogonal, some signal cancelation
is required.
In addition, XPIC includes an automatic recovery mechanism that ensures that
if one carrier fails, or a false signal is received, the mate carrier will not be
affected. This mechanism also ensures that both carriers will be operational,
after the failure is cleared.
To configure and enable XPIC, first configure the antennas and then configure
the carriers, as described below.
14.4.2 Configuring the Antennas (CLI)

To configure the antennas:
1 Align the antennas for one carrier. While you are aligning these antennas,
mute the second carrier. See Configuring the Radio Parameters (CLI).
2 Adjust the antenna alignment until you achieve the maximum RSL for the
first-carrier link (the “RSLwanted”). This RSL should be no more than
+/-2 dB from the expected level.

3 Record the RSLwanted and mute the first radio carrier at each end of the
link.
4 Unmute the second (orthogonal) radio carrier which was muted during the
antenna alignment process.
5 Determine the XPI, by either of the following two methods:
Measure the RSL of the second carrier (the “RSLunwanted”). To calculate
the XPI, subtract RSLunwanted from the RSLwanted.
Note: To measure the second carrier, leave the Voltmeter
connected to the BNC connector. In the Radio Parameters
page of the Web EMS (Figure 17), change the RSL
Connector Source field from PHYS1 to PHYS2 (or vice
versa). The BNC connector will now measure RSL from the
other carrier.
Read the XPI by going to radio view and entering one of the following
commands:
radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr

6 The XPI should be at least 25dB. If it is not, you should adjust the OMT
assembly on the back of the antenna at one side of the link until you
achieve the highest XPI, which should be no less than 25dB. Adjust the
OMT very slowly in a right-left direction. OMT adjustment requires very
fine movements and it may take several minutes to achieve the best
possible XPI. It is recommended to achieve XPI levels between 25dB and
30dB.
7 Enable all four radio carriers and check the XPI levels of both carriers at
both sides of the link by going to radio view and entering one of the
following commands:
radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
radio [x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr
All four carriers should have approximately the same XPI value. Do not
adjust the XPI at the remote side of the link, as this may cause the XPI at
the local side of the link to deteriorate.
Note: In some cases, the XPI might not exceed the required 25dB
minimum due to adverse atmospheric conditions. If you
believe this to be the case, you can leave the configuration at
the lower values, but be sure to monitor the XPI to make
sure it subsequently exceeds 25dB. A normal XPI level in
clear sky conditions is between 25 and 30dB.
14.4.3 Configuring the Radio Carriers for XPIC (CLI)

To configure the radio carriers:
1 Configure the carriers on both ends of the link to the desired frequency
channel. Both carriers must be configured to the same frequency channel.
2 Assign XPIC (CCDP operational mode) support-enabled script to both
RMCs on both ends of the link. Each RMC must be assigned the same script.
See Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI).
Note: XPIC support is indicated by an X in the script name. For

example, mdN_A2828X_111_1205 is an XPIC-enabled script.
mdN_A2828N_130_100 is not an XPIC-enabled script. For a
list of XPIC support-enabled scripts, refer to the most recent
FibeAir IP-20C/S/E Release Notes.
3 Create an XPIC group. See Creating an XPIC Group (CLI).
14.4.4 Creating an XPIC Group (CLI)

To create an XPIC group, enter the following commands:
root> radio-groups
radio-groups>
radio-groups> xpic set admin enable
To disable XPIC, enter the following commands:

root> radio-groups
radio-groups>
radio-groups> xpic set admin disable
14.5 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)

This section explains how to configure HSB radio protection and includes the
following topics:
 HSB Radio Protection Overview (CLI)
 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)
 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit (CLI)
 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI)
 Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI)
 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI)
 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI)
 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI)
 Disabling Unit Protection (CLI)
14.5.1 HSB Radio Protection Overview (CLI)

IP-20C and IP-20S support 1+1 HSB radio protection. IP-20C also supports
2+2 HSB radio protection. In HSB radio protection, one IP-20 operates in
active mode and the other operates in standby mode. If a protection
switchover occurs, the Active unit goes into standby mode and the Standby
unit goes into active mode.
 For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection and 2+2 HSB radio
protection support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
 For a full explanation of 1+1 HSB radio protection support in IP-20S, refer
to the IP-20S Technical Description.

14.5.2 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)

You must perform the initial configuration of a 1+1 or 2+2 HSB system using a
splitter cable for each unit to provide a management connection to each unit.
For instructions on preparing and connecting the splitter cables, refer to the
Installation Guide for IP-20C or IP-20S.
Ethernet traffic must be routed to each unit via an optical splitter cable.
To configure HSB radio protection:
1 Before enabling protection, you must:
i Verify that both units have the same hardware part number (see
Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)) and the same software version (see
Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)). If the units do not have the
same software version, upgrade each unit to the most recent software
release (see Configuring a Software Download (CLI)).
ii Assign an IP address to each unit. For instructions, see Changing the
Management IP Address (CLI).
iii Establish a management connection to one of the units. You can select
either unit; once you enable Protection Administration, the system will
determine which unit becomes the Active unit.
2 To enable protection, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection set admin enable
The system configures itself for HSB protection:

The system determines which unit is the Active unit based on a
number of pre-defined criteria.
When the system returns online, all management must be performed
via the Active unit using the IP address you defined for that unit.
The IP address you defined for the unit which is now the Standby unit
is no longer valid, and the management port of the Standby unit
becomes non-operational.
Management of the Standby unit is performed via the Active unit, via
the cable between the two MIMO/Prot ports on the splitters
connecting the two units.
3 Once you have enabled Protection Admin:
i Perform all necessary radio configurations on the Active unit, such as
setting the frequency, assigning MRMC scripts, unmuting the radio, and
setting up radio groups such as XPIC or Multi-Carrier ABC
(Multi-Radio).
ii Perform all necessary Ethernet configurations on the Active unit, such
as defining Ethernet services.
iii Enter the following command in root view to copy the configuration of
the Active unit to the Standby unit:
root> platform management protection copy-to-mate
Note: While the system is performing the copy-to-mate operation,

a temporary loss of management connection will occur.

To keep the Standby unit up-to-date, after any change to the configuration of
the Active unit enter the copy-to-mate command to copy the configuration to
the Standby unit.
If you are unsure whether the Standby unit’s configuration matches that of the
Active unit, enter the following command in root view. The command output
displays the list of mismatched parameters.
root> platform management protection show mismatch details
14.5.3 Configuring 2+2 HSB Protection on an IP-20C Unit (CLI)

In order to configure 2+2 HSB unit protection on an IP-20C unit, you must
simply enable the second radio carrier on both units on both sides of the link.
No other configuration is necessary other than the configuration described
above.
To enable the second radio carrier on both units using the CLI, enter the
following commands in root view:
root> platform if-manager set interface-type radio slot 2
port 2 admin up
root> platform management protection copy-to-mate
14.5.4 Viewing the Configuration of the Standby unit (CLI)

You can view the settings of the standby unit any time.
To view the settings of the standby unit, you can run show commands in the
standby unit. To do so, first enter the mate/root context, as described in
Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI), then run the relevant
show command, and then switch back to the active unit.
14.5.5 Editing Standby Unit Settings (CLI)

Almost all settings of the standby unit are view-only. However, several
settings are editable on the Standby unit. They must be configured separately
for the Standby unit, and are not copied via copy-to-mate, nor do they trigger a
configuration mismatch in the CLI.
In the Web EMS, failure to synchronize these configuration settings causes a
configuration mismatch alarm.
The following settings must be configured separately on the standby unit:
 Setting the Unit Name. Refer to the description of platform management
system-name set name in Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI).
 Disabling/enabling Radio TX-mute. Refer to the description of rf mute
set admin in Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI).
 Clearing the Radio and RMON counters. Refer to the description of modem
clear counters in Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block
PMs (CLI).
 Setting the activation key configuration. Refer to Configuring the Activation
Key (CLI) and Activating Demo Mode (CLI).
 Defining user accounts. Refer to Configuring User Accounts (CLI).

 Setting synchronization settings. Refer to Configuring SyncE Regenerator

(CLI).
To configure these settings in the standby unit, first enter the mate/root
context, as described in Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI),
then run the relevant commands, and then switch back to the active unit.
14.5.5.1 Performing CLI operations on the Standby unit (CLI)

You can run CLI commands in the standby unit.
To run CLI commands in the standby unit:
1 Use the following command to enter view context for the standby unit:
root> switch-to mate
mate/root>
2 Enter the specific CLI command you want to run in mate/root context.
3 To switch back to the active unit, enter the following command:
mate/root> switch-back
root>
14.5.6 Viewing Link and Protection Status and Activity (CLI)

You can view link and protection status and activity any time.
 To view whether HSB protection is enabled or disabled, enter the
root> platform management protection show admin
 To view whether HSB protection is functional (available in practice), enter
the following command in root view. Note that protection is not functional
if MIMO is configured, or if the management connection to the mate is
down.
root> platform management protection show operational-state
 To view protection activity, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management protection show activity-state
 To view the status of the protection link to the mate, enter the following
root> platform management protection show link-status
 To view the status of the last copy-to-mate operation, enter the following
root> platform management protection show copy-to-mate status
 To view the current lockout status, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management protection show lockout status

14.5.7 Manually Switching to the Standby Unit (CLI)

The following events trigger switchover for HSB radio protection according to
their priority, with the highest priority triggers listed first.
1 Loss of active unit
2 Lockout
3 Radio/Ethernet interface failure
4 Manual switch
At any point, you can manually switch to the Standby unit, provided that the
highest protection fault level in the Standby unit is no higher than the highest
protection fault level on the Active unit.
To manually switchover to the Standby unit enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform management protection set manual-switch
14.5.8 Disabling Automatic Switchover to the Standby Unit (CLI)

At any point, you can perform lockout, which disables automatic switchover to
the standby unit.
To disable automatic switchover to the Standby unit, use the following
root> platform management protection lockout set admin on
To re-enable automatic switchover to the standby unit, use the following

root> platform management protection lockout set admin off
14.5.9 Disabling Unit Protection (CLI)

You can disable unit protection at any time. If you disable unit protection,
keep in mind that while the unit that was formerly the active unit maintains its
IP address, the unit that was formerly the standby unit is assigned the default
IP address (192.168.1.1)
To disable protection, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform management protection set admin disable

14.6 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI)

Note: This feature is only relevant for IP-20C units.
This section describes how to configure MIMO and space diversity, and
include the following topics:
 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI)
 MIMO Mate Management Access (CLI)
 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)
 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)
 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)
 Resetting MIMO (CLI)
 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels (CLI)
 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)
14.6.1 MIMO and Space Diversity Overview (CLI)

Line-of-Sight (LoS) Multiple Input Multiple Output (MIMO) achieves spatial
multiplexing by creating an artificial phase de-correlation by deliberate
antenna distance at each site in deterministic constant distance. At each site in
an LoS MIMO configuration, data to be transmitted over the radio link is split
into two bit streams (MIMO 2x2) or four bit streams (MIMO 4x4). These bit
streams are transmitted via two antennas. In MIMO 2x2, the antennas use a
single polarization. In MIMO 4x4, each antenna uses dual polarization. The
phase difference caused by the antenna separation enables the receiver to
distinguish between the streams.
IP-20C supports both MIMO 2x2 and MIMO 4x4. For a full explanation of
MIMO support in IP-20C, refer to the IP-20C Technical Description.
The same hardware configurations can also be used to implement BBS Space
Diversity. IP-20C supports 1+0 and 2+2 Space Diversity.
Note: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created per
IP-20C unit.

14.6.1.1 2+2 Space Diversity (CLI)

2+2 HSB Space Diversity provides both equipment protection and signal
protection. If one unit goes out of service, the other unit takes over and
maintains the link until the other unit is restored to service and Space
Diversity operation resumes.
2+2 HSB Space Diversity utilizes two IP-20C units operating in dual core
mode. In each IP-20C unit, both radio carriers are connected to a single
antenna. One optical GbE port on each IP-20C is connected to an optical
splitter. Traffic must be routed to an optical GbE port on each IP-20C unit.
In effect, a 2+2 HSB configuration is a protected 2+0 Space Diversity
configuration. Each IP-20C monitors both of its cores. If the active IP-20C
detects a radio failure in either of its cores, it initiates a switchover to the
standby IP-20C.
14.6.2 MIMO Mate Management Access (CLI)

For MIMO configurations using in-band management and an external switch
operating in LAG mode, you must enable MIMO Mate Management Access in
order to manage both units via in-band management. When MIMO Mate
Management Access is enabled, the two units exchange incoming management
packets, ensuring that all management data is received by both units.
Note that MIMO Mate Management Access should only be enabled if both of
the following conditions exist:
 In-band management
 External switch using LAG
If either of these conditions is not present, MIMO Mate Management Access
should be disabled, otherwise in-band management may be lost. By default,
the feature is disabled.
To enable MIMO Mate Management Access, enter the following command:
root> radio mimo mate mng access set admin enable
To disable MIMO Mate Management Access, enter the following command:

root> radio mimo mate mng access set admin disable
To display whether MIMO Mate Management Access is enabled, enter the

following command:
root> radio mimo mate mng access show
14.6.3 Creating a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)

Note: Only one MIMO or Space Diversity group can be created
per IP-20C unit.
1 To create a MIMO or Space Diversity group, enter the following command:
root> radio mimo create group 1 mimo-type <mimo-type> radio 2
port <first radio carrier in the group: either 1 or 2> radio 2
port <second radio carrier in the group: either 2 or 1 >
where <mimo-type> defines the MIMO or Space Diversity

configuration. The options are:
mimo-2x2 – 2x2 MIMO.

mimo-4x4 – 4x4 MIMO.
1-plus-0-sd – 1+0 Space Diversity.
2-plus-0-sd – 2+0 Space Diversity.
Note To enable 2+2 Space Diversity, specify 2-plus-0-sd

after setting up the hardware configuration for 2+2
Space Diversity. See 2+2 Space Diversity (CLI).
2 After creating the group, you must enable the group.
See Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI).
3 For 4x4 MIMO configurations and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, you
must set the role of the group to Master or Slave. See Setting the Role of a
MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI).
14.6.4 Enabling/Disabling a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)

To set the admin state of a MIMO or Space Diversity group, enter the following
root > radio mimo set-admin group <group_id> admin <enable |
disable>
14.6.5 Setting the Role of a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)

For 4x4 MIMO configurations and 2+2 Space Diversity configurations, you
must set the role of the group to Master or Slave. This determines the role of
To set the role of a MIMO or Space Diversity group, enter the following
root > radio mimo set-role group 1 mimo-role <slave|master>
14.6.6 Resetting MIMO (CLI)

In hardware failure scenarios, MIMO 4x4 provides a resiliency mechanism
that enables the link to continue functioning as a 2+0 XPIC link.
To restore full MIMO operation, the faulty equipment must be replaced. The
replacement equipment must be pre-configured to the same configuration as
the equipment being replaced. Once the new equipment has been properly
installed and, if necessary, powered up, you must reset MIMO.
Note: MIMO reset causes a traffic interruption.
To reset MIMO, enter the following command in root view:
root > radio mimo reset group 1
14.6.7 Viewing MMI and XPI Levels (CLI)

You can view MMI and XPI levels for the individual radio carriers in a MIMO
group.

Note that the MMI value can also be calculated manually. To calculate it
manually, you must measure the following RSL levels per receiver:
1 Mute all remote transmitters except the transmitter for the link you want
to measure, and measure the local RSL level (RSL_Wanted).
2 Mute all remote transmitters except the same polarization interferer and
measure the local RSL2 (RSL_Int).
3 The MMI is equal to RSL_Wanted – RSL_Int.
To show the status of a MIMO group, as well as the MMI and XPI levels for the
individual radio carriers, enter the following command:
root > radio mimo show status group 1
The following is a sample output from this command:

root> radio mimo show status group 1
MIMO group type: mimo-4x4.

MIMO group 1st member: slot 2 port 1.
MIMO group 2nd member: slot 2 port 2.
MIMO group admin status: disable.
MIMO state: MIMO-Disabled.
MIMO advanced state: disabled.
MIMO RFU role: slave.
MIMO 1st carrier MMI: -0.0
MIMO 2nd carrier MMI: -0.0
MIMO 1st carrier XPI: 99.0
MIMO 2nd carrier XPI: 99.0
Table 81: MMI and XPI Levels CLI Parameters
Parameter Input Type

MIMO group type The MIMO or Space Diversity configuration:
 mimo-2x2 – 2x2 MIMO.
 mimo-4x4 – 4x4 MIMO.
 1-plus-0-sd – 1+0 BBS Space Diversity.
 2-plus-0-sd – 2+0 XPIC with BBS Space Diversity.
MIMO group 1st member The first radio carrier in the group.
MIMO group 2nd member The second radio carrier in the group.
MIMO group admin status Indicates whether the MIMO group is enabled or disabled.
MIMO state Indicates whether MIMO is enabled or disabled.
MIMO advanced state A detailed description of the MIMO state.
MIMO RFU role Indicates the role of the unit in the MIMO configuration (Master or
Slave).
MIMO 1st carrier MMI MIMO Mate Interference for the first group member. MMI represents the
difference between the RSL1 and the RSL2 of the remote Master and
Slave transmitters with the same polarization. The nominal range is 0.
The range should be from -3 dB to +3 dB.
MMI is not relevant for 1+0 Space Diversity.

Parameter Input Type

MIMO 2nd carrier MMI MMI for the second group member.
MIMO 1st carrier XPI Cross Polarization Interference for the first group member. This is only
relevant in 4x4 MIMO configurations, where each unit operates in dual
polarization (XPIC) mode. The XPI value should be at least 25 dB. For
further information, refer to Configuring XPIC (CLI).
MIMO 2nd carrier XPI XPI for the second group member.
14.6.8 Deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity Group (CLI)

You can delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group.
To delete a MIMO or Space Diversity Group:
1 Before deleting a MIMO or Space Diversity group, you must first disable
the group using the following command in root view:
root > radio mimo set-admin group 1 admin disable
Note: When the MIMO or Space Diversity group is disabled,

the system is automatically reset.
2 Delete the MIMO or Space Diversity group by entering the following
root > radio mimo delete group 1
14.7 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI)

If you wish to operate an IP-20C unit in single radio carrier mode, you must
perform the following steps:
1 Verify that XPIC is disabled. See Configuring XPIC (CLI).
2 Disable Multi-Carrier ABC, as described in Deleting a Multi-Carrier ABC
Group (CLI).
3 Disable one of the two radio interfaces, as described in Enabling the
Interfaces (CLI).
4 Mute the disabled radio interface, as described in Muting and Unmuting a
Radio (CLI).

15. Unit Management (CLI)

 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating Communications (CLI)
 Configuring SNMP (CLI)
 Upgrading the Software (CLI)
 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI)
 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration (CLI)
 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI)
 Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring NTP (CLI)
 Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)
Related topics:
 Setting the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI)
 Uploading Unit Info (CLI)
 Changing the Management IP Address (CLI)
15.1 Defining the IP Protocol Version for Initiating

Communications (CLI)
You can specify which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating
communications, such as downloading software, sending traps, pinging, or
exporting configurations. The options are IPv4 or IPv6.
To define which IP protocol the unit will use when initiating communications,
enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management ip set ip-address-family <ipv4|ipv6>
To show the IP protocol version the unit will use when initiating
communications, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management ip show ip-address-family
15.2 Configuring the Remote Unit’s IP Address (CLI)

You can configure the remote unit’s IP address, subnet mask and default
gateway in IPv4 format and/or in IPv6 format. The remote unit will receive
communications whether they were sent to its IPv4 address or its IPv6
address.

15.2.1 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv4 format (CLI)

To set the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set ip-address <ipv4-address>
To display the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show ip-address
To set the remote radio’s subnet mask, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set subnet-mask IP <subnet-mask>
To display the remote radio’s subnet mask, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show subnet-mask
To set the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set default-gateway IP <ipv4-address>
To display the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show default-gateway
Table 82: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv4) CLI Parameters

ipv4-address Dotted Any valid IPv4 address. Sets the default gateway or IP
decimal address of the remote radio.
format.
subnet-mask Dotted Any valid subnet mask. Sets the subnet mask of the
decimal remote radio.
format.
Examples
The following command sets the default gateway of the remote radio as
192.168.1.20:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set default-gateway IP 192.168.1.20
The following commands set the IP address of the remote radio as

192.168.1.1, with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.255.
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set ip-address 192.168.1.1
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set subnet-mask IP 255.255.255.255

15.2.2 Configuring the Remote Radio's IP Address in IPv6 format (CLI)

To set the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set ip-address-ipv6 <ipv6-address>
To display the remote radio’s IP Address, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show ip-address-ipv6
To set the remote radio’s prefix length , enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set prefix-length <prefix-length >
To display the remote radio’s prefix-length , enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show prefix-length
To set the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set default-gateway-ipv6 IPv6 <ipv6-
address>
To display the remote radio’s default gateway, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show default-gateway-ipv6
Table 83: Remote Unit IP Address (IPv6) CLI Parameters

ipv6-address Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 address. Sets the default gateway or IP
hexadecimal digits address of the remote radio.
prefix-length Number 1-128 Sets the prefix length of the
remote radio.
Examples
The following command sets the default gateway of the remote radio as
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set default-gateway-ipv6 IPv6
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
The following commands set the IP address of the remote radio as

FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329, with a prefix length of 64:
radio[2/2]>remote-unit set ip-address-ipv6
FE80:0000:0000:0000:0202:B3FF:FE1E:8329
radio[2/2]>remote-unit set prefix-length 64

15.3 Configuring SNMP (CLI)

P-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20E support SNMP v1, V2c, and v3. You can set
community strings for access to IP-20 units.
IP-20C, IP-20S, and IP-20E support the following MIBs:
 RFC-1213 (MIB II).
 RMON MIB.
 Proprietary MIB.
Access to the unit is provided by making use of the community and context
fields in SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c/SNMPv3, respectively.

 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI)
 Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI)
 Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI)
 Configuring Trap Managers (CLI)
15.3.1 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI)

To enable SNMP, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp admin set
<admin>
To specify the SNMP version, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp version set
<version>
To specify the SNMP read and write communities, enter the following
root> platform security protocols-control snmpv1v2 set read-
community <read-community> write-community <write-community>
Table 84: Basic SNMP CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Select enable to enable SNMP
disable monitoring, or disable to disable
SNMP monitoring.
version Variable v1 Specifies the SNMP version.
v2
v3
read- Text String Any valid SNMP read The community string for the SNMP
community community. read community.
write- Text String Any valid SNMP write The community string for the SNMP
community community. write community.

Example
The following commands enable SNMP v2 on the unit, and set the read
community to “public” and the write community to “private”:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp admin set enable
root> platform security protocols-control snmp version set v2

community public write-community private
15.3.2 Configuring SNMPv3 (CLI)

The following commands are relevant for SNMPv3.
To block SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access so that only SNMPv3 access will be
enabled, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp v1v2-block set
<set-block>
To add an SNMPv3 user, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security protocols-control snmp v3-
authentication add v3-user-name <v3-user-name> v3-user-password
<v3-user-password> v3-security-mode <v3-security-mode> v3-
encryption-mode <v3-encryption-mode> v3-auth-algorithm <v3-
auth-algorithm> v3-access-mode <v3-access-mode>
To remove an SNMP v3 user, enter the following command in root view:

authentication remove v3-user-name <v3-user-name>
To display all SNMP v3 users and their authentication parameters, enter the
authentication show
Table 85: SNMPv3 CLI Parameters

set-block Variable yes yes – SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access is
no blocked.
no – SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 access is
not blocked.
v3-user-name Text String An SNMPv3 user name.
v3-user- Text String Must be at least eight An SNMPv3 user password.
password characters.
v3-security- Variable authNoPriv Defines the security mode to be used
mode authPriv for this user.
noAuthNoPriv


v3-encryption- Variable None Defines the encryption (privacy)
mode DES protocol to be used for this user.
AES
v3-auth- Variable None Defines the authentication algorithm to
algorithm SHA be used for this user.
MD5
v3-access- Variable readWrite Defines the access permission level
mode readOnly for this user.
Example
The following commands enable SNMP v2 on the unit, and set the read
community to “public” and the write community to “private”:

community public write-community private
The following commands enable SNMP v3 on the unit, block SNMP v1 and
SNMP v2 access, and define an SNMPv3 user with User Name=Geno,
Password=abcdefgh, security mode authPriv, encryption mode DES,
authentication algorithm SHA, and read-write access:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp v1v2-block set

yes

authentication add v3-user-name geno v3-user-password abcdefgh
v3-security-mode authPriv v3-encryption-mode DES v3-auth-
algorithm SHA v3-access-mode readWrite
15.3.3 Displaying the SNMP Settings (CLI)

To display the general SNMP parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-all
To display all SNMP v3 users and their authentication parameters, enter the
authentication show
To display the current MIB version used in the system, enter the following
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-mib-version

To display details about the current MIB version used in the system, enter the
root> platform security protocols-control snmp show-mib-
version-table
To display the SNMP read and write communities, enter the following
root> platform security protocols-control snmpv1v2 show
15.3.4 Configuring Trap Managers (CLI)

To display the current SNMP trap manager settings, enter the following
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager
show
To modify the settings of an SNMP trap manger, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager set
manager-id <manager-id> manager-admin <manager-admin> manager-
ipv4 <manager-ipv4> manager-ipv6<manager-ipv6> manager-port
<manager-port> manager-community <manager-community> manager-
v3-user <manager-v3-user> manager-description <manager-
description>
To enable an SNMP trap manger without modifying its parameters, enter the
admin manager-id <manager-id> manager-admin <manager-admin>
To specify the number of minutes between heartbeat traps, enter the

heartbeat manager-id <manager-id> manager-heartbeat <manager-
heartbeat>
Table 86: Trap Managers CLI Parameters

manager-id Number. 1–4 Enter the Manager ID of the trap
manager you want to modify.
manager- Variable. enable Enter enable or disable to
admin disable enable or disable the trap
manager.
manager-ipv4 Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. If the IP protocol selected
in platform management ip set
ip-address-family is IPv4, enter
the destination IPv4 address.
Traps will be sent to this IP
address.


manager-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 address. If the IP protocol selected
hexadecimal digits in platform management ip set
separated by colons. ip-address-family is IPv6, enter
the destination IPv6 address.
Traps will be sent to this IP
address.
manager-port Number. 70 – 65535 Enter the number of the port
through which traps will be sent.
manager- Text String. Any valid SNMP read Enter the community string for
community community. the SNMP read community.
manager-v3- Text String. The name of a V3 user If the SNMP Trap version
user defined in the system. selected in platform security
protocols-control snmp version
set is V3, enter the name of a
V3 user defined in the system.
Note: Make sure that an
identical V3 user is also
defined on the manager's
side
manager- Text String. Enter a description of the trap
description manager (optional).
manager- Number. 0 – 1440 Specifies the number of minutes
heartbeat between heartbeat traps. If you
enter 0, no heartbeat traps will
be sent.
Note: To reduce unnecessary
traffic, heartbeat traps are
only sent if no other trap
was sent during the
Heartbeat Period.
Examples
The following commands enable trap manager 2, and assign it IP address
192.168.1.250, port 164, and community “private”, with a heartbeat of
12 minutes.
root> platform security protocols-control snmp trap-manager set
manager-id 2 manager-admin enable manager-ip 192.168.1.250
manager-port 164 manager-community private manager-description
text

heartbeat manager-id 2 manager-heartbeat 12

15.4 Upgrading the Software (CLI)

IP-20 software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that
includes software and firmware for all components in the system. Software is
first downloaded to the system, then installed. After installation, a reset is
automatically performed on all components whose software was upgraded.

 Software Upgrade Overview (CLI)
 Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)
 Configuring a Software Download (CLI)
 Downloading a Software Package (CLI)
 Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI)
15.4.1 Software Upgrade Overview (CLI)

The IP-20 software installation process includes the following steps:
1 Download – The files required for the installation or upgrade are
downloaded from a remote server.
2 Installation – The downloaded software and firmware files are installed
in all modules and components of the IP-20 that are currently running an
older version.
3 Reset – The IP-20 is restarted in order to boot the new software and
firmware versions.
Software and firmware releases are provided in a single bundle that includes
software and firmware for all components in the system. When you download
a software bundle, the system verifies the validity of the bundle. The system
also compares the files in the bundle to the files currently installed in the
IP-20 and its components, so that only files that need to be updated are
actually downloaded. A message is displayed for each file that is actually
downloaded.
Note: When downloading an older version, all files in the bundle
may be downloaded, including files that are already
installed.
Software bundles can be downloaded via FTP or SFTP. After the software
download is complete, you can initiate the installation.
Note: Before performing a software upgrade, it is important to
the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI).
15.4.2 Viewing Current Software Versions (CLI)

To display all current software versions, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform software show versions

15.4.3 Configuring a Software Download (CLI)

When downloading software, the IDU functions as an FTP or SFTP client. You
must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are using to
perform the software upgrade. For details, see Installing and Configuring an
FTP or SFTP Server.
To set the file transfer protocol you want to use (FTP or SFTP), enter the
following command:
root> platform software download version protocol <ftp|sftp>
If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is

IPv4, enter the following command:
root> platform software download channel server set server-ip
<server-ipv4> directory <directory> username <username>
password <password>
If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-family is

IPv6, enter the following command:
root> platform software download channel server-ipv6 set
server-ip <server-ipv6> directory <directory> username
<username> password <password>
To display the software download channel configuration, enter one of the

following commands:
root> platform software download channel server show
root> platform software download channel server-ipv6 show
Table 87: Software Download CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The IPv4 address of the PC or
laptop you are using as the FTP
server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 address. The IPv6 address of the PC or
hexadecimal digits laptop you are using as the FTP
separated by colons. server.
directory Text String. The directory path from which
you are downloading the files.
Enter the path relative to the
FTP user's home directory, not
the absolute path. To leave the
path blank, enter //.
server- Text String. The user name you configured
username in the FTP server.
server- Text String. The password you configured in
password the FTP server. If you did not
configure a password for your
FTP user, simply omit this
parameter.

The following command configures a download from IP address

192.168.1.242, in the directory “current”, with user name “anonymous” and
password “12345.”
root> platform software download channel server set server-
ip 192.168.1.242 directory \current username anonymous password
12345
15.4.4 Downloading a Software Package (CLI)

To initiate a software download, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform software download version protocol ftp

You are about to perform a software management operation. This
may cause a system reset.
Are you sure? (yes/no)
Enter Yes at the prompt. When the prompt appears again, enter the following
command to check the download status:
root> platform software download status show
Once the following message appears, proceed with the installation:

DOWNLOAD VERSION status: download success, process percentage:
100
If the software version on the FTP or SFTP server has already been
downloaded to the unit, the following message appears:
DOWNLOAD VERSION status: all components exist, process
percentage: 0
Important Note – If upgrading from version 7.9 or earlier:

• Before you proceed to install the software, repeat the download
process even if the platform software download status show
command produced a download success message, until the unit
displays the message all components exist.
• In case of failure, wait at least 30 minutes and repeat the software
download.
15.4.5 Installing and Upgrading Software (CLI)

To install or upgrade the software, enter the following command in root view
after downloading the software bundle:
root> platform software install version
If you wish to delay the start of installation, enter instead the following
command. The time you enter in HH:MM format is the amount of time to delay
until the start of the installation process:
root> platform software install version timer-countdown <hh:mm>


Software version to be installed:
Are you sure? (yes/no)
To display the status of a software installation or upgrade, enter the following

command:
root> platform software install status show
Important Notes:
• DO NOT reboot the unit during software installation process. As soon
as the process is successfully completed, the unit will reboot itself.
• Sometimes the installation process can take up to 30 minutes.
• Only in the event that software installation was not successfully
finished and more than 30 minutes have passed can the unit be
rebooted.
If you configured delayed installation, you can do any of the following:
 Abort the current delayed installation. To do so, enter the following
command:
root> platform software install abort-timer
 Show the time left until the installation process begins. To do so, enter the
following command:
root> platform software install time-to-install
 Show the original timer as configured for a delayed installation. To do so,
enter the following command:
root> platform software install show-time

15.5 Backing Up and Restoring Configurations (CLI)

You can import and export IP-20 configuration files. This enables you to copy
the system configuration to multiple IP-20 units. You can also backup and save
configuration files.
Configuration files can only be copied between units of the same type,
i.e., IP-20C to IP-20C, IP-20S to IP-20S, and IP-20E to IP-20E.
Note that you can also write CLI scripts that will automatically execute a series
of commands when the configuration file is restored. For information, refer to
Editing CLI Scripts (CLI).

 Configuration Management Overview (CLI)
 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI)
 Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI)
 Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI)
 Editing CLI Scripts (CLI)
15.5.1 Configuration Management Overview (CLI)

System configuration files consist of a zip file that contains three components:
 A binary configuration file used by the system to restore the configuration.
 A text file which enables users to examine the system configuration in a
readable format. The file includes the value of all system parameters at the
time of creation of the backup file.
 An additional text file which enables you to write CLI scripts in order to
make desired changes in the backed-up configuration. This file is executed
by the system after restoring the configuration.
You can apply a configuration file to the system from any of the restore points.
You must configure from 1 to 3 restore points:
 When you import a configuration file, the file is saved to the selected
restore point, and overwrites whichever file was previously held in that
restore point.
 When you export a configuration file, the file is exported from the selected
restore point.
 When you back up the current configuration, the backup configuration file
is saved to the selected restore point, and overwrites whichever file was
previously held in that restore point.
 When you restore a configuration, the configuration file in the selected
restore point is the file that is restored.

15.5.2 Setting the Configuration Management Parameters (CLI)

When importing and exporting configuration files, the IP-20 functions as an
FTP or SFTP client. You must install FTP or SFTP server software on the PC or
laptop you are using to perform the import or export. For details, see Installing
and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
Note Before importing or exporting a configuration file, you must
the Time and Date (Optional) (CLI).
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration file import and export,
enter one of the following commands in root view:
 If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-
family is IPv4, enter the following command:
root> platform configuration channel server set ip-
address <server-ipv4> directory <directory> filename <filename>
username <username> password <password>
 If the IP protocol selected in platform management ip set ip-address-
family is IPv6, enter the following command:
root> platform configuration channel server-ipv6 set ip-
address <server-ipv6> directory <directory> filename <filename>
To set the file transfer protocol you want to use (FTP or SFTP), enter the
following command:
root>platform configuration channel set protocol <ftp|sftp>
To display the FTP channel parameters for importing and exporting

configuration files, enter one of the following commands in root view:
root> platform configuration channel server show
root> platform configuration channel server-ipv6 show
Table 88: Configuration Management CLI Parameters
Permitted
Parameter Input Type Values Description
server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you
format. address. are using as the FTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you
hexadecimal digits address. are using as the FTP server.
separated by
colons.
directory Text String. The directory path to which you are
exporting or from which you are importing
the configuration file. Enter the path relative
to the FTP user's home directory, not the
absolute path. To leave the path blank,
enter //.

Permitted
filename Text String. The name of the file you are importing, or
the name you want to give the file you are
exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to the
file name. Otherwise, the file import
may fail. You can export the file
using any name, then add the suffix
.zip manually.
username Text String. The user name you configured in the FTP
server.
password Text String. The password you configured in the FTP
server. If you did not configure a password
for your FTP user, simply omit this
parameter.
Examples
The following command configures the FTP channel for configuration file
import and export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with
file name “version_8_backup.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password
“12345.”
root> platform configuration channel server set server-ip
192.168.1.99 directory \current filename version_8_backup.zip
username anonymous password 12345
15.5.3 Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI)

To save the current configuration as a backup file to one of the restore points,
root> platform configuration configuration-file add <restore-
point>
To export a configuration from a restore point to the external server location,

root> platform configuration configuration-file export
<restore-point>
Table 89: Configuration Backup and Restore CLI Parameters
Permitted
restore-point Variable restore-point-1 Identifies the restore point to or from which
restore-point-2 to perform the backup operation.
restore-point-3

Examples
The following commands save the current configuration as a configuration at
Restore Point 1, and export the file to the external server location:
root> platform configuration configuration-file add restore-
point-1
root> platform configuration configuration-file export restore-

point-1
15.5.4 Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI)

You can import a configuration file from an external PC or laptop to one of the
restore points. Once you have imported the file, you can restore the
configuration. Restoring a saved configuration does not change the unit’s FIPS
mode.
Note: In order to import a configuration file, you must configure
the FTP channel parameters and restore points, as
described in Setting the Configuration Management
Parameters and Backing up and Exporting a Configuration
File.
To import a configuration file, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform configuration configuration-file import
<restore-point>
To restore a configuration from a restore point to become the active

configuration file, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform configuration configuration-file restore
<restore-point>
Table 90: Configuration Import and Restore CLI Parameters
Permitted
restore-point Variable restore-point-1 Identifies the restore point to or from which
restore-point-2 to perform the backup operation.
restore-point-3
Examples
The following commands import a configuration file from an external PC or
laptop to Restore Point 2 on the IP-20, and restore the file to be the system
configuration file for the IP-20:
root> platform configuration configuration-file import restore-
point-2
root> platform configuration configuration-file restore

restore-point-2

15.5.5 Editing CLI Scripts (CLI)

The configuration file package includes a text file that enables you to write CLI
scripts in a backed-up configuration that are executed after restoring the
configuration.
To edit a CLI script:
1 Back up the current configuration to one of the restore points. See Backing
up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI).
2 Export the configuration from the restore point to a PC or laptop.
See Backing up and Exporting a Configuration File (CLI).
3 On the PC or laptop, unzip the file Configuration_files.zip.
4 Edit the cli_script.txt file using clish commands, one per line.
5 Save and close the cli_script.txt file, and add it back into
the Configuration_files.zip file.
6 Import the updated Configuration_files.zip file back into the unit.
See Importing and Restoring a Configuration File (CLI).
7 Restore the imported configuration file. See Importing and Restoring a
Configuration File (CLI). The unit is automatically reset. During
initialization, the CLI script is executed, line by line.
Note: If any specific command in the CLI script requires reset, the
unit is reset when that command is executed. During
initialization following the reset, execution of the CLI script
continues from the following command.
15.6 Setting the Unit to the Factory Default Configuration

(CLI)
To restore the unit to its factory default configuration, while retaining the
unit’s IP address settings and logs, enter the following commands in root view:
root> platform management set-to-default

WARNING: All database and configuration will be lost, unit will
be restart.
Are you sure? (yes/no):yes
At the prompt, type yes.

Note: This does not change the unit’s IP address or FIPS
configuration.
15.7 Performing a Hard (Cold) Reset (CLI)

To initiate a hard (cold) reset on the unit, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management chassis reset

You are about to reset the shelf
Are you sure? :(yes/no):

Enter yes. The unit is reset.
15.8 Configuring Unit Parameters (CLI)

You can view and configure system information:
To configure a name for the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management system-name set name <name>
To define a location for the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management system-location set name <name>
To define a contact person for questions pertaining to the unit, enter the
root> platform management system-contact set name <name>
To define the unit's latitude coordinates, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform management system-latitude set <latitude>
To define the unit's longitude coordinates, enter the following command in

root view:
root> platform management system-longitude set <longitude>
To define the type of measurement unit you want the system to use, enter the
root> platform management set unit_measure_format
<unit_measure_format>
To display the type of measurement unit used by the system, enter the
root> platform management show unit_measure_format
Table 91: Unit Parameters CLI Parameters

name Text Up to 64 characters. Defines the name of the unit.
latitude Text Up to 256 characters. Defines the latitude coordinates of the
unit.
longitude Text Up to 256 characters. Defines the longitude coordinates of
the unit.
unit_measure_format Variable metric Defines the measurement units of the
imperial unit.

Examples
The following commands configure a name, location, contact person, latitude
coordinates, longitude coordinates, and units of measurements for the IP-20:
root> platform management system-name set name "My-System-Name"
root> platform management system-location set name "My-System-

Location"
root> platform management system-contact set name "John Doe"
root> platform management system-latitude set 40
root> platform management system-longitude set 73
root> platform management set unit_measure_format metric
15.9 Configuring NTP (CLI)

IP-20 supports Network Time Protocol (NTP). NTP distributes Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC) throughout the system, using a jitter buffer to neutralize
the effects of variable latency.
To configure NTP, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management ntp set admin <admin> ntp-version
<ntp-version> ntp-server-ip-address-1 <ntp-server-ip-address>
To display the current NTP configuration, enter the following command in

root view:
root> platform management ntp show status
Table 92: NTP CLI Parameters

admin Variable. enable Enter enable or disable to enable or
disable disable the NTP server.
ntp-version Variable. v3 Enter the NTP version you want to use.

v4 NTPv4 provides interoperability with NTP v3
and with SNTP.
ntp-server-ip- Dotted decimal Any valid IP address. Enter the IP address of the NTP server.
address format.
Example
The following command enables NTP, using NTP v4, and sets the IP address of
the NTP server as 62.90.139.210.
root> platform management ntp set admin enable ntp-version
ntpv4 ntp-server-ip-address-1

15.10 Displaying Unit Inventory (CLI)

To view inventory information, such as the part number and serial number of
the unit hardware, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform management inventory show-info
For example:
root> platform management inventory show info
System information:
card-name : IP-20
Subtype : 350
part number : 22-0001-0|
serial number : F493606212
company name : Ceragon Networks Ltd.
product name : AODU DC, All-outdoor, dual radio carriers in one

product
product description : AODU DC, All-outdoor, dual radio carriers

in one product
root>

16. Radio Configuration (CLI)

 Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring ATPC (CLI)
 Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI)
 Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI)
 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)
 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics (CLI)
Related topics:
 Entering Radio View (CLI)
 Muting and Unmuting a Radio (CLI)
 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Level (CLI)
 Configuring the Transmit (TX) Frequency (CLI)
 Configuring the Radio (MRMC) Script(s) (CLI)
 System Configurations (CLI)
 Configuring Multi-Carrier ABC (CLI)
 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) (Optional) (CLI)
 Configuring XPIC (CLI)
 Configuring HSB Radio Protection (CLI)
 Configuring MIMO and Space Diversity (CLI)
 Operating an IP-20C in Single Radio Carrier Mode (CLI)
Note that to view and configure radio parameters, you must first enter the
radio’s view level in the CLI. For details, refer to Entering Radio View (CLI).
Note: For convenience, this User Guide generally shows the radio
prompt as radio[2/1]>.
16.1 Viewing and Configuring the Remote Radio Parameters

(CLI)
 Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI)
 Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI)
 Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI)
 Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI)
 Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI)
 Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI)
Related topics
16.1.1 Displaying Communication Status with the Remote Radio (CLI)

To display the communication status with the remote radio, enter the
following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit communication status show
16.1.2 Displaying the Remote Radio’s Link ID (CLI)

To display the remote radio’s Link ID, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show link-id
16.1.3 Muting and Unmuting the Remote Radio (CLI)

To mute or unmute the remote radio, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit mute set admin <admin>
To display the mute status of the remote radio, enter the following command
in radio view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit mute show status
Table 93: Remote Radio Mute/Unmute CLI Parameters

admin Variable on Mutes (on) or unmutes (off) the remote
off unit.
The following command mutes the remote radio:

radio[2/1]>remote-unit mute set admin on
The following command unmutes the remote radio:

radio[2/1]>remote-unit mute set admin off
16.1.4 Displaying the Remote Radio’s RX Level (CLI)

To display the remote radio’s RX level, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show rx-level
16.1.5 Configuring the Remote Radio’s TX Level (CLI)

To set the transmit (TX) level of the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit set tx-level <tx-level>
To display the transmit (TX) level of the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit show tx-level

Table 94: Remote Radio TX Level CLI Parameters

tx-level Number Depends on the The desired TX signal level (TSL), in dBm.
frequency and unit
type.
The following command sets the TX level of the remote radio to 10 dBm:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit set tx-level 10
16.1.6 Configuring Remote ATPC (CLI)

To set the RX reference level for ATPC on the remote radio, enter the following
radio[x/x]>remote-unit atpc set ref-level <ref-level>
To display the RX reference level for ATPC on the remote radio, enter the
radio[x/x]>remote-unit atpc show ref-level
Table 95: Remote Radio ATPC CLI Parameters

ref-level Number -70 - -30 The RX reference level for the ATPC
mechanism.
The following command sets the ATPC RX reference level of the remote radio
to -55:
radio[2/1]>remote-unit atpc set ref-level -55
16.2 Configuring ATPC (CLI)

Automatic TX Power Control (ATPC) is a closed-loop mechanism by which
each carrier adjusts its transmitted signal power according to the indication
received across the link, in order to achieve a desired RSL on the other side of
the link. Without ATPC, if loss of frame occurs the system automatically
increases its transmit power to the configured maximum. This may cause a
higher level of interference with other systems until the failure is corrected.
Note: You cannot use ATPC in MIMO mode. See Configuring MIMO
and Space Diversity (CLI).
To enable or disable ATPC, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc set admin <admin>
To display whether or not ATPC is enabled, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show admin
To set the RX reference level for ATPC, enter the following command in radio
view
radio[x/x]>atpc set rx-level atpc_ref_rx_level <rx-level>

To display the RX reference level for ATPC, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>atpc show rx-level
Table 96: Radio ATPC CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Enables or disables ATPC mode.
disable
rx-level Number -70 - -30 The RX reference level for the ATPC
mechanism.
The following commands enable ATPC mode for radio carrier 1 and set the RX
reference level to -55:
radio[2/1]>atpc set admin enable
radio[2/1]>atpc set rx-level atpc_ref_rx_level -55
16.3 Configuring Header De-Duplication (CLI)

Note: Header De-Duplication is supported for IP-20C and IP-20S.
For IP-20E, Header De-Duplication is planned for future
release.
Header De-Duplication identifies traffic flows and replaces header fields with
a flow ID. The Header De-Duplication module includes an algorithm for
learning each new flow, and implements compression on the flow type
starting with the next frame of that flow type.
You can determine the depth to which the compression mechanism operates,
from Layer 2 to Layer 4. You must balance the depth of compression against
the number of flows in order to ensure maximum efficiency. Multi-Layer
(Enhanced) compression supports up to 256 flow types.
Note: The Header De-Duplication configuration must be identical
on both sides of the link.
To configure Header De-Duplication, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[2/1]> compression header-compression set <mode>
Note: In this release, if two radio carriers in an IP-20C unit are

activated, the Header De-Duplication configuration for radio
carrier 1 are applied to both carriers. You must enter radio
view for radio interface 1.
To clear Ethernet port counters, including both Frame Cut-Through and
Header De-Duplication counters, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>clear-ethernet-port-counters

Table 97: Header De-Duplication CLI Parameters

admin Variable Enable Enables or disables ATPC mode.
disable
mode Variable Disabled Disabled - Header De-Duplication is
Layer2 disabled.
MPLS Layer2 - Header De-Duplication operates on
the Ethernet level.
Layer3
MPLS - Header De-Duplication operates on
Layer4
the Ethernet and MPLS levels.
Tunnel
Layer3 - Header De-Duplication operates on
Tunnel-Layer3 the Ethernet and IP levels.
Tunnel-Layer4 Layer4 - Header De-Duplication operates on
all supported layers up to Layer 4.
Tunnel - Header De-Duplication operates on
Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the Tunnel layer for
packets carrying GTP or GRE frames.
Tunnel-Layer3 - Header De-Duplication
operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the
Tunnel and T-3 layers for packets carrying
GTP or GRE frames.
Tunnel-Layer4 - Header De-Duplication
operates on Layer 2, Layer 3, and on the
Tunnel, T-3, and T-4 layers for packets
carrying GTP or GRE frames.
The following command enables Layer 2 Header De-Duplication on radio

carrier 1:
radio[2/1]> compression header-compression set Layer2
16.3.1 Displaying Header De-Duplication Information (CLI)

To display the current Header De-Duplication configuration, enter the
radio[2/1]> compression show-configuration
To display counters for Header De-Duplication, enter the following command

in radio view:
radio[2/1]> compression show-configuration
The following counters are displayed:

 TX in octet count - Bytes on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.
 TX out octet count - Bytes on the TX side that were compressed by Header
De-Duplication.
 TX frame in count - Frames on the TX side before Header De-Duplication.

 TX frame out compressed count - Frames on the TX side that were

compressed by Header De-Duplication.
 TX frame uncompressed count - The number of frames on the TX side that
were not compressed due to exclusion rules.
Note: The use of exclusion rules for Header De-Duplication is
planned for future release.
 TX frame uncompressed other count - Frames on the TX side that were not
compressed for reasons other than the use of exclusion rules.
 TX out frame learning count - The number of frames that have been used
to learn unique data flows. Once a particular flow type has been learned,
subsequent frames with that flow type are compressed by Header De-
Duplication.
 TX out number of active flows in count - The number of Header De-
Duplication flows that are active on the TX side.
16.4 Configuring Frame Cut-Through (CLI)

Using the Frame Cut-Through feature, frames assigned to queues with 4th
priority pre-empt frames already in transmission over the radio from other
queues. Transmission of the pre-empted frames is resumed after the
cut -through with no capacity loss or re-transmission required.
To enable Frame Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> cut-through mode yes
To disable Frame Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[2/1]> cut-through mode no
To display whether Frame Cut-Through is currently enabled or disabled, enter

the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> cut-through show-mode
To display the number of frames and bytes that have been transmitted via
Frame Cut-Through, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[2/1]> cut-through show-counters

16.5 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)

This feature is not supported with MIMO links.
This feature requires:

 Requires an activation key. If no valid AES activation key has been applied
to the unit, AES will not operate on the unit. See Configuring the Activation
Key (CLI).
Note: In order for the AES activation key to become active, you
must reset the unit after configuring a valid AES activation
key. Until the unit is reset, an alarm will be present if you
enable AES. This is not the case for other activation keys.
FibeAir IP-20C and IP-20S support AES-256 payload encryption. The purpose
of payload encryption is to secure the radio link and provide protection
against eavesdropping and/or personification (“man-in-the-middle”) attacks.
AES is enabled and configured separately for each radio carrier.
IP-20 uses a dual-key encryption mechanism for AES:
 The user provides a master key. The master key can also be generated by
the system upon user command. The master key is a 32-byte symmetric
encryption key. The same master key must be manually configured on
both ends of the encrypted link.
 The session key is a 32-byte symmetric encryption key used to encrypt the
actual data. Each link uses two session keys, one for each direction. For
each direction, the session key is generated by the transmit side unit and
propagated automatically, via a Key Exchange Protocol, to the other side of
the link. The Key Exchange Protocol exchanges session keys by encrypting
them with the master key, using the AES-256 encryption algorithm.
Session keys are regenerated at user-configured intervals.
AES key generation is completely hitless, and has no effect on ACM operation.
To display the current payload encryption status for all available radio links
on the unit, enter the following command in root view:
root> payload encryption status show

The following is a sample output of this command in which payload

encryption is enabled but not operational on radio interface 1, and disabled on
radio interface 2.
To configure AES on a radio carrier, you must first enter traffic encryption
view for the specific radio. To enter traffic encryption view, enter the
root> payload encryption slot 2 port <port>
For example, to configure AES on radio interface 1, enter the following

root> payload encryption slot 2 port 1
Traffic Encryption [1/1]>
To display the payload encryption mode of the radio interface, enter the
following command in Traffic Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode show
The following display indicates that payload encryption is enabled on radio

interface 1:
Traffic Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption mode show
Admin Mode: AES-256
The following display indicates that payload encryption is disabled on radio

interface 1:
Traffic Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption mode show
Admin Mode: Disable
To enable payload encryption, enter the following command in Traffic

Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode admin AES-256
To disable payload encryption, enter the following command in Traffic

Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mode admin Disable
Configure the master key by doing one of the following:

 Enter a master key manually.
 Generate the master key automatically.

You must use the same master key on both sides of the link. This means that if
you generate a master key automatically on one side of the link, you must copy
that key and for use on the other side of the link. Once payload encryption has
been enabled on both sides of the link, the Key Exchange Protocol periodically
verifies that both ends of the link have the same master key. If a mismatch is
detected, an alarm is raised and traffic transmission is stopped for the
mismatched carrier at both sides of the link. The link becomes non-valid and
traffic stops being forwarded.
To define the master key manually, enter the following command in Traffic
Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption mkey
When you press <Enter>, the following prompt appears:

Please enter key:
Enter the master key and press <Enter>. The master key must be between 8
and 32 ASCII characters. The characters do not appear as you type them. To
display the master key and verify that you typed it correctly, enter the payload
encryption status show command described above. You can copy the master
key from the output of this command.
To generate the master key automatically, enter the following command in
Traffic Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> master key generate
A random master key is generated. You must copy and paste this key to the
remote end of the link to ensure that both sides of the link have the same
master key. To display and copy the master key, enter the traffic
encryption status show command described above. You can copy the master
key from the output of this command.
You can set all master keys defined on the unit to zero value. To zeroize the
master keys, enter the following command in root view:
root> payload encryption key zeroize
Warning! Executing this command formats the unit’s disk, and

renders the unit non-operational. If it is necessary to use
this command, contact Ceragon Technical Support for
instructions how to re-configure the unit.
The session key is automatically regenerated at defined intervals. To set the
session key regeneration interval, enter the following command in Traffic
Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [x/x]> payload encryption session-key period
set <00:00-00:00>
Enter the regeneration interval in hours and minutes (HH:MM). For example,
the following command configures radio interface 1 to regenerate the session
key every 4 hours and 15 minutes:
Traffic Encryption [2/1]> payload encryption session-key period
set 04:15

To display the session key regeneration interval, enter the following command
in Traffic Encryption view:
Traffic Encryption [2/x]> payload encryption session-key period
show
Note: Any time payload encryption fails, the Operational status of

the link is Down until payload encryption is successfully
restored.

16.6 Configuring and Viewing Radio PMs and Statistics

(CLI)
 Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs (CLI)
 Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI)
 Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI)
 Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI)
 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI)
 Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI)
 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs (CLI)
 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs (CLI)
 Displaying ACM PMs (CLI)
16.6.1 Displaying General Modem Status and Defective Block PMs

(CLI)
To display the general status of the modem, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem show status
The following is a sample output of the modem show status command:

MSE[db]: -99.00
Defective Blocks count: 0
Current Tx profile: 0
Current Tx QAM: 4
Current Tx rate(Kbps): 43389
Current Rx profile: 0
Current Rx QAM: 4
Current Rx rate(Kbps): 43389
radio [2/1]>modem show status
To clear all radio PMs in the system, enter the following command in root
view:
root> radio pm clear all
To clear defective blocks counters for a radio, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem clear counters

16.6.2 Displaying Excessive BER (Aggregate) PMs (CLI)

You can display modem BER (Bit Error Rate) PMs in either 15-minute or daily
intervals.
To display modem BER PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following
radio [x/x]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 15min
The following is a partial sample output of the framer pm-aggregate show

interval 15min command:
radio [2/1]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 15min

Modem BER PM table:
===================
Interval Integrity ES SES UAS BBE

===========================================================
0 1 0 0 333 0
1 1 0 0 900 0
2 1 0 0 900 0
3 1 0 0 900 0
4 1 0 0 900 0
5 1 0 0 900 0
6 1 0 0 900 0
7 1 0 0 900 0
8 1 0 0 900 0
radio [2/1]>
To display modem BER PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 24hr
The following is a sample output of the framer pm-aggregate show interval

24hr command:
radio [2/1]>framer pm-aggregate show interval 24hr
Modem BER PM table:

===================
Interval Integrity ES SES UAS BBE

===============================================================
0 1 0 0 53843 0
4 1 0 0 37061 0
5 1 0 0 4034 0
6 1 0 0 85971 0
8 1 0 0 46171 0
11 1 0 0 24184 0
15 1 0 0 85978 0
17 1 0 0 54979 0
radio [2/1]>

Table 99: Aggregate PMs (CLI)
Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM reports, and 1-96 for 15 minute PM
reports.
Integrity Indicates whether the values received at the time and date of the measured interval
are reliable. "1" in the column indicates that the values are not reliable due to a
possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.
ES Indicates the number of seconds in the measuring interval during which errors
occurred.
SES Indicates the number of severe error seconds in the measuring interval.
UAS Indicates the Unavailable Seconds value of the measured interval. The value can be
between 0 and 900 seconds (15 minutes).
BBE Indicates the number of background block errors during the measured interval.
16.6.3 Displaying BER Level and Configuring BER Parameters (CLI)

To display the current BER level, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem show ber
The excessive-ber parameter determines whether or not excessive BER is

propagated as a fault and considered a system event. For example, if
excessive-ber is enabled, excessive BER can trigger a protection switchover.
To enable or disable Excessive BER Admin, enter the following command

in root view:
root> radio excessive-ber set admin <admin>
To display the current setting for excessive-ber, enter the following

root> radio excessive-ber show admin
To set the level above which an excessive BER alarm is issued for errors
detected over the radio link, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem excessive-ber set threshold <threshold>
To display the excessive BER threshold, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio [x/x]>modem excessive-ber show threshold
Table 100: Excessive BER CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Enables or disables propagation of excessive
disable BER as a fault.
threshold Variable 1e -3 The level above which an excessive BER

1e -4 alarm is issued for errors detected over the
radio link.
1e -5

The following command enables excessive-ber:

root> radio excessive-ber set admin enable
The following command sets the excessive BER threshold to 1e-5:

radio [2/1]>modem excessive-ber set threshold 1e-5
16.6.4 Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI)

You can set two RSL (RX Signal Level) thresholds. The number of seconds
during which the RSL exceeds these thresholds are counted as RSL Exceed
Threshold Seconds. See Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI).
To set the RSL thresholds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl set threshold1 <threshold1> threshold2
<threshold2>
Table 101: RSL Thresholds CLI Parameters

threshold1 Number -75 - -15 The first RSL threshold (dBm).
threshold2 Number -75 - -15 The second RSL threshold (dBm).
The following command sets the RSL thresholds to -30 dBm and -60 dBm,
respectively.
radio [2/1]>rf pm-rsl set threshold1 -30 threshold2 -60
16.6.5 Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI)

The number of seconds during which the TX Signal Level exceeds the TSL
threshold are counted as TSL Exceed Threshold Seconds. See Displaying RSL
and TSL Levels (CLI).
To set the TSL threshold, enter the following command in radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-tsl set threshold -15
Table 102: TSL Thresholds CLI Parameters

threshold Number -10 - 34 The TSL threshold (dBm).
The following command sets the TSL threshold to 10 dBm:

radio [2/1]>rf pm-tsl set threshold 10
16.6.6 Displaying RSL and TSL Levels (CLI)

You can display the RSL (RX Signal Level) and TSL (TX Signal Level) PMs in
either 15-minute or daily intervals.
To display RSL and TSL PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl-tsl show interval 15min

To display RSL and TSL PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>rf pm-rsl-tsl show interval 24hr
The following is the output format of the rf pm-rsl-tsl show commands:
Table 103: RSL and TSL PMs (CLI)
Interval The number of the interval: 1-30 for daily PM reports, and 1-96 for 15 minute
PM reports.
interval are reliable. "1" in the column indicates that the values are not reliable
due to a possible power surge or power failure that occurred at that time.
Min RSL (dBm) The minimum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Max RSL (dBm) The maximum RSL (Received Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Min TSL (dBm) The minimum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
Max TSL (dBm) The maximum TSL (Transmit Signal Level) that was measured during the
interval.
TSL exceed The number of seconds the measured TSL exceeded the threshold during the
threshold seconds interval. See Configuring TSL Thresholds (CLI).
RSL exceed The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold 1 during
threshold1 seconds the interval. See Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI).
RSL exceed The number of seconds the measured RSL exceeded RSL threshold 2 during
threshold2 seconds the interval. See Configuring RSL Thresholds (CLI).

16.6.7 Configuring the Signal Level Threshold (CLI)

To set the BER (Bit Error Rate) level above which a Signal Degrade alarm is
issued for errors detected over the radio link, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem signal-degrade set threshold 1e-7
To display the Signal Degrade BER threshold, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>modem signal-degrade show threshold
Table 104: Signal Level Threshold CLI Parameters

threshold Variable 1e -6 The BER level above which a Signal
1e -7 Degrade alarm is issued for errors detected
over the radio link.
1e -8
1e -9
1e -10
The following command sets the Signal Degrade threshold at 1e-7:

radio [2/1]>modem signal-degrade set threshold 1e-7
16.6.8 Configuring the MSE Thresholds and Displaying the MSE PMs
(CLI)
To configure the MSE (Mean Square Error) threshold, enter the following
radio [x/x]>modem set mse-exceed threshold <threshold>
To display the currently configured MSE threshold, enter the following

radio [x/x]>modem show threshold-mse-exceed
Table 105: MSE CLI Parameters

threshold Number -99 - -1 The MSE threshold.
To display MSE (Mean Square Error) PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the
radio [x/x]>modem pm-mse show interval 15min

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-mse show interval
15min command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-mse show interval 15min
Modem MSE PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity Min MSE (dB) Max MSE (dB)Exceed

threshold
seconds
===============================================================
0 1 0.00 0.00 708
1 1 0.00 0.00 900
2 1 0.00 0.00 900
3 1 0.00 0.00 900
4 1 0.00 0.00 900
5 1 0.00 0.00 900
6 1 0.00 0.00 900
7 1 0.00 0.00 900
8 1 0.00 0.00 900
9 1 0.00 0.00 900
10 1 0.00 0.00 900
radio [2/1]>
To display MSE (Mean Square Error) PMs in daily intervals, enter the
radio [x/x]>modem pm-mse show interval 24hr
The following is sample output of the modem pm-mse show interval

24hr command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-mse show interval 24hr
Modem MSE PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity Min MSE (dB) Max MSE (dB)Exceed

threshold
seconds
===============================================================
0 1 0.00 0.00 63745
4 1 0.00 0.00 37062
5 1 0.00 0.00 3495
6 1 0.00 0.00 85976
8 1 0.00 0.00 46173
11 1 0.00 0.00 24185
15 1 0.00 0.00 85988
17 1 0.00 0.00 54981
radio [2/1]>modem

Table 106: MSE PMs (CLI)
reports.
Min MSE (dB) Indicates the minimum MSE in dB, measured during the interval.
Max MSE (dB) Indicates the maximum MSE in dB, measured during the interval.
Exceed Indicates the number of seconds the MSE exceeded the MSE PM threshold during
Threshold the interval.
Seconds
The following command sets the MSE threshold to -30:

radio [2/1]>modem set mse-exceed threshold -30
16.6.9 Configuring the XPI Thresholds and Displaying the XPI PMs
(CLI)
To configure the modem XPI threshold for calculating XPI Exceed Threshold
seconds, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem set threshold-xpi-exceed threshold <threshold>
To display the currently configured XPI threshold, enter the following

radio[x/x]>modem show threshold-xpi-below
Table 107: XPI Threshold CLI Parameters

threshold Number 0-99 The XPI threshold.
To display XPI PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command in

radio view:
radio[x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-xpi show interval
15min command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-xpi show interval 15min
Modem XPI PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity Min XPI (dB) Max XPI (dB)XPI below

threshold
seconds
===============================================================
1 1 55.00 0.00 0
2 1 55.00 0.00 0
3 1 55.00 0.00 0
4 1 55.00 0.00 0
5 1 55.00 0.00 0
6 1 55.00 0.00 0
7 1 55.00 0.00 0
8 1 55.00 0.00 0
9 1 55.00 0.00 0
10 1 55.00 0.00 0
11 1 55.00 0.00 0
12 1 55.00 0.00 0
13 1 55.00 0.00 0
14 1 55.00 0.00 0
15 1 55.00 0.00 0
16 1 55.00 0.00 0
17 1 55.00 0.00 0
18 1 55.00 0.00 0
19 1 55.00 0.00 0
20 1 55.00 0.00 0
radio [2/1]>
To display XPI PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr

The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-xpi show interval
24hr command:
radio [2/1]>modem pm-xpi show interval 24hr
Modem XPI PM Table:

===================
Interval Integrity Min XPI (dB) Max XPI (dB)

XPI below
threshold
seconds
===============================================================
1 1 55.00 0.00 0
2 1 55.00 0.00 0
3 1 55.00 0.00 0
4 1 55.00 0.00 0
5 1 55.00 0.00 0
6 1 55.00 0.00 0
7 1 55.00 0.00 0
8 1 55.00 0.00 0
9 1 55.00 0.00 0
10 1 55.00 0.00 0
11 1 55.00 0.00 0
12 1 55.00 0.00 0
13 1 55.00 0.00 0
14 1 55.00 0.00 0
15 1 55.00 0.00 0
16 1 55.00 0.00 0
17 1 55.00 0.00 0
18 1 55.00 0.00 0
19 1 55.00 0.00 0
20 1 55.00 0.00 0
radio [2/1]>
Table 108: XPI PMs (CLI)
reports.
Min XPI (dB) Indicates the lowest XPI value in dB, measured during the interval.
Max XPI (dB) Indicates the highest XPI value in dB, measured during the interval.
XPI Below Indicates the number of seconds the XPI value was lower than the XPI threshold
Threshold during the interval.
Seconds
The following command sets the XPI threshold for radio carrier 2 to 15:
radio[2/1]>modem set threshold-xpi-below threshold 15

16.6.10 Displaying ACM PMs (CLI)

To display ACM PMs in 15-minute intervals, enter the following command in
radio view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 15min
The following is a partial sample output of the modem pm-acm show interval
15min command:
radio [2/1]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 15min
MRMC PM Table:
==============
Interval Integrity Min profile Max profile Min bitrate Max bitrate
============================================================================
0 1 0 0 43389 43389
1 1 0 0 43389 43389
2 1 0 0 43389 43389
3 1 0 0 43389 43389
4 1 0 0 43389 43389
5 1 0 0 43389 43389
6 1 0 0 43389 43389
7 1 0 0 43389 43389
8 1 0 0 43389 43389
9 1 0 0 43389 43389
10 1 0 0 43389 43389
radio [2/1]>
To display ACM PMs in daily intervals, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio [x/x]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 24hr
The following is sample output of the modem pm-acm show interval

24hr command:
radio [2/1]>mrmc pm-acm show interval 24hr
MRMC PM Table:
==============

Interval Integrity Min profile Max profile Min bitrate Max bitrate
===========================================================================
0 1 0 0 43389 43389
4 1 0 0 43389 43389
5 1 0 0 43389 43389
6 1 0 0 43389 43389
8 1 0 0 43389 43389
11 1 0 0 43389 43389
15 1 0 0 43389 43389
17 1 0 0 43389 43389
radio [2/1]>
Table 109: ACM PMs (CLI)
reports.
Min profile Indicates the minimum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Max profile Indicates the maximum ACM profile that was measured during the interval.
Min bitrate Indicates the minimum total radio throughput (Mbps), delivered during the interval.
Max bitrate Indicates the maximum total radio throughput (Mbps), delivered during the interval.

17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI)

 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)
 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI)
 Configuring Automatic State Propagation (CLI)
 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI)
Related topics:
 Configuring Link Aggregation (LAG) (Optional) (CLI)
 Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)
 Ethernet Protocols (CLI)
 Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI)
17.1 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)

 Ethernet Services Overview (CLI)
 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI)
 Defining Services (CLI)
 Configuring Service Points (CLI)
 Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI)
17.1.1 Ethernet Services Overview (CLI)

Users can define up to 64 Ethernet services. Each service constitutes a virtual
bridge that defines the connectivity between logical ports in the IP-20
network element.
This version of IP-20 supports the following service types:
 Multipoint (MP)
 Point-to-Point (P2P)
 Management (MNG)
In addition to user-defined services, IP-20 contains a pre-defined management
service (Service ID 257). By default, this service is operational.
Note: You can use the management service for in-band
management. For instructions on configuring in-band
management, see Configuring In-Band Management (CLI).
A service point is a logical entity attached to a physical or logical interface.
Service points define the movement of frames through the service. Each
service point includes both ingress and egress attributes. A Point-to-Point or

Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A Management service can

hold up 30 service points.
For a more detailed overview of the IP-20 service-oriented Ethernet switching
engine, refer to the Technical Description for the IP-20 product type you are
using.
17.1.2 General Guidelines for Provisioning Ethernet Services (CLI)

When provisioning Ethernet services, it is recommended to follow these
guidelines:
 Use the same Service ID for all service fragments along the path of the
service.
 Do not re-use the same Service ID within the same region. A region is
defined as consisting of all IP-20 devices having Ethernet connectivity
between them.
 Use meaningful EVC IDs.
 Give the same EVC ID (service name) to all service fragments along the
path of the service.
 Do not reuse the same EVC ID within the same region.
It is recommended to follow these guidelines for creating service points:
 Always use SNP service points on NNI ports and SAP service points on UNI
ports.
 For each logical interface associated with a specific service, there should
never be more than a single service point.
 The transport VLAN ID should be unique per service within a single region.
That is, no two services should use the same transport VLAN ID.
17.1.3 Defining Services (CLI)

Use the commands described in the following sections to define a service and
its parameters. After defining the service, you must add service points to the
service in order for the service to carry traffic.
17.1.3.1 Adding a Service (CLI)

To add a service, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet service add type <service type> sid <sid> admin
<service admin mode> evc-id <evc-id> description <evc-
description>
Table 110: Adding Ethernet Service CLI Parameters

service type Variable p2p Defines the service type:
mp p2p - Point-to-Point
mp - Multipoint


sid Number Any unused value A unique ID for the service. Once you have
from 1-256 added the service, you cannot change the
Service ID. Service ID 257 is reserved for a
pre-defined management service.
service admin Variable Operational The administrative state of the service:
mode reserved  operational - The service is functional.
 reserved - The service is disabled until
this parameter is changed
to operational. In this mode, the service
occupies system resources but is unable
to receive and transmit data.
evc-id Text String Up to 20 characters. Defines an Ethernet Virtual Connection
(EVC) ID. This parameter does not affect the
network element’s behavior, but is used by
the NMS for topology management.
evc- Text String Up to 64 characters. A text description of the service. This
description parameter does not affect the network
element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS
for topology management.
Example
The following command adds a Multipoint service with Service ID 18:
root> ethernet service add type mp sid 18 admin operational
evc-id Ring_1 description east_west
The following command adds a Point-to-Point service with Service ID 10:

root> ethernet service add type p2p sid 10 admin
operational evc-id Ring_1 description east_west
These services are immediately enabled, although service points must be

added to the services in order for the services to carry traffic.
17.1.3.2 Entering Service View (CLI)

To view service details and set the service’s parameters, you must enter the
service’s view level in the CLI.
To enter a service’s view level:
root> ethernet service sid <sid>
Table 111: Entering Ethernet Service View CLI Parameters

sid Number Any unused value A unique ID for the service. Once you have
from 1-256 added the service, you cannot change the
Service ID. Service ID 257 is reserved for a
pre-defined management service.

Example
The following command enters service view for the service with Service ID 10:
root> ethernet service sid 10

service[10]>
17.1.3.3 Showing Service Details (CLI)

To display the attributes of a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>service info show
For example:
service[1]>service info show
service info:
service id: 1
service type: p2p
service admin: operational
Maximal MAC address learning entries: 131072
default cos: 0
cos mode: preserve-sp-cos-decision
EVC id: N.A.
EVC description: N.A.
split horizon group: disable
configured multicast grouping: no
service[1]>
To display the attributes of a service and its service points, go to service view
for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>service detailed-info show
For example:
To display a list of service points and their attributes, enter the following
root>ethernet service show info sid <sid>

Table 112: Displaying Ethernet Service Details CLI Parameters
Parameter Input Permitted Default Description

Type Values
sid Number Any defined None The Service ID.
Service ID.
For example:
17.1.3.4 Configuring a Service’s Operational State (CLI)

To change the operational state of a service, go to service view for the service
service[SID]>service admin set <service admin mode>
To display a service’s admin mode, go to service view for the service and enter
Service[SID]> service admin show state
Table 113: Ethernet Service Operational State CLI Parameters
Parameter Input Permitted Description

Type Values
service Variable Operational The administrative state of the service:
admin mode reserved  operational - The service is functional.
 reserved - The service is disabled until this
parameter is changed to Operational. In this
mode, the service occupies system resources but
is unable to receive and transmit data.
Example
The following command sets Service 10 to be operational:
service[10]>service admin set operational

17.1.3.5 Configuring a Service’s CoS Mode and Default CoS (CLI)

The CoS mode determines whether or not frames passing through the service
have their CoS modified at the service level. The CoS determines the priority
queue to which frames are assigned.
The CoS of frames traveling through a service can be modified on the interface
level, the service point level, and the service level. The service level is the
highest priority, and overrides CoS decisions made at the interface and service
point levels. Thus, by configuring the service to apply a CoS value to frames in
the service, you can define a single CoS for all frames traveling through the
service.
To set a service’s CoS mode, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>service cos-mode set cos-mode <cos-mode>
If the CoS mode is set to default-cos, you must define the Default CoS. Use the
following command to define the Default CoS:
service[SID]>service default-cos set cos <cos>
Table 114: Ethernet Service CoS Mode CLI Parameters

Type Values
cos-mode Variable default-cos  default cos - Frames passing through the service
preserve-sp- are assigned the default CoS defined below. This
cos-decision CoS value overrides whatever CoS may have
been assigned at the service point or interface
level.
 preserve-sp-cos-decision - The CoS of frames
passing through the service is not modified by the
service.
cos Number 0–7 This value is assigned to frames at the service level
if cos-mode is set to default-cos. Otherwise, this value
is not used, and frames retain whatever CoS value
they were assigned at the service point or logical
interface level.
Examples
The following commands configure Service 10 to assign a CoS value of 7 to
frames traversing the service:
service[10]>service cos-mode set cos-mode default-cos
service[10]>service default-cos set cos 7
The following command configures Service 10 to preserve the CoS decision

made at the interface or service point level for frames traveling through the
service:
service[10]>service cos-mode set cos-mode preserve-sp-cos-
decision

17.1.3.6 Configuring a Service’s EVC ID and Description (CLI)

To add or change the EVC ID of a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>service evcid set <evcid>
To display a service’s EVC ID, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>service evcid show
To add or change the EVC description of a service, go to service view for the
service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>service description set <evc description>
To display a service’s EVC description, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>service description show
Table 115: Ethernet Service EVC CLI Parameters

Type Values
evcid Text String Up to 20 Defines an Ethernet Virtual Connection (EVC) ID.
characters. This parameter does not affect the network
element’s behavior, but is used by the NMS for
topology management.
evc description Text String Up to 64 A text description of the service. This parameter
characters. does not affect the network element’s behavior, but
is used by the NMS for topology management.
Examples
The following commands add the EVC ID "East_West" and the EVC description
"Line_to_Radio" to Service 10:
service[10]>service evcid set East_West
service[10]>service description set Line_to_Radio
17.1.3.7 Deleting a Service (CLI)

Before deleting a service, you must first delete any service points attached to
the service (refer to Deleting a Service Point (CLI)).
Use the following command to delete a service:
root>ethernet service delete sid <sid>
Use the following command to delete a range of services:

root>ethernet service delete sid <sid> to <sid>

Table 116: Deleting Ethernet Service CLI Parameters

Type Values
sid Number Any defined The Service ID.
Service ID.
Examples
The following command deletes Service 10:
root>ethernet service delete sid 10
The following command deletes Services 10 through 15:

root>ethernet service delete sid 10 to 15
17.1.4 Configuring Service Points (CLI)

 Service Points Overview (CLI)
 Service Point Classification (CLI)
 Adding a Service Point (CLI)
 Configuring Service Point Ingress Attributes (CLI)
 Configuring Service Point Egress Attributes (CLI)
 Displaying Service Point Attributes (CLI)
 Deleting a Service Point (CLI)
17.1.4.1 Service Points Overview (CLI)

Service points are logical interfaces within a service. A service point is a logical
entity attached to a physical or logical interface. Service points define the
movement of frames through the service. Each service point includes both
ingress and egress attributes.
Each service point for a Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can be either a
Service Access Point (SAP) or a Service Network Point (SNP). A Point-to-Point
service can also use Pipe service points.
 An SAP is equivalent to a UNI in MEF terminology and defines the
connection of the user network with its access points. SAPs are used for
Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
 An SNP is equivalent to an NNI or E-NNI in MEF terminology and defines
the connection between the network elements in the user network. SNPs
are used for Point-to-Point and Multipoint traffic services.
 A Pipe service point is used to create traffic connectivity between two
ports in a port-based manner (Smart Pipe). In other words, all the traffic
from one port passes to the other port.
Management services utilize Management (MNG) service points.
A Point-to-Point or Multipoint service can hold up to 32 service points. A
management service can hold up to 30 service points.

Table 117 summarizes the service point types available per service type.
Table 117: Service Points per Service Type
Service Point Type

MNG SAP SNP Pipe
Management Yes No No No
Point-to- No Yes Yes Yes
Service Type
Point
Multipoint No Yes Yes No
Table 118 shows which service point types can co-exist on the same interface.
Table 118: Service Point Types per Interface
MNG SAP SNP Pipe

MNG Only one MNG SP is allowed per interface. Yes Yes Yes
SAP Yes Yes No No
SNP Yes No Yes No
PIPE Yes No No Only one Pipe SP is allowed per interface.
17.1.4.2 Service Point Classification (CLI)

 Overview of Service Point Classification (CLI)
 SAP Classification (CLI)
 SNP Classification (CLI)
 Pipe Service Point Classification (CLI)
 MNG Service Point Classification (CLI)
Overview of Service Point Classification (CLI)

Service points connect the service to the network element interfaces. It is
crucial that the network element have a means to classify incoming frames to
the proper service point. This classification process is implemented by means
of a parsing encapsulation rule for the interface associated with the service
point. This rule is called the Interface Type, and is based on a key consisting of:
 The Interface ID of the interface through which the frame entered.
 The frame’s C-VLAN and/or S-VLAN tags.
The Interface Type provides a definitive mapping of each arriving frame to a
specific service point in a specific service. Since more than one service point
may be associated with a single interface, frames are assigned to the earliest
defined service point in case of conflict.

SAP Classification (CLI)

SAPs can be used with the following Interface Types:
 All to one – All C-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
classified to the same service point.
 Dot1q – A single C-VLAN is classified to the service point.
 QinQ – A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN combination is classified to the
service point.
 Bundle C-Tag – A set of multiple C-VLANs is classified to the service point.
 Bundle S-Tag – A single S-VLAN and a set of multiple C-VLANs are
classified to the service point.
SNP Classification (CLI)

SNPs can be used with the following Attached Interface Types:
 S-Tag – A single S-VLAN is classified to the service point.
Pipe Service Point Classification (CLI)

Pipe service points can be used with the following Attached Interface Types:
 Dot1q – All C-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
 S-Tag – All S-VLANs and untagged frames that enter the interface are
MNG Service Point Classification (CLI)

Management service points can be used with the following Interface Types:
 S-Tag – A single S-VLAN is classified to the service point.
 QinQ – A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN combination is classified to the
service point.
Table 119 and Table 120 show which service point – Interface Type
combinations can co-exist on the same interface.
Table 119: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface –
SAP and SNP
SP Type SAP SNP

SP Type Attached Interface Type 802.1q Bundle-C Bundle-S All to One Q in Q 802.1q S-Tag
SAP 802.1q Yes Yes No No No No No
Bundle-C Yes Yes No No No No No
Bundle-S No No Yes No Yes No No
All to One No No No Only 1 All to No No No

One SP Allowed

SP Type SAP SNP

Q in Q No No Yes No Yes No No
SNP 802.1q No No No No No Yes No
S-Tag No No No No No No Yes
Pipe 802.1q No No No No No No No
S-Tag No No No No No No No
MNG 802.1q Yes Yes No No No Yes No
Q in Q No No Yes No Yes No No
S-Tag No No No No No No Yes
Table 120: Legal Service Point – Interface Type Combinations per Interface –
Pipe and MNG
SP Type Pipe MNG

SP Type Attached Interface Type 802.1q S-Tag 802.1q Q in Q S-Tag
SAP 802.1q No No Yes No No
Bundle-C No No Yes No No
Bundle-S No No No Yes No
All to One No No No No No
Q in Q No No No Yes No
SNP 802.1q No No Yes No No
S-Tag No No No No Yes
Pipe 802.1q Only one Pipe No Yes No No

SP Allowed
S-Tag No Only one Pipe No No Yes

SP Allowed
MNG 802.1q Yes No Only 1 MNG No No

SP Allowed
Q in Q No No No Only 1 MNG No
SP Allowed
S-Tag No Yes No No Only 1 MNG

SP Allowed

17.1.4.3 Adding a Service Point (CLI)

The command syntax for adding a service point depends on the interface type
of the service point. The interface type determines which frames enter the
service via this service point.
To add a service point with an All-to-One interface type, go to service view for
the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type all-to-
one spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot
<slot> port <port> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Dot1q interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type dot1q spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port
<port> vlan <vlan> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with an S-Tag interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type s-tag spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port
<port> vlan <vlan> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Bundle-C interface type, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type bundle-
c spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot>
port <port> sp-name <sp-name>
To add a service point with a Bundle-S interface type, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type bundle-
s spid <sp-id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot>
port <port> [outer-vlan <outer-vlan>|vlan <vlan>] sp-name <sp-
name>
Note: In SAP service points, use the parameter outer-vlan. In SP

service points, use the parameter vlan.
To add a service point with a Q-in-Q interface type, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp add sp-type <sp-type> int-type qinq spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port <port>
outer-vlan <outer-vlan> inner-vlan <inner-vlan> sp-name <sp-
name>
To add a Pipe service point, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type <int-type> spid <sp-
id> [interface|group] <interface|group> slot <slot> port <port>
sp-name <sp-name>

Table 121: Add Service Point CLI Parameters
Permitted
sp-type Variable sap  SAP - Service Access Point
snp  SNP - Service Network Point
pipe  PIPE - Pipe service point
mng  MNG - Management service point
int-type Variable all-to-one Determines which frames enter the service via
dot1q this service point, based on the frame's VLAN
tagging. Since more than one service point may
s-tag
be associated with a single interface, frames are
bundle-c-tag assigned to the earliest defined service point in
bundle-s-tag case of conflict.
qinq  all-to-one - All C-VLANs and untagged
frames that enter the interface are classified
to the service point. Only valid for SAP
service point types.
 dot1q - A single C-VLAN is classified to the
service point. Valid for all service point types.
 s-tag - A single S- VLAN is classified to the
service point. Valid for SNP and MNG
service point types.
 bundle-c-tag - A set of multiple C-VLANs is
classified to the service point. Only valid for
SAP service point types.
 bundle-s-tag - A single S-VLAN and a set of
multiple C-VLANs are classified to the
service point. Only valid for SAP service
point types.
 qinq - A single S-VLAN and C-VLAN
combination is classified to the service point.
Valid for SAP and MNG service point types.
sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P This ID is unique within the service.
and MP
services.
1-30 for MNG
services.
interface Variable eth The Interface type for the service point:
radio  eth - An Ethernet interface.
 radio - A radio interface.
When you are defining the service point on a
group, such as a LAG, use the group parameter
instead of the interface parameter.

Permitted
group Variable rp1 When you are defining the service point on an
rp2 HSB group (rp1 - rp-4), a LAG (lag1 - lag4), or a
Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 - mc-abc4),
rp3
use this parameter instead of the interface
rp4 parameter to identify the group. The group must
lag1 be defined before you add the service point.
lag2 Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP protection are
only relevant for IP-20C units.
lag3
lag4
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
slot Number Ethernet: 1
Radio: 2
port Number For an Ethernet The port or radio carrier on which the service
interface: 1-3 point is located.
For a radio
interface in IP-
20C units: 1-2
For a radio
interface in IP-
20S and IP-20E
units: 1
vlan Number or 1-4094 (except Defines the VLAN classified to the service point.
Variable 4092 which is This parameter should not be included for service
reserved for the points with an interface type of bundle-C-tag. For
default instructions on attaching a bundled VLAN, refer to
management Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point
service), or (CLI).
Untagged
This parameter is also not relevant for:
Service points with an interface type of qinq and
all-to-one.
Pipe service points.
outer-vlan Number 1-4094 (except Defines the S-VLAN classified to the service
4092, which is point.
reserved for the This parameter is only relevant for service points
default with the interface type bundle-s-tag or qinq.
management
service), or
Untagged

Permitted
inner-vlan Number 1-4094 (except Defines the C-VLAN classified to the service
4092, which is point.
reserved for the This parameter is only relevant for service points
default with the interface type qinq.
management
service), or
Untagged
sp-name Text string Up to 20 A descriptive name for the service point
characters. (optional).
Examples
The following command adds an SAP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
Service 37, with interface type dot1q. This service point is located on radio
carrier 1. VLAN ID 100 is classified to this service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type dot1q spid 10 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 vlan 100 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type bundle-c-tag. This service point is located on
radio carrier 1.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type bundle-c-tag spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type bundle-s-tag. This service point is located on
radio carrier 2 in an IP-20C unit. S-VLAN 100 is classified to the service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type bundle-s-tag spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 2 outer-vlan 100 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type qinq. This service point is located on radio
carrier 2 in an IP-20C unit. S-VLAN 100 and C-VLAN 200 are classified to the
service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type qinq spid 10 interface
radio slot 2 port 2 outer-vlan 100 inner-vlan 200 sp-name Radio
Service 37, with interface type all-to-one. This service point is located on radio
carrier 1. All traffic entering the system from that port is classified to the
service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type sap int-type all-to-one spid 10
interface radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name "all-to-one"
The following command adds an SNP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
carrier 1. VLAN ID 100 is classified to this service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type snp int-type dot1q spid 10 interface

The following command adds an SNP service point with Service Point ID 10 to
Service 37, with interface type s-tag. This service point is located on radio
carrier 1. S-VLAN 100 is classified to the service point.
service[37]>sp add sp-type snp int-type s-tag spid 10 interface
Service 36, with interface type dot1q. This service point is connected to HSB
group 1 (rp1). VLAN ID 100 is classified to the service point.
service[36]>sp add sp-type sap int-type dot1q spid 7 group
rp1 vlan 100 sp-name test1
The following command adds a Pipe service point with Service Point ID 1 to
Service 1, with interface type dot1q. This service point is connected to Eth1.
service[1]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type dot1q spid 1 interface
eth slot 1 port 1 sp-name pipe_dot1q
The following command adds a Pipe service point with Service Point ID 2 to
carrier 1.
service[1]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type dot1q spid 2 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name pipe_dot1q_radio
The following commands create a Smart Pipe service between Eth1 and radio
carrier 1. This service carries S-VLANs and untagged frames between the two
interfaces:
root> ethernet service add type p2p sid 10 admin
operational evc-id test description east_west
root>
root> ethernet service sid 10
service[10]>
service[10]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type s-tag spid 1 interface
eth slot 1 port 1 sp-name test1
service[10]>
service[10]>sp add sp-type pipe int-type s-tag spid 2 interface
radio slot 2 port 1 sp-name test2
service[10]>

17.1.4.4 Configuring Service Point Ingress Attributes (CLI)

A service point’s ingress attributes are attributes that operate upon frames
ingressing via the service point. This includes how the service point handles
the CoS of ingress frames and how the service point forwards frames to their
next destination within the service.

 Enabling and Disabling Broadcast Frames (CLI)
 CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI)
 Enabling and Disabling Flooding (CLI)
Enabling and Disabling Broadcast Frames (CLI)

To determine whether frames with a broadcast destination MAC address are
allowed to ingress the service via this service point, go to service view for the
service[SID]>sp broadcast set spid <sp-id> state <state>
Table 122: Enable/Disable Broadcast Frames CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP The Service Point ID.
services.
1-30 for MNG services.
state Variable Allow Determines whether frames with a
disable broadcast destination MAC address are
allowed to ingress the service via this
service point.
Examples
The following command allows frames with a broadcast destination MAC
address to ingress Service 37 via Service Point 1.
service[37]>sp broadcast set spid 1 state allow
The following command prevents frames with a broadcast destination MAC

address from ingressing Service 37 via Service Point 1.
service[37]>sp broadcast set spid 1 state disable
CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI)

The CoS of frames traversing a service can be modified on the logical interface,
service point, and service level. The service point can override the CoS
decision made at the interface level. The service, in turn, can modify the CoS
decision made at the service point level.
To determine whether the service point modifies CoS decisions made at the
interface level, go to service view for the service and enter the following
command:
service[SID]> sp cos-mode set spid <sp-id> mode <cos mode>

If you set cos-mode to sp-def-cos, you must then configure a default CoS. This
CoS is applied to frames that ingress the service point, but can be overwritten
at the service level.
To configure the default CoS, go to service view for the service and enter the
following command:
service[SID]>sp sp-def-cos set spid <sp-id> cos <cos>
Table 123: Service Point CoS Preservation CLI Parameters

services.
cos mode Variable sp-def-cos  sp-def-cos - The service point re-
interface-decision defines the CoS of frames that pass
through the service point, according
to the Default CoS (below). This
decision can be overwritten on the
service level.
 interface-decision - The service point
preserves the CoS decision made at
the interface level. This decision can
still be overwritten at the service
level.
cos Number 0–7 If cos-mode is sp-def-cos, this is the CoS
assigned to frames that pass through the
service point. This decision can be
overwritten on the service level.
Examples
The following commands configure Service Point 1 in Service 37 to apply a
CoS value of 5 to frames that ingress the service point:
service[37]>sp cos-mode set spid 1 mode sp-def-cos
service[37]>sp sp-def-cos set spid 1 cos 5
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 to preserve

the CoS decision made at the interface level for frames that ingress the service
point:
service[37]>sp cos-mode set spid 1 mode interface-decision
Enabling and Disabling Flooding (CLI)

The ingress service point for a frame can forward the frame within the service
by means of flooding or dynamic MAC address learning in the service.
To enable or disable forwarding by means of flooding for a service point, go to
service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp flooding set spid <sp-id> state <flooding
state>

Table 124: Service Point Enable/Disable Flooding CLI Parameters

services.
state Variable allow Determines whether incoming frames with
disable unknown MAC addresses are forwarded
to other service points via flooding.
Examples
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 to flood
incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses to other service points:
service[37]>sp flooding set spid 1 state allow
The following command configures Service Point 1 in Service 37 not to flood

incoming frames with unknown MAC addresses to other service points:
service[37]>sp flooding set spid 1 state disable
17.1.4.5 Configuring Service Point Egress Attributes (CLI)

A service point’s egress attributes are attributes that operate upon frames
ingressing via the service point. This includes VLAN preservation and marking
attributes.

 Configuring VLAN and CoS Preservation (CLI)
 Configuring Service Bundles (CLI)
 Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point (CLI)
Configuring VLAN and CoS Preservation (CLI)

CoS and VLAN preservation determines whether the CoS and/or VLAN IDs of
frames egressing the service via the service point are restored to the values
they had when the frame entered the service.

 Configuring C-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)
 Configuring C-VLAN Preservation (CLI)
 Configuring S-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)
Configuring C-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)

To configure CoS preservation for C-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view
service[SID]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id>
mode <c-vlan cos preservation mode>

Table 125: C-VLAN CoS Preservation Mode CLI Parameters

services.
c-vlan cos Variable enable Select enable or disable to determine
preservation disable whether the original C-VLAN CoS value is
mode preserved or restored for
frames egressing the service point.
 enable - the C-VLAN CoS value of
frames egressing the service point is
the same as the value when the
frame entered the service.
 disable - the C-VLAN CoS value of
set at whatever value might have
been re-assigned by the interface,
service point, or service, or whatever
value results from marking (see
Configuring Marking (CLI)).
Examples
The following command enables C-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1
on Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
enable
The following command disables C-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1
on Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
disable
Configuring C-VLAN Preservation (CLI)

To configure VLAN preservation for C-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view
service[SID]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id> mode
<c-vlan preservation mode>
Table 126: C-VLAN Preservation CLI Parameters

services.


c-vlan Variable enable Determines whether the original C-VLAN
preservation disable ID is preserved or restored for frames
mode egressing from the service point.
 enable - The C-VLAN ID of frames
egressing the service point is the
same as the C-VLAN ID when the
 disable - The C-VLAN ID of frames
egressing the service point is set at
whatever value might have been re-
assigned by the interface, service
point, or service, or whatever value
results from marking (see Configuring
Marking (CLI)).
Examples
The following command enables C-VLAN preservation for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode enable
The following command disables C-VLAN preservation for Service Point 1 on

Service 37:
service[37]>sp cvlan-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode disable
Configuring S-VLAN CoS Preservation (CLI)

To configure CoS preservation for S-VLAN-tagged frames, go to service view
service[SID]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid <sp-id>
mode <s-vlan cos preservation mode>
Table 127: S-VLAN CoS Preservation CLI Parameters

services.


s-vlan cos Variable enable Select enable or disable to determine
preservation disable whether the original S-VLAN CoS value is
mode preserved or restored for
frames egressing the service point.
 enable - the S-VLAN CoS value of
the same as the value when the
 disable - the S-VLAN CoS value of
set at whatever value might have
been re-assigned by the interface,
service point, or service, or whatever
value results from marking (see
Configuring Marking (CLI)).
Examples
The following command enables S-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1
on Service 37:
service[37]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
enable
The following command disables S-VLAN CoS preservation for Service Point 1
on Service 37:
service[37]>sp svlan-cos-preservation-mode set spid 1 mode
disable
Configuring Service Bundles (CLI)

You can use service bundles to personalize common sets of egress queue
attributes that can be applied to multiple service points. In this version only
one service bundle is supported.
To assign a service point to a service bundle, go to service view for the service
service[SID]>sp egress-service-bundle set spid 1 service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
Table 128: Service Bundle CLI Parameters

services.
service- Number 1 – 63 The service bundle assigned to the
bundle-id Note: In the current service point.
release, only
Service Bundle 1
is supported.

Examples
The following command assigns Service Bundle 1 to Service Point 1 in Service
37.
service[37]>sp egress-service-bundle set spid 1 service-bundle-
id 1
Attaching a VLAN Bundle to a Service Point (CLI)

For service points with an interface type of bundle-C-tag or bundle-S-tag, you
must classify a group of VLANs (VLAN Bundle) to the service point.
To classify a VLAN Bundle to a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service point, go to
service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SIP]>sp bundle cvlan attach spid <sp-id> vlan <vlan>
to-vlan <to-vlan>
To classify untagged frames to a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service point, go

to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SIP]>sp bundle attach untagged spid <sp-id>
To remove a VLAN Bundle from a bundle-c-tag or bundle-s-tag service point,

go to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SIP]>sp bundle cvlan remove spid <sp-id> vlan <vlan>
to-vlan <to-vlan>
To removed untagged frames from a bundle-c-tag or bundle s-tag service

point, go to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SIP]>sp bundle remove untagged spid <sp-id>
To display a service point’s attributes, including the VLANs classified to a

bundle service point, go to service view for the service to which the service
point belongs and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp service-point-info show spid <sp-id>
Table 129: VLAN Bundle to Service Point CLI Parameters

services.
vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, The C-VLAN at the beginning of the range
which is reserved for the of the VLAN Bundle.
default management
service)
to-vlan Number 1-4094 (except 4092, The C-VLAN at the end of the range of the
which is reserved for the VLAN Bundle.
default management
service)

Examples
The following command classifies C-VLANs 100 through 200 to Service Point 1
in Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle cvlan attach spid 1 vlan 100 to-vlan 200
The following command classifies untagged frames to Service Point 1 in

Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle attach untagged spid 1
The following command removes C-VLANs 100 through 200 from Service
Point 1 in Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle cvlan remove spid 1 vlan 100 to-vlan 200
The following command removes untagged frames to Service Point 1 in

Service 37:
service[37]>sp bundle remove untagged spid 1
17.1.4.6 Displaying Service Point Attributes (CLI)

To display a service point’s attributes, go to service view for the service to
which the service point belongs and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp service-point-info show spid <sp-id>
Table 130: Display Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters

services.
Example
The following command displays the attributes of Service Point 1 in Service
37:
service[37]>sp service-point-info show spid 1
17.1.4.7 Deleting a Service Point (CLI)

You can only delete a service point if no VLAN bundles are attached to the
service point. This is only relevant if the interface type of the service point is
bundle-c-tag or bundle-s-tag. For more information, refer to Attaching a VLAN
Bundle to a Service Point (CLI).
To delete a service point from a service, go to service view for the service and
service[SID]>sp delete spid <sp-id>

Table 131: Delete Service Point Attributes CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP services. The Service Point ID.
Example
The following command deletes Service Point 10 from Service 37:
service[37]>sp delete spid 10
17.1.5 Defining the MAC Address Forwarding Table for a Service (CLI)

 MAC Address Forwarding Table Overview (CLI)
 Setting the Maximum Size of the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
 Setting the MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time (CLI)
 Adding a Static MAC Address to the Forwarding Table (CLI)
 Displaying the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
 Flushing the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
 Enabling MAC Address Learning on a Service Point (CLI)
17.1.5.1 MAC Address Forwarding Table Overview (CLI)

IP-20 performs MAC address learning per service. IP-20 can learn up to
131,072 MAC addresses.
If necessary due to security issues or resource limitations, you can limit the
size of the MAC address forwarding table. The maximum size of the MAC
address forwarding table is configurable per service in granularity of 16
entries.
When a frame arrives via a specific service point, the learning mechanism
checks the MAC address forwarding table for the service to which the service
point belongs to determine whether that MAC address is known to the service.
If the MAC address is not found, the learning mechanism adds it to the table.
In parallel with the learning process, the forwarding mechanism searches the
service’s MAC forwarding table for the frame’s MAC address. If a match is
found, the frame is forwarded to the service point associated with the MAC
address. If not, the frame is flooded to all service points in the service.
17.1.5.2 Setting the Maximum Size of the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)
To limit the size of the MAC address forwarding table for a specific service, go
to service view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>service mac-limit-value set <mac limit>

Table 132: MAC Address Forwarding Table Maximum Size CLI Parameters

mac limit Number 16 to 131,072, in multiples of 16 The maximum MAC address table
size for the service. This maximum
only applies to dynamic, not static,
MAC address table entries.
Example
The following command limits the number of dynamic MAC address
forwarding table entries for Service 10 to 128:
service[10]>service mac-limit-value set 128
17.1.5.3 Setting the MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time (CLI)
You can configure a global aging time for dynamic entries in the MAC address
forwarding table. Once this aging time expires for a specific table entry, the
entry is erased from the table.
To set the global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time set time <time>
To display the global aging time for the MAC address forwarding table, enter
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time show
Table 133: MAC Address Forwarding Table Aging Time CLI Parameters

time Number 15 - 3825 The global aging time for the MAC address
forwarding table, in seconds.
Example
The following command sets the global aging time to 2500 seconds:
root> ethernet service learning-ageing-time set time 2500
17.1.5.4 Adding a Static MAC Address to the Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can add static entries to the MAC forwarding table. The global aging timer
does not apply to static entries, and they are not counted with respect to the
maximum size of the MAC address forwarding table. It is the responsibility of
the user not to use all the entries in the table if the user also wants to utilize
dynamic MAC address learning.
To add a static MAC address to the MAC address forwarding table, go to
service view for the service to which you want to add the MAC address and
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table set-static-
mac <static mac> spid <sp-id>

To delete a static MAC address from the MAC address forwarding table, go to
service view for the service from which you want to delete the MAC address
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table del-static-
mac <static mac> spid <sp-id>
Table 134: Adding Static Address to MAC Address Forwarding Table CLI
Parameters
Permitted
static mac Six groups of two The MAC address.
hexadecimal digits
sp-id Number 1-32 The Service Point ID of the service point
associated with the MAC address.
Examples
The following command adds MAC address 00:11:22:33:44:55 to the MAC
address forwarding table for Service 10, and associates the MAC address with
Service Point ID 1 on Service 10:
service[10]>service mac-learning-table set-static-
mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 spid 1
The following command deletes MAC address 00:11:22:33:44:55, associated

with Service Point 1, from the MAC address forwarding table for Service 10:
service[10]>service mac-learning-table del-static-
mac 00:11:22:33:44:55 spid 1
17.1.5.5 Displaying the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface, a service,
or for the entire unit.
To display the MAC address forwarding table for a service, go to service view
service[SID]>service mac-learning-table show
To display the MAC address forwarding table for an interface, go to interface

eth type xxx[x/x]>mac-learning-table show
To display the MAC address forwarding table for the entire unit, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet generalcfg mac-learning-table show
Example
To display the MAC address forwarding table for GbE 1, enter the following
commands:
eth type eth[1/1]>mac-learning-table show

17.1.5.6 Flushing the MAC Address Forwarding Table (CLI)

You can perform a global flush on the MAC address forwarding table. This
erases all dynamic entries for all services. Static entries are not erased.
Note: The ability to flush the MAC address forwarding table per-
service and per-interface is planned for future release.
To perform a global flush of the MAC address forwarding table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet service mac-learning-table set global-flush
17.1.5.7 Enabling MAC Address Learning on a Service Point (CLI)

You can enable or disable MAC address learning for specific service points. By
default, MAC learning is enabled.
To enable or disable MAC address learning for a service point, go to service
view for the service and enter the following command:
service[SID]>sp learning-state set spid <sp-id> learning
<learning>
Table 135: Enabling MAC Address Learning CLI Parameters
Parameter Input Type Permitted Description

Values
sp-id Number 1-32 The Service Point ID of the service point associated
with the MAC address.
learning Variable Enable Select enable or disable to enable or disable MAC
disable address learning for frames that ingress via the
service point.
When enabled, the service point learns the source
MAC addresses of incoming frames and adds them to
the MAC address forwarding table.
Examples
The following command enables MAC address learning for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp learning-state set spid 1 learning enable
The following command disables MAC address learning for Service Point 1 on
Service 37:
service[37]>sp learning-state set spid 1 learning disable

17.2 Setting the MRU Size and the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
The following parameters are configured globally for the IP-20 switch:
 S- VLAN Ethertype – Defines the ethertype recognized by the system as the
S-VLAN ethertype.
 C-VLAN Ethertype – Defines the ethertype recognized by the system as the
C-VLAN ethertype. IP-20 supports 0x8100 as the C-VLAN ethertype.
 MRU – The maximum segment size defines the maximum receive unit
(MRU) capability and the maximum transmit capability (MTU) of the
system. You can configure a global MRU for the system.
Note: The MTU is determined by the receiving frame and editing
operation on the frame.

 Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
 Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)
 Configuring the MRU (CLI)
17.2.1 Configuring the S-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)

To configure the S-VLAN Ethertype, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype set svlan-value <ethertype>
To display the system S-VLAN ethertype, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype show svlan
Table 136: Configure S-VLAN Ethertype CLI Parameters

ethertype Hexadecimal 0x8100 Defines the ethertype recognized by the
0x88a8 system as the S-VLAN ethertype.
0x9100
0x9200
Example
For example, the following command sets the system S-VLAN ethertype to
0x88a8:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype set svlan-value 0x88a8
17.2.2 Configuring the C-VLAN Ethertype (CLI)

The system C-VLAN Ethertype is set by the system as 0x8100.
To display the system C-VLAN ethertype, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet generalcfg ethertype show cvlan

17.2.3 Configuring the MRU (CLI)

To define the global size (in bytes) of the Maximum Receive Unit (MRU), enter
the following command in root view:
root> ethernet generalcfg mru set size <size>
To display the system MRU, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet generalcfg mru show
Table 137: Configure MRU CLI Parameters

size Number 64 to 9612 Defines the global size (in bytes) of the
Maximum Receive Unit (MRU). Frames that
are larger than the global MRU will be
discarded.
Example
For example, the following command sets the system MRU to 9612:
root> ethernet generalcfg mru set size 9612

17.3 Configuring Ethernet Interfaces (CLI)

Related Topics:
 Enabling the Interfaces (CLI)
 Configuring Ethernet Services (CLI)
 Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)
P-20's switching fabric distinguishes between physical interfaces and logical
interfaces. Physical and logical interfaces serve different purposes in the
switching fabric. In some cases, a physical interface corresponds to a logical
interface on a one-to-one basis. For some features, such as LAG, a group of
physical interfaces can be joined into a single logical interface.
The basic interface characteristics, such as media type, port speed, duplex, and
auto-negotiation, are configured on the physical interface level. Ethernet
services, QoS, and OAM characteristics are configured on the logical interface
level.
Note: You cannot change the configuration of the Management
interface. By default, the Management interface has the
following configuration:
 Auto negotiation ON
 Full Duplex
 RJ45 - 100Mbps

 Entering Interface View (CLI)
 Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit (CLI)
 Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI)
 Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI)
 Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI)
 Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI)
 Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI)
 Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI)
 Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI)
 Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI)

17.3.1 Entering Interface View (CLI)

To view interface details and set the interface’s parameters, you must enter
the interface’s view level in the CLI.
Use the following command to enter an Ethernet interface’s view level:
root> ethernet interfaces eth slot <slot> port <port>
Use the following command to enter the radio interface’s view level:
root> ethernet interfaces radio slot <slot> port <port>
Use the following command to enter the view level of a group, such as a Multi-
Carrier ABC group, an HSB protection group, or a LAG:
root> ethernet interfaces group <group>
Table 138: Entering Interface View CLI Parameters

size Number 64 to 9612 Defines the global size (in bytes) of the
Maximum Receive Unit (MRU). Frames that
are larger than the global MRU will be
discarded.
slot Number Ethernet: 1 Depends on the interface and unit type.
Radio: 2
port Number GbE 1: 1 The port number of the interface.
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-
20C only): 2
group Variable rp1 To enter interface view for a group, enter the
rp2 group ID for one of the following types of
group:
rp3
 HSB group (rp1 - rp-4)
rp4
 LAG (lag1 - lag4)
lag1
 Multi-Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 - mc-
lag2
abc4)
lag3
Note: HSB and Multi-Carrier ABC groups are
lag4 only relevant for IP-20C.
mc-abc1
mc-abc2
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
Example
The following command enters interface view for Ethernet port 3:


eth type eth [1/3]>
The following command enters interface view for radio interface 2 in an

IP-20C unit:

radio [2/2]>
The following command enters interface view for the radio interface in an
IP-20S or an IP-20E unit:

radio [2/1]>
The following command enters interface view for LAG 1:

eth type group [64/1]>
Note: For simplicity, the examples in the following sections show

the prompt for an Ethernet interface.
17.3.2 Displaying the Operational State of the Interfaces in the Unit

(CLI)
To display a list of all interfaces in the unit and their operational states, enter
root> platform if-manager show interfaces
The following is a sample output of this command:
17.3.3 Viewing Interface Attributes (CLI)

To display an interface’s attributes, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]>summary show
To display an interface’s current operational state (up or down), go to

interface view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>operational state show

Examples
The following command shows the attributes of GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>summary show
The following command shows the operational state of GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>operational state show
17.3.4 Configuring an Interface’s Media Type (CLI)

The Media Type attribute defines the physical interface Layer 1 media type.
Permitted values are RJ-45 and SFP.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s Media Type, go to interface view for the
interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>media-type state set <media type>
Table 139: Interface Media Type CLI Parameters
Permitted
media type Variable rj45 Select the physical interface layer 1 media type:
sfp RJ45 - An electrical (RJ-45) Ethernet interface.
SFP - An optical (SFP) Ethernet interface.
Example
The following command sets GbE 1 to RJ-45 (electrical):
eth type eth [1/2]>media-type state set rj45
The following command sets GbE 2 to SFP:

eth type eth [1/2]>media-type state set sfp
17.3.5 Configuring an Interface’s Speed and Duplex State (CLI)

To configure an Ethernet interface’s maximum speed and duplex state, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>speed-and-duplex state set <speed-and-duplex
state>
Table 140: Interface Speed and Duplex State CLI Parameters
Permitted
speed-and- Variable '10hd' This parameter sets the maximum speed and the
duplex state '10fd' duplex state of the interface. For RJ-45 interfaces, any
of the permitted values can be configured. For SFP
'100hd'
interfaces, only '1000fd' is supported.
'100fd'
'1000fd'
Note: 10HD is not supported in the current release.

Examples
The following command sets GbE 1 to 100 Mbps, full duplex:
eth type eth [1/1]>speed-and-duplex state set '100fd'
Note: Before performing this command, you must verify that the
media-type attribute is set to rj45.
The following command sets GbE 1 to 1000 Mbps, full duplex:
eth type eth [1/1]>speed-and-duplex state set '1000fd'
17.3.6 Configuring an Interface’s Auto Negotiation State (CLI)

To configure an Ethernet interface’s auto-negotiation state, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>autoneg state set <autoneg state>
Table 141: Interface Auto Negotiation State CLI Parameters
Permitted
autoneg state Variable On Enables or disables auto-negotiation on the physical
off interface.
Example
The following command enables auto negotiation for GbE 2:
eth type eth [1/2]>autoneg state set on
17.3.7 Configuring an Interface’s IFG (CLI)

The IFG attribute represents the physical port Inter-frame gap. Although you
can modify the IFG field length, it is strongly recommended not to modify the
default value of 12 bytes without a thorough understanding of how the
modification will impact traffic.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s IFG, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]>ifg set <ifg>
Table 142: Interface IFG CLI Parameters
Permitted
ifg Number 6 - 15 Sets the interface’s IFG (in bytes).
Example
The following command sets the ifg for GbE 1 to 12:
eth type eth [1/1]>ifg set 12
The following displays the currently configured ifg for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>ifg get
17.3.8 Configuring an Interface’s Preamble (CLI)

Although you can modify an Ethernet interface’s preamble, it is strongly
recommended not to modify the default value of 8 bytes without a thorough
understanding of how the modification will impact traffic.
To configure an Ethernet interface’s preamble, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>preamble set <preamble>
Table 143: Interface Preamble CLI Parameters
Permitted
preamble Number 6 - 15 Sets the interface’s preamble (in bytes).
Example
The following command sets the preamble for GbE 1 to 8:
eth type eth [1/1]>preamble set 8
The following command displays the current preamble for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>preamble get
17.3.9 Adding a Description for the Interface (CLI)

You can add a text description for an interface. To add a description, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>description set <description>
To delete a description, go to interface view for the interface and enter the
following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>description delete
To display an interface’s description, go to interface view for the interface and

eth type eth [x/x]>description show
Table 144: Interface Description CLI Parameters
Permitted
description Text String Up to 40 Adds a text description to the interface.
characters
Example
The following command adds the description “Line” to GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>description set Line

17.3.10 Displaying Interface Statistics (RMON) (CLI)

standards.
To display RMON statistics for a physical interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read <clear-
on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
Table 145: Interface Statistics (RMON) CLI Parameters
Permitted
clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are cleared once you
no display them.
layer-1 Boolean yes yes – Statistics are represented as Layer 1 statistics,

no including preamble and IFG.
no – Statistics are represented as Layer 2 statistics.
Example
The following commands enter interface view for GbE 1, and clear the
statistics after displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read yes

layer-1 yes
The following commands enter interface view for radio carrier 1 in an IP-20C
or IP-20S unit, and display statistics for the interface, without clearing the
statistics.
eth type radio[2/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read no

layer-1 no
17.4 Configuring Automatic State Propagation (CLI)

Automatic state propagation enables propagation of radio failures back to the
Ethernet port. You can also configure Automatic State Propagation to close the
Ethernet port based on a radio failure at the remote carrier.
You must first configure automatic state propagation for a pair consisting of
an Ethernet interface, on the one hand, and a radio interface, Multi-Carrier
ABC group, or HSB protection group, on the other. You must then use a
separate command to enable automatic state propagation on the selected pair
and determine whether a failure on the remote side of the link is propagated
to the local interface.
It is recommended to configure both ends of the link to the same Automatic
State Propagation configuration.


 Configuring Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port (CLI)
 Enabling Automatic State Propagation (CLI)
 Deleting Automatic State Propagation (CLI)
 Displaying Automatic State Propagation Parameters (CLI)
17.4.1 Configuring Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port

(CLI)
To configure propagation of a radio interface failure to an Ethernet port, use
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-radio eth-slot
<eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> radio-slot <radio-slot> radio-
port <radio-port>
To configure propagation of a Multi-Carrier ABC group failure to an Ethernet

port, use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-multi-radio-group
eth-slot <eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> multi-radio-group
<multi-radio-group>
To configure propagation of an HSB-SD protection group failure to an Ethernet

port, use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-protection-group
eth-slot <eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port> protection-group
<protection-group>
Table 146: Automatic State Propagation to an Ethernet Port CLI Parameters

eth-slot Number 1 Always enter 1.
eth-port Number 1-3 The interface to which you want to
propagate faults from the selected
radio or group.
radio-slot Number 2
radio-port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1 The radio interface.
Radio Carrier 2 (IP-20C
only): 2
multi-radio- Number 1-4 The Multi-Carrier ABC group failure of
group which is propagated to the defined
interface.
protection- Number 1-4 The HSB-SD protection group failure
group of which is propagated to the defined
interface.

Example
The following commands configure and enable automatic state propagation to
propagate faults from radio interface 1 to Ethernet port 1.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-radio eth-slot 1
eth-port 1 radio-slot 2 radio-port 1

propagate faults from Multi-Carrier ABC group 1 to Ethernet port 1 on an IP-
20C unit.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-multi-radio-group
eth-slot 1 eth-port 1 multi-radio-group 1

propagate faults from 1+1 HSB-SD protection group 1 to Ethernet port 1 on
an IP-20C unit.
root> auto-state-propagation add eth-port-to-protection-group
eth-slot 1 eth-port 1 protection-group 1
17.4.2 Enabling Automatic State Propagation (CLI)

To enable automatic state propagation on an Ethernet port and determine
whether remote interface failures are also propagated, use the following
command:
root> auto-state-propagation configure eth-port eth-slot <eth-
slot> eth-port <eth-port> asp-admin <asp-admin> remote-fault-
trigger-admin <remote-fault-trigger-admin>csf-mode-admin <csf-
mode-admin>
Table 147: Enable Automatic State Propagation CLI Parameters
Permitted
eth-port Number 1-3 The interface to which you want to propagate faults
from the selected radio or group.
asp-admin Variable enable Enables or disables automatic state propagation on
disable the Ethernet interface.
remote-fault- Variable enable Determines whether faults on the remote radio

trigger-admin disable interface or group are propagated to the local
Ethernet interface.
csf-mode- Variable enable Enables or disables Client Signal Failure (CSF)
admin disable mode. In CSF mode, the ASP mechanism does not
physically shut down the Controlled Interface when
ASP is triggered. Instead, the ASP mechanism
sends a failure indication message (a CSF
message). The CSF message is used to propagate
the failure indication to external equipment.

Example
The following command enables automatic state propagation to Ethernet port
1, and specifies that faults on the remote carrier are also propagated to
Ethernet port 1. CSF mode is enabled.
root> auto-state-propagation configure eth-port eth-slot 1 eth-
port 1 asp-admin enable remote-fault-trigger-admin enable csf-
mode-admin enable
17.4.3 Deleting Automatic State Propagation (CLI)

To delete automatic state propagation on an Ethernet port, use the following
command:
root> auto-state-propagation delete eth-port eth-slot <eth-
slot> eth-port <eth-port>
Table 148: Delete Automatic State Propagation CLI Parameters
Permitted
eth-port Number 1-3 The interface to which you wanted to propagate
faults from the selected radio or group.
17.4.4 Displaying Automatic State Propagation Parameters (CLI)

To display all automatic state propagation configurations on the unit, use the
following command:
root> auto-state-propagation show-config all
To display the automatic state propagation configuration for a specific

Ethernet port, use the following command:
root> auto-state-propagation show-config eth-port eth-slot
<eth-slot> eth-port <eth-port>
Table 149: Display Automatic State Propagation CLI Parameters
Permitted
eth-port Number 1-3 The interface to which you propagate faults from the
selected radio or group.

17.5 Viewing Ethernet PMs and Statistics (CLI)

standards. You can display various peak TX and RX rates (in seconds) and
average TX and RX rates (in seconds), both in bytes and in packets, for each
measured time interval. You can also display the number of seconds in the
interval during which TX and RX rates exceeded the configured threshold.

 Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI)
 Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI)
 Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)
 Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)
17.5.1 Displaying RMON Statistics (CLI)

To display RMON statistics for a physical interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read <clear-
on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
Table 150: RMON Statistics CLI Parameters

clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are cleared once you display
no them.
layer-1 Boolean yes  yes – Statistics are represented as Layer 1 statistics,

no including preamble and IFG.
 no – Statistics are represented as Layer 2 statistics.
The following commands bring you to interface view for Ethernet port 1, and
clears the statistics after displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read yes

layer-1 yes
The following commands bring you to interface view for radio interface 2,
without clearing the statistics.
eth type radio[2/2]>rmon statistics show clear-on-read no

layer-1 no

17.5.2 Configuring Ethernet Port PMs and PM Thresholds (CLI)

To enable the gathering of PMs for an Ethernet interface, go to interface view
for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> pm set admin <enable|disable>
You can configure thresholds and display the number of seconds these
thresholds were exceeded during a specified interval.
To configure interface PM thresholds, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> pm set thresholds rx-layer1-rate-threshold
<0-4294967295> tx-layer1-rate-threshold <0-4294967295>
To display whether or not PM gathering is enabled for an Ethernet interface,

as well as the configured thresholds, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> pm show configuration
Table 151: Port PM Thresholds CLI Parameters

rx-layer1-rate- Number 0-4294967295 The exceed threshold for port RX PMs, in bytes per second.
thershold
tx-layer1-rate- Number 0-4294967295 The exceed threshold for port TX PMs, in bytes per second.
thershold
The following commands bring you to interface view for Ethernet port 1,
enable PM gathering, and set the thresholds for RX and TX PMs at 850,000,000
bytes per second:
eth type eth [1/1]>pm set admin enable
eth type eth [1/1]>pm set thresholds rx-layer1-rate-threshold

850000000 tx-layer1-rate-threshold 850000000

17.5.3 Displaying Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)

Note: The port PM results may be several pages long. Remember:
To view the next results page, press the space bar.

To end the list and return to the most recent prompt, press
the letter q.
To display RX packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-packets interval 15min
To display RX packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-packets interval 24hr
To display RX broadcast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bcast-packets interval 15min
To display RX broadcast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bcast-packets interval 24hr
To display RX multicast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-mcast-packets interval 15min
To display RX multicast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-mcast-packets interval 24hr
To display Layer 1 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer1 interval 15min
To display Layer 1 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer1 interval 24hr
To display Layer 2 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer2 interval 15min
To display Layer 2 RX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show rx-bytes-layer2 interval 24hr
To display TX packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-packets interval 15min

To display TX packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view for the

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-packets interval 24hr
To display TX broadcast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bcast-packets interval 15min
To display TX broadcast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bcast-packets interval 24hr
To display TX multicast packet PMs in 15-minute intervals, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-mcast-packets interval 15min
To display TX multicast packet PMs in 24-hour intervals, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-mcast-packets interval 24hr
To display Layer 1 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer1 interval 15min
To display Layer 1 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer1 interval 24hr
To display Layer 2 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 15-minute intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer2 interval 15min
To display Layer 2 TX PMs, in bytes per second, in 24-hour intervals, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> pm show tx-bytes-layer2 interval 24hr
Table 152: Ethernet Port PMs
Invalid data flag Indicates whether the values received during the measured interval are valid.
An x in the column indicates that the values are not valid (for example,
because of a power surge or power failure that occurred during the interval).
Peak RX Packets The peak rate of RX packets per second for the measured time interval.
Average RX Packets The average rate of RX packets per second for the measured time interval.
Peak RX Broadcast Packets The peak rate of RX broadcast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Average RX Broadcast Packets The average rate of RX broadcast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Peak RX Multicast Packets The peak rate of RX multicast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Average RX Multicast Packets The average rate of RX multicast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Peak RX Bytes in Layer1 The peak RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
(including preamble and IFG).
Average RX Bytes in Layer1 The average RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
RX Bytes Layer1 Exceed The number of seconds during the measured time interval that the RX rate
Threshold (sec) exceeded the configured threshold.
Peak RX Bytes in Layer2 The peak RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
(excluding preamble and IFG).
Average RX Bytes in Layer2 The average RX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
Peak TX Packets The peak rate of TX packets per second for the measured time interval.
Average TX Packets The average rate of TX packets per second for the measured time interval.
Peak TX Broadcast Packets The peak rate of TX broadcast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Average TX Broadcast Packets The average rate of TX broadcast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Peak TX Multicast Packets The peak rate of TX multicast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Average TX Multicast Packets The average rate of TX multicast packets per second for the measured time
interval.
Peak TX Bytes in Layer1 The peak TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
Average TX Bytes in Layer1 The average TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
TX Bytes Layer1 Exceed The number of seconds during the measured time interval that the TX rate
Threshold (sec) exceeded the configured threshold.
Peak TX Bytes in Layer2 The peak TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval
Average TX Bytes in Layer2 The average TX rate, in bytes per second, for the measured time interval

17.5.4 Clearing Ethernet Port PMs (CLI)

To clear all PMs for an Ethernet interface, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> pm clear-all

18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)

 Configuring Classification (CLI)
 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI)
 Configuring Marking (CLI)
 Configuring WRED (CLI)
 Configuring Shapers (CLI)
 Configuring Scheduling (CLI)
 Displaying Egress Statistics (CLI)
18.1 Configuring Classification (CLI)

 Classification Overview (CLI)
 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface (CLI)
 Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI)
 Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI)
 Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI)
 Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI)
 Configuring a Default CoS (CLI)
 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI)
 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI)
18.1.1 Classification Overview (CLI)

IP-20 supports a hierarchical classification mechanism. The classification
mechanism examines incoming frames and determines their CoS and Color.
The benefit of hierarchical classification is that it provides the ability to “zoom
in” or “zoom out”, enabling classification at higher or lower levels of the
hierarchy. The nature of each traffic stream defines which level of the
hierarchical classifier to apply, or whether to use several levels of the
classification hierarchy in parallel.
The hierarchical classifier consists of the following levels:
 Logical interface-level classification
 Service point-level classification
 Service level classification
18.1.2 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Logical Interface

(CLI)
Logical interface-level classification enables you to configure classification on
a single interface or on a number of interfaces grouped tougher, such as a LAG
group.
The classifier at the logical interface level supports the following classification
methods, listed from highest to lowest priority. A higher level classification
method supersedes a lower level classification method:
 VLAN ID
 802.1p bits.
 DSCP values.
 MPLS EXP field.
 Default CoS
IP-20 performs the classification on each frame ingressing the system via the
logical interface. Classification is performed step by step from the highest
priority to the lowest priority classification method. Once a match is found, the
classifier determines the CoS and Color decision for the frame for the logical
interface-level.
For example, if the frame is an untagged IP Ethernet frame, a match will not be
found until the third priority level (DSCP). The CoS and Color values defined
for the frame’s DSCP value will be applied to the frame.
You can disable some of these classification methods by configuring them as
un-trusted. For example, if 802.1p classification is configured as un-trusted for
a specific interface, the classification mechanism does not perform
classification by UP bits. This is useful, for example, if classification is based on
DSCP priority bits.
If no match is found at the logical interface level, the default CoS is applied to
incoming frames at this level. In this case, the Color of the frame is assumed to
be Green.
18.1.3 Configuring VLAN Classification and Override (CLI)

You can specify a specific CoS and Color for a specific VLAN ID. In the case of
double-tagged frames, the match must be with the frame’s outer VLAN.
Permitted values are CoS 0 to 7 and Color Green or Yellow per VLAN ID. This is
the highest classification priority on the logical interface level, and overrides
any other classification criteria at the logical interface level.
To configure CoS and Color override based on VLAN ID, go to interface view
eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id <outer-
vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id> use-cos <use-cos> use-
color <use-color>
To display configured VLAN-based CoS and Color override values, go to

eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override show outer-vlan-id <outer-
vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id>
To delete a set of VLAN-based CoS and Color override values, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]>vlan-cos-override delete outer-vlan-id
<outer-vlan-id> inner-vlan-id <inner-vlan-id>

Table 153: VLAN Classification and Override CLI Parameters

outer-vlan-id Number 1 – 4094 (except For double-tagged frames, the S-VLAN value mapped to the
4092, which is CoS and Color values defined in the command.
reserved for the For single-tagged frames, the VLAN value mapped to the
default management CoS and Color values defined in the command.
service)
inner-vlan-id Number 1 – 4094 (except Optional. Include this parameter when you want to map
4092, which is double-tagged frames to specific CoS and Color values.
reserved for the When this parameter is included in the command, both the
default management S-VLAN and the C-VLAN IDs must match the configured
service) outer-vlan-id and inner-vlan-id values,
respectively, in order for the defined CoS and Color values
to be applied to the frame.
use-cos Number 0–7 The CoS value applied to matching frames.
use-color Variable green The Color applied to matching frames.

yellow
Examples
The following command configures the classification mechanism on GbE 1 to
override the CoS and Color values of frames with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID
30 with a CoS value of 6 and a Color value of Green:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 30 use-cos 6 use-color green
The following command configures the classification mechanism on GbE 2 to

override the CoS and Color values of frames with VLAN ID 20 with a CoS value
of 5 and a Color value of Green:
eth type eth [1/2]>vlan-cos-override set outer-vlan-id 20 use-
cos 5 use-color green
The following command displays the CoS and Color override values for frames
that ingress on GbE 1, with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override show outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 20
The following command displays all CoS and Color override values for frames
that ingress on GbE 2:
eth type eth [1/2]>vlan-cos-override show all
The following command deletes the VLAN to CoS and Color override mapping
for frames that ingress on GbE 1, with S-VLAN ID 10 and C-VLAN ID 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>vlan-cos-override delete outer-vlan-id 10
inner-vlan-id 20

18.1.4 Configuring 802.1p Classification (CLI)

When 802.1p classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS
and Color classification according to user-configurable tables for 802.1q UP bit
(C-VLAN frames) or 802.1AD UP bit (S-VLAN frames) to CoS and Color
classification.

 Configuring Trust Mode for 802.1p Classification (CLI)
 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
18.1.4.1 Configuring Trust Mode for 802.1p Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for 802.1p classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set 802.1p <802.1p>
To display the trust mode for 802.1p classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show 802.1p state
Table 154: 802.1p Trust Mode CLI Parameters

802.1p Variable trust Enter the interface's trust mode for user priority (UP) bits:
un-trust  trust – The interface performs QoS and color
classification according to UP and CFI/DEI bits according
to user-configurable tables for 802.1q UP bits (C-VLAN
frames) or 802.1AD UP bits (S-VLAN frames). VLAN UP bit
classification has priority over DSCP and MPLS
classification, so that if a match is found with the UP bit of
the ingressing frame, DSCP values and MPLS bits are not
considered.
 un-trust – The interface does not consider 802.1 UP
bits during classification.
Examples
The following command enables 802.1p trust mode for GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>classification set 802.1p trust
The following command disables 802.1p trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set 802.1p un-trust

18.1.4.2 Modifying the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
The following table shows the default values for the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI
bit classification table.
Table 155: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table Default Values
802.1 UP CFI CoS (configurable) Color (configurable)

0 0 0 Green
0 1 0 Yellow
1 0 1 Green
1 1 1 Yellow
2 0 2 Green
2 1 2 Yellow
3 0 3 Green
3 1 3 Yellow
4 0 4 Green
4 1 4 Yellow
5 0 5 Green
5 1 5 Yellow
6 0 6 Green
6 1 6 Yellow
7 0 7 Green
7 1 7 Yellow
To modify the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
<802.1p> cfi <cfi> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl show

Table 156: C-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters

802.1p Number 0–7 The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
cfi Number 0–1 The CFI bit to be mapped.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and
CFI.
color Variable green The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP and
yellow CFI.
Example
The following command maps frames with an 802.1p UP bit value of 1 and a
CFI bit value of 0 to CoS 1 and Green color:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
1 cfi 0 cos 1 color green
18.1.4.3 Modifying the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table (CLI)
The following table shows the default values for the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI
bit classification table.
Table 157: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table Default Values
802.1 UP DEI CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)

0 0 0 Green
0 1 0 Yellow
1 0 1 Green
1 1 1 Yellow
2 0 2 Green
2 1 2 Yellow
3 0 3 Green
3 1 3 Yellow
4 0 4 Green
4 1 4 Yellow
5 0 5 Green
5 1 5 Yellow
6 0 6 Green
6 1 6 Yellow
7 0 7 Green
7 1 7 Yellow

To modify the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI bit classification table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p
<802.1p> dei <dei> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the S-VLAN 802.1 UP and CFI bit classification table, enter the
following command:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl show
Table 158: S-VLAN 802.1 UP and DEI Bit Classification Table CLI Parameters

802.1p Number 0–7 The User Priority (UP) bit to be mapped.
dei Number 0-1 The DEI bit to be mapped.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS assigned to frames with the designated UP and
CFI.
color Variable green The Color assigned to frames with the designated UP and
yellow CFI.
Example
The following command maps frames with an 802.1ad UP bit value of 7 and a
DEI bit value of 0 to CoS 7 and Green color:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-mapping-tbl set 802.1p 7 dei
0 cos 7 color green
18.1.5 Configuring DSCP Classification (CLI)

When DSCP classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS and
Color classification according to a user-configurable DSCP to CoS and Color
classification table. 802.1p classification has priority over DSCP Trust Mode, so
that if a match is found on the 802.1p level, DSCP is not considered.

 Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Classification (CLI)
 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table (CLI)
18.1.5.1 Configuring Trust Mode for DSCP Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for DSCP classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set ip-dscp <ip-dscp>
To display the trust mode for DSCP classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show 802.1p state

Table 159: Trust Mode for DSCP CLI Parameters

ip-dscp Variable trust Select the interface's trust mode for DSCP classification:
classification according to a user-configurable table for
DSCP to CoS and color classification. DSCP classification
has priority over MPLS classification, so that if a match is
found with the DSCP value of the ingressing frame, MPLS
bits are not considered.
 un-trust – The interface does not consider DSCP
during classification.
Examples
The following command enables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>classification set ip-dscp trust
The following command disables DSCP trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set ip-dscp un-trust
18.1.5.2 Modifying the DSCP Classification Table (CLI)

The following table shows the default values for the DSCP classification table.
Table 160: DSCP Classification Table Default Values
DSCP DSCP (bin) Description CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)

0 (default) 000000 BE (CS0) 0 Green
10 001010 AF11 1 Green
12 001100 AF12 1 Yellow
14 001110 AF13 1 Yellow
18 010010 AF21 2 Green
20 010100 AF22 2 Yellow
22 010110 AF23 2 Yellow
26 011010 AF31 3 Green
28 011100 AF32 3 Yellow
30 011110 AF33 3 Yellow
34 100010 AF41 4 Green
36 100100 AF42 4 Yellow
38 100110 AF43 4 Yellow
46 101110 EF 7 Green
8 001000 CS1 1 Green

DSCP DSCP (bin) Description CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)

16 010000 CS2 2 Green
24 011000 CS3 3 Green
32 100000 CS4 4 Green
40 101000 CS5 5 Green
48 110000 CS6 6 Green
56 111000 CS7 7 Green
51 110011 DSCP_51 6 Green
52 110100 DSCP_52 6 Green
54 110110 DSCP_54 6 Green
56 111000 CS7 7 Green
To modify the DSCP classification table, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl set dscp <dscp> cos <cos>
color <color>
To display the DSCP classification table, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl show
Table 161: Modify DSCP Classification Table CLI Parameters

dscp Number Valid DSCP values. Refer to the The DSCP value to be mapped.
DSCP column in the table above.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS assigned to frames with the

designated DSCP value.
color Variable green The Color assigned to frames with the

yellow designated DSCP value.
Example
The following command maps frames with DSCP value of 10 to CoS 1 and
Green color:
root> ethernet qos dscp-mapping-tbl set dscp 10 cos 1 color
green

18.1.6 Configuring MPLS Classification (CLI)

When MPLS classification is set to Trust mode, the interface performs QoS and
Color classification according to a user-configurable MPLS EXP bit to CoS and
Color classification table. Both 802.1p and DSCP classification have priority
over MPLS Trust Mode, so that if a match is found on either the 802.1p or
DSCP levels, MPLS bits are not considered.

 Configuring Trust Mode for MPLS Classification (CLI)
 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table (CLI)
18.1.6.1 Configuring Trust Mode for MPLS Classification (CLI)

To define the trust mode for MPLS classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set mpls <mpls>
To display the trust mode for MPLS classification, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show mpls state
Table 162: Trust Mode for MPLS CLI Parameters

mpls Variable Trust Select the interface's trust mode for MPLS bits:
classification according to a user-configurable table for
MPLS EXP to CoS and color classification.
 un-trust – The interface does not consider MPLS
bits during classification.
Examples
The following command enables MPLS trust mode for GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>classification set mpls trust
The following command disables MPLS trust mode for GbE 1:

eth type eth [1/1]>classification set mpls un-trust

18.1.6.2 Modifying the MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table (CLI)

The following table shows the default values for the MPLS EXP bit
classification table.
Table 163: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Default Values
MPLS EXP bits CoS (Configurable) Color (Configurable)

0 0 Yellow
1 1 Green
2 2 Yellow
3 3 Green
4 4 Yellow
5 5 Green
6 6 Green
7 7 Green
To modify the MPLS EXP bit classification table, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos mpls-exp-bits-mapping-tbl set mpls-exp
<mpls-exp> cos <cos> color <color>
To display the MPLS EXP bit classification table, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos mpls-mapping-tbl show
Table 164: MPLS EXP Bit Classification Table Modification CLI Parameters

mpls-exp Number 0–7 The MPLS EXP bit to be mapped.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS assigned to frames with the designated MPLS
EXP bit value.
color Variable green The Color assigned to frames with the designated MPLS
yellow EXP bit value.
Example
The following command maps frames with MPLS EXP bit value of 4 to CoS 4
and Yellow color:
root> ethernet qos mpls-exp-bits-mapping-tbl set mpls-exp 4
cos 4 color yellow

18.1.7 Configuring a Default CoS (CLI)

You can define a default CoS value for frames passing through the interface.
This value can be overwritten on the service point and service level. The Color
is assumed to be Green.
To define a default CoS value for an interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification set default-cos <default-cos>
To display the default CoS value for an interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>classification show default-cos
Table 165: Default CoS CLI Parameters

default-cos Number 0–7 Enter the default CoS value for frames passing through the
interface. This value can be overwritten on the service point
and service level.
Example
The following command sets the default CoS for GbE 1 as 7:
eth type eth [1/1]>classification set default-cos 7
18.1.8 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service Point (CLI)

For instruction on configuring ingress path classification on a service point,
see CoS Preservation and Modification on a Service Point (CLI).
18.1.9 Configuring Ingress Path Classification on a Service (CLI)

For instruction on configuring ingress path classification on a service, see
Configuring a Service’s CoS Mode and Default CoS (CLI).

18.2 Configuring Policers (Rate Metering) (CLI)

 Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI)
 Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI)
 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI)
 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI)
 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI)
 Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter (Policer) (CLI)
 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI)
18.2.1 Overview of Rate Metering (Policing) (CLI)

The IP-20 switching fabric supports hierarchical policing on the logical
interface level. You can define up to 250 rate meter (policer) profiles.
Note: Policing on the service point level, and the service point and
CoS level, is planned for future release.
The IP-20's policer mechanism is based on a dual leaky bucket mechanism
(TrTCM). The policers can change a frame’s color and CoS settings based on
CIR/EIR + CBS/EBS, which makes the policer mechanism a key tool for
implementing bandwidth profiles and enabling operators to meet strict SLA
requirements.
The output of the policers is a suggested color for the inspected frame. Based
on this color, the queue management mechanism decides whether to drop the
frame or to pass it to the queue.

18.2.2 Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI)

To add a rate meter (policer) profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter add profile-id <profile-id> cir
<cir> cbs <cbs> eir <eir> ebs <ebs> color-mode <color-mode>
coupling-flag <coupling-flag> rate-meter-profile-name <rate-
meter-profile-name>
To edit an existing rate meter (policer) profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter edit profile-id <profile-id> cir
<cir> cbs <cbs> eir <eir> ebs <ebs> color-mode <color-mode>
coupling-flag <coupling-flag> rate-meter-profile-name <rate-
meter-profile-name>
Table 166: Rate Meter Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 – 250 A unique ID for the rate meter (policer) profile.
cir Number 0, or 64,000 - The Committed Information Rate (CIR) defined for the rate meter
1,000,000,000 (policer), in bits per second.
If the value is 0, all incoming CIR traffic is dropped.
cbs Number 0 - 128 The Committed Burst Rate (CBR) for the rate meter (policer), in
Kbytes.
eir Number 0, or 64,000 - The Excess Information Rate (EIR) for the rate meter (policer), in
1,000,000,000 bits per second.
If the value is 0, all incoming EIR traffic is dropped.
ebs Number 0 - 128 The Excess Burst Rate (EBR) for the rate meter (policer), in
Kbytes.
color-mode Variable color-blind Determines how the rate meter (policer) treats frames that ingress
color-aware with a CFI or DEI field set to 1 (yellow). Options are:
 color aware – All frames that ingress with a CFI/DEI field
set to 1 (yellow) are treated as EIR frames, even if credits
remain in the CIR bucket.
 color blind – All ingress frames are treated as green
regardless of their CFI/DEI value. A color-blind policer
discards any former color decisions.
coupling-flag Variable enable When enabled, frames that ingress as yellow may be converted to
disable green when there are no available yellow credits in the EIR
bucket. Only relevant in color-aware mode.
rate-meter- Text string Up to 20 characters. A description of the rate meter (policer) profile.
profile-name

Examples
The following command creates a rate meter (policer) profile with Profile ID
50, named “64k.”
root> ethernet qos rate-meter add profile-id 50 cir 64000 cbs 5
eir 64000 ebs 5 color-mode color-blind coupling-flag disable
rate-meter-profile-name 64k
This profile includes the following parameters:

 CIR – 64,000 bps
 CBS – 5 Kbytes
 EIR – 64,000 bps
 EBS – 5 Kbytes
 Color Blind mode
 Coupling Flag disabled
The following command edits the rate meter (policer) profile with Profile
ID 50, and changes its name to “256 kBytes.”
root> ethernet qos rate-meter edit profile-id 50 cir 128000 cbs
5 eir 128000 ebs 5 color-mode color-aware coupling-flag enable
rate-meter-profile-name 256 kBytes
This edited profile includes the following parameters:

 CIR – 128,000 bps
 CBS – 5 Kbytes
 EIR – 128,000 bps
 EBS – 5 Kbytes
 Color Aware mode
 Coupling Flag enabled
18.2.3 Displaying Rate Meter Profiles (CLI)

You can display all configured rate meter (policer) profiles or a specific profile.
To display a specific profile, enter the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id <profile-id>
To display all configured profiles, enter the following command:

root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id all
Example
The following command displays the parameters of Rate Meter Profile 50:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter show profile-id 50

18.2.4 Deleting a Rate Meter Profile (CLI)

You cannot delete a rate meter (policer) profile that is attached to a logical
interface. You must first remove the profile from the logical interface, then
delete the profile.
To delete a rate meter (policer) profile, use the following command:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter delete profile-id <profile-id>
Example
The following command deletes Rate Meter Profile 50:
root> ethernet qos rate-meter delete profile-id 50
18.2.5 Attaching a Rate Meter (Policer) to an Interface (CLI)

On the logical interface level, you can assign rate meter (policer) profiles as
follows:
 Per frame type (unicast, multicast, and broadcast)
 Per frame ethertype

 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Unicast Traffic (CLI)
 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Multicast Traffic (CLI)
 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Broadcast Traffic (CLI)
 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) per Ethertype (CLI)
18.2.5.1 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Unicast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic to the interface, go to
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast add capability admin-
state <admin-state> profile-id <profile-id>
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast edit admin-state <admin-
state> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the current unicast rate meter (policer) profile for an interface, go
to interface view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast delete

Table 167: Assigning Rate Meter for Unicast Traffic CLI Parameters

admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on unicast traffic flows
disable from the logical interface.
profile-id Number 1 – 250 Select from the rate meter profiles defined in the system.
Examples
The following command assigns Rate Meter Profile 1 to unicast traffic on
GbE 1, and enables rate metering on the port:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast add capability admin-
state enable profile-id 1
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for unicast
traffic on GbE 1 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4
18.2.5.2 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Multicast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic to the interface, go
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast add capability admin-
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast edit admin-state
<admin-state> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the current multicast rate meter (policer) profile for an interface,
go to interface view for the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast delete
Table 168: Assigning Rate Meter for Multicast Traffic CLI Parameters

admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on multicast traffic flows

Examples
The following command assigns Rate Meter Profile 1 to multicast traffic on
GbE 1, and enables rate metering on the port.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast add capability admin-
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for multicast
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4
18.2.5.3 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) for Broadcast Traffic (CLI)

To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic to the interface, go
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast add capability admin-
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast edit admin-state
<admin-state> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the current broadcast rate meter (policer) settings for an interface,
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast traffic, go to interface
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast delete
Table 169: Assigning Rate Meter for Broadcast Traffic CLI Parameters

admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables rate metering on broadcast traffic flows
Examples
The following command assigns Profile 1 to broadcast traffic on GbE 1, and
enables rate metering on the port.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast add capability admin-
The following command changes the rate meter (policer) profile for broadcast
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast edit admin-state enable
profile-id 4

18.2.5.4 Assigning a Rate Meter (Policer) per Ethertype (CLI)

You can define up to three policers per Ethertype value.
To assign a rate meter (policer) profile for a specific Ethertype to an interface,
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter <ethertype#> add capability
ethertype-value <ethertype-value> admin-state <admin-state>
profile-id <profile-id>
To change the rate meter (policer) profile for a specific Ethertype, go to

eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter <ethertype#> edit ethertype-value
<ethertype-value> admin-state <admin-state> profile-id
<profile-id>
To display the current Ethertype rate meter (policer) settings for an interface,
go to interface view for the interface and enter the following commands:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 show configuration
To delete the rate meter (policer) profile for an Ethertype, go to interface view
for the interface and enter one or more of the following commands:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 delete
Table 170: Assigning Rate Meter per Ethertype CLI Parameters

ethertype# Variable ethertype1 Identifies which of three possible policer-per-Ethertype
ethertype2 combinations you are defining.
ethertype3 I
ethertype-value Hexadecimal 1-65535 Identifies the Ethertype to which the profile applies.
admin-state Variable enable Enables or disables policing on broadcast traffic flows

profile-id Number 1 – 250 Select from the policer profiles defined in the system.
For instructions on defining rate meter (policer) profiles,
refer to Configuring Rate Meter (Policer) Profiles (CLI).

Examples
The following commands assign Rate Meter Profiles 1, 2, and 3 to Ethertypes
0x8000, 0x8100, and 0x9100, respectively, on GbE 1, and enable rate metering
on the port.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 add capability
ethertype-value 0x8000 admin-state enable profile-id 1


The following commands change the rate meter (policer) profiles assigned in
the examples above to 4, 5, and 6, respectively.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 edit ethertype-value
0x8000 admin-state enable profile-id 4


18.2.6 Configuring the Line Compensation Value for a Rate Meter

(Policer) (CLI)
A rate meter can measure CIR and EIR at Layer 1 or Layer 2 rates. Layer 1
capacity is equal to Layer 2 capacity plus 20 additional bytes for each frame
due to the preamble and Inter Frame Gap (IFG). In most cases, the preamble
and IFG equals 20 bytes, but other values are also possible. Line compensation
defines the number of bytes to be added to each frame for purposes of CIR and
EIR calculation. When Line Compensation is 20, the rate meter operates as
Layer 1. When Line Compensation is 0, the rate meter operates as Layer 2.
This parameter is very important to users that want to distinguish between
Layer 1 and Layer 2 traffic.
To configure the rate meter (policer) line compensation value for an interface,
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter-compensation-value set <value>
To display the rate meter (policer) line compensation value for an interface, go
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter-compensation-value get
Table 171: Assigning Line Compensation Value for Rate Meter CLI Parameters

value Number 0 – 32 Policers attached to the interface use this value to
compensate for Layer 1 non-effective traffic bytes.

Example
The following command sets the line compensation value for policers attached
to GbE 1 to 20:
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter-compensation-value set 20
18.2.7 Displaying Rate Meter Statistics for an Interface (CLI)

For the rate meter (policer) at the logical interface level, you can display the
following statistics counters:
 Green Frames
 Green Bytes
 Yellow Frames
 Yellow Bytes
 Red Frames
 Red Bytes
Note: Rate meter (policer) counters are displayed in granularity of
64 bits.
The following commands display rate meter counters for the available frame
types and Ethertypes:
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter unicast show statistics clear-on-
read <clear-on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter multicast show statistics clear-

on-read <clear-on-read> layer-1 <layer-1>
eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter broadcast show statistics clear-

eth type eth [x/x]>rate-meter ethertype1 show statistics clear-



Table 172: Displaying Rate Meter Statistics CLI Parameters

no display them.
layer 1 Boolean yes  yes – Statistics are represented as Layer 1

no statistics, including preamble and IFG.
 no – Statistics are represented as Layer 2 statistics.

Example
The following commands display rate meter counters for GbE 1, for each of the
available frame types and Ethertypes. These commands clear the counters
after displaying them.
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter unicast show statistics clear-on-
read yes layer-1 no
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter multicast show statistics clear-

on-read yes layer-1 no
eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter broadcast show statistics clear-

eth type eth [1/1]>rate-meter ethertype1 show statistics clear-




18.3 Configuring Marking (CLI)

 Marking Overview (CLI)
 Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI)
 Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)
 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)
18.3.1 Marking Overview (CLI)

When enabled, IP-20’s marking mechanism modifies each frame’s 802.1p UP
bit and CFI/DEI bits according to the classifier decision. The CFI/DEI (color)
field is modified according to the classifier and policer decision. The color is
first determined by a classifier and may be later overwritten by a policer.
Green color is represented by a CFI/DEI value of 0, and Yellow color is
represented by a CFI/DEI value of 1. Marking is performed on egress frames
that are VLAN-tagged.
The marking is performed according to global marking tables that describe the
802.1p UP bits and the CFI bits (for C-VLAN tags) or DEI bits (for S VLAN tags).
The marking mode attribute in the service point egress attributes determines
whether the frame is marked as Green or Yellow according to the calculated
color.
Note: The calculated color is sent to the queue manager regardless
of whether the marking bit is set.
Regular marking is only performed when:
 The outer frame is S-VLAN, and S-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled
 The outer frame is C-VLAN, and C-VLAN CoS preservation is disabled
If marking and CoS preservation for the relevant outer VLAN are both
disabled, special marking is applied. Special marking means that marking is
performed, but only according to the values defined for Green frames in the
When marking is performed, the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits are re-
marked according to the calculated CoS and Color.

18.3.2 Configuring Marking Mode on a Service Point (CLI)

To enable or disable marking mode on a service point, go to service view for
service[SID]>sp marking set spid <sp-id> mode <mode>
Table 173: Marking Mode on Service Point CLI Parameters

sp-id Number 1-32 for P2P and MP services. The Service Point ID.
mode Variable enable Determines whether re-marking of the outer VLAN

disable (C-VLAN or S-VLAN) of tagged frames that pass
through the service point is enabled.
 If mode is set to enable, and CoS
preservation for the relevant outer VLAN is
set to disable, the service point re-marks
the C-VLAN or S-VLAN 802.1p UP bits of
egress frames according to the calculated
CoS and Color, and the user-configurable
 If mode is set to enable and CoS
also set to enable, re-marking is not
performed.
 If mode is set to disable and CoS
also set to disable, re-marking is applied,
but only according to the values defined for
Green frames in the 802.1Q and 802.1AD
marking tables.
For information about configuring CoS
Preservation, refer to CoS Preservation and
Modification on a Service Point (CLI).
Examples
The following command enables marking mode on Service Point 3 on
Service 2:
service[2]>sp marking set spid 3 mode enable
The following command disables marking mode on Service Point 3 on

Service 2:
service[2]>sp marking set spid 3 mode disable

18.3.3 Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)

When marking is performed, the following table is used by the marker to
decide which CoS and Color to use as the egress CoS and Color bits for C-
VLAN-tagged frames.
Table 174: Marking Table for C-VLAN UP Bits
CoS Color 802.1q (Configurable) CFI Color (Configurable)

0 Green 0 0
0 Yellow 0 1
1 Green 1 0
1 Yellow 1 1
2 Green 2 0
2 Yellow 2 1
3 Green 3 0
3 Yellow 3 1
4 Green 4 0
4 Yellow 4 1
5 Green 5 0
5 Yellow 5 1
6 Green 6 0
6 Yellow 6 1
7 Green 7 0
7 Yellow 7 1
To modify the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos <cos>
color <color> 802.1p <802.1p> cfi <cfi>
To display the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl show

Table 175: 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI Bit Mapping Table CLI
Parameters

cos Number 0–7 The CoS value to be mapped.
color Variable green The Color to be mapped.

yellow
802.1p Number 0–7 The UP bit value assigned to matching frames.
cfi Number 0–1 The CFI bit value assigned to matching frames.
Example
The following command maps CoS 0, Green, to 802.1p UP bit 0, and CFI bit 0:
root> ethernet qos 802.1q-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos 0 color
green 802.1p 0 cfi 0
18.3.4 Marking Table for S-VLAN UP Bits (CLI)

When marking is performed, the following table is used by the marker to
decide which CoS and Color to use as the egress CoS and Color bits for
S-VLAN-tagged frames.
Table 176: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN)
CoS Color 802.1ad UP (Configurable) DEI Color (Configurable)

0 Green 0 0
0 Yellow 0 1
1 Green 1 0
1 Yellow 1 1
2 Green 2 0
2 Yellow 2 1
3 Green 3 0
3 Yellow 3 1
4 Green 4 0
4 Yellow 4 1
5 Green 5 0
5 Yellow 5 1
6 Green 6 0
6 Yellow 6 1
7 Green 7 0
7 Yellow 7 1
To modify the 802.1ad CoS and Color to UP and DEI bit mapping table, enter
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos <cos>
color <color> 802.1p <802.1p> dei <dei>
To display the 802.1q CoS and Color to UP and CFI bit mapping table, enter the
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl show
Table 177: 802.1ad UP Marking Table (S-VLAN) CLI Parameters

cos Number 0–7 The CoS value to be mapped.
color Variable green The Color to be mapped.

yellow
802.1p Number 0–7 The UP bit value assigned to matching frames.
dei Number 0–1 The DEI bit value assigned to matching frames.
Example
The following command marks CoS 5, Yellow, to 802.1p UP bit 5, and DEI bit 1:
root> ethernet qos 802.1ad-up-bits-marking-tbl set cos 5 color
yellow 802.1p 5 dei 1

18.4 Configuring WRED (CLI)

 WRED Overview (CLI)
 Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI)
 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI)
18.4.1 WRED Overview (CLI)

Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) enables differentiation between
higher and lower priority traffic based on CoS. You can define up to 30 WRED
profiles. Each profile contains a green traffic curve and a yellow traffic curve.
These curves describe the probability of randomly dropping frames as a
function of queue occupancy.
The system also includes two pre-defined read-only profiles. These profiles
are assigned WRED profile IDs 31 and 32.
A WRED profile can be assigned to each queue. The WRED profile assigned to
the queue determines whether or not to drop incoming frames according to
the occupancy of the queue. As the queue occupancy grows, the probability of
dropping each incoming frame increases as well. As a consequence,
statistically more TCP flows will be restrained before traffic congestion occurs.
18.4.2 Configuring WRED Profiles (CLI)

To configure a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl add profile-id <profile-id>
green-min-threshold <green-min-threshold> green-max-threshold
<green-max-threshold> green-max-drop <green-max-drop> yellow-
min-threshold <yellow-min-threshold> yellow-max-threshold
<yellow-max-threshold> yellow-max-drop <yellow-max-drop>
To edit an existing WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl edit profile-id <profile-
id> green-min-threshold <green-min-threshold> green-max-
threshold <green-max-threshold> green-max-drop <green-max-drop>
yellow-min-threshold <yellow-min-threshold> yellow-max-
threshold <yellow-max-threshold> yellow-max-drop <yellow-max-
drop>
To display a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl show profile-id <profile-
id>
To delete a WRED profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl delete profile-id <profile
id>
You cannot delete a WRED profile that is assigned to a queue. You must first
remove the WRED profile from the queue by replacing it with a different
WRED profile. You can then delete the WRED profile.

Note: Each queue always has a WRED profile assigned to it. By

default, WRED Profile 31 is assigned to every queue until a
different profile is assigned.
Table 178: WRED Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 30 A unique ID to identify the profile.
green-min-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The minimum throughput of green frames for queues
with this profile, in Kbytes. When this value is
reached, the system begins dropping green frames in
the queue.
green-max-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The maximum throughput of green frames for queues
reached, all green frames in the queue are dropped.
green-max-drop Number 1 - 100 The maximum percentage of dropped green frames

for queues with this profile.
yellow-min-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The minimum throughput of yellow frames for queues
reached, the system begins dropping yellow frames in
the queue.
yellow-max-threshold Number 0 - 8192 The maximum throughput of yellow frames for queues
with this profile, in Kbytes. After this value is reached,
all yellow frames in the queue are dropped.
yellow-max-drop Number 1 - 100 The maximum percentage of dropped yellow frames

for queues with this profile.
Examples
The following command adds a WRED profile.
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl add profile-id 2 green-min-
threshold 8000 green-max-threshold 8000 green-max-drop 100
yellow-min-threshold 8000 yellow-max-threshold 8000 yellow-max-
drop 100
The new profile has the following parameters:

 profile-id – 2
 green-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 green-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 green-max-drop – 100%
 yellow-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 yellow-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 yellow-max-drop – 100%

The following command edits the WRED profile created by the previous
command:
root> ethernet qos wred-profile-tbl edit profile-id 2 green-
min-threshold 8000 green-max-threshold 8000 green-max-drop 100
yellow-min-threshold 4000 yellow-max-threshold 4000 yellow-max-
drop 100
The edited profile has the following parameters:

 green-min-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 green-max-threshold – 8000 Kbytes
 green-max-drop – 100%
 yellow-min-threshold – 4000 Kbytes
 yellow-max-threshold –4000 Kbytes
 yellow-max-drop – 100%
18.4.3 Assigning a WRED Profile to a Queue (CLI)

To assign a WRED profile to a queue, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> wred set service-bundle-id <service-bundle-
id> cos <cos> profile-id <profile-id>
To display the WRED profile assigned to a queue, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> wred show profile-id service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
Table 179: Assigning WRED Profile to Queue CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 – 63 Assigns the WRED profile to a Service
Note: In the current release, only Bundle. Service Bundles are bundles of
Service Bundle 1 is supported. queues, grouped together in order to
configure common egress characteristics for
specific services.
cos Number 0–7 Assigns the WRED profile to a queue in the

designated service bundle.
profile-id Number 1 – 32 A unique ID that identifies the profile.
Examples
The following command assigns WRED Profile 2 to the CoS 0 queue in Service
Bundle 1, on GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> wred set service-bundle-id 1 cos 0 profile-
id 2
The following command displays the WRED profile assigned to the CoS
0 queue in Service Bundle 1, on GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> wred show profile-id service-bundle-id
1 cos 0
18.5 Configuring Shapers (CLI)

 Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI)
 Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI)
 Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI)
 Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI)
18.5.1 Overview of Egress Shaping (CLI)

Egress shaping determines the traffic profile for each queue. IP-20 performs
egress shaping on the following levels:
 Queue level – Single leaky bucket shaping
 Service Bundle level – Dual leaky bucket shaping
Note: Single leaky bucket shaping on the interface level is planned
for future release.
18.5.2 Configuring Queue Shapers (CLI)

You can configure up to 32 single leaky bucket queue shaper profiles. The CIR
value can be set to the following values:
 16,000 – 32,000,000 bps – granularity of 16,000 bps
 32,000,000 – 131,008,000 bps – granularity of 64,000 bps
Note: You can enter any value within the permitted range. Based
on the value you enter, the software automatically rounds
off the setting according to the granularity. If you enter a
value below the lowest granular value (except 0), the
software adjusts the setting to the minimum.
You can attach one of the configured queue shaper profiles to each priority
queue. If no profile is attached to the queue, no egress shaping is performed
on that queue.

 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles (CLI)
 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Queue (CLI)

18.5.2.1 Configuring Queue Shaper Profiles (CLI)

To configure a queue shaper profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl add profile-id
<profile-id> cir <cir> shaper-profile-name <shaper-profile-
name>
To edit the parameters of an existing queue shaper profile, enter the following
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile-id> cir <cir> shaper-profile-name <shaper-profile-
name> burst-type short
Note: The burst-type parameter is reserved for future use.

However, you must enter this parameter in order for the
command to execute.
To display the parameters of a queue shaper profile, enter the following
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete a queue shaper profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile id>
You cannot delete a queue shaper profile if it is attached to a queue. You must
first remove the profile from the queue. You can then delete the profile.
Table 180: Queue Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 32 A unique ID that identifies the profile.
cir Number 16000 – 131008000 The Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned
to the profile (in bps).
shaper-profile-name Text String Up to 20 characters. A description of the profile.
Examples
The following command creates Queue Shaper 1, named “p1”, with a CIR value
of 16000 bps:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl add profile-id 1
cir 16000 shaper-profile-name p1
The following command changes the CIR value of the profile created above
from 16000 to 32000, and changes the profile name to p3:
root> ethernet qos queue-shaper-profile-tbl edit profile-id 1
cir 32000 shaper-profile-name p3 burst-type short

18.5.2.2 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Queue (CLI)

You can attach one of the configured queue shaper profiles to each priority
queue. If no profile is attached to the queue, no egress shaping is performed
on that queue. Shapers are attached to queues based on the logical interface
and service bundle to which the queue belongs, and the queue’s CoS value.
To attach a queue shaper profile to a queue, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper add capability service-bundle-
id <service-bundle-id> cos <cos> admin-state <admin-state>
To change the queue shaper profile attached to a queue, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper edit service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos> admin-state <admin-state>
To display the queue shaper profile attached to a queue, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper show configuration service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
To remove a queue shaper profile from a queue, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> queue-shaper delete service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos>
Table 181: Attaching Shaper Profile to Queue CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 – 63 The service bundle to which you are attaching the
Note: In the current release, only queue shaper profile.
Service Bundle 1 is
supported.
cos Number 0–7 The CoS queue ID of the queue to which you
want to assign the shaper. Queues are numbered
according to CoS value.
admin-state Variable enable Select enable to enable egress queue shaping

disable on the queue, or disable to disable egress
queue shaping on the queue. If you set shaping to
disable, the shaper profile remains attached to
the queue, but does not affect traffic.
profile-id Number 1 – 32 Enter the ID of one of the configured queue

shaper profiles.

Examples
The following command adds Queue Shaper Profile 5 to queues with CoS 0, on
Service Bundle 1, on GbE 1, and enables shaping on these queues:
eth type eth [1/1]> queue-shaper add capability service-bundle-
id 1 cos 0 admin-state enable profile-id 5
The following command changes the Queue Shaper Profile assigned in the
previous command to Queue Shaper Profile 2:
eth type eth [1/1]> queue-shaper edit service-bundle-id 1 cos 0
admin-state enable profile-id 2
18.5.3 Configuring Service Bundle Shapers (CLI)

You can configure up to 256 dual leaky bucket service bundle shaper profiles.
The profiles can be configured as follows:
Valid CIR values are:
 0 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000 bps
 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000 bps
Valid PIR values are:
 16,000 – 32,000,000 bps, with granularity of 16,000 bps
 32,000,000 – 1,000,000,000 bps, with granularity of 64,000 bps
Note: You can enter any value within the permitted range. Based
on the value you enter, the software automatically rounds
off the setting according to the granularity. If you enter a
value below the lowest granular value (except 0), the
software adjusts the setting to the minimum.
You can attach one of the configured service bundle shaper profiles to each
service bundle. If no profile is attached to the service bundle, no egress
shaping is performed on that service bundle.

 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles (CLI)
 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle (CLI)
18.5.3.1 Configuring Service Bundle Shaper Profiles (CLI)

To configure a service bundle shaper profile, enter the following command in
root view:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl add
profile-id <profile-id> cir <cir> pir <pir> shaper-profile-name
<shaper-profile-name>
To edit the parameters of an existing service bundle shaper profile, enter the
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl edit
profile-id <profile-id> cir <cir> pir <pir> shaper-profile-name
<shaper-profile-name>

To display the parameters of a service bundle shaper profile, enter the

root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl show
To display the parameters of all configured service bundle shaper profiles,

root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl show
profile-id all
To delete a service bundle shaper profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl delete
You cannot delete a service bundle shaper profile if it is attached to a service

bundle. You must first remove the profile from the service bundle. You can
then delete the profile.
Table 182: Service Bundle Shaper Profiles CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1 - 256 A unique ID that identifies the profile.
cir Number 1 - 1000000000 The Committed Information Rate (CIR) assigned to the
profile (in bps).
pir Number 16000 - 1000000000 The Peak Information Rate (PIR) assigned to the
profile (in bps).
shaper-profile-name Text String Up to 20 characters. A description of the profile.
The following command creates Service Bundle Shaper 1, named “p1”, with a
CIR value of 100000000 bps and a PIR value of 200000000 bps:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl add
profile-id 1 cir 100000000 pir 200000000 shaper-profile-name p1
The following command changes the CIR value in the Service Bundle Shaper
created above from 100000000 bps to 110000000 bps:
root> ethernet qos service-bundle-shaper-profile-tbl edit
profile-id 1 cir 110000000 pir 200000000 shaper-profile-name p1

18.5.3.2 Attaching a Shaper Profile to a Service Bundle (CLI)

You can attach one of the configured service bundle shaper profiles to each
service bundle. If no profile is attached to the service bundle, no egress
shaping is performed on that service bundle.
To attach a service bundle shaper profile to a service bundle, go to interface
view for the service bundle and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper add capability
service-bundle-id <service-bundle-id> admin-state <admin-state>
To change the service bundle shaper profile attached to a service bundle, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper edit service-bundle-
id <service-bundle-id> admin-state <admin-state> profile-id
<profile-id>
To display the service bundle shaper profile attached to a service bundle, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper show configuration
service-bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
To remove a service bundle shaper profile from a service bundle, go to

eth type eth [x/x]> service-bundle-shaper delete service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id>
Table 183: Attaching Shaper Profile to Service Bundle CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 – 63 The service bundle to which you are attaching the
Note: In the current release, only queue shaper profile.
Service Bundle 1 is
supported.
admin-state Variable enable Select enable to enable egress shaping on the

disable service bundle, or disable to disable egress
shaping on the service bundle.
profile-id Number 1 – 256 Enter the ID of one of the configured service bundle
shaper profiles.
Examples
The following command adds Service Bundle Shaper Profile 5 to Service
Bundle 1, on GbE 1, and enables shaping on this service bundle:
eth type eth [1/1]> service-bundle-shaper add capability
service-bundle-id 1 admin-state enable profile-id 5
The following command changes the Service Bundle Shaper Profile assigned in
the previous command to Service Bundle 1, from 5 to 4:
eth type eth [1/1]> service-bundle-shaper edit service-bundle-
id 1 admin-state enable profile-id 4

18.5.4 Configuring Egress Line Compensation for Shaping (CLI)

You can configure a line compensation value for all the shapers under a
specific logical interface. This value is used to compensate for Layer 1 non-
effective traffic bytes on egress.
To set the egress line compensation value, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>shaping-compensation-value set <value>
To display the egress line compensation value, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]>shaping-compensation-value get
Table 184: Egress Line Compensation for Shaping CLI Parameters

value Number 0 – 26 (even numbers only) Shapers attached to the interface use this value to
compensate for Layer 1 non-effective traffic bytes on
egress.
Example
The following command sets the egress line compensation value to 0 on
GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]>shaping-compensation-value set 0

18.6 Configuring Scheduling (CLI)

 Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI)
 Configuring Queue Priority (CLI)
 Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI)
 Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI)
 Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI)
18.6.1 Overview of Egress Scheduling (CLI)

Egress scheduling is responsible for transmission from the priority queues.
IP-20 uses a unique algorithm with a hierarchical scheduling model over the
three levels of the egress path that enables compliance with SLA
requirements.
The scheduler scans all the queues over all the service bundles, per interface,
and determines which queue is ready to transmit. If more than one queue is
ready to transmit, the scheduler determines which queue transmits first based
on:
 Queue Priority – A queue with higher priority is served before lower-
priority queues.
 Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) – If two or more queues have the same
priority and are ready to transmit, the scheduler transmits frames from
the queues based on a WFQ algorithm that determines the ratio of frames
per queue based on a predefined weight assigned to each queue.
18.6.2 Configuring Queue Priority (CLI)

A priority profile defines the exact order for serving the eight priority queues
in a single service bundle. When you attach a priority profile to an interface, all
the service bundles under the interface inherit the profile.
The priority mechanism distinguishes between two states of the service
bundle:
 Green State – Committed state
 Yellow State – Best effort state
Green State refers to any time when the service bundle rate is below the user-
defined CIR. Yellow State refers to any time when the service bundle is above
the user-defined CIR but below the PIR.
You can define up to four Green priority profiles, from 4 (highest) to 1
(lowest). An additional four Yellow priority profiles are defined automatically
and cannot be changed or edited.

The following table provides a sample of an interface priority profile. This

profile is also used as the default interface priority profile.
Table 185: Interface Priority Profile Example
Profile ID (1-9)
Green Priority Yellow Priority
CoS (user defined) (read only) Description
0 1 1 Best Effort
1 2 1 Data Service 4
5 3 1 Real Time 2 (Video with large buffer)
6 3 1 Real Time 1 (Video with small buffer)
7 4 4 Management (Sync, PDUs, etc.)
When the service bundle state is Green (committed state), the service bundle
priorities are as defined in the Green Priority column. When the service
bundle state is Yellow (best effort state), the service bundle priorities are
system-defined priorities shown in the Yellow Priority column.
Note: CoS 7 is always marked with the highest priority and cannot
be changed or edited, no matter what the service bundle
state is, since it is assumed that only high priority traffic will
be tunneled via CoS 7.
The system supports up to nine interface priority profiles. Profiles 1 to 8 are
defined by the user, while profile 9 is the pre-defined read-only default
interface priority profile.
18.6.3 Configuring Interface Priority Profiles (CLI)

To define an interface priority profile, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl add profile-id
<profile-id> cos0-priority <cos0-priority> description
<description> cos1-priority <cos1-priority> description
<description>

To edit an existing interface priority profile, enter the following command in

root view:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile-id> cos0-priority <cos0-priority> description
<description>
To display the parameters of an interface priority profile, enter the following

root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete an interface priority profile, enter the following command in root

view:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile-id>
You can only delete an interface priority profile if the profile is not attached to
any interface.
Table 186: Interface Priority Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–8 A unique ID to identify the profile.
cos0-priority Number 1–4 The Green priority for the CoS 0 queue, from 4 (highest)
to 1 (lowest). This priority is applied to Green frames with
CoS 0 egressing the service bundle to which the profile is
assigned.
description Text String Up to 20 characters. A description of the priority level.
assigned.
assigned.
assigned.


assigned.
assigned.
assigned.
assigned.
Example
The following command configures a priority profile with Profile ID 1:
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl add profile-id 1
cos0-priority 1 description c0_p1 cos1-priority 1 description
c1_p1 cos2-priority 1 description c2_p1 cos3-priority 2
description c3_p2 cos4-priority 2 description c4_p2 cos5-
priority 3 description c5_p3 cos6-priority 4 description c6_p4
cos7-priority 4 description c7_p4
This profile has the parameters listed in the following table.
Table 187: Interface Priority Sample Profile Parameters
CoS Green Priority Yellow Priority Description

(user defined) (read only)
0 1 1 c0_p1
1 1 1 c1_p1
2 1 1 c2_p1
3 2 1 c3_p2
4 2 1 c4_p2
5 3 1 c5_p3
6 4 1 c6_p4
7 4 4 c7_p4

The following command edits the profile you created in the previous
command so that CoS 6 queues have a Green priority of 3 instead of 4, and a
description of “c6_p3”.
root> ethernet qos port-priority-profile-tbl edit profile-id 1
cos0-priority 1 description c0_p1 cos1-priority 1 description
c1_p1 cos2-priority 1 description c2_p1 cos3-priority 2
description c3_p2 cos4-priority 2 description c4_p2 cos5-
priority 3 description c5_p3 cos6-priority 3 description c6_p3
cos7-priority 4 description c7_p4
18.6.4 Attaching a Priority Profile to an Interface (CLI)

To attach a priority profile to an interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth [x/x]> priority set profile-id <profile-id>
To display which priority profile is attached to an interface, go to interface

eth type eth [x/x]> port-priority show profile-id
Table 188: Attaching Priority Profile to Interface CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–9 Enter the ID of one of the configured logical interface priority
profiles.
Examples
The following command attaches Interface Priority Profile 3 to GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> priority set profile-id 3
The following is a sample output from the port-priority show profile-id

command:
eth type eth [1/1]>port-priority show profile-id
Profile ID: 9
CoS Priority Priority Description

(When queue is green) (When queue is yellow)
0 1 1 best effort
1 2 1 data service
2 2 1 data service
3 2 1 data service
4 2 1 data service
5 3 1 real time
6 3 1 real time
7 4 4 management
eth type eth [1/1]>

18.6.5 Configuring Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) (CLI)

 Overview of WFQ (CLI)
 Configuring a WFQ Profile (CLI)
 Attaching a WFQ Profile to an Interface (CLI)
18.6.5.1 Overview of WFQ (CLI)

The scheduler serves the queues based on their priority, but when two or
more queues have data to transmit and their priority is the same, the
scheduler uses Weighted Fair Queuing (WFQ) to determine the priorities
within each priority. WFQ defines the transmission ratio, in bytes, between the
queues. All the service bundles under the interface inherit the WFQ profile
attached to the interface.
The system supports up to six WFQ interface profiles. Profile ID 1 is a pre-
defined read-only profile, and is used as the default profile. Profiles 2 to 6 are
user-defined profiles.
The following table provides an example of a WFQ profile.
Table 189: WFQ Profile Example
Profile ID (1-7)
CoS Queue Weight (Green) Queue Weight (Yellow – not visible to
users, and cannot be edited)
0 20 20
1 20 20
2 20 20
3 20 20
4 20 20
5 20 20
6 20 20
7 20 20
You can attach one of the configured interface WFQ profiles to each interface.
By default, the interface is assigned Profile ID 1, the pre-defined system
profile.

18.6.5.2 Configuring a WFQ Profile (CLI)

To define a WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl add profile-id
<profile.id> cos0-weight <cos0-weight> cos1-weight <cos1-
weight> cos2-weight <cos2-weight> cos3-weight <cos3-weight>
cos4-weight <cos4-weight> cos5-weight <cos5-weight> cos6-weight
<cos6-weight> cos7-weight <cos7-weight>
To edit an existing WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl edit profile-id
<profile.id> cos0-weight <cos0-weight> cos1-weight <cos1-
weight> cos2-weight <cos2-weight> cos3-weight <cos3-weight>
cos4-weight <cos4-weight> cos5-weight <cos5-weight> cos6-weight
<cos6-weight> cos7-weight <cos7-weight>
To display the parameters of a WFQ profile, enter the following command in

root view:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl show profile-id
<profile-id>
To delete a WFQ profile, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl delete profile-id
<profile-id>
You can only delete a WFQ profile if the profile is not attached to any interface.
Table 190: WFQ Profile CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 2–6 A unique ID to identify the profile.
cos0-weight Number 1 - 20 The relative weight for the CoS 0 queue.
cos1- weight Number 1 - 20 The relative weight for the CoS 1 queue.

Examples
The following command configures a WFQ profile with Profile ID 2:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl add profile-id 2
cos0-weight 15 cos1-weight 15 cos2-weight 15 cos3-weight 15
This profile has the parameters listed in the following table. Note that the
yellow queue weight is constant and cannot be changed. This means that all
best effort traffic (yellow) will always have the same weight, regardless of CoS.
Table 191: WFQ Sample Profile Parameters
CoS Queue Weight (Green) Queue Weight (Yellow – not visible to

users, and cannot be edited)
0 15 20
1 20 20
2 20 20
3 20 20
4 20 20
5 20 20
6 20 20
7 20 20
The following command edits the profile you created in the previous
command so that CoS 6 queues have a weight of 20 instead of 15:
root> ethernet qos wfq-weight-profile-tbl edit profile-id 2
18.6.5.3 Attaching a WFQ Profile to an Interface (CLI)

To attach a WFQ profile to an interface, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth [x/x]> port-wfq set profile-id <profile-id>
To display which WFQ profile is attached to an interface, go to interface view

eth type eth [x/x]> port-wfq show profile-id
Table 192: Attaching WFQ Profile to Interface CLI Parameters

profile-id Number 1–6 Enter the ID of one of the configured WFQ profiles.

Examples
The following command assigns WFQ Profile 3 to GbE 1:
eth type eth [1/1]> port-wfq set profile-id 3
The following is a sample display for the port-wfq show profile-id

command:
eth type eth [1/1]>port-wfq show profile-id
Profile ID: 1
CoS Queue Weight

(Green)
0 20
1 20
2 20
3 20
4 20
5 20
6 20
7 20
eth type eth [1/1]>

18.7 Displaying Egress Statistics (CLI)

IP-20 collects egress PMs at the queue level and the service bundle level.
18.7.1 Displaying Queue-Level PMs (CLI)

IP-20 supports the following counters per queue at the queue level:
 Transmitted Green Packets (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Green Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
 Dropped Green Packets (64 bits counter)
 Dropped Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
 Dropped Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
 Dropped Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
To display queue-level PMs, enter interface view for the interface and enter
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-queue show statistics service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id> cos <cos> clear-on-read <clear-on-read>
layer-1 <layer-1>
To clear queue-level PMs for a specific service bundle, enter interface view for
the interface and enter the following command:
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-queue clear statistics service-bundle-id
<service-bundle-id>
Table 193: Egress Queue Level PMs CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 – 63 The service bundle for which you want to display PMs.
Note: In the current
release, only
Service Bundle
1 is supported.
cos Number 0-7 The queue for which you want to display PMs.
no display them.
layer-1 Boolean yes  yes – Statistics are represented as Layer 1

no statistics, including preamble and IFG.
 no – Statistics are represented as Layer 2
statistics.

The following command displays PMs for the CoS 0 queue in Service Bundle 1,
on GbE 2. The PMs are cleared after they are displayed:
eth type eth [1/2]> tm-queue show statistics service-bundle-id
1 cos 0 clear-on-read yes layer-1 yes
The following command clears PMs for all queues in Service Bundle 1, on
GbE 2:
eth type eth [1/2]> tm-queue clear statistics service-bundle-id
1
18.7.2 Displaying Service Bundle-Level PMs (CLI)

IP-20 supports the following counters per service bundle at the service bundle
level:
 Transmitted Green Packets (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Green Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
 Dropped Green Packets (64 bits counter)
 Dropped Green Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
 Transmitted Yellow Bits per Second (32 bits counter)
 Dropped Yellow Packets (64 bits counter)
 Dropped Yellow Bytes (64 bits counter)
To display service bundle-level PMs, enter interface view for the interface and
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-service-bundle show statistics service-
bundle-id <service-bundle-id> clear-on-read <clear-on-read>
layer-1 <layer-1>
To clear service bundle-level PMs for all service bundles on an interface, enter
eth type eth [x/x]> tm-service-bundle clear statistics
Table 194: Egress Service Bundle Level PMs CLI Parameters

service-bundle-id Number 1 – 63 The service bundle for which you want to
Note: In the current release, only display PMs.
Service Bundle 1 is
supported.
clear-on-read Boolean yes If you enter yes, the statistics are cleared once
no you display them.


layer-1 Boolean yes  yes – Statistics are represented as Layer
no 1 statistics, including preamble and IFG.
 no – Statistics are represented as Layer
2 statistics.
Example
The following command displays service bundle PMs for Service Bundle 1, on
GbE 1. The PMs are cleared after they are displayed.
eth type eth [1/1]> tm-service-bundle show statistics service-
bundle-id 1 clear-on-read yes layer-1 yes

19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI)

 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN) (CLI)
 Configuring LLDP (CLI)
Related Topics:
19.1 Configuring Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN)

(CLI)
 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI)
 Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI)
19.1.1 Adaptive Bandwidth Notification Overview (CLI)

Adaptive Bandwidth Notification (ABN), also known as Ethernet Operation
and Maintenance (EOAM), enables third party applications to learn about
bandwidth changes in a radio link when ACM is active. Once ABN is enabled,
the radio unit reports bandwidth information to upstream third-party
switches.
The ABN entity creates a logical relationship between a radio interface or a
logical group of radio interfaces, called the Monitored Interface, and an
Ethernet interface or a logical group of Ethernet interfaces, called the Control
Interface. When bandwidth degrades from the nominal value in the monitored
interface, messages relaying the actual bandwidth values are periodically sent
over the Control Interface. A termination message is sent once the bandwidth
returns to its nominal level.
19.1.2 Configuring an ABN Entity (CLI)

You must first create an ABN entity consisting of the Monitored Interface on
the one hand, and the Control Interface on the other. You must then use
separate commands to enable or disable bandwidth monitoring of the
monitored interface and transmission of messages. You can also set various
parameters relating to the bandwidth sampling and the transmitted
bandwidth messages.
To create an ABN entity consisting of a physical radio interface as the
monitored interface and a physical Ethernet interface as the control interface,
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name <ab-name>
monitored-interface <monitored-interface> monitored-slot
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-
interface <control-interface> control-slot <control-slot>
control-port <control-port> vlan <vlan>
To create an ABN entity consisting of a physical radio interface as the

monitored interface and an interface group as the control interface, enter the
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name <abn-name>
monitored-interface <monitored-interface> monitored-slot
<monitored-slot> monitored-port <monitored-port> control-group
<control-group> vlan <vlan>
To create an ABN entity consisting of an interface group as the monitored

interface and a physical Ethernet interface as the control interface, enter the
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-interface <control-
interface> control-slot <control-slot> control-port <control-
port> vlan <vlan>
To create an ABN entity consisting of an interface group as the monitored

interface and an interface group as the control interface, enter the following
monitored-group <monitored-group> control-group <control-group>
vlan <vlan>
To set the Admin status of an ABN entity, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet abn abn-admin-set abn-name <abn-name> admin
<admin-state>
To delete an ABN entity, enter the following command in root view:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-delete abn-name <abn-name>
To show a summary of all ABN entities defined, enter the following command
in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-entities-summary-show
To show a summary of the configuration and status of a specific ABN entity,

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-show abn-name <abn-name>
To set the monitoring interval for which a weighted average of the bandwidth
readings is calculated, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-monitoring-interval-set abn-name <abn-
name> period <monitoring-interval>
To set how often messages are transmitted when bandwidth is below the
nominal value, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-period-set abn-name <abn-name> period
<message-frequency>

To set the holdoff time, enter the following command in root view. Holdoff
time is the amount of time the system waits when bandwidth degradation
occurs, before transmitting a message. If the bandwidth is below the nominal
value when the holdoff period ends, the system starts transmitting messages:
root> ethernet abn abn-holdoff-set abn-name <abn-name> holdoff
<holdoff-time>
To clear the messages counter, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-counter-reset abn-name <abn-name>
Table 195: ABN Entity CLI Parameters

pipe-id Number 1 The pipe ID. Only one pipe is
supported in the current release.
abn-name Text String The name of the ABN entity.
monitored- Variable radio This parameter is always set to
interface radio.
monitored-slot Number 2
monitored-port Number Radio Carrier 1: 1
monitored-group Variable rp1 When the monitored group is an
rp2 HSB protection group (rp1 - rp-4),
a LAG (lag1 - lag4), or a Multi-
rp3
Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 -
rp4 mc-abc4), use this parameter
lag1 instead of the monitored-interface
lag2 parameter to identify the group.
lag3 The group must be defined before
you create the ABN entity.
lag4
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP
mc-abc1 protection are only relevant
mc-abc2 for IP-20C units.
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
control-interface Variable eth This parameter is always set to
ethernet.
control-slot Number 1 This parameter is always set to 1.
control-port Number 1-3 The specific Ethernet interface to
which messages are transmitted
when bandwidth in the monitored
interface degrades below the
nominal value.


control-group Variable rp1 When the control group is an HSB
rp2 protection group (rp1 - rp-4), a
LAG (lag1 - lag4), or a Multi-
rp3
Carrier ABC group (mc-abc1 -
rp4 mc-abc4), use this parameter
lag1 instead of the control-interface
lag2 parameter to identify the group.
The group must be defined before
lag3
you create the ABN entity.
lag4
Note: Multi-Carrier ABC and HSP
mc-abc1 protection are only relevant
mc-abc2 for IP-20C units.
mc-abc3
mc-abc4
vlan Variable untag The VLAN on which messages
1 - 4094, except 4092 are transmitted (optional).
(reserved for the default
management service)
admin-state Variable isUp Enter isUp to enable ABN
isDown monitoring on the interface,
or isDown to disable ABN
monitoring on the interface.
monitoring- Number 1 - 20 The interval (in seconds) for
interval which a weighted average of the
bandwidth readings is calculated.
message- Variable 4-one-second - sets message How often messages are
frequency frequency to 1 second transmitted when bandwidth is
5-ten-seconds - sets message below the nominal value.
frequency to 10 seconds
6-one-minute - sets message
frequency to 1 minute
holdoff-time Number 10 - 29 The amount of time the system
waits when bandwidth
degradation occurs, before
transmitting a message.
Examples
The following command creates an ABN entity with radio interface 1 as the
monitored interface and Ethernet port 1 as the control interface. It also
specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 1:
root> ethernet abn abn-entity-create abn-name ABN-1 monitored-
interface radio monitored-slot 1 monitored-port 1 control-
interface ethernet control-slot 1 control-port 1 vlan 1

The following command creates an ABN entity in an IP-20C unit with radio
interface 2 as the monitored interface and LAG group lag1 as the control
interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN 55:
interface radio monitored-slot 1 monitored-port 2 control-group
lag1 vlan 55
The following command creates an ABN entity in an IP-20C unit with HSB
protection group rp1 as the monitored interface and Ethernet port 2 as the
control interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on VLAN
200:
group rp1 control-interface ethernet control-slot 1 control-
port 2 vlan 200
The following command creates an ABN entity in an IP-20C unit with HSB
protection group rp1 as the monitored interface and LAG group lag1 as the
control interface. It also specifies to transmit bandwidth messages on
VLAN 300:
group rp1 control-group lag1 vlan 300
The following command deletes ABN-1:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-delete abn-name ABN-1
The following command sets the monitoring interval of ABN-1 to 1 second:

root> ethernet abn abn-monitoring-interval-set abn-name ABN-1
period 1
The following command sets the frequency of bandwidth messages regarding

ABN-1 to 10 seconds:
root> ethernet abn abn-period-set abn-name ABN-1 period 5-ten-
seconds
The following command sets the Holdoff time of ABN-1 to 15 seconds:

root> ethernet abn abn-holdoff-set abn-name ABN-1 holdoff 15
The following command clears the messages counter for ABN-1:

root> ethernet abn abn-entity-counter-reset abn-name ABN-1

19.2 Configuring LLDP (CLI)

Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is a vendor-neutral layer 2 protocol that
can be used by a network element attached to a specific LAN segment to
advertise its identity and capabilities and to receive identity and capacity
information from physically adjacent layer 2 peers. LLDP is a part of the IEEE
802.1AB – 2005 standard that enables automatic network connectivity
discovery by means of a port identity information exchange between each port
and its peer. Each port periodically sends and also expects to receive frames
called Link Layer Discovery Protocol Data Units (LLDPDU). LLDPDUs contain
information in TLV format about port identity, such as MAC address and IP
address.
LLDP is used to send notifications to the NMS, based on data of the local unit
and data gathered from peer systems. These notifications enable the NMS to
build an accurate network topology.

 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI)
19.2.1 Configuring the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)

This section explains how to define the general LLDP parameters for the unit.
For instructions on defining port-specific parameters, see Configuring LLDP
Port Parameters (CLI).
To define the Transmit Interval, which is the interval at which LLDP frames
are transmitted, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-interval <tx-interval>
The time-to-live (TTL) determines the length of time LLDP frames are
retained by the receiving device. The TTL is determined by multiplying the
Transmit Interval by the TTL Multiplier.
To define the TTL Multiplier, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier
<hold-multiplier>
To define the interval between transmission of LLDP notifications during

normal transmission periods, enter the following command in root view:
root> ethernet lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval <notif-
interval>

Table 196: General LLDP CLI Parameters
Permitted
tx-interval Number 5-3600 The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted. The default value is 30.
hold- Number 2-10 The TTL Multiplier, which is multiplied by the
multiplier Transmit Interval to determine the TTL, in seconds,
of LLDP frames. The default value is 4.
notif-interval Number 5-3600 The interval, in seconds, between transmission of
LLDP notifications during normal transmission
periods. The default value is 30.
Examples
The following commands set the Transmit Interval to 50 seconds with a TTL
Multiplier of 5. This produces a TTL of 4 minutes and 10 seconds.
root> ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-interval 50
root> ethernet lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier 50
The following command sets a Notification Interval of 20 seconds:

root> ethernet lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval 20
19.2.2 Displaying the General LLDP Parameters (CLI)

To display the general LLDP parameters, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet lldp configuration-scalers-show

 Message Tx Interval - The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted, as defined by the ethernet lldp tx-interval-set tx-
interval command. The default value is 30.
 Message Tx Hold Multiplier - The TTL Multiplier, as defined by
the ethernet lldp tx-hold-multiplier-set hold-multiplier command.
The TTL Multiplier is multiplied by the Transmit Interval to determine the
TTL, in seconds, of LLDP frames. The default value is 4.
 Reinit Delay - The minimum time, in seconds, the system waits after the
LLDP Admin status becomes Disabled until it will process a request to
reinitialize LLDP. In this release, this parameter is set at 2.
 Notification Interval - The interval, in seconds, between transmission of
LLDP notifications during normal transmission periods, as defined by
the ethernet lldp notif-interval-set notif-interval command. The
default value is 30.
 Tx Credit Max - The maximum number of consecutive LLDPDUs that can
be transmitted at any one time. In this release, the Tx Credit Max is set at 5.
 Message Fast Tx - The interval, in seconds, at which LLDP frames are
transmitted during fast transmission periods, such as when the unit
detects a new neighbor. In this release, this parameter is set at 1.

 Message Fast Init - The initial value used to initialize the variable which
determines the number of transmissions that are made during fast
transmission periods. In this release, this parameter is set at 4.
19.2.3 Configuring LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)

This section explains how to enable LLDP per port, and determine how LLDP
operates and which TLVs are sent for each port:
To define how the LLDP agent operates on a specific port, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp agent-admin-set interface eth slot <slot>
port <port> agent-admin <agent-admin>
To enable or disable LLDP notifications to the NMS on a specific port, enter the
root> ethernet lldp agent-notif-enable interface eth slot
<slot> port <port> agent-notif-enable <agent-notif-enable>
Table 197: LLDP Port CLI Parameters
Permitted
slot Number 1 The slot in which the card resides.
port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to configure LLDP.
agent-admin Variable txOnly Defines how the LLDP protocol operates for this port:
rxOnly  txOnly - The LLDP agent transmits LLDP
txAndRx frames on this port but does not update
information about its peer.
disabled
 rxOnly - The LLDP agent receives but does not
transmit LLDP frames on this port.
 txAndRx - The LLDP agent transmits and
receives LLDP frames on this port (default value).
 disabled - The LLDP agent does not transmit
or receive LLDP frames on this port.
agent-notif- Variable true  true - The agent sends a Topology Change trap
enable false to the NMS whenever the system information
received from its peer changes.
 false - Notifications to the NMS are disabled
(default value).

Example
The following commands configure Ethernet port 2 to transmit and receive
LLDP frames and to send a Topology Change trap to the NMS whenever the
system information of its peer changes:
root> ethernet lldp agent-admin-set interface eth slot 1 port 2
agent-admin txAndRx
root> ethernet lldp agent-notif-enable interface eth slot 1

port 2 agent-notif-enable true
19.2.4 Displaying LLDP Port Parameters (CLI)

To display the LLDP agent configuration on all ports, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp agent-configuration-show
The following is a sample output of the command:
19.2.5 Displaying LLDP Local System Parameters (CLI)

 Displaying Local Unit Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying Local Port Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying Local Unit Management Information (CLI)
 Displaying Local Unit Management Information per Port (CLI)
 Displaying Unit’s Destination MAC Addresses (CLI)
19.2.5.1 Displaying Local Unit Parameters (CLI)

To display the local unit's unit parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agents,
root> ethernet lldp local-system-scalars-show

 local Chassis Id Subtype - The type of encoding used to identify the local
unit. In this release, this parameter is always set to 4 (MAC Address).
 local Chassis Id - The MAC Address of the local unit.
 local System Name - The system name included in TLVs transmitted by
the LLDP agent. To define the system name, see Configuring Unit
Parameters (CLI).

 local System Description - The system description included in TLVs

transmitted by the LLDP agent.
 local System Cap Supported - A bitmap value used to identify which
system capabilities are supported on the local system, as included in TLVs
transmitted by the LLDP agent. The bitmap is defined by the following
parameters:
0 - other
1 - repeater
2 - bridge
3 - wlanAccessPoint
4 - router
5 - telephone
6 - docsisCableDevice
7 - stationOnly
8 - cVLANComponent
9 - sVLANComponent
10 - twoPortMACRelay
 local System Cap Enabled - A bitmap value used to identify which system
capabilities are enabled on the local system, as included in TLVs
transmitted by the LLDP agent. The bitmap is defined by the following
parameters:
0 - other
1 - repeater
2 - bridge
3 - wlanAccessPoint
4 - router
5 - telephone
7 - stationOnly
8 - cVLANComponent
9 - sVLANComponent

19.2.5.2 Displaying Local Port Parameters (CLI)

To display local port parameters, as transmitted by the LLDP agent, enter the
root> ethernet lldp local-port-show

 Interface type/slot/port - The port type, slot number, and port number.
 Port ID Subtype - The type of encoding used to identify the port in LLDP
transmissions. In this release, this parameter is always set to MAC
Address.
 Port ID - The port's MAC address.
 Description - A text string that describes the port. In this release, this
parameter is always set to ethPort.
19.2.5.3 Displaying Local Unit Management Information (CLI)

To display the local unit's management information, enter the following
root> ethernet lldp local-mng-show

 Mng Addr SubType - The format of the local unit's IP Address. In this
release, only IPV4 is supported.
 Management Address - The local unit's IP address.
 Mng Addr Length - Reserved for future use.
 Mng Addr IF SubType - Reserved for future use.
 Mng Addr IF - Reserved for future use.
 Mng Addr OID - Reserved for future use.
19.2.5.4 Displaying Local Unit Management Information per Port (CLI)

To display the local unit's management information per port, enter the
root> ethernet lldp mng-addr-table-show

 Interface type/slot/port - The port type, slot number, and port number.
 Dest Mac Address - Defines the MAC address associated with the port for
purposes of LLDP transmissions.
 Mng Address subType - Defines the type of the management address
identifier encoding used for the Management Address. In this release, only
IpV4 is supported.
 Management Address - The unit's IP address.
 Mng Address Tx Enable - Indicates whether the unit's Management
Address is transmitted with LLDPDUs. In this release, the Management
Address is always sent.

19.2.5.5 Displaying Unit’s Destination MAC Addresses (CLI)

To display the destination MAC address or range of MAC addresses associated
with the unit, and their internal index, enter the following command in root
view:
root> ethernet lldp mac-da-table-show

 LLDP DA Index - The internal index associated with the unit's destination
LLDP MAC address.
 LLDP DA - The unit's destination LLDP MAC address.
19.2.6 Displaying the LLDP Remote System Parameters (CLI)

 Displaying the LLDP Remote Unit Parameters (CLI)
 Displaying the LLDP Remote Management Data per Port (CLI)
Note: Remote information is not displayed for ports that belong to
a LAG group.
19.2.6.1 Displaying the LLDP Remote Unit Parameters (CLI)

To display the peer's LLDP unit parameter information, starting from a
specific time, enter the following command in root view. If no time is specified,
all data is displayed.
root> ethernet lldp agent-remote-table-show agent-start-time
<agent-start-time> interface eth slot <slot> port <port>
Table 198: LLDP Remote Unit CLI Parameters

slot Number 1 The slot in which the card resides.
port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to
configure LLDP.
agent-start-time Date Use the format: The sys-up-time of the entry creation.
dd-mm-yyyy,hh:mm:ss

 Time Mark – The time the entry was created.
 Interface Type/Slot/Port – The port for which you are displaying data
about the peer.
 Rem Dest Mac Address – The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC
Address.
 Remote Index – An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to
identify a particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated
peer.
 Remote Chassis ID subType – The type of encoding used to identify the
peer hardware unit.
 Remote Chassis ID – An octet string used to identify the peer hardware

unit.
 Rem Port ID subType – The type of port identifier encoding used in the
peer's Port ID.
 Rem Port ID – An octet string used to identify the port component
associated with the peer.
 Rem Port Description – A description of the peer's port.
 Rem System Name – The peer's system name.
 Rem System Description – The peer's system description.
Note: The Rem Port Description, Rem System Name, and Rem
System Description fields are not used in the current
version.
 Rem System Cap Supported - The bitmap value used to identify which
system capabilities are supported on the peer. The bitmap is defined by
the following parameters:
0 - other
1 - repeater
2 - bridge
3 - wlanAccessPoint
4 - router
5 - telephone
7 - stationOnly
8 - cVLANComponent
9 - sVLANComponent
 Rem System Cap Enabled - The bitmap value used to identify which
system capabilities are enabled on the peer. The bitmap is defined by the
following parameters:
0 - other
1 - repeater
2 - bridge
3 - wlanAccessPoint
4 - router
5 - telephone
7 - stationOnly
8 - cVLANComponent
9 - sVLANComponent

 Remote Changes - Indicates whether there are changes in the peer's MIB,
as determined by the variable remoteChanges. Possible values are:
True - Changes have taken place in the peer's MIB since the
defined agent-start-time.
False - No changes have taken place in the peer's MIB since the
defined agent-start-time.
19.2.6.2 Displaying the LLDP Remote Management Data per Port (CLI)
To display remote LLDP management data from a specific port, starting from a
specific time, enter the following command in root view. If no time is specified,
all data is displayed.
root> ethernet lldp agent-remote-mng-show agent-start-time
<agent-start-time> interface eth slot <slot> port <port>
Table 199: LLDP Remote Management Data Per Port CLI Parameters

slot Number 1
port Number 1-3 The port for which you want to configure
LLDP.
agent-start-time Date Use the format: The sys-up-time of the entry creation.
dd-mm-yyyy,hh:mm:ss

 Time Mark - The time the entry was created.
 Interface Type/Slot/Port - The port for which you are displaying data
about the peer.
 Rem Dest Mac Address - The peer LLDP agent's destination MAC
Address.
 Remote Index - An arbitrary local integer value used by this agent to
identify a particular connection instance, unique only for the indicated
peer.
 Remote Mng Addr subType - The type of management address identifier
encoding used in the associated LLDP Agent Remote Management
Address.
 Remote Mng Address - The octet string used to identify the management
address component associated with the remote system. The purpose of
this address is to contact the management entity.
 Remote Mng IF subType - The enumeration value that identifies the
interface numbering method used for defining the interface number,
associated with the remote system. Possible values are:
unknown(1)
ifIndex(2)
systemPortNumber(3)

 Agent Rem OID - The OID value used to identify the type of hardware
component or protocol entity associated with the management address
advertised by the remote system agent.
19.2.7 Displaying LLDP Statistics (CLI)

 Displaying Statistics Regarding Changes in Peer Unit (CLI)
 Displaying LLDP Transmission Statistics (CLI)
 Displaying LLDP Received Frames Statistics (CLI)
19.2.7.1 Displaying Statistics Regarding Changes in Peer Unit (CLI)

To display statistics about changes reported via LLDP by the remote unit,
root> ethernet lldp statistics-scalars-show

 stats Rem Tables Last Change Time - The time of the most recent change
in the remote unit, as reported via LLDP.
 stats Rem Tables Inserts - The number of times the information from the
remote system has changed.
 stats Rem Tables Deletes - The number of times the information from the
remote system has been deleted.
 stats Rem Tables Drops - Reserved for future use.
 stats Rem Tables Ageouts - The number of times the information from
the remote system has been deleted from the local unit's database because
the information's TTL has expired. The RX Ageouts counter is similar to
this counter, but is for specific ports rather than the entire unit.
19.2.7.2 Displaying LLDP Transmission Statistics (CLI)

To display statistics about LLDP transmissions and transmission errors, enter
root> ethernet lldp statistics-port-tx-show

 LLDP TX Statistics Ifindex - The index value used to identify the port in
LLDP transmissions.
 LLDP TX Statistics DA ID - The LLDP MAC address associated with this
entry.
 LLDP TX Statistics Total Frames - The number of LLDP frames
transmitted by the LLDP agent on this port to the destination MAC
address.

 LLDP TX Statistics No. of Length Error - The number of LLDPDU Length

Errors recorded for this port and destination MAC address. If the set of
TLVs that is selected in the LLDP local system MIB by network
management would result in an LLDPDU that violates LLDPDU length
restrictions, then the No. of Length Error statistic is incremented by 1, and
an LLDPDU is sent containing the mandatory TLVs plus as many of the
optional TLVs in the set as will fit in the remaining LLDPDU length.
19.2.7.3 Displaying LLDP Received Frames Statistics (CLI)

To display statistics about LLDP frames received by the unit, enter the
root> ethernet lldp statistics-port-rx-show

 RX Destination Port - The index value used to identify the port in LLDP
transmissions.
 RX DA Index - The index value used to identify the destination MAC
address associated with this entry.
 RX Total Discarded - The number of LLDP frames received by the LLDP
agent on this port, and then discarded for any reason. This counter can
provide an indication that LLDP header formatting problems may exist
with the local LLDP agent in the sending system or that LLDPDU validation
problems may exist with the local LLDP agent in the receiving system.
 RX Invalid Frames - The number of invalid LLDP frames received by the
LLDP agent on this port while the agent is enabled.
 RX Valid Frames - The number of valid LLDP frames received by the LLDP
agent on this port.
 RX Discarded TLVs - The number of LLDP TLVs discarded for any reason
by the LLDP agent on this port.
 RX Unrecognized TLVs - The number of LLDP TLVs received on the given
port that are not recognized by LLDP agent.
 RX Ageouts - The number of age-outs that occurred on the port. An age-
out is the number of times the complete set of information advertised by
the remote system has been deleted from the unit's database because the
information timeliness interval has expired. This counter is similar to
the LLDP No. of Ageouts counter, except that it is per port rather than for
the entire unit. This counter is set to zero during agent initialization. This
counter is incremented only once when the complete set of information is
invalidated (aged out) from all related tables on a particular port. Partial
ageing is not allowed.

20. Synchronization (CLI)

 Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI)
20.1 Configuring SyncE Regenerator (CLI)

Note: SyncE Regenerator is supported for IP-20C and IP-20S. For
IP-20E, SyncE Regenerator support is planned for future
release.
In SyncE PRC pipe regenerator mode, frequency is transported between two
interfaces through the radio link.
With the system acting as a simple link, no distribution mechanism is
necessary, resulting in improved frequency distribution performance with
PRC quality and a simplified configuration.
Note: SyncE Regenerator currently supports only a single pipe
configuration.
To add a pipe configuration, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform sync pipe add pipe-id <pipe-id> interface-1-type
<interface-1-type> slot <slot> port <port> interface-2-type
<interface-2-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To change the first interface in a SyncE pipe, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id <pipe-id>
interface-1-type <interface-1-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To change the second interface in a SyncE pipe, enter the following command
in root view:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id <pipe-id>
interface-2-type <interface-2-type> slot <slot> port <port>
To remove a SyncE pipe, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform sync pipe remove pipe-id <pipe-id>
To remove all SyncE Regenerators (pipes), enter the following command in

root view:
root> platform sync pipe remove all
To view the configured SyncE pipes, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform sync pipe show

Table 200: SyncE Regenerator CLI Parameters

pipe-id Number 1 The pipe ID. Only one pipe is
supported in the current
release.
interface-1-type Variable ethernet The interface type for the first
radio interface in the pipe.
slot Number Ethernet: 1

Radio: 2
port Number GbE 1: 1
GbE 2: 2
GbE 3: 3
Radio Carrier 1: 1
interface-2-type Variable ethernet The interface type for the
radio second interface in the pipe. If
the first interface type is
ethernet, the second must by
radio, and vice versa.
Examples
The following command configures a SyncE pipe between Ethernet port 1 and
radio interface 1:
root> platform sync pipe add pipe-id 1 interface-1-type
ethernet slot 1 port 1 interface-2-type radio slot 2 port 1
The following command changes the first interface in the pipe from ethernet
port 1 to Ethernet port 2:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-1 pipe-id 1 interface-
1-type ethernet slot 1 port 2
The following command changes the second interface in the pipe from radio
interface 1 to radio interface 2:
root> platform sync pipe edit interface-2 pipe-id 1 interface-
2-type radio slot 2 port 2
The following command removes SyncE pipe 1:

root> platform sync pipe remove pipe-id 1

21. Access Management and Security (CLI)

 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI)
 Configuring Users (CLI)
 Configuring RADIUS (CLI)
 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS (CLI)
 Blocking Telnet Access (CLI)
 Uploading the Security Log (CLI)
 Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI)
Related Topics:
 Operating in FIPS Mode (CLI)
 Configuring AES-256 Payload Encryption (CLI)
21.1 Configuring the General Access Control Parameters

(CLI)
To avoid unauthorized login to the system, the following parameters should
be set:
 Inactivity Timeout
 Blocking access due to login failures
 Blocking unused accounts

 Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI)
 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI)
 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI)
21.1.1 Configuring the Inactivity Timeout Period (CLI)

A system management session automatically times out after a defined period
(in minutes) with no user activity. To configure the session timeout period,
root> platform security protocols-control session inactivity-
timeout set <inactivity-timeout>
To display the currently configured session timeout period, enter the

timeout show

Table 202: Inactivity Timeout Period CLI Parameters

inactivity-timeout Number 1 - 60 The session inactivity timeout period (in minutes).
Example
The following command sets the session inactivity timeout period to 30
minutes:
timeout set 30
21.1.2 Configuring Blocking Upon Login Failure (CLI)

Upon a configurable number of failed login attempts, the system blocks the
user from logging in for a configurable number of minutes.
To configure the number of failed login attempts that will temporarily block
the user from logging into the system, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security access-control block-failure-login
attempt set <attempt>
To define the period (in minutes) for which a user is blocked after the
configured number of failed login attempts, enter the following command in
root view:
period set <period>
To display the current failed login attempt blocking parameters, enter the
root> platform security access-control block-failure-login show
Table 203: Blocking Upon Login Failure CLI Parameters

attempt Number 1 - 10 If a user attempts to login to the system with
incorrect credentials this number of times
consecutively, the user will temporarily be
prevented from logging into the system for
the time period defined by the platform
security access-control block-failure-login
period set command.
period Number 1 - 60 The duration of time, in minutes, that a user
is prevented from logging into the system
after the defined number of failed login
attempts.

Example
The following commands configure a blocking period of 45 minutes for users
that perform 5 consecutive failed login attempts:
attempt set 5

period set 45
21.1.3 Configuring Blocking of Unused Accounts (CLI)

You can configure a number of days after which a user is prevented from
logging into the system if the user has not logged in for the configured number
of days. You can also manually block a specific user.
To configure the blocking of unused accounts period, enter the following
root> platform security access-control block-unused-account
period set <period>
Once the user is blocked, you can use the following command to unblock the
user:
root> platform security access-control user-account block user-
name <user-name> block no
To manually block a specific user, enter the following command in root view:
name <user-name> block yes
To display the currently configured blocking of unused account period, enter

show
Table 204: Blocking Unused Accounts CLI Parameters

period Number 0, 30 - 90 The number of days after which a user is
prevented from logging into the system if the
user has not logged in for the configured
number of days. If you enter 0, this feature is
disabled.
user-name Text String Any valid user name. The name of the user being blocked or
unblocked.
Examples
The following command configures the system to block any user that does not
log into the system for 50 days:
period set 50

The following commands block, then unblock, a user with the user name
John_Smith:
name John_Smith block yes

name John_Smith block no
21.2 Configuring the Password Security Parameters (CLI)

You can configure enhanced security requirements for user passwords.

 Configuring Password Aging (CLI)
 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)
 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI)
 Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI)
21.2.1 Configuring Password Aging (CLI)

Passwords remain valid from the first time the user logs into the system for
the number of days (20-90) set by this command. If you set this parameter to
0, password aging is disabled, and passwords remain valid indefinitely.
To configure password aging, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security access-control password aging set
<password aging>
Table 205: Password Aging CLI Parameters

password Number 0, 20 - 90 The number of days that user passwords will
aging remain valid from the first time the user logs
into the system.
Example
The following command sets the password aging time to 60 days:
root> platform security access-control password aging set 60
21.2.2 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)

To set password strength enforcement, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security access-control password enforce-
strength set <enforce-strength>

Table 206: Password Strength Enforcement CLI Parameters
Permitted
password Number 0, 20 - 90 The number of days that user passwords will remain
aging valid from the first time the user logs into the system.
enforce- Boolean Yes When yes is selected:
strength no  Password length must be at least eight characters.
 Password must include characters of at least three
of the following character types: lower case letters,
upper case letters, digits, and special characters.
For purposes of meeting this requirement, upper
case letters at the beginning of the password and
digits at the end of the password are not counted.
 The last five passwords you used cannot be
reused.
Example
The following command enables password strength enforcement:
root> platform security access-control password enforce-
strength set yes
21.2.3 Forcing Password Change Upon First Login (CLI)

To determine whether the system requires users to change their password the
first time they log into the system, enter the following command in root view.
root> platform security access-control password first-login set
<first-login>
To require users to change their password the first time they log in, enter the
root> platform security access-control password first-login set
yes
Table 207: Force Password Change on First Time Login CLI Parameters
Permitted
first-login Boolean yes When yes is selected, the system requires users to
no change their password the first time they log in.
21.2.4 Displaying the System Password Settings (CLI)

Use the following command to display the system password settings:
root> platform security access-control password show-all

21.3 Configuring Users (CLI)

 User Configuration Overview (CLI)
 Configuring User Profiles (CLI)
 Configuring User Accounts (CLI)
Related topics:
21.3.1 User Configuration Overview (CLI)

User configuration is based on the Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) model.
According to the RBAC model, permissions to perform certain operations are
assigned to specific roles. Users are assigned to particular roles, and through
those role assignments acquire the permissions to perform particular system
functions.
In the IP-20 GUI, these roles are called user profiles. Up to 50 user profiles can
be configured. Each profile contains a set of privilege levels per functionality
group, and defines the management protocols (access channels) that can be
used to access the system by users to whom the user profile is assigned.
The system parameters are divided into the following functional groups:
 Security
 Management
 Radio
 TDM
 Ethernet
 Synchronization
A user profile defines the permitted access level per functionality group. For
each functionality group, the access level is defined separately for read and
write operations. The following access levels can be assigned:
 None – No access to this functional group.
 Normal – The user has access to parameters that require basic knowledge
about the functional group.
 Advanced – The user has access to parameters that require advanced
knowledge about the functional group, as well as parameters that have a
significant impact on the system as a whole, such as restoring the
configuration to factory default settings.

21.3.2 Configuring User Profiles (CLI)

User profiles enable you to define system access levels. Each user must be
assigned a user profile. Each user profile contains a detailed set of read
and write permission levels per functionality group.
The system includes a number of pre-defined user profiles. You can edit these
profiles, and add user profiles. Together, the system supports up to 50 user
profiles.
To create a new user profile with default settings, enter the following
command:
root> platform security access-control profile add name
<profile-name>
To edit the settings of a user profile, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control profile edit group name
<profile-name> group <group> write-lvl <write-lvl> read-
lvl <read-lvl>
Table 208: User Profile CLI Parameters

profile--name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.
group Variable security The functionality group for which you are
management defining access levels.
radio
ethernet
sync
write-lvl Variable none The read level for the functionality group.
normal
advanced
read-lvl Variable none The read level for the functionality group.
normal
advanced
Example
The following commands create a user profile called “operator” and give users
to whom this profile is assigned normal write privileges for all system
functionality and advanced read privileges for all functionality except security
features.
root> platform security access-control profile add name
operator
root> platform security access-control profile edit group name

operator group security write-lvl normal read-lvl normal group
management write-lvl normal read-lvl advanced group radio
write-lvl normal read-lvl advanced group ethernet write-
lvl normal read-lvl advanced group sync write-lvl normal read-
lvl advanced

21.3.2.1 Limiting Access Protocols for a User Profile (CLI)

The user profile can limit the access channels that users with the user profile
can use to access the system. By default, a user profile includes all access
channels.
Use the following command to limit the protocols users with this user profile
can use to access the system:
root> platform security access-control profile edit mng-channel
name <profile-name> channel-type <channel-type> allowed
<allowed>
Table 209: User Profile Access Protocols CLI Parameters

profile--name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.
profile-name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the user profile.
channel-type Variable Serial The access channel type allowed or
Web disallowed by the command for users
with this user profile.
NMS
Telnet
SSH
allowed Boolean yes  yes – Users with this user profile can
no access the access channel type
defined in the preceding parameter.
 no - Users with this user profile
cannot access the access channel
type defined in the preceding
parameter.
Example
The following command prevents users with the user profile “operator” from
accessing the system via NMS:
root> platform security access-control profile edit mng-channel
name operator channel-type NMS allowed no
21.3.3 Configuring User Accounts (CLI)

You can configure up to 2,000 users. Each user has a user name, password,
and user profile. The user profile defines a set of read and write permission
levels per functionality group (see Configuring User Profiles (CLI)).
To create a new user account, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control user-account add user-
name <user-name> profile-name <profile-name> expired-date
<expired-date>

When you create a new user account, the system will prompt you to enter a
default password. If Enforce Password Strength is activated (refer to
Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI)), the password must meet
the following criteria:
 Password length must be at least eight characters.
 Password must include characters of at least three of the following
character types: lower case letters, upper case letters, digits, and special
characters. For purposes of meeting this requirement, upper case letters at
the beginning of the password and digits at the end of the password are
not counted.
 The last five passwords you used cannot be reused.
To block or unblock a user account, enter the following command:
name <user-name> block <block>
To change a user account's expiration date, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control user-account edit
expired-date user-name <user-name> expired-date <expired-date>
To change a user account's profile, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control user-account edit
profile-name user-name <user-name> profile-name <profile name>
To delete a user account, enter the following command:

root> platform security access-control user-account delete
user-name <user-name>
To display all user accounts configured on the unit and their settings,
including whether the user is currently logged in and the time of the user's last
logout, enter the following command:
root> platform security access-control user-account show
To display the settings of a specific user account, enter the following

command:
root> platform security access-control user-account show user-
name <user-name>
Table 210: User Accounts CLI Parameters

user-name Text String Up to 32 characters The name of the user profile.
profile name Text String Up to 49 characters The name of the User Profile you want to
assign to the user. The User Profile
defines the user’s access permissions
per functionality group.
expired-date Date Use the format: Optional. The date on which the user
YYYY-MM-DD account will expire. On this date, the user
automatically becomes inactive.


block Variable yes yes - blocks the account.
no no - unblocks the account.
Example
The following command creates a user account named Tom_Jones, with user
profile “operator”. This user’s account expires on February 1, 2014.
root> platform security access-control user-account add user-
name Tom_Jones profile-name operator expired-date 2014-02-01
21.4 Configuring RADIUS (CLI)

 RADIUS Overview (CLI)
 Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI)
 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI)
 Viewing RADIUS Access Control and Server Attributes (CLI)
 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity (CLI)
Note: For instructions on configuring a RADIUS server, see
Configuring a RADIUS Server.
21.4.1 RADIUS Overview (CLI)

The RADIUS protocol provides centralized user management services. IP-20
supports RADIUS server and provides a RADIUS client for authentication and
authorization. When RADIUS is enabled, a user attempting to log into the
system from any access channels (CLI, WEB, NMS) is not authenticated locally.
Instead, the user’s credentials are sent to a centralized standard RADIUS
server which indicates to the IP-20 whether the user is known, and which
privilege is to be given to the user.
You can define up to two Radius servers. If you define two, one serves as the
primary server and the other as the secondary server.
21.4.2 Activating RADIUS Authentication (CLI)

To enable or disable Radius access control, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-admin set <admin>
Table 211: Activate RADIUS CLI Parameters

admin Variable enable Enables or disables Radius access
disable control.

21.4.3 Configuring the RADIUS Server Attributes (CLI)

To configure Radius server attributes, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-server-communication-ipv4 set
server-id <server-id> ip-address <ip-address> port <radius-
port> retries <retries> timeout <timeout> secret <shared-
secret>
Table 212: Configure RADIUS Server CLI Parameters

server-id Number 1  1 - The primary Radius server
2  2 - The secondary Radius server.
ip-address Dotted Any valid IP address The IP address of the Radius server.
decimal
format
radius-port Number 0-65535 The port ID of the RADIUS server.
retries Number 3-30 The number of times the device will try to
communicate with the RADIUS server
before declaring the server to be
unreachable.
timeout Number 1-10 The timeout (in seconds) that the agent
will wait in each communication with the
selected RADIUS server before retrying if
no response is received.
shared-secret String Between 22-128 The shared secret of the RADIUS server.
characters
Example
The following command configures Radius server attributes for the primary
Radius server:
root> platform security radius-server-communication-ipv4 set
server-id 1 ip-address 192.168.1.99 port 1812 retries 5 timeout
10 secret U8glp3KJ6FKGksdgase4IQ9FMm
21.4.4 Viewing RADIUS Access Control and Server Attributes (CLI)

To display the Radius access control status, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-admin show
To display Radius server attributes, enter the following command:

root> platform security radius-server-communication show

21.4.5 Viewing RADIUS User Permissions and Connectivity (CLI)

You can view Radius user connectivity and permissions information for all
Radius users currently connected. To do so, enter the following command:
root> platform security radius-server-privileges show
The following user information is displayed, for each currently connected

Radius user:
 User ID - The user name
 Access Channels - The permitted access channels.
 User Instances - The number of currently open sessions.
 Security Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Security
functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
 Security Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Security
 Management Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the
Management functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
 Management Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the
Management functional group: None, Regular or Advanced.
 Radio Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Radio
 Radio Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Radio
 TDM Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the TDM
 TDM Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the TDM
 Eth Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Eth functional
group: None, Regular or Advanced.
 Eth Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Eth functional
group: None, Regular or Advanced.
 Sync Func Group Read level – The Read access level in the Sync
 Sync Func Group Write level – The Write access level in the Sync

21.5 Configuring X.509 CSR Certificates and HTTPS (CLI)

The web interface protocol for accessing IP-20 can be configured to HTTP
(default) or HTTPS. It cannot be set to both at the same time.
Before setting the protocol to HTTPS, you must:
1 Create and upload a CSR file. See Generating a Certificate Signing Request
(CSR) File (CLI).
2 Download the certificate to the IP-20 and install the certificate. See
Downloading a Certificate (CLI).
3 Enable HTTPS. See Enabling HTTPS (CLI).
When uploading a CSR and downloading a certificate, the IP-20 functions as an
SFTP client. You must install SFTP server software on the PC or laptop you are
using to perform the upload or download. For details, see Installing and
Note: For these operations, SFTP must be used.

 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI)
 Downloading a Certificate (CLI)
 Enabling HTTPS (CLI)
21.5.1 Generating a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) File (CLI)

To set the CSR parameters, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security csr-set-parameters common-name <common-
name> country <country> state <state> locality <locality>
organization <organization> org-unit <org-unit> email <email>
file-format <file-format>
To display the currently-configured CSR parameters, enter the following

root> platform security csr-show-parameters
If the IP address family is configured to be IPv4, enter the following command

in root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for the CSR file upload:
root> platform security csr-set-server-parameters server-ipv4
<server-ipv4> server-path <server-path> filename <filename>
server-username <username> server-password <password>

in root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for the CSR file upload:
root> platform security csr-set-server-parameters server-ipv6
<server-ipv6> server-path <server-path> filename <filename>
server-username <username> server-password <password>
To display the currently-configured SFTP parameters for CSR upload, enter

root> platform security csr-show-server-parameters

To generate and upload a CSR, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security csr-generate-and-upload
To display the status of a pending CSR generation and upload operation, enter
root> platform security csr-generate-and-upload-show-status
Table 213: CSR Generation and Upload CLI Parameters

common name String The fully–qualified domain name for your web
server. You must enter the exact domain name.
country String The two-letter ISO abbreviation for your country

(e.g., US)
state String The state, province, or region in which the

organization is located. Do not abbreviate.
locality String The city in which the organization is legally located.
organization String The exact legal name of your organization. Do not

abbreviate.
org-unit String The division of the organization that handles the

certificate.
email String An e-mail address that can be used to contact your

organization.
file-format Variable PEM The file format of the CSR. In this version, only
DER PEM is supported.
server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 IP The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you are using
format. address. as the SFTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you are using
hexadecimal digits address. as the SFTP server.
server-path Text String The directory path to which you are uploading the
CSR. Enter the path relative to the SFTP user's
home directory, not the absolute path. To leave the
path blank, enter //.
filename Text String The name you want to give the CSR.
username Text String The user name for the SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the SFTP session. To configure
the SFTP settings without a password, simply omit
this parameter.

21.5.2 Downloading a Certificate (CLI)

in root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading a
certificate:
root> platform security certificate-set-download-parameters
server-ipv4 <server-ipv4> server-path <server-path> filename
<filename> server-username <username> server-password
<password>

in root view to configure the SFTP server parameters for downloading a
certificate:
root> platform security certificate-set-download-parameters
server-ipv6 < server-ipv6> server-path <server-path> filename
<filename> server-username <username> server-password
<password>
To display the currently-configured SFTP parameters for downloading a

certificate, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security certificate-show-download-parameters
To download a certificate, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security certificate-download
To display the status of a pending certificate download, enter the following

root> platform security certificate-download-show-status
To install a certificate, enter the following command in root view:

root> platform security certificate-install
Table 214: Certificate Download and Install CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal Any valid IPv4 IP The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop you are using
format. address. as the SFTP server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four Any valid IPv6 The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop you are using
hexadecimal digits address. as the SFTP server.
server-path Text String The directory path from which you are downloading
the certificate. Enter the path relative to the SFTP
user's home directory, not the absolute path. To
leave the path blank, enter //.
filename Text String The certificate’s file name in the SFTP server.
username Text String The user name for the SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the SFTP session. To configure
the SFTP settings without a password, simply omit
this parameter.

21.5.3 Enabling HTTPS (CLI)

By default, HTTP is used by IP-20 as its web interface protocol.
To change the protocol to HTTPS, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security url-protocol-set url-protocol https
Note: Make sure you have installed a valid certificate in the IP-20
before changing the web interface protocol to HTTPS.
Failure to do this may prevent users from accessing the Web
EMS.
To change the protocol back to HTTP, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform security url-protocol-set url-protocol http
To display which protocol is currently enabled, enter the following command

in root view:
root> platform security url-protocol-show

21.6 Blocking Telnet Access (CLI)

You can block telnet access to the unit. By default, telnet access is not blocked.
To block telnet access, enter the following command:
root> platform security protocols-control telnet admin set
disable
To unblock telnet access, enter the following command:

root> platform security protocols-control telnet admin set
enable
To display whether telnet is currently allowed (enable) or blocked (disable),

root> platform security protocols-control telnet show
Note: When you block telnet, any current telnet sessions are
immediately disconnected.
21.7 Uploading the Security Log (CLI)

The security log is an internal system file which records all changes performed
to any security feature, as well as all security related events.
In order to read the security log, you must upload the log to an FTP or SFTP
server. IP-20 works with any standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see
Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
Before uploading the security log, you must install and configure the FTP
server on the laptop or PC from which you are performing the download. See
Installing and Configuring an FTP or SFTP Server.
To set the FTP parameters for security log upload, enter the following
root> platform security file-transfer set server-path <server-
path> file-name <file-name> ip-address <ip-address> protocol
<protocol> username <username> password <password>
To display the FTP channel parameters for uploading the security log, enter
root> platform security file-transfer show configuration
To upload the security log to your FTP server, enter the following command in
root view:
root> platform security file-transfer operation set upload-
security-log
To display the progress of a current security log upload operation, enter the
root> platform security file-transfer show operation
To display the result of the most recent current security log upload operation,
root> platform security file-transfer show status

Table 215: Security Log CLI Parameters

server-path Text String The directory path to which you are uploading the
security log. Enter the path relative to the FTP
user's home directory, not the absolute path. To
leave the path blank, enter //.
file-name Text String The name you want to give the file you are
uploading.
ip-address Dotted decimal format. Any valid IP address. The IP address of the FTP server.
protocol Variable ftp

sftp
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP session. To
configure the FTP settings without a password,
simply omit this parameter.
Example
The following commands configure an FTP channel for security log upload to
IP address 192.168.1.80, in the directory “current”, with file name
“security_log_Oct8.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345”, and
initiate the upload:
root> platform security file-transfer set server-path \current
file-name security_log_Oct8.zip ip-address 192.168.1.80
protocol ftp username anonymous password 12345
root> platform security file-transfer operation set upload-

security-log
21.8 Uploading the Configuration Log (CLI)

The configuration log lists actions performed by users to configure the system.
This file is mostly used for security, to identify suspicious user actions. It can
also be used for troubleshooting.
In order to upload the configuration log, you must install an FTP or SFTP
server on the laptop or PC from which you are performing the upload. IP-20
works with any standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see Installing and
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration log export, enter the
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-params set
path <path> file-name <file-name> ip-address <ip-address>
protocol <protocol> username <username> password <password>
To display the FTP or SFTP parameters for configuration log export, enter the
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-params show

To export the configuration log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform security configuration-log upload
To display the status of a configuration log export operation, enter the

following command in root view
root> platform security configuration-log-upload-status show
Table 216: Configuration Log CLI Parameters
Permitted
path Text String The directory path to which you are exporting the configuration
log. Enter the path relative to the FTP user's home directory,
not the absolute path. To leave the path blank, enter //.
file-name Text String The name you want to give the file you are exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to the file name. Otherwise,
the file import may fail. You can export the file using any
name, then add the suffix .zip manually. For example:
UnitInfo.zip
If the Unit Information file is exported several times
consecutively, the file itself will not be replaced. Instead, the
filename will be updated by time stamp. For example:
UnitInfo.zip.11-05-14 03-31-04
ip-address Dotted decimal Any valid IP The IP address of the PC or laptop you are using as the FTP or
format. address. SFTP server.
protocol Variable ftp The file transfer protocol.

sftp
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP session. To configure the
FTP or SFTP settings without a password, simply omit this
parameter.
Note: The path and fie name, together, cannot be more than:
Examples
The following commands configure an FTP channel for configuration log
export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name
“cfg_log”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
path \file-name cfg_log ip-address 192.168.1.99 protocol ftp
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol frp
The following command exports the configuration log to the external server
location:
root> platform security configuration-log upload

22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI)

 Viewing Current Alarms (CLI)
 Viewing the Event Log (CLI)
 Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI)
 Uploading Unit Info (CLI)
 Performing Diagnostics (CLI)
 Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI)
22.1 Viewing Current Alarms (CLI)

To display all alarms currently raised on the unit, enter the following
root> platform status current-alarm show module unit
To display the most severe alarm currently raised in the unit, enter the
root> platform status current-alarm show most-severe-alarm
module unit
22.2 Viewing the Event Log (CLI)

The Event Log displays a list of current and historical events and information
about each event.
To display the event log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status event-log show module unit
To clear the event log, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status event-log clear module unit
22.3 Editing Alarm Text and Severity (CLI)

You can view a list of alarm types, edit the severity level assigned to individual
alarm types, and add additional descriptive text to individual alarm types.

 Displaying Alarm Information (CLI)
 Editing an Alarm Type (CLI)
 Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI)
22.3.1 Displaying Alarm Information (CLI)

To display a list of all alarm types and their severity levels and descriptions,
root> platform status alarm-management show alarm-id all
22.3.2 Editing an Alarm Type (CLI)

To edit an alarm type’s severity level, enter the following command in root
view:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id <alarm-id>
severity-level <severity-level>
To add descriptive information to an alarm type, enter the following command

in root view:
additional-text <additional-text>
Table 217: Editing Alarm Text and Severity CLI Parameters

alarm-id Number All valid alarm type Enter the unique Alarm ID that identifies
IDs, depending on the alarm type.
system configuration
severity-level Variable indeterminate The severity of the alarm, as displayed to
critical users.
major
minor
warning
additional-text Text String 255 characters An additional text description of the alarm
type.
Example
The following command changes the severity level of alarm type 401 (Loss of
Carrier) to minor:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id 401
severity-level minor
22.3.3 Setting Alarms to their Default Values (CLI)

To restore an alarm type’s severity level and description to their default
values, enter the following command in root view:
restore default
To restore the severity levels and descriptions of all alarm types to their
default values, enter the following command in root view:
root> platform status alarm-management set all default
Table 218: Restoring Alarms to Default CLI Parameters

alarm-id Number All valid alarm type Enter the unique Alarm ID that identifies
IDs, depending on the alarm type.
system configuration

Example
The following command restores alarm type 401 (Loss of Carrier) to its
default severity level:
root> platform status alarm-management set alarm-id 401 restore
default
22.4 Uploading Unit Info (CLI)

You can generate a unit information file, which includes technical data about
the unit. This file can be forwarded to customer support, at their request, to
help in analyzing issues that may occur.
In order to export a unit information file, you must install an FTP or SFTP
server on the laptop or PC from which you are performing the upload. IP-20
works with any standard FTP or SFTP server. For details, see Installing and
To set the FTP or SFTP parameters for unit information file export, enter one
of the following commands in root view. If the IP protocol selected in platform
management ip set ip-address-family is IPv4, enter the destination IPv4
address. If the selected IP protocol is IPv6, enter the destination IPv6 address.
root> platform unit-info channel server set ip-address <server-
ipv4> directory <directory> filename <filename> username
<username> password <password>
root> platform unit-info channel server-ipv6 set ip-address

<server-ipv6> directory <directory> filename <filename>
To set the protocol for unit information file export, enter the following
command in root view.
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol <protocol>
To display the FTP or SFTP parameters for unit information file export, enter
one of the following commands in root view:
root> platform unit-info-file channel show
root> platform unit-info-file channel-ipv6 show
To create a unit information file based on the current state of the system,
root> platform unit-info-file create
To export the unit information file you just created, enter the following
root> platform unit-info-file export
To display the status of a unit information file export operation, enter the
following command in root view
root> platform unit-info-file status show

Table 219: Uploading Unit Info CLI Parameters

server-ipv4 Dotted decimal format. Any valid IPv4 address. The IPv4 address of the PC or laptop
you are using as the FTP or SFTP
server.
server-ipv6 Eight groups of four hexadecimal Any valid IPv6 address. The IPv6 address of the PC or laptop
digits separated by colons. you are using as the FTP or SFTP
server.
directory Text String The directory path to which you are

exporting the unit information file. Enter
the path relative to the FTP or SFTP
user's home directory, not the absolute
path. To leave the path blank, enter //.
filename Text String The name you want to give the file you
are exporting.
Note: You must add the suffix .zip to
the file name. Otherwise, the file
import may fail. You can export
the file using any name, then add
the suffix .zip manually.
username Text String The user name for the FTP or SFTP
session.
password Text String The password for the FTP or SFTP

session. To configure the FTP or SFTP
settings without a password, simply
omit this parameter.
protocol Variable ftp The file transfer protocol.

sftp
The following commands configure an FTP or SFTP channel for configuration

log export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file
name “cfg_log”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
path \\ file-name cfg_log ip-address 192.168.1.99 protocol ftp
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol ftp
The following commands create a unit information file and export the file to
the external server location:

Example
The following commands configures an FTP channel for unit information file
export to IP address 192.168.1.99, in the directory “current”, with file name
“version_8_backup.zip”, user name “anonymous”, and password “12345.”
root> platform unit-info channel server set ip-address
192.168.1.99 directory \current filename version_8_backup.zip
root> platform unit-info channel set protocol ftp
The following commands create a unit information file and export the file to
the external server location:
22.5 Performing Diagnostics (CLI)

 Performing Radio Loopback (CLI)
22.5.1 Performing Radio Loopback (CLI)

You can perform loopback on a radio.
To set the timeout for a radio loopback, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]> radio loopbacks-timeout set duration <duration>
To display the radio loopback timeout, enter the following command in radio
view:
radio[x/x]>radio loopbacks-timeout show
To activate an RF loopback, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x]>rf loopback-rf set admin <admin>
Table 220: Radio Loopback CLI Parameters
Permitted
duration Number 0 – 1440 The timeout, in minutes, for automatic
termination of a loopback. A value of 0 indicates
that there is no timeout.
admin Variable on Set on to initiate an RF loopback.
off

Examples
The following commands initiate an RF loopback on radio carrier 1 with a
timeout of two minutes:
radio[2/1]> radio loopbacks-timeout set duration 2
radio[2/1]>rf loopback-rf set admin on
The following command cancels an RF loopback on radio carrier 1:

radio[2/1]>rf loopback-rf set admin off
22.5.2 Performing Ethernet Loopback (CLI)

Ethernet loopbacks can be performed on any logical Ethernet interface except
a LAG. When Ethernet loopback is enabled on an interface, the system loops
back all packets ingressing the interface. This enables loopbacks to be
performed over the link from other points in the network.
To configure loopback on an Ethernet interface, go to interface view for the
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback admin <loopback-admin-state>
To configure the loopback duration time, go to interface view for the interface
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback set duration <loopback-duration>
You can select whether to swap DA and SA MAC addresses during the
loopback. Swapping addresses prevents Ethernet loops from occurring. It is
recommended to enable MAC address swapping if LLDP is enabled.
To configure MAC address swapping, go to interface view for the interface and
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback swap-mac-address admin <MAC_swap-
admin-state>
To view loopback status, go to interface view for the interface and enter the
following command:
eth type eth[x/x]> loopback status show
Table 221: Ethernet Loopback CLI Parameters
Permitted
loopback- Variable enable Enter enable to enable Ethernet loopback on the
admin-state disable interface, or disable to disable Ethernet
loopback on the interface.
loopback- Number 1 - 900 The loopback duration time, in seconds.
duration
MAC_swap- Variable enable Enter enable to enable MAC address swapping,
admin-state disable or disable to disable MAC address swapping.

Examples
The following command enables Ethernet loopback on Ethernet interface 2:
eth type eth [1/2]> loopback admin enable
The following command sets the loopback duration time to 900 seconds:
eth type eth [1/2]> loopback set duration 900
The following command enables MAC address swapping during the loopback:
eth type eth [1/2]> loopback swap-mac-address admin enable
The following command displays Ethernet port loopback status:

eth type eth [1/2]> loopback status show
22.6 Working in CW Mode (Single or Dual Tone) (CLI)

CW mode enables you to transmit a single or dual frequency tones, for
debugging purposes.
To work in CW mode, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x] modem tx-source set admin enable
Once you are in CW mode, you can choose to transmit in a single tone or two
tones.
To transmit in a single tone, enter the following command in radio view:
radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode one-tone freq-shift <freq-
shift>
To transmit two tones, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode two-tone freq-shift <freq-
shift> freq-shift2 <freq-shift>
To exit CW mode, enter the following command in radio view:

radio[x/x] modem tx-source set admin disable
Table 222: CW Mode CLI Parameters
Permitted
freq-shift Number 0-7000 Enter the frequency you want to transmit, in KHz.
The following commands set a single-tone transmit frequency of 5050 KHz on

radio interface 1 on an IP-20C or IP-20S unit, then exit CW mode and return
the interface to normal operation:
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin enable
radio[2/1] radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode one-tone freq-
shift 5050
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin disable

The following commands set a single-tone transmit frequency of 6010 KHz on

the radio interface of an IP-20E unit, then exit CW mode and return the
interface to normal operation:
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin enable
radio[2/1] radio[x/x] modem tx-source set mode one-tone freq-
shift 6010
radio[2/1] modem tx-source set admin disable

Section IV
Maintenance

23. Maintenance
 IP-20C Connector Pin-outs
 IP-20C LEDs
 IP-20S Connector Pin-outs
 IP-20S LEDs
 IP-20E Connector Pin-outs
 IP-20E LEDs
 PoE Injector Pin-outs
23.1 IP-20C Connector Pin-outs

Figure 260: IP-20C Interfaces
23.1.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical
Table 223: IP-20C Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description

1 BI_DA+ (Bi-directional pair +A)
2 BI_DA- (Bi-directional pair -A)
3 BI_DB+ (Bi-directional pair +B)
4 BI_DC+ (Bi-directional pair +C)

Pin no. Description

5 BI_DC- (Bi-directional pair -C)
6 BI_DB- (Bi-directional pair +B)
7 BI_DD+ (Bi-directional pair +D)
8 BI_DD- (Bi-directional pair -D)
23.1.2 Eth2 - GbE Electrical/Optical
Table 224: IP-20C Eth2 Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description

23.1.3 Eth3/EXP - GbE Electrical/Optical/Expansion
Table 225: IP-20C Eth3/EXP Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description


23.1.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-

Non-Standard)
Table 226: IP-20C MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts
Pin no. Description

Management - Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 RX-
Protection - Non-Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
4 TX+
5 TX-
7 RX+
8 RX-
23.1.5 DC
The DC port is UL-60950 compliant, with a 2-pin connector.
Figure 261: IP-20C DC Port Connector
23.1.6 RSL Interface

IP-20C uses a weather-proof BNC connector
23.1.7 Source Sharing

IP-20C uses a TNC connector for source sharing. This connector is marked
EXT/REF.

23.2 IP-20C LEDs

The IP-20C provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
interfaces, and the unit as a whole:
 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs
 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Radio LED
 Status LED
 Protection LED
23.2.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to each electrical (RJ-45) interface, a Green LED to
the left of the interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.
The Green LED indicates the port’s Admin state:
 Off – Admin is Disabled.
 Green – Admin is Enabled.
The Orange LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status,
and whether there is traffic on the interface:
 Off - Admin is Disabled or no cable is connected to the interface.
 Orange - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface.
 Blinking Orange - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the
interface, and there is traffic on the interface.
23.2.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs

There is one Green LED next to each optical (SFP) GbE interface. The LED
indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether
there is traffic on the interface:
 Green - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the interface.
 Blinking Green - Admin is Enabled and a cable is connected to the

23.2.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT (management) interface, a Green LED to
If the MGT interface is being used for protection, the Orange LED indicates the
status of the mate unit.:
 Off – The interface is not in an operational state (down).
 Orange – The interface is operational (up).
 Blinking Orange – The interface is operational, and there is traffic on the
interface (Tx, Rx, or both).
23.2.4 Radio LED

The Link LED is a three-color LED that indicates the status of the radio link:
 Off – The radio is off.
 Green - The power is on, and all carriers are operational (up).
 Yellow - A signal degrade condition exists in at least one carrier.
 Red - A loss of frame (LOF) or excessive BER condition exists in at least
one carrier.
23.2.5 Status LED

The Status LED is a three-color LED that indicates the status of the radio link:
 Off – The power is off.
 Green - The power is on, and no alarms are raised on the motherboard.
 Yellow - The power is on, and one or more minor alarms or warnings are
raised on the motherboard.
 Red - The power is on, and one or more major or critical alarms are raised
on the motherboard.
23.2.6 Protection LED

The Protection LED is a three-color LED that operates in a protected
configuration to indicate the protection status:
 Red – A protection alarm exists (cable disconnected, etc.)
 Yellow - Protection is enabled, and the unit is in standby mode.
 Green - Protection is enabled, and the unit is in active mode.
 Off - Protection is not enabled.

23.3 IP-20S Connector Pin-outs

Figure 262: IP-20S Interfaces
23.3.1 Eth1/PoE - GbE Electrical+PoE/Optical
Table 227: IP-20S Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description

Table 228: IP-20S Eth2 Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description


Pin no. Description

Table 229: IP-20S Eth3/EXP Interface - RJ-45/SFP Pinouts
Pin no. Description

23.3.4 MGT/PROT - Management (FE-Standard) and Protection (FE-

Non-Standard)
Table 230: IP-20S MGT/PROT Interface - RJ-45 Pinouts
Pin no. Description

Management - Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
6 RX-
Protection - Non-Standard 100Base-T 4 Wire
4 TX+
5 TX-
7 RX+
8 RX-

23.3.5 DC
The DC port is UL-60950 compliant, with a 2-pin connector.
Figure 263: IP-20S DC Connector

IP-20S uses a weather-proof BNC connector.
23.4 IP-20S LEDs

The IP-20S provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs
 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Radio LED
 Status LED
 Protection LED
23.4.1 Electrical GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs


23.4.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs

There is one Green LED next to each optical (SFP) GbE interface. The LED
indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and whether
there is traffic on the interface:
23.4.3 Management FE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT (management) interface, a Green LED to
If the MGT interface is being used for protection, the Orange LED indicates the
status of the mate unit.:
23.4.4 Radio LED

one carrier.
23.4.5 Status LED

on the motherboard.


The Protection LED is a three-color LED that operates in a protected
configuration to indicate the protection status:
 Red – A protection alarm exists (cable disconnected, etc.)
 Yellow - Protection is enabled, and the unit is in standby mode.
 Green - Protection is enabled, and the unit is in active mode.
 Off - Protection is not enabled.
23.5 IP-20E Connector Pin-outs

Figure 264: IP-20E Interfaces
Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45)
Table 231: IP-20E Eth1/PoE Interface- RJ-45/
Pin no. Description

23.5.1 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP)

Eth2/Eth3 is an SFP cage that supports regular and CSFP standards.
23.5.2 MGT/Eth4 GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45)
Table 232: IP-20E MGT/Eth4 Interface - RJ-45/ Pinouts
Pin no. Description

23.5.3 EXT Port

This port is reserved for future use.
23.5.4 Power Adaptor

For configurations in which power is not provided via PoE, a special adaptor
(IP-20_Mini_Power_Adaptor) is available that enables users to connect a two-
wire power connector to the PoE port. This adaptor is located inside of the
gland. In such configurations, only one electrical GbE interface is available
(MGT/ETH4).

Figure 265: Two-Wire to PoE Port Power Adaptor

IP-20E uses a two-pin connection to measure the RSL level using standard
voltmeter test leads:

23.6 IP-20E LEDs

The IP-20E provides the following LEDs to indicate the status of the unit's
 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs
 MGT/Eth4 GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs
 Radio LED
 Status LED
 Protection LED
23.6.1 Eth1/PoE GbE Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

The Green LED indicates the interface’s Admin status:
23.6.2 Eth2/Eth3 GbE Optical Interface (SFP/CSFP) LEDs

Eth2/Eth3 is an SFP cage that supports regular and CSFP standards.
 When Eth2/Eth3 is used with a regular SFP, it provides Ethernet port 2.
 When Eth2/Eth3 is used with CSFP, it provides two Ethernet ports:
Ethernet port 2 and Ethernet port 3.
Note: The Web EMS displays Ethernet port 3 even if a regular SFP
is used, and there is no Ethernet port 3. You must avoid
configuring Ethernet port 3 in this case.
There is one Green LED to the left of the interface and one Green LED to the
right of the interface. The LED to the left is for Eth2. When CSFP is used, the
LED to the right is for Eth3; otherwise, it is inactive
Each LED indicates the interface's Admin and cable connection status, and
whether there is traffic on the interface:

23.6.3 MGT/Eth4 GbE Electrical Interface (RJ-45) LEDs

There are two LEDs next to the MGT/Eth4 interface, a Green LED to the left of
the interface and an Orange LED to the right of the interface.
The Green LED is not functional in this release.
23.6.4 Radio LED

one carrier.
23.6.5 Status LED

on the motherboard.

Reserved for future use.

23.7 PoE Injector Pin-outs

Figure 266: PoE Injector Connectors
23.7.1 PoE Port
Table 233: PoE Injector PoE Port - RJ-45 Pinouts
Pin no. Description

23.7.2 Data Port
Table 234: PoE Injector RJ-45 Data Port Supporting 10/100/1000Base-T
Pin no. Description


Pin no. Description

23.7.3 DC
One or two DC ports, depending on the PoE Injector model:
Two models of the PoE Injector are available:
 PoE_Inj_AO_2DC_24V_48V – Includes two DC power ports with power
input ranges of ±(18-60)V each.
 PoE_Inj_AO – Includes one DC power port (DC Power Port #1), with a
power input range of ±(40-60)V.
These ports are UL-60950 compliant, with a 2-pin connector.
23.8 PoE Injector LEDs

 PWR1 (Bi-color LED)
Green – Power available on PWR1 DC input
Off – No power is available on PWR1 DC input.
 PWR2 (Bi-color LED)
Green – Power available on PWR2 DC input,
Off – No power is available on PWR2 DC input.
 PoE (Tri -color LED)
Orange – No load is detected
Green – Providing in-line power
Blinking Red – Invalid/over-load
Off – no power to the injector unit.
23.8.1 Radio LED

one carrier.

Section V:
Appendices

24. Alarms List

The following table lists all alarms used in the IP-20C/S/E products.
Alarm ID Name Type Description Severity Probable Cause Corrective Action Notes
10 radio-digital-loopback Alarm Framer digital loopback Warning User enabled framer digital loopback. Disable framer digital loopback.
main-board-extreme- Unit Temperature is out of system
25 Alarm Warning
temperature-alarm specified limits.
28 main-board-warm-reset Event Unit warm reset. Indeterminate
29 main-board-cold-reset Event Unit reset. Warning
main-board-poe-low-
30 Alarm POE input voltage is too low Warning
voltage-alarm
31 Event Change Remote request was sent Major (1)
Protection switchover due to remote
32 Event Major (1)
request
protection-mimo- Unit Redundancy and MIMO 4x4
33 Alarm Major (2)
misconfiguration-alarm cannot operate simultaneously.
LAG is not fully functional - LAG
100 lag-degraded Alarm Major
Degraded.
101 lag-down Alarm LAG operational state is down Critical
ethernet-loopback- Wait till loopback timeout expires or

102 Alarm Loopback is active Major Ethernet loopback is active.
active-alarm disable loopback.

Slot X port XX is mirrored to slot Y Mirroring is enabled by user
103 port-mirroring-is-active Alarm Minor Disable mirroring.
port YY configuration.
Failure of the radio interface which is

Check adjacent radio interface for failure
auto-state-propagation- Interface is down due to automatic monitored for automatic state
150 Alarm Major conditions that caused automatic state
interface-down-alarm state propagation. propagation causes automatic
propagation.
shutdown of the controlled interface.
1. Check existence of mate unit.
protection- 1. Mate unit is absent/failure. 2. Check protection cable connection
200 communication-down- Alarm Protection communication is down Major 2. Protection cable is disconnected. between units.
alarm 3. Unit failure. 3. Reset mate unit.
4. Replace mate unit.
201 protection-lockout-alarm Alarm Protection in Lockout State Major
protection-switch- Protection switchover due to local
202 Event Major
command failure
protection-mate-not- Mate does not exist or cable
203 Alarm Mate does not exist Major
present-alarm unplugged.
1. Cable disconnected. 1. Check connection of cable
401 TrafficPhyLocAlarm Alarm Loss of Carrier Major
2. Defective cable. 2. Replace cable.
407 ethernet-link-up Event Ethernet interface is up Warning
408 ethernet-link-down Event Ethernet interface is down Warning

1. Check link performance.
1. Fade in the link.
2. Check IF cable and replace if
2. Defective IF cable.
required.
601 radio-excessive-ber Alarm Radio excessive BER Major 3. Fault in RFU.
3. Replace RFU.
4. Fault in RMC (Radio Modem
4. Replace RMC (Radio Modem
Card).
Card).
Link ID is not the same at both sides of Configure same Link ID for both sides of
602 remote-link-id-mismatch Alarm Link ID mismatch Major
link link
required.
3. Fault in RFU.
3. Replace RFU.
603 radio-lof Alarm Radio loss of frame Critical 4. Fault in RMC (Radio Modem
Card).
Card).
5. Different radio scripts at both
5. Make sure same script is loaded at
ends of the link.
both ends of the link.
required.
604 radio-signal-degrade Alarm Radio signal degrade Minor 3. Fault in RFU.
3. Replace RFU.
4. Fault in RMC (Radio Modem
Card).
Card).
605 radio-link-up Event Radio interface is up Warning
606 radio-link-down Event Radio interface is down Warning

1. Reset the system.
801 corrupted-file Alarm Corrupted inventory file Warning The inventory file is corrupted
2. Reinstall the software.
802 file-not-found Alarm Inventory file not found Warning The inventory file is missing
2. Reinstall the software.
Demo mode has been activated by the
901 demo-license-alarm Alarm Demo mode is active Warning Disable demo mode.
user
902 license-demo-expired Event Demo mode is expired Warning
license-demo-start-by-
903 Event Demo mode is started Warning
user
license-demo-stop-by-
904 Event Demo mode is stopped Warning
user
905 license-load-fail Event Activation key loading failure Major
906 license-load-successful Event Activation key loaded successfully Warning
The current configuration does not
match the activation-key-enabled 1. Get the list of features'
feature set. configurations that are violated via
48 hours after a "activation key the "activation key information
907 license-violation-alarm Alarm Activation key violation Critical violation" alarm is raised, sanction report".
mode is activated in which all alarms 2. Install a new activation key that
except the activation key violation allows the use of all required
alarm are cleared and no new alarms features.
are raised.
demo-license-about-to- Demo mode allowed period is about to Disable demo mode and install a new
908 Alarm Demo mode is about to expire Major
expire-alarm end within 10 days valid activation key.

license-signature-failed- Activation key validation has failed due
910 Alarm Activation key signature failure Major Replace the IDU
alarm to invalid product serial number
license-violation- Activation key violation sanction is
911 Event Major
runtime-counter-expired enforced
license-bad-xml-file- Activation key components are Essential internal activation key
913 Alarm Major Reinstall software
alarm missing or corrupted components are missing or corrupted.
software-installation-
1102 Event Software installation status: Warning
status
software-new-version- A software version has been installed
1105 Event New version installed Warning
installed but system has not been reset.
software-user- User approved download of software
1111 Event Warning
confirmation-for-version version file
software-download-
1112 Event Software download status: Warning
status
software-download-
1113 Event Missing components: Warning
missing-components
software-management- Incomplete file set; missing Software bundle is missing
1114 Event Warning Get a complete software bundle
incomplete-bundle components components.
Configuration file backup generation
1150 backup-started Event Warning User command
started
Backup file creation finished
1151 backup-succeeded Event Configuration file backup created Warning
successfully
Failure in configuration file backup System failed in attempt to create
1152 backup-failure Event Warning
generation backup configuration file

Configuration successfully restored Configuration restore finished
1153 restore-succeeded Event Warning
from file backup successfully
1. Configuration file system type
Failure in configuration restoring from System failed in attempt to restore mismatch
1154 restore-failure Event Warning
backup file configuration from backup file 2. Invalid or corrupted configuration
file
Restore operation cancelled because
Configuration restore operation of user command or execution of
1155 restore-canceled Event Warning Try again
cancelled another configuration management
operation
User issued command for transfer of
1156 file-transfer-issued Event Warning User command
configuration file
1157 file-transfer-succeeded Event Configuration file transfer successful Warning Configuration file transfer successful
1. Mark sure protocol details are
1. Communications failure.
1158 file-transfer-failure Event Configuration file transfer failure Warning properly configured.
2. File not found in server
2. Make sure file exists.
1159 file-transfer-in-progress Event Configuration file transfer in progress Warning File transfer started
cli-script-activation- CLI configuration script activation
1163 Event Warning User command
started started
cli-script-activation- CLI Configuration script executed
1164 Event Warning
succeeded successfully

Verify script in the relevant line, and run
1. Syntax Error.
cli-script-activation- again.
1165 Event CLI Configuration script failed Warning 2. Error returned by system during
failure Note that script may assume pre-
runtime
existing configuration.
unit-info-file-transfer-
1166 Event Unit info file transfer status: Warning
status-changed
unit-info-file-creation-
1167 Event Unit info file creation status: Warning
status-changed
Configuration restore operation Restore operation started because of
1169 restore-started Event Warning
started user command
1. Download software package.
1201 file-missed Alarm Modem firmware file not found Critical Modem file is missing
Modem firmware was not loaded 1. Modem firmware file is corrupted. 1. Download software package.
1202 load-failed Alarm Critical
successfully 2. System failure. 2. Reset the system.
1203 modem-wd-reset Event Modem watch-dog reset event Warning
1312 script-loading-failed Alarm Radio MRMC script loading failed Major Damaged hardware module Replace the radio hardware module
incompatible-rfu-tx- RFU calibration tables require SW
1401 Alarm Incompatible RFU TX calibration Major Upgrade IDU SW
calibration upgrade
remote-communication-
1501 Alarm Remote communication failure Critical Fade in the link Check the link performance
failure
1601 if-loopback Alarm IF loopback Warning User enabled IF loopback Disable IF loopback

1. Check installation.
2. Reset the RMC (Radio Modem
1. Extreme temperature condition.
1602 lock-detect Alarm IF synthesizer is unlocked. Critical Card) module.
2. HW failure.
3. Replace the RMC (Radio Modem
Card).
1. Check IF cable and connectors.
2. Verify that the N-Type connector
Cable is not connected to RMC (Radio inner pin is not spliced.
1701 cable-open Alarm Cable open Major
Modem Card) or RFU 3. Replace RMC (Radio Modem
Card).
4. Replace RFU.
2. Verify that the N-Type connector
inner pin is not spliced.
1702 cable-short Alarm Cable short Major Physical short at the IF cable
Card).
4. Replace RFU.

3. Defective IF cable. 2. Verify that N-Type connector inner
4. IF cable not connected properly. pin is not spliced.
5. Defective RMC (Radio Modem 3. Replace RMC (Radio Modem
1703 communication-failure Alarm RFU communication failure Warning Card). Card).
6. Defective RFU. 4. Replace RFU.
7. RFU software download in For a high power RF Unit:
progress. 1. Check BMA connector on OCB
2. Check BMA connector on RFU.
1. Reset the RMC (Radio Modem
delay-calibration-failure-
1704 Alarm RFU delay calibration failure 1 Warning Defective RFU Card) / RFU.
1
2. Replace RFU.
delay-calibration-failure- Calibration cannot be completed due to
1705 Alarm RFU delay calibration failure 2 Warning Enter delay calibration value manually.
2 notch detection
1. Check installation conditions.
1. Installation conditions. 2. Verify operation as per product's
1706 extreme-temp-cond Alarm RFU extreme temperature Warning
2. Defective RFU. specs.
3. Replace RFU.
1. Check if problem repeats and if
1708 freq-set-automatically Event RFU frequency was set automatically Warning Defective RFU errors/alarms reported.
2. Replace RFU.
1709 hardware-failure-1 Alarm RFU hardware failure 1 Critical Defective RFU. Replace RFU.
1710 hardware-failure-2 Alarm RFU hardware failure 2 Critical Defective RFU. Replace RFU.

1. Check IF cable connectors.
1. IF cable connection. 2. Verify that N-Type connector inner
2. Defective RFU. pin is not spliced.
1711 low-if-signal-to-rfu Alarm Low IF signal to RFU Major
3. Defective RMC (Radio Modem 3. Replace RMC (Radio Modem
Card). Card).
4. Replace RFU.
2. Verify that N-Type connector inner
pin is not spliced.
1712 no-signal-from-rfu Alarm Low IF signal from RFU Warning Low RX IF signal (140 MHz) from RFU.
Card).
4. Replace RFU.
1. Installation conditions. 1. Check installation conditions.
1713 pa-extreme-temp-cond Alarm RFU PA extreme temperature Warning
2. Defective RFU. 2. Replace RFU.
1721 reset-occurred Event RFU reset Major
1722 rfu-loopback-active Alarm RFU loopback is active Major User has activated RFU loopback. Disable RFU loopback.
rfu-mode-changed-to-
1723 Event RFU mode changed to Combined Indeterminate
combined
1724 Event RFU mode changed to Diversity Indeterminate
diversity
1725 Event RFU mode changed to Main Indeterminate
main
At least one of the RFU's power supply
1726 rfu-power-supply-failure Alarm RFU power supply failure Major Replace RFU.
voltages is too low.

1. Check antenna alignment & link
planning.
2. Check link settings (TX power, TX
1727 rx-level-out-of-range Alarm RFU RX level out of range Warning RSL is very low, link is down.
frequency).
3. Check antenna connections.
4. Replace local/remote RFU.
1. Check that the fault is not due to
rain/multi-path fading or lack of
LOS.
1. Improper installation.
rx-level-path1-out-of- 2. Check link settings (TX power, TX
1728 Alarm RFU RX level path1 out of range Warning 2. Fading event. frequency).
range
3. Defective RFU. 3. Check antenna alignment.
1. Check that the fault is not due to
rain/multi-path fading or lack of
LOS.
1. Improper installation.
rx-level-path2-out-of- 2. Check link settings (TX power, TX
1729 Alarm RFU RX level path2 out of range Warning 2. Fading event. frequency).
range
3. Defective RFU. 3. Check antenna alignment.
1. Replace RFU.
At least one of the RFU synthesizers is
1733 synthesizer-unlocked Alarm RFU synthesizer unlocked Major 2. In XPIC mode, replace mate RFU
unlocked
as well.

1. Replace RFU.
Defective RFU (the RFU cannot
1734 tx-level-out-of-range Alarm RFU TX level out of range Minor 2. Intermediate solution - reduce TX
transmit the requested TX power)
power.
1735 tx-mute Alarm RFU TX Mute Warning RFU Transmitter muted by user Unmute the RFU transmitter
IDU SW does not support this type of
1736 unknown-rfu-type Alarm Major IDC SW does not support the RFU Upgrade IDC SW
RFU
1769 unit-cold-reset-event Event Unit Perform Power up Warning
1770 cable-lof-rfu Event Unit performing power-up. Major
1. Check the IF cable and connectors.

2. Verify that the N-Type/TNC
1771 cable-error-rfu Alarm RFU cable error. Major Errors in signal from IDU to XCVR. connector inner pin is not spliced.
3. Replace RMC.
4. Replace XCVR.
1. Check that the RMCs are in
allowed slots.
Signaling between RMCs (Radio 2. Populate the RMCs in different
1772 xpic-data-los Alarm Radio XPIC sync loss Major Modem Cards) for XPIC functionality
allowed location in the chassis.
has failed
3. Replace RMC/s.
4. Replace chassis.

6. Check IF cable, and replace if
The estimated radio BER (Bit Error required.
1773 early-warning Alarm Radio early warning. Warning
Rate) is above 10E-12.
7. Replace XCVR.
8. Replace RMC.
The hardware of the XCVR is OK, but 1. Upgrade the XCVR software
sw-download- RFU software download cannot be
1774 Alarm Critical is it running with METRO radio application via XPAND-IP and then
incompatible-rfu initiated.
application. reinitiate software download.
RFU software download is not Wrong type of XCVR, the XCVR
1775 hw-incompatible-rfu Alarm Critical Replace the XCVR
possible. hardware is METRO.
RMC hardware failure of the clock
1776 pll-rmc Alarm RMC hardware failure. Major Replace the RMC.
distributor.
1. Make sure the required software
New installed software package does package include the running
mrmc-running-script- MRMC radio script.
1780 Event MRMC running script is deleted Warning not include the running MRMC radio
deleted
script 2. Download and install the correct
software package.
New installed software package does
mrmc-running-script- Reset the radio carrier to reacquire the
1781 Event MRMC running script is updated Warning has an updated version of the running
updated new updated MRMC radio script
MRMC radio script
An internal hardware failure has been Replace the card or unit reporting the
1790 np-hw-failure Alarm Hardware failure Critical
detected by the system. hardware failure.

1. Reconnect line.
Loss of Signal on Line Interface 1. Line is not properly connected.
2100 STM-1-OC-3-IN-LOS Alarm Critical 2. Check line cables.
(LOS) on STM-1/OC-3 port. 2. External equipment is faulty.
3. Check external equipment.
1. Reconnect line.
Loss of Frame on Line Interface 1. Line is not properly connected.
2101 STM-1-OC-3-IN-LOF Alarm Major 2. Check line cables.
(LOF) on STM-1/OC-3 port. 2. External equipment is faulty.
1. Reconnect line.
Alarm Indication Signal on Line 1. Line is not properly connected.
2102 STM-1-OC-3-IN-MSAIS Alarm Minor 2. Check line cables.
Interface (MS-AIS/AIS-L) received. 2. External equipment is faulty.
Remote Defect Indication on Line
2103 STM-1-OC-3-IN-MSRDI Alarm Minor External equipment is faulty. Check external equipment.
Interface (MS-RDI/RDI-L) received.
1. All channels in Multi Carrier ABC
Loss of STM-1/OC-3 Frame on Radio group are down.
2104 STM-1-OC-3-RX-LOS Alarm Major 2. Check radio alarms for channel.
Interface. 2. Incorrect configuration on remote
side. 3. Check configuration.
1. Remote STM-1/OC-3 signal is

missing (LOS/LOF/MS-AIS/AIS-L
on remote STM-1/OC-3
STM-1-OC-3-RX- MS-AIS/AIS-L on Radio Interface
2105 Alarm Minor interface). Check remote equipment.
MSAIS detected.
2. STM-1/OC-3 Channel removed
due to reduced radio capacity on
remote side.
MS-RDI/RDI-L on Radio Interface
2106 STM-1-OC-3-RX-RDI Alarm Minor External equipment is faulty. Check remote equipment.
detected.

STM-1-OC-3-
2107 Alarm Loopback Warning Looping. Remove looping.
LOOPBACK
STM-1/OC-3-
STM-1/OC-3 Channel Removed 1. Reduced capacity. 1. Check link performance.
2108 CHANNEL-1- Alarm Warning
alarm (due to reduced radio capacity). 2. Fading 2. Check radio alarms for channel.
REMOVED
STM-1-OC-3-PBRS-
2109 Alarm PBRS insertion. Warning PRBS insertion on STM-1/OC-3 card. Remove PRBS insertion.
INSERTION
STM-1-OC-3-SFP-NOT- 1. SFP is not properly installed. 1. Install SFP properly.

2110 Alarm SFP absent on STM-1/OC-3 port. Critical
DETECTED 2. SFP is faulty. 2. Replace the card.
1. Replace SFP or insert SFP if it is
STM-1-OC-3-SFP-TX- SFP Transmit Failure on STM-1/OC-3
2111 Alarm Critical 1. SFP is faulty. not inserted correctly.
FAILURE port.
2. Replace the card.
STM-1-OC-3-SFP-TX-
2112 Alarm SFP is muted on STM-1/OC-3 port. Warning SFP is muted by configuration. Remove muting.
MUTED
STM-1/OC-3- 1. Reduced capacity. 1. Check link performance.
STM-1/OC-3 Channel Removed
alarm (due to reduced radio capacity). 2. Fading. 2. Check radio alarms for channel.
REMOVED
STM-1/OC-3-
REMOVED
STM-1/OC-3-
REMOVED

REMOVED
REMOVED
STM-1/OC-3-
REMOVED
STM-1/OC-3-
REMOVED
1. Check link performance on all radio
channels in Multi Carrier ABC
group.
All channels in Multi Carrier ABC group
2200 MC-ABC-Local-LOF Alarm Multi Carrier ABC LOF. Critical 2. Check radio alarms for channels in
are down.
Multi Carrier ABC group.
3. Check configuration of Multi Carrier
ABC group.
1. Replace RMC.
Hardware failure between RMC and
2203 MC-ABC-Lvds-Error-Sl2 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 2. Major 2. Replace TCC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.

1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
1. Replace RMC.
MC-ABC-Lvds-Error- Hardware failure between RMC and
2211 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 10. Major 2. Replace TCC.
Sl10 TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.

1. Replace RMC.
MC-ABC-Lvds-Error- Hardware failure between RMC and
2212 Alarm LVDS RX Error Slot 12. Major 2. Replace TCC.
Sl12 TCC cards.
3. Replace chassis.
MC-ABC-Ch-Id- Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Compare Channel ID configuration with
2219 Alarm Warning Configuration failure.
Mismatch-Ch1 Mismatch Ch1. remote side.
MC-ABC-Ch-Id- Multi Carrier ABC Channel Id Manual
2235 Alarm Warning Admin state for channel is down. Enable admin state for channel.
Disabled-Ch1 Disabled Ch1.

Apply copy-to-mate command to copy
protection-configuration- The configuration between the
2300 Alarm Protection configuration mismatch! Major the configuration from the required All
mismatc protected devices is not aligned.
device to the other one.
protection-copytomate- The copy-to-mate command has just
2301 Event Copy to mate started Indeterminate This is a notification All
started begun!
protection-copytomate- The copy-to-mate command was
2302 Event Copy to mate completed Indeterminate This is a notification All
completed completed.
User blocked due to consecutive User blocked due to consecutive The user should wait few minutes until it
5000 failure-login-event Event Indeterminate
failure login failure login account will be unblock
g8032-protection- ERPI is either in protection state or Either user "force switch" command or Either clear force command or recover
5001 Alarm Minor
switching-alarm forced protection state one of the ring links has failed the link

g8032-failure-of- More than a single RPL is configured
5002 Alarm Warning User configuration Reconfigure the RPL
protocol-pm-alarm in a ring
5003 lldp-topology-change Event LLDP topology change Warning New neighbor None
security-log-upload-
5004 Event Security log upload started Indeterminate Security log upload started
started-event
5005 Event Security log upload failed Indeterminate Security log upload failed
failed-event
5006 Event Security log upload succeeded Indeterminate Security log upload succeeded
succeeded-event
5010 force-mode-alarm Alarm System is in sync force mode state Warning User command
sync-quality-change- The sync-source quality level was
5011 Event Major
event changed
system-clock-in- System Synchronization Reference in
5012 Alarm Critical
holdover-mode Holdover Mode
sync-T0-quality-change- The system's reference-quality
5013 Event Major
event changed
The pipe interface clock-source in
sync-pipe-invalid-
5014 Alarm signal-interface table is not system- Major
interface-clock-source
clock
Regenerator contains less than 2 Accomplish configuration by assigning
5015 sync-pipe-missing-edge Alarm The pipe is missing an edge interface Major
interfaces second interface
sync-pipe-interface-op- Pipe interface operational state is At least one of Regenerator Interfaces
5016 Alarm Major Checking regenerator Admin status
state-down down status is down

Interfaces has Configuration or
5017 sync-pipe-invalid-pipe Alarm Pipe is invalid Major Configuration not accomplished
Operation fails
soam-connectivity- Specific defect dependent: User
5030 Alarm A connectivity failure in MA/MEG Minor Reconfigure the RPL.
failure configuration , connectivity loss.
Master key mismatch cross over the
5100 mkey-mismatch Alarm Critical Master Key was not set correctly. Verify the Master Key. (1)
link
No Master Key set, default value Crypto module has been enabled, but
5101 mkey-no-exist Alarm Warning Set the Master Key. (1)
used no Master Key has been loaded.
1. Validate the MSE on both sides of
1. Radio LOF on Tx/Rx direction.
the link.
2. The session key does not match
general-encryption- 2. Validate the session key on both
5102 Alarm Payload Encryption failure Critical across the link. (1)
failure sides of the link.
1. The AES admin setting does not
1. Validate the AES admin setting on
match across the link.
both sides of the link.
Event Key Exchange Protocol successfully
5103 kep-finished Indeterminate (1)
finished
5104 kep-initiated Event Key Exchange Protocol initiated Indeterminate (1)
Event Key Exchange Protocol initiated by
5105 kep-remote-initiated Indeterminate (1)
remote side
5106 kep-zeroized Event Key Zeroization command executed Indeterminate (1)
5107 bypass-self-test-alarm Alarm FIPS Bypass Self-Test failed Critical Disk failure (1)
5108 post-fail-alarm Alarm Power On Self-Test Failed Critical System failure Reboot the unit. (1)

1. Try re-initiation of MIMO. If still
1. Faulty coaxial cable between
fails:
Clock-source-sharing- master and slave RFUs.
30007 Event Clock source sharing failure Critical 2. Replace faulty coaxial cable and (2)
failure-event 2. Hardware failure in Master RFU.
reset Master RFU.
3. Hardware failure in Slave RFU.
3. Replace faulty RFU.
1. Make sure all cables between
master and slave are connected
Insufficient-conditions- 1. Insufficient conditions for MIMO.
31000 Alarm Insufficient conditions for MIMO Critical (MIMO 4x4 only). (2)
for-MIMO-alarm 2. Hardware failure.
2. Replace faulty units and check that
cables are plugged.
1. Unsuitable hardware for MIMO
operation requirements.
2. Dual carrier RFUs (MIMO 2x2 and
Unsuitable-hardware- 4x4). Make sure both RFUs are compatible
31003 Alarm Unsuitable hardware for MIMO Critical (2)
for-MIMO-alarm 3. RFUs with MIMO bus interface for MIMO operation.
(MIMO 4x4).
4. Clock source sharing capability
(MIMO 4x4).
1. Not all MIMO carriers are set to
1. Load same MIMO compatible radio
same radio script or script is not
script to all MIMO carriers.
Unsuitable-software- compatible for MIMO.
Unsuitable software configuration for 2. Set same TX and RX frequency on
31004 configuration-for-MIMO- Alarm Critical 2. Radio TX and RX frequency is not (2)
MIMO all MIMO carriers.
alarm identical on all MIMO carriers.
3. Disable XPIC, Multi radio and
3. XPIC or Multi radio or ATPC
ATPC on all MIMO carriers.
features are enabled.

2. Faulty coaxial cable between 2. Replace faulty coaxial cable and

Clock-source-sharing- Clock source sharing cable master and slave RFUs reset Master RFU.
31005 Alarm Critical (2)
failure-alarm unplugged
3. Mate does not exist 3. Replace faulty RFU.
Master key mismatch cross over the

5100 mkey-mismatch Alarm Critical Master Key was not set correctly. Verify the Master Key. (1)
link
No Master Key set, default value Crypto module has been enabled, but
5101 mkey-no-exist Alarm Warning Set the Master Key. (1)
used no Master Key has been loaded.
3. Validate the MSE on both sides of
3. Radio LOF on Tx/Rx direction.
the link.
4. The session key does not match
general-encryption- 4. Validate the session key on both
5102 Alarm Payload REncryption failure Critical across the link. (1)
failure sides of the link.
4. The AES admin setting does not
4. Validate the AES admin setting on
match across the link.
both sides of the link.
Event Key Exchange Protocol successfully
5103 kep-finished Indeterminate (1)
finished
5104 kep-initiated Event Key Exchange Protocol initiated Indeterminate (1)
Event Key Exchange Protocol initiated by
5105 kep-remote-initiated Indeterminate (1)
remote side
5106 kep-zeroized Event Key Zeroization command executed Indeterminate (1)
5107 bypass-self-test-alarm Alarm FIPS Bypass Self-Test failed Critical Disk failure (1)
5108 post-fail-alarm Alarm Power On Self-Test Failed Critical System failure Reboot the unit. (1)

(1) Supported by IP-20C and IP-20S only

(2) Supported by IP-20C only

25. Abbreviations
The following table lists the abbreviations used in this guide.
A
ABC Adaptive Bandwidth Control
ABN Adaptive Bandwidth Notification
AC Alternating Current
ACAP Adjacent Channel Alternate Polarization
ACCP Adjacent Channel Co-Polarization
ACM Adaptive Coded Modulation
ACR Adaptive Clock Recovery
AES Advanced Encryption Standard
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AIS Alarm Indicating Signal
ALC Automatic Level Control
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASIC Application Specified Integrated Circuit
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AUX Auxiliary Unit
B
BB Baseband
BBS Baseband Switching
BER Bit Error Rate
BLSR Bidirectional Line Switch Ring
BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Units
BWA Broadband Wireless Access
C
CBS Committed Burst Size
CCDP Co-Channel Dual Polarization
Comité Consultatif International de Télégraph et des
CCITT
Télécommunications (ITU)
CET Carrier-Ethernet Transport
CFM Connectivity Fault Management

CIR Committed Information Rate

CLI Command Line Interface
Clk Clock
CODEC Coder/Decoder
CoS Class of Service
D
DA Destination Address
DC Direct Current
DCB Diversity Circulator Block
DCC Data Communication Channel
DXC Digital Cross Connect
DSCP Differentiated Services Code Point
E
EBS Excess Burst Size
EIR Excess Information Rate
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EOW Engineering Order Wire
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
F
FCC Federal Communications Commission
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FTP File Transfer Protocol
G
GbE Gigabit Ethernet
GFP Generic Framing Procedure
(Procedure for mapping of Ethernet traffic over a transport
network)
GND Ground
GRE Generic Routing Encapsulation
GTP GPRS Tunneling Protocol
H
HBER High Bit Error Rate
HDLC High-level Data Link Control

HF High Frequency (3-30 MHz)

HSB Hot-Standby
HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol
HTTPS Secured Hypertext Transfer Protocol
I
IDC Indoor Controller
IF Intermediate Frequency
IFC IF Combining
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITU International Telecom. Union
ITU-R International Telecom. Union (former CCIR)
ITU-T International Telecom. Union (former CCITT)
IVM Inventory Module
L
LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol
LAG Link Aggregation Group
LAN Local Area Network
LBER Low Bit Error Rate
LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LED Light Emitting Diode
LIU Line Interface Unit
LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol
LLF Link Loss Forwarding
LMS License Management System
LO Local Oscillator
LOC Loss of Carrier
LOF Loss of Frame
LOS Loss of Signal
LSI Large Scale Integration
LTE Long-Term Evolution
M
MAID Maintenance Association Identifier
MPLS Multi Protocol Label Switching
MSP Multiplex Section Protection

MUX Multiplexer
N
NE Network Element
NMS Network Management System
NTP Network Time Protocol
O
OAM Operation Administration & Maintenance (Protocols)
OCB Outdoor Circulator Box
OHC OverHead Connections
OMT Orthogonal Mode Transducer
OOF Out of Frame
OPEX Operational Expenditure
P
PBB-TE Provider Backbone Bridge Traffic Engineering
PBS Peak Burst Rate
PC Personal Computer
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDV Packed Delay Variation
PIR Peak Information Rate
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PM Performance Monitoring
PN Provider Network
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory
PSN Packet Switched Network
PTP Precision Timing Protocol
PWR Power
Q
QoE Quality of Experience
QoS Quality of Service
R
RBAC Role Based Access Control
RCVR Receiver
RDI Reverse Defect Indication
RF Radio Frequency

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RMON Ethernet Statistics
RPS Radio Protection Switching
RSL Received Signal Level
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator
RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
S
SAP Service Access Point
SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SDWRR Shaped Deficit Weighted Round Robin
SETS Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SFTP Secure FTP
SLA Service Level Agreements
SNCP Simple Network Connection Protection
SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol
SNP Service Network Point
SNR Signal to Noise Ratio
SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol
SOH Section OverHead (ETSI)
SONET Synchronous Optical NETwork
SP Service Point
SSH Secured Shell (Protocol)
SSM Synchronization Status Message
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
SyncE Synchronous Ethernet
SVCE Service Channel Equipment
T
TC Traffic Class
TIM Trace Identifier Mismatch
TOH Transport OverHead (ANSI)
TOS Type Of Service
V
VC Virtual Container
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator

VCXO Voltage Controlled crystal Oscillator

VLSI Very Large Scale of Integration
W
WAN Wide Area Network
Web EMS Web-Based Element Management System
WFQ Weighted Fair Queue
WG Waveguide
WRED Weighted Random Early Detection
WRR Weighted Round Robin
X
XCVR Transceiver (Transmitter/Receiver)
XMTR Transmitter
XO Crystal Oscillator
XPD Cross Polar Differentiation
XPIC Cross Polarization Interference Cancellation

FibeAir IP-20S C83 U

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FibeAir IP-20S C83 U

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FibeAir IP-20S C83 U

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FibeAir IP-20C/S/E

DOC-00036523 Rev G.02

Copyright © 2016 by Ceragon Networks Ltd. All rights reserved.

Open Source Statement

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 2 of 597

Section II: Web EMS Configuration ................................................................... 32

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 3 of 597

3. Configuration Guide ....................................................................................... 58

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 4 of 597

4.6 Upgrading the Software ............................................................................................. 110

5. Radio Configuration ..................................................................................... 129

6. Ethernet Services and Interfaces ................................................................ 164

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 5 of 597

6.1.7 Enabling, Disabling, or Deleting Multiple Services .................................................... 169

7. Quality of Service (QoS)............................................................................... 196

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 6 of 597

8. Ethernet Protocols ....................................................................................... 239

10. Access Management and Security .............................................................. 263

11. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting .................................................. 307

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 7 of 597

12. Web EMS Utilities ......................................................................................... 329

Section III: CLI Configuration ........................................................................... 332

13.14.2 Enabling FIPS Mode (CLI) ......................................................................... 348

14. Configuration Guide (CLI) ............................................................................ 350

15. Unit Management (CLI)................................................................................. 368

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 9 of 597

15.3.1 Configuring Basic SNMP Settings (CLI) .................................................................... 371

16. Radio Configuration (CLI) ............................................................................ 388

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 10 of 597

17. Ethernet Services and Interfaces (CLI) ....................................................... 410

18. Quality of Service (QoS) (CLI)...................................................................... 456

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 11 of 597

19. Ethernet Protocols (CLI) .............................................................................. 505

20. Synchronization (CLI)................................................................................... 521

21. Access Management and Security (CLI) ..................................................... 523

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 12 of 597

21.2.2 Configuring Password Strength Enforcement (CLI) ................................................... 526

22. Alarm Management and Troubleshooting (CLI) ......................................... 542

Section IV Maintenance ..................................................................................... 550

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 13 of 597

23.2.2 Optical GbE Interface (SFP) LEDs ............................................................................ 554

Section V: Appendices ...................................................................................... 567

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 14 of 597

Safety Precautions & Declared Material

Use of controls, adjustments, or performing procedures other than those

Machine noise information order - 3. GPSGV, the highest sound pressure

High Frequency Electromagnetic Fields!

Exposure to strong high frequency electromagnetic fields may cause thermal

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 15 of 597

This equipment contains components which are sensitive to “ESD” (Electro

Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those

Special Requirements for North America

Grounding: This equipment is designed to permit connection between the

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 16 of 597

Installation Codes: The equipment must be installed according to country

Special Requirements for Norway and Sweden:

! Equipment connected to the protective earthing of the building installation

Ceragon Proprietary and Confidential Page 17 of 597

Précautions générales relatives à l'équipement